Transcriber’s Notes:

A Table of Contents with links to articles and a letter jump table
for the index were added for the convenience of users. Obsolete
hyphenation, use of commas, archaic spellings, and misspelled words
contained within quotations were retained; minor punctuation errors were
corrected. Footnotes were moved to the end of the applicable
article.

The remaining changes are indicated by dotted lines under the text.
Scroll the mouse over the word and the original text will appear.

THE

AMERICAN

QUARTERLY REVIEW.


No. XVIII.


JUNE, 1831.


Philadelphia:
CAREY & LEA.

SOLD IN PHILADELPHIA BY E. L. CAREY & A. HART.
NEW-YORK, BY G. & C. & H. CARVILL.

LONDON:—R. J. KENNETT, 59 GREAT QUEEN STREET.
PARIS:—A. & W. GALIGNANI, RUE VIVIENNE.

Art. I.—College-Instruction and Discipline
Art. II.—The Life and Times of His late
Majesty, George the Fourth
Art. III.—Essay on the Hieroglyphic
System
Art. IV.—Iron
Art. V.—The Siamese Twins
Art. VI.—Europe and America
Art. VII.—Webster’s Speeches and Forensic
Arguments
Art. VIII.—Poland
Art. IX.—History of Maryland
Art. X.—Peale’s Notes on Italy
Index—Volumes 1 and 2


[Pg 283]

AMERICAN QUARTERLY REVIEW.

No. XVIII.


JUNE, 1831.


Art. I.—COLLEGE-INSTRUCTION AND
DISCIPLINE.

1.—Journal of the Proceedings of a Convention of Literary
and Scientific Gentlemen, held in the Common Council Chamber of the City
of New-York
. October, 1830. New-York: pp. 286. 8vo.

2.—Catechism of Education, Part 1st, &c. By William Lyon Mackenzie. Member of the Parliament
of Upper Canada
. York: 1830. pp. 46. 8vo.

3.—Address of the State Convention of Teachers and Friends
of Education, held at Utica
. January 12th, 13th, and 14th, 1831.
With an Abstract of the Proceedings of said Convention. Utica:
1831. pp. 16. 8vo.

4.—Oration on the advantages to be derived from the
Introduction of the Bible and of Sacred Literature as essential parts of
all Education, in a literary point of view merely, from the Primary
Schools to the University: delivered before the Connecticut Alpha of
the
ΦΒΚ Society. On Tuesday, September 7th, 1830. By Thomas Smith Grimke, of Charleston, S. C.
New-Haven: 1830. pp. 76. 8vo.

5.—Lecture on Scientific Education, delivered Saturday,
December 18th, 1830, before the Members of the Franklin Institute
.
By James R. Leib, A. M. Philadelphia: 1831.
pp. 16. 8vo.

The subject of practical education has always been one of
intense interest with every reflecting individual in this Union. It is a
universally received axiom, that the foundation of a republic must be in
the information of its people; and that whilst the monarchical
governments of other countries may be successfully [Pg
284]
administered by an oligarchy of intelligence, a
government like our own cannot be carried on without an extensive
diffusion of knowledge amongst those who have to select its very
machinery. The political circumstances of a country will also modify,
most importantly, the course of instruction; and that system which is
adopted in the old Universities of Oxford, Cambridge, and Dublin, in a
nation in which the law of primogeniture exists, where wealth is
entailed in families, and where the colleges themselves are richly
endowed, may be impracticable or impolitic in a country not possessing
such incentives. Education must, therefore, be suited to the country;
and a long period must elapse before we can expect to have individuals
as well educated as in those universities, although the mass of our
community may be much more enlightened. We have no benefices, no
fellowships with fixed stipends, to offer for those who may devote
themselves to the profound study of certain subjects. In England and
Ireland, it is by no means uncommon for a student to remain at college
until he is twenty-two or twenty-three years of age, in the acquisition
of his preliminary education, or of those branches that are made to
precede a professional course of study—the whole period of his
academic residence being consumed in the study of these departments. In
this country, such a course would be as unadvisable as it is generally
impracticable. The equal division of property precludes any extensive
accumulation of wealth in families. The youth are compelled to launch
early into life: the more useful subjects of study have to be selected,
and the remainder are postponed as luxuries, to be acquired should
opportunity admit of indulgence.

In no country are the colleges or higher schools so numerous, in
proportion to the population, as in the United States.

In France there are three universities; in Italy, eight; in Great
Britain, eight; in Germany, twenty-two; and in Russia, seven: whilst in
the United States, we have thirteen institutions bearing the title of
universities, and thirty-three that of colleges; making in all forty-six
higher schools capable of conferring degrees: yet a very wrong inference
would be drawn, were we to affirm that the education of a nation is
always in a direct ratio with the number of its higher schools. Such
would be the fact, did these institutions assume an elevated standard in
the distribution of their highest honours, and were the condition of the
intermediate schools such that the youth could be sent to the university
so prepared as to be able to cultivate his studies there to the greatest
advantage. Unfortunately, in many parts of the United States the
condition of the intermediate schools and academics has been grievously
neglected; and the authorities of the universities have been compelled
to lower their standard, and to admit students totally unprepared for
[Pg
285]
more advanced studies. In this way many of the higher
schools have degenerated into mere gymnasia, or ordinary academies. This
circumstance, with the multiplication of institutions capable of
conferring degrees, has been attended with the additional evil, that, in
some, the highest honours have been, and are conferred for acquirements,
which would scarcely enable the possessors to enter the lowest classes
in others.

It seems, indeed, that the real or fancied insufficiency of most of
our existing institutions, gave occasion to the proposition for
establishing a university in New-York, and to the Convention, a review
of whose proceedings will enable us to offer some practical
considerations and reflections, deduced from some experience and
meditation on this momentous subject. “Much as our country,” observes
the Rev. Dr. Mathews, in his opening address in behalf of the committee of the
university, “owes to her excellent colleges, the sentiment seems to be
general, that the time has arrived when she calls for something more;
when she requires institutions which shall give increased maturity to
her literature, and also an enlarged diffusion to the blessings of
education, and which she may present to the world as maintaining an
honourable competition with the universities of Europe.” p. 14.

The establishment of a university in the city of New-York having been
determined upon, and “an amount of means” pledged to the object, which
would place the institution at its commencement on a liberal footing,
its friends, “believing it to be desirable, and that it would prove
highly gratifying to all who feel an interest in the important subject
of education, that a meeting should be convened of literary and
scientific men of our country, to confer on the general interests of
letters and liberal education,” appointed a committee, with powers to
invite, as far as practicable, the attendance of such individuals in behalf of the
university. Accordingly, on the 20th of October last, a number of
literary and scientific gentlemen assembled from various parts of the
United States, when President Bates, of Middlebury College, Vermont, was
appointed president of the convention; and the Honourable Albert
Gallatin, and Walter Bowne, Esq. Mayor of the City, were named vice
presidents. The convention sat daily until the 23d inclusive, when it
adjourned sine die; but not without having provided for the
perpetuation of its species at a future period.

In an assemblage so constituted, it was not to be expected that,
excepting the notoriety occasioned by it, any great advantage could
accrue to the university or to the public from its deliberations; the
most discordant sentiments on almost all points of discipline and
instruction;—the views of the experienced and
inexperienced—the experientia vera, and the experientia
falsa
—of [Pg 286]the contemplative and the visionary,
were to be anticipated; but we must confess, that humble as were our
expectations from the results of its labours, the published record of
its proceedings proves that we had pitched them too high. The committee
appear to us to have had no definite object—no system—in
bringing many of the subjects before the convention; every discussion is
arrested, without our being able to decide what was the conclusion at
which the meeting arrived: and

“Like a man to double business bound,
They stand in pause where they shall first begin,
And both neglect.”

Of these debates the “Journal” is, doubtless, a faithful record, so
far as regards their succession; the brevity, however, of the minutes,
published by the secretary, renders the work very unsatisfactory; and
scarcely elevates it above the character of a log-book, if we make
exception of one or two excellent addresses—such as that of Mr.
Gallatin—which are reported at length; and of some (generally
indifferent) communications transmitted by their authors.

The first topic presented for the consideration of the convention,
was:—”As to the universities of Europe; and how far the systems
pursued in them may be desirable for similar institutions in this
country
.” On this subject, Dr. Lieber read a communication of
interest in relation to the organization, courses of study and
discipline of the German universities, which was referred to the
committee of arrangements. Mr. Woolsey, of New-York, gave an account of
the French colleges; their system of instruction and discipline; a few
desultory observations are next made by Mr. W. C. Woodbridge. Mr. Hasler
flies off at a tangent, and offers “a few remarks on the appointment of
professors,” and is followed by Professor Silliman on the same subject.
Mr. Sparks presents a few observations and alludes to the organization
of Harvard College. President Bates gives the plan of choosing
professors adopted at the college over which he is placed; and Mr.
Keating, of Philadelphia, puts a finale to the proceedings of the
day and to the question at the same time, by the expression of his
views. After this, we hear no more of this “topic,” and we are left in
the dark whether the system or any part of the system of the
universities of Europe be desirable for similar institutions in this
country.

It is a mere truism to remark, that the success of an institution
must be greatly dependent upon the character of its professors; hence,
in all universities, the best mode of selecting them has been a point of
earnest and careful inquiry. In some countries, they are appointed by
the government; in others, the office is obtained au concours.
The candidates being required to defend theses of their own composition,
and the most successful [Pg 287]receiving the office; whilst in others,
the faculty have the power of supplying vacancies in their own body. In
our own country, no uniformity exists on this point. Harvard, by the
scheme of organization, is under the supervision and control of two
separate boards, called the Corporation, and Board of
Overseers
. The former is composed of seven persons, of whom the
president of the college is one, by virtue of his office; the other six
being chosen from the community at large. The board of overseers
consists of the governor and lieutenant-governor of the state, the
members of the council and of the senate, the speaker of the house of
representatives, and the president of the college ex-officio;
and, also, of fifteen laymen and fifteen clergymen, who are elected, as
vacancies occur, by the whole board. This board has a controlling power,
which, however, is rarely exerted over the acts of the corporation.

The professors are all chosen, in the first instance, by the
corporation, or rather nominated for the approval or rejection of the
board of overseers: “but as a case has rarely, if ever been known, in
which such a nomination has been rejected by the overseers, the election
of all the professors and immediate officers, may be said to pertain in
practice to the corporation alone. It is probable, however, that this is
seldom done without consulting the members of the faculty into which a
professor is to be chosen.” Journal, p. 82.

In the generality of our institutions, the appointing power is vested
in a board of trustees, who have no controlling body placed over them.
In almost all, however, we find from the Journal of the
Convention—that the faculty are consulted—”that” according
to Dr. Bates, “experience had proved the wisdom of consulting the
faculty on any contemplated appointment of a professor; and that, in
fact, though not professedly, yet in effect, professors are appointed by
the instructers or faculty,—and thus by securing their good will
towards the new incumbent, amity was enforced.” P. 83.

The great difficulty exists in becoming acquainted with the
qualifications of the candidate, especially if he has not been
previously engaged in teaching. There can be no better mode of testing
the capacity of a teacher, than in the class room; but if this be not
available, the recommendation of sufficient individuals, with us,
has always to be taken; and in this, a certain degree of risk must
necessarily be incurred. It is never, however, a matter of so much
moment to procure a professor, who is pre-eminently informed upon the
subject of his department, as one that is capable of communicating the
knowledge he possesses, is systematic, has a mind that can enable him to
improve and to take part as a member of the faculty in the management of
the university, in which the greatest firmness, good sense, and ability
are occasionally [Pg 288]demanded. “A man,” says the illustrious
Jefferson, “is not qualified for a professor, knowing nothing but merely
his own profession. He should be otherwise well educated as to the
sciences generally; able to converse understandingly with the scientific
men with whom he is associated, and to assist in the councils of the
faculty on any subject of science in which they may have occasion to
deliberate. Without this he will incur their contempt and bring
disreputation on the institution.”[1]

Young professors are, on the above accounts, cæteris paribus,
preferable to old. They have not had time to acquire any bad system; are
energetic in the acquisition of information, and become attached to the
occupation. In institutions where the faculty live within the same
walls, it is, likewise, important that the disposition of the individual
should be taken into the account, in order that every thing may go on
harmoniously. A kind, conciliating deportment, will also gain the
respect of the student, and tend materially to discipline.

The best system for the appointment of professors, perhaps, would
be—that the faculty should nominate, and the trustees approve or
reject. It is improbable, that they would ever be guided by any feelings
which would be counter to the prosperity of the institution; whilst they
would generally have better opportunities of becoming acquainted with
the qualifications of individuals than the board of trustees. This
course appears to us less objectionable than any other; and we are glad
to find that it was suggested by Mr. Sparks, in the
convention.—

“No good policy,” he remarks, “would introduce an
efficient member into a small body, where such a step would be likely to
endanger the harmony of feeling and action. For this reason, it may be
well worthy of consideration, whether, in the scheme of a new
constitution, it is not better to provide for the nomination of a
professor by the members of the faculty, with whom he is to be
associated. Such a body would be as capable as any other, to say the
least, of judging in regard to the requisite qualifications of a
candidate, and much more capable of deciding whether his personal
qualities, traits of character, and habits of thinking, would make him
acceptable in their community. It seems evident, therefore, that
something is lost and nothing gained by referring this nomination to
another body of men, who have no interest in common with the party
chiefly concerned. It is enough that the electing or sanctioning power
dwells in a separate tribunal.” P. 83.

Much diversity of opinion has prevailed on the subject of
remuneration to professors. In some universities they are paid entirely
by fees from the students. The objection urged against this, is, that
the professor is too much dependent upon the student, and that this
feeling may materially interfere with discipline. To those who consider
that there ought to be no discipline in our universities—and
strange as it may seem, such views were expressed in the
convention—this plan of remuneration can be liable to no
objection. Nor to institutions in which there [Pg 289]are no resident pupils,
like the one proposed in New-York, would the objection apply. On the
contrary, the mode in which the professor receives his remuneration
entirely from the students, the stimulus which is thus excited, and the
feeling that his emoluments may be proportionate to his energy and
success in conveying instruction, may have the most beneficial effect
upon his exertions. Accordingly, we find the most meritorious
application on the part of the professors in our great medical schools;
and a degree of enthusiasm aroused, which might not be elicited were the
mode of recompensing them other than it is.

On the other hand, it has been maintained, that the professor should
be in no wise dependent upon the student; that he should receive no
fees, but be paid by a fixed salary. The objection urged against this
system is, that there is here no stimulus, and that as the professor
feels his income altogether independent of his exertions, he will relax
in his efforts, neglect his duties, become inattentive to his own
improvement, and uncourteous in his behaviour to the pupil. This is
plausible in theory, and doubtless, has occasionally been found to be
the fact. It is not likely to occur, however, if the professor be held
rigidly responsible, and if the tenure of his office be on good
behaviour, instead of for life. It is to be calculated, likewise, that
every professor is a gentleman, and that the honour of the situation is
a part of the emolument. These should be a sufficient guarantee that his
duties will be performed energetically, and that his behaviour will be
courteous. Should this not be the case, he is unfit for his situation,
and the trustees should have moral courage enough to remove him.
Experience, too, has, we think, sufficiently proved, that the evils of
fixed salaries, under the tenure dum bene se gesserit, are more
imaginary than real: some of the very best institutions are conducted
upon this system, in various parts of Europe and of this country. On the
whole, perhaps, where the students reside within the precincts, a
combination of a fixed salary, of a sufficient amount to enable the
professor to be, to a certain extent, independent of the student, with
the payment of a fee from the student for tuition, is the most politic
and satisfactory mode of remuneration. In this manner, he receives a
certain stimulus to exertion, whilst other objections to both exclusive
systems are obviated. Experience, however, shows, that although the zeal
and industry of a professor may occasion a slight fluctuation in the
numbers that resort to his school, this influence is very limited in its
action. It is the character of the study which attracts followers; and
whilst one department will be crowded to excess, independently of the
merits or demerits of the professor, others will be almost entirely
neglected. This will occur in all institutions in which professional,
[Pg
290]
or extremely advanced, or unusual studies are taught.
Every student, whether he may be intended for one of the learned
professions, or for any other pursuit, considers it absolutely necessary
to attend certain academical departments;—those of ancient
languages and mathematics for example;—whilst comparatively few
can be expected to attend the professional chairs, or the higher
branches of study, notwithstanding the subjects may be taught in the
most attractive and sufficient manner. Unless the manners of a professor
are strikingly obnoxious, but little effect will be produced in the
numbers frequenting his school: and if they are so, it is a sufficient
ground for removal.

In those universities in which the professors are remunerated by a
fixed salary, this inequality of attendance is not felt; but it is a
serious evil, where the emolument accrues wholly or in part in the form
of tuition fees. The greatest inequality may prevail in the
compensation; and those teachers who are engaged in the most abstruse
departments, will necessarily be worse paid than those who are engaged
in superintending the elementary branches. Suppose the department of
mathematics to be divided into the elementary and transcendental: if
each be remunerated by an equal fee from his students, the latter cannot
expect to have an income of more than one-twentieth part of that of his
colleague. This we know is a ground of much dissatisfaction in many
institutions, and attempts have been made to obviate it. Meiners,[2] a reflecting writer on the subject
of universities, thinks it would be proper to correct this inequality by
making a portion of the fees received common stock: but if we admit that
the abilities and attention of the professors are equal, and that the
same number of hours is employed in teaching the various branches, there
seems to be no reason why the remuneration of one professor should be
permitted to exceed that of his colleague. On this subject, some
pertinent remarks were made by Dr. Lieber, in which he agrees, in many
respects, with his countryman, Meiners.

“Now I ask,” says he, “how much even Professor
Gauss, le plus grand des mathematiciens, as La Grange
called him, has realized from his lectures? Mathematics, at least the
higher branches of them, never can be very popular; I mean, it is
impossible that they should be generally studied, and it would be to
consign a professor to absolute indigence, if government should leave
professors of mathematics dependent on the honorarium paid by their
students. I studied mathematics under the celebrated Pfaff at Halle,
whom La Grange called un des premiers mathematiciens, and
we were never more than twenty in his lecture room, of whom I fully
believe not much more than half paid the honorarium, which was
very small.” P. 58.

And again,—

“Yet I believe, that generally speaking, it is
better for professors and students [Pg 291]to have fees paid for
their lectures, for various reasons, although it would be unsafe to let
professors be solely or chiefly depending upon them, for it would be
unsafe to settle such annuities upon persons intended to live for
science, or guarantee them, forever, an easy life. It has besides been
found, that generally, students attend those lectures more carefully for
which they pay. With the different branches of instruction, the
principle upon which professorships are to be established, ought to
vary. In a city, in which many students of medicine always will be
assembled, it may be safe to let the professor greatly depend upon the
fees of the students, whilst a professor of Hebrew ought to be provided
for in such a way, that he may follow the difficult study of Oriental
languages, without the direct care for his support, in case the number
of students would be too small for this purpose, as it generally will
prove.” P. 65.

In most of our colleges, the president has some control over the
course of education in the schools of the institution; and,
consequently, over the professors. Such a plan is, however, impolitic.
No control whatever ought to be exerted over the teacher. If
qualified—and if not he is not fitted for his situation—he
ought to be left to himself, and to follow that system which he
conceives best adapted to develop the intellect of his pupils; at the
same time he should be held rigidly responsible for his free agency. In
the University of Virginia, as well as in other of the higher schools of
the country, the professor is required to send in a weekly report of the
number of lectures he has delivered; the daily examinations instituted;
the length of time occupied in each; and this report of the mode in
which his duties have been executed, is laid before the board of
visitors at their next meeting. In this manner delinquencies can be
detected, and the appropriate corrective be applied.

Occasionally, however, it may happen, that a professor may be
indolent, and inaccurate in his reports; and it may be a question,
whether it is not advantageous that the presiding officer should have
authority to attest how often a professor really does meet his class,
with the length of time expended, and the precise course of instruction
adopted; and then to report to the trustees, but not to interfere
himself in the rectification of abuses.

In the discussion of this subject in the Convention, Mr. Keating has
committed a blunder, regarding the University of Virginia.

“He would like to see the president, in truth, the
head of the university, occupying a distinguished station in the board
of trustees, controlling all the faculties, superintending all the
departments. It should be a situation such as an experienced and
retiring statesman would be proud to fill. A good example had been set
by the new University of Virginia.” P. 86.

Now, the rector of that institution is merely a member of the board
of visiters, chosen from out the body to preside over them, has no
delegated authority, but meets the other visiters once a year, and
presides over their deliberations, without, however, having a casting
vote. The chairman of the faculty, chosen annually by the board of
visiters, from amongst the professors, is the real president, and
possesses the powers usually granted to [Pg 292]the presidents of
colleges. We are surprised, by the bye, to observe from the journal of
the Convention, that the University of Virginia was entirely
unrepresented there. It has now been established six years, and has been
proceeding on a tide of successful experiment. It is the first effort
that has been made in this country to cast off the trammels that have
fettered practical instruction; to suffer each to take the bent of his
own inclination in the selection of his studies, requiring for the
attainment of its highest honours, qualifications only, and
rejecting time altogether. Although the first attempt in this
country on a large scale, the plan has been long adopted in other
countries, particularly in Germany, which has been so justly celebrated
for the novelty and excellence of its academic instruction; yet in no
country can such an experiment be regarded with more interest than in
the United States, where, for the reasons already assigned, the youth
are compelled to attain, if practicable, the strictly useful, and to
strive for their own support at a very early period of their career.

In the debates of the Convention, we find few allusions to that
institution, and wherever it is referred to, the most lamentable
ignorance of its economy is exhibited, and the greatest errors are
committed. In it there is an entire separation of the legislative from
the executive power; the board of visiters exercising the
former—the board of professors, or faculty, the latter. This has
its advantages and inconveniences. In many of our colleges for resident
students, the president is, ex officio, presiding officer of the
board of visiters, so that he forms a part of the two powers.
Where the president is at the same time a professor this is apt to
create heart burnings and jealousies, and gives him a decided, and often
unfair preponderance in any dispute with his brother professors, in
which the decision of the board of trustees may be requested; whilst, if
the executive power have no voice in the deliberations of the superior
board; and especially if the visiters reside at a distance from the
institution, laws are apt to be enacted, which create great
dissatisfaction and confusion, which have not been suggested by
experience, and which, consequently, are either wholly inoperative,
unfeasible, or impolitic. To obviate these evils the executive might
have a delegate at the meetings of the legislative body, who, even if he
had no vote, might be expected to take part in those deliberations which
regarded the rules and regulations of the university, or the interests
of the body to which he belonged; but in the discussion of other topics,
his attendance might be dispensed with. In this manner, the legislative
body would have the advantage of the voice of experience, and the
faculty, by choosing their own delegate, could always be represented,
should discussions arise between them and their presiding officer.
Nothing is more [Pg 293]certain, than that laws which seem easy
of execution, and admirably conceived, are often found, in practice, to
be wholly unavailable and injudicious. But the mischief does not end
here. The respect of the student is any thing but increased towards the
board that conceives, or the executive which attempts to fulfil such
regulations. By the enactments lying before us, of almost all the well
regulated institutions of this country, we find, that the board of
professors are requested by the trustees to suggest to them such laws as
experience may indicate; this is wise; the faculty are unquestionably
the best judges, and no non-resident can possibly have the necessary
experience.

Well adapted rules are the best safeguards for the success of any
university, where the students reside within the precincts especially.
They should be simple, yet not trivial; efficient, yet not unnecessarily
rigorous, and should be drawn up, if not perspicuously, at least
intelligibly. What shall we say to such cases as the following, which we
copy from the published laws of one of the oldest colleges of this
Union?

“No person, other than a student or other member of the college,
shall be admitted as a boarder at the college table. No liquors shall be
furnished or used at table, except beer, cider, toddy, or
spirits and water!”

“No student shall be permitted to lodge or board, or without
permission from the president or a professor, go into a
tavern.”

And again,—

“If offences be committed in which there are many
actors or abettors, the faculty may select such of the offenders for
punishment as may be deemed necessary to maintain the authority of the
laws, and to preserve good order in the college
, &c.”

It is always found more easy to make laws, than to have them well
executed. This is, in fact, usually the great difficulty, and formed,
very properly, a subject of deliberation in the Convention. No light
was, however, shed upon it, and the most visionary sentiments were
elicited, denying the necessity of any discipline whatever in the higher
schools. Whenever a number of youths are thrown together within a small
compass, other rules become necessary besides those of the land. The
esprit du corps, the influence of bad example afforded by a few,
lead to the commission of offences that demand interposition;
accordingly, in every intelligent and sound thinking community, certain
transgressions, such
as gambling, drinking, disorderly behaviour, habits of expense and
dissoluteness, and incorrigible idleness, have been esteemed to merit
serious collegiate reprehension.

Of the different kinds of government adopted in universities, we
shall mention those only which prevail in the United States. The
authority is generally vested in a president and faculty, the former
having the power of inflicting minor punishments; the major punishments
requiring the sanction of the latter. With the president the power is
vested of deciding whether any case [Pg 294]is deserving the one or
the other. An objection has been urged against this system, that if the
president be of a timid, vacillating disposition, he may keep every case
from the faculty, and in this there is some truth; he is, however,
responsible to the trustees, and hence it can rarely happen that he will
exercise ill-judged lenity; this danger too, is greatly abated, provided
the faculty be allowed collateral jurisdiction, and can act on cases of
which he has not taken cognizance. If he has already acted, it would be
obviously improper that any additional jurisdiction should be
exercised—in accordance with the common law maxim—that no
man can be put in jeopardy twice for the same offence.

If such discretionary power be not granted to the presiding officer,
he will have to carry every case before the faculty; and thus his office
will be merely nominal, for it would be utterly impracticable to define,
with any accuracy, the cases that must fall under his dominion,
distinctly from those to be assigned for the animadversion of the
faculty.

It has been fancifully presumed, that the students themselves might
be induced to form a part of the government—to constitute a court
for the trial of minor offences, and to inflict punishment on a
delinquent colleague; and, further, that their co-operation might react
beneficially in the prevention of transgressions. The scheme has a
republican appearance, but experience has sufficiently shown that it is
impracticable. In the first printed copy of the enactments of the
University of Virginia, (1825) we find the following.

“The major punishments of expulsion from the university, temporary
suspension of attendance and presence there, or interdiction of
residence or appearance within its precincts, shall be decreed by the
professors themselves. Minor cases may be referred to a board of six
censors, to be named by the faculty, from among the most discreet of the
students, whose duty it shall be, sitting as a board, to inquire into
the facts, propose the minor punishment which they think proportioned to
the offence, and to make report thereof to the professors for their
approbation or their commutation of the penalty, if it be beyond the
grade of the offence. These censors shall hold their offices until the
end of the session of their appointment, if not sooner revoked by the
faculty.” But in the next edition of the enactments, (1827) we find that
no such law exists; hence we conclude, that the experiment had met with
the usual unsuccessful issue. So long, indeed, as the esprit du
corps
or Burschenschaft prevails amongst students, which
inculcates, that it is a stigma of the deepest hue to give testimony
against a fellow-student, it is vain for us to expect any co-operation
in the discipline of the institution from them. This “loose principle in
the ethics of schoolboy [Pg 295]combinations,” as it has been termed by
Mr. Jefferson, has indeed led to numerous and serious evils. It has been
a great cause of the combinations formed in resistance of the lawful
authorities, of intemperate addresses at the instigation of some
unworthy member, and to repeated scenes of commotion and violence, and
cannot be too soon laid aside. Sooner or later, it must yield to the
improved condition of public feeling; and we cannot but regret to see
the slightest and most indirect sanction given to it in the regulations
of a university, which has made so many useful innovations in systems of
instruction and discipline, that have been perpetuated by the prejudices
of ages. The law to which we allude is the following:—”When
testimony is required from a student, it shall be voluntary and not on
oath, and the obligation to give it, shall be left to his own sense of
right.”

No youth hesitates to depose in a court of justice touching an
offence against the municipal laws of his country, committed by a
brother student. The youth and the people at large, are, indeed,
distinguished for their ready attention to the calls of justice. Yet it
is esteemed the depth of dishonour to testify when called upon by the
college authorities, against the grossest violator not only of
collegiate but municipal law, as if it could be less honourable to give
the same testimony before one tribunal than another; or the morality of
the act differed in the two cases.

This erroneous principle, which leads to the separation of so many
promising individuals from the universities, threatens their reputation
and prosperity, injures the cause and saps the very foundation of
education, prevails in some countries, and in some portions of this
country more than in others. In some of the most respectable of our own
colleges, it is made a duty to give evidence under pain of the highest
punishments; and in some of those in which the esprit du corps
has prevailed to the greatest extent, it has given occasion to the
adoption, by the faculty, of the monstrous alternative of selecting
persons on bare suspicion, or at random, and punishing them under the
expectation that the real delinquent might exhibit himself. A law of
this kind prevails in the college of William and Mary, in Virginia. “In
any case of disorderly conduct within the college, in which students are
concerned, every student in college at the time, whether he be a
resident therein or not, shall be considered as a principal and treated
accordingly, unless he can show his innocence.” It has also been
proposed to get over this difficulty, with regard to testimony, by
establishing a law court at the university, of which the law professor,
for example, might be judge, and the jury be constituted of the
inhabitants of the vicinity. This tribunal to possess the ordinary
jurisdiction of courts of law, and of course, empowered to require
testimony on oath [Pg 296]from the student. Such might be a
valuable adjunct to the powers ordinarily possessed by the faculties of
our colleges.

The majority of the convention, seem manifestly to have been in
favour of what they term Parental Discipline; but we are left to
conjecture how much this embraces. If it be meant, in the language of
Meiners, that “the academical authorities should bear to the students
the relation of fathers as well as of judges; that they should not only
punish, but entreat, admonish, advise, warn, and reprove”—no one
will dispute the propriety of the system. It is, in fact, that which is
introduced into our best institutions.

“The governors and instructors,” say the laws of Harvard, “earnestly
desire that the students may be influenced to good conduct and literary
exertion, by higher motives than the fear of punishment; but when such
motives fail, the faculty will have recourse to friendly caution and
warning, fines, solemn admonition, and official notice of delinquency to
parents or guardians; and where the nature and circumstances of the case
require it, to suspension, dismission, rustication, or expulsion.” But
important as may be the reformation of an offender, and interesting as
it is to see the wild and the thoughtless restored to the paths of
rectitude, it is obvious, that the prime object of discipline is less
such reformation than the advantage to others; and if in the collegiate,
as in the corporeal economy, an offending member should endanger the
safety of the whole fabric, it will have to be removed. A man is not
sent to the penitentiary merely because he has stolen a sheep, but in
order that sheep may not be stolen. The term parental discipline, in
fact, is most undefined; it includes the most discrepant and the most
heterogeneous modes of correction. Solitary confinement, sitting in a
corner, whipping, are used according to circumstances; but we presume
none of these punishments were contemplated by the Convention.

Most of the speakers seem to have been of opinion, that the parental
system of intercourse, such as a wise father would maintain with his
son, is best adapted for instruction and discipline in our colleges.
Such a course would be manifestly impracticable where the number of
students is considerable, and is of doubtful policy in all. The
professor should, indeed, be kind, courteous, and affable; conciliating
and ready to afford every information; but we doubt whether either
discipline or instruction is aided by constant and familiar intercourse.
There should be a certain distance maintained between pupil and
preceptor; but no presumption, no affected dignity on the part of the
latter; and under such circumstances every thing will be better effected
than where the communication is closer and less unrestrained.

But the great dread entertained by these gentlemen, has been [Pg
297]
towards the infliction of disgrace; yet no punishment,
whatever, can be awarded, without more or less of this. It is a disgrace
to an offender to be reprimanded; to be dismissed from the schoolroom
for a time; to be sent away from the institution; the good, however, of
the rest requires it, and it is pseudo-philanthropy to repine. One point
canvassed in the Convention and connected with this subject, requires
notice. “Whether a student who has been dismissed from one institution
ought to be refused admittance into any other? There is a general
understanding amongst the colleges of the United States, that no student
thus separated from one, shall be received into another, unless he be so
far restored to favour as to be able to obtain from his college what is
termed a regular dismissal.” (Journal, p. 145.) Unconditional refusal to
admit, appears to us to be a rule which can allow of but little
justification. Meiners observes, that “those who come from other
universities ought to bring certificates that they have not been
expelled. If merely dismissed, they may be admitted,—but then they
should be narrowly watched.” It would, however, be barbarous to exclude
even an expelled student, provided he could produce satisfactory
evidence of his return to rectitude. It is a good practice to make the
matriculation, under such circumstances, difficult; and to require a
sufficient period of probation before he is permitted to join the
university. The University of Virginia, has no comity in this respect
with the other institutions of the Union. It has followed the only
rational plan; ordaining—”that no person who has been a student at
any other incorporated seminary, shall be received at that university,
but on producing a certificate from such seminary, or other
satisfactory evidence
, to the faculty, with respect to his general
good conduct.” A no less important regulation would be, to exclude those
of notoriously idle or dissolute habits, and yet who had never been at
any incorporated seminary.

But Mr. Hasler is of opinion, and in this he is joined by Dr. Wolf,
and, so far as we can judge, from the published speech of Mr.
Woodbridge, by that gentleman also,—that little or no control is
necessary over the students who resort to universities. The paper from
the pen of that gentleman, in the Journal before us, bears the stamp of
visionary enthusiasm; exhibits, we think, clearly a total deficiency of
experience, and is

“A fine sample, on the whole,
Of rhetoric, which the learn’d call rigmarole.”

“Against this liberal discipline,” he remarks, “the
example of the Virginia university has very erroneously been alleged by
way of disapprobation, or as a failure: it affords no proof of that
kind. The erroneous system of collegiate life has been preserved in it.
The locality is insulated, and the constant sameness of the company, of
fellow-students only, produces the bad results of tedious and too close
influence between the student, even with the professors. Besides that,
the architect of that building, the well informed, philosophical, and
amiable Jefferson, [Pg 298]died before it was finished; for the
construction of such an institution is not finished, with the walls that
enclose its lecture rooms, or the dwellings; the organization can only
be the result of several years actual activity of the institution,
particularly when the plan is novel in the place where it is
established. To this is still to be added, that the professors appointed
there, were all accustomed to the collegiate life, and therefore not
likely of such dispositions as to be proper secundents to the liberal
plans of the original founder.” P. 265.

Without pointing out the numerous minor errors that pervade this
paragraph, we may remark, that Mr. Hasler is manifestly uninformed
regarding the condition of the institution to which he alludes. We have
every reason for believing, that the discipline of the University of
Virginia, is equal to that which prevails in any institution of the
Union. The evils of bad discipline, occasioned by the want of sufficient
and efficient rules, were speedily experienced there. The objections
felt by the board of visiters to over-legislation, led to an opposite
error; whilst undue dependence was placed upon the effect that might be
produced from the participation of the students themselves in the
judicial power. Accordingly, we find, from the supplement to the printed
enactments, that it became necessary to tighten the reins of authority
during the very first session.

It has often been remarked, that owing to the feeble domestic
discipline which ordinarily prevails in the United States, the youth,
particularly of the southern parts of the Union, require a different
mode of management from those of other countries. There does not appear
to be the slightest foundation for this vulgar error. Young men, as well
as adults, are much alike over the whole civilized globe; and if it be
found that mild measures are ineffectual, recourse must be had to more
severe every where: and in all cases, the laws, where needed, must be
executed temperately, unhesitatingly, and firmly.

It has been said, that certain offences are esteemed as such in all
institutions: of these, perhaps the most fatal are gambling and
drinking. Both exert their baneful effects upon the morals, habits, and
application of the student; and it is difficult to say, which is the
most to be deprecated. The general evils produced upon society by their
indulgence, it is as unnecessary as it would be out of place, to depict.
It is only as regards their influence on college life and discipline,
that they concern us at present.

Habits of gambling should lead to immediate separation of the
offender; they are rarely abandoned; whilst they are as pernicious to
the student himself, as they are likely to be by evil example to others.
Gaming is one of the offences that require a collegiate, in addition to
the municipal law. Under this head are included all those, which, from
their seductive character, are apt to engross the time of the student,
or to lead to parental loss and inconvenience, as cards, dice,
billiards, &c. [Pg 299]

Serious, however, as we must necessarily esteem the offence of
gambling, it is, if possible, less so than habits of drinking. The
latter is not an evil which entails with it so much pecuniary
difficulty, but it is apt to lead to the former, and to every other
loathsome vice. Few professed drunkards are reclaimed; and even should
they be, the valuable time lost in youth in these indulgences, renders
the youth subsequently unfit for the reception of moral and intellectual
culture; hence he remains in after life debased and vicious, exhibiting
merely the wreck of his previous intellect. Both these weighty offences
may, in some measure, be checked by wisely devised sumptuary laws. In
all well regulated universities, such endeavours have been directed to
restrain the expenditure of the students.

The Credit Gesetre of Göttingen occupy a space of twenty-two
octavo pages in the work of Meiners. At Harvard, (and we take this in
our references to institutions on the old system of instruction, as
being one of the longest established of those that receive resident
students,) every student who belongs to places more than one hundred
miles distant from Cambridge, is compelled to have a patron, appointed
by the corporation, who has charge of all his funds, and disburses them
under the regulations of the establishment. For this duty, he receives
from the student six dollars a year as a compensation. In the University
of Virginia, the proctor is the patron; and it is enacted, that “no
student, resident within the precincts, shall matriculate, till he shall
have deposited with the proctor all the money, checks, bills, drafts,
and other available funds, which he shall have in his possession or
under his control, in any manner intended to defray his expenses whilst
a student of the university, or on his return from thence to his
residence.” On this the proctor is allowed a commission of 2 per cent.
To ensure a more faithful compliance with this and other enactments on
the subject, each student, about to leave the university, is required to
sign a written declaration that he has made such deposit; or if not, to
state the sum withheld, and the proctor is entitled to the same
commission upon that sum as if it had been deposited. But if the student
refuses to give such written declaration, the proctor is entitled to
demand and receive from him so much as, with the commission on the money
actually deposited, will make the sum of twelve dollars. Moreover, in
all cases in which the student fails to make such written declaration,
or in which it may appear that he has not deposited the whole of his
funds with the proctor, that officer is required to report the fact to
the chairman of the faculty, in order that it may be communicated to the
parent or guardian of the student, be laid before the faculty and
visiters, and otherwise properly animadverted upon.

[Pg
300]
The contraction of debts by students has, also, been made
liable to the severest collegiate penalties; but, notwithstanding, the
offence is always committed to a greater or less extent. The tradesman
will give credit, and the student escape detection. The last and best
resource is in the public spirit of the parent or guardian, who ought,
unhesitatingly and firmly, to refuse to discharge any debt of an
unauthorized nature, which his son or ward may have contracted, and
especially those of the tavern-keeper or confectioner. The censures
which he may incur from the exercise of his public spirit, can proceed
only from the interested and sordid; whilst he will receive the applause
of all those, whose favourable opinion it is desirable to possess. He
will, moreover, have the gratifying conviction, that, by such a course,
he is contributing to the annihilation of a system which is the cause of
much public and domestic mischief.

The legislature of Massachusetts, to aid in the prevention of
expense and dissoluteness, have patriotically enacted “That no
inn-holder, tavern-keeper, retailer, confectioner, or keeper of
any shop or boarding-house, for the sale of drink or food, or any
livery-stable-keeper, shall give credit to any under-graduate, of
either of the colleges within the commonwealth, without the consent
of such officer or officers of the said colleges, respectively,
as may be authorized to act in such cases, by the government
of the same, or in violation of such rules and regulations as
shall be, from time to time, established by the authority of said
colleges respectively.”

The example might be advantageously followed in other
states. The objection, that, in a free country, every one ought
to be protected in the exercise of his avocation, provided it be
honest, is nugatory. They who are receiving their education at
our universities, are to form the future strength,—and, in many
cases, the pride and ornament of the state; and the pecuniary
detriment that might accrue to a few individuals by the enactment
of such a law, must be reckoned as nothing, compared
with the overwhelming evil which results where unlimited indulgence
is permitted.

One of the most prevalent sources of expense is in the article
of dress. They, whose pecuniary means will admit of ostentatious
display, will frequently attempt to exceed others in this
fancied evidence of superiority. This excites a spirit of emulation
in such as are but ill able to afford it, and is the origin of
much idle extravagance.

To rectify this evil, as well as to aid in the more ready detection
of offences, a uniform style of dress has been adopted
in many of the universities of this country, and of Europe.

In some, this consists merely of a gown thrown over the clothes:
which latter may be as costly as the wearer chooses.

[Pg
301]
In others, as in the universities of Harvard and
Virginia, cloth of the cheapest colour, and of a determinate quality,
has been selected; and the uniform dress, made from this, has been
directed to be worn, whenever the student is out of his room. The plan
pursued at those colleges, is the most advantageous, both in a sumptuary
and penal point of view: the fashion of the dress being such as to
distinguish readily the student from others, and thus to admit of the
discovery of transgressors.

As a general system, the adoption of a uniform is attended
with the most beneficial results: although, in particular cases,
it may clearly and necessarily add to the expenditure, where,
for instance, the student purposes to remain at an institution for
a single session only. He leaves home provided with his ordinary
apparel, which he is compelled to abandon, on becoming a
matriculate. The prescribed uniform must, of course, be laid
aside, on his quitting college at the end of the collegiate year;
and, by this time, his ordinary apparel has become too small for
him. For this reason, a law requiring a uniform dress, is obviously
more beneficial in such institutions as prescribe a particular
course and term of study, than where no such regulations
exist. In the laws of the University of Virginia, we find that
boots are proscribed, and this may seem to be descending to unnecessary
minutiæ; but they who are practically conversant with
university discipline, are aware that this article of dress is objectionable
on other grounds than expense. It is one of the contraband
methods, often had recourse to, for the introduction of
forbidden liquors. The boot is sent apparently to the shoemaker,
containing an empty bottle, which returns, by the same
conveyance, filled with the prohibited article.

On the important topic of practical instruction, the Convention
appear to have entered at some length; but, seemingly,
with the same discursive irregularity, that characterizes all their
other deliberations. We observe no method,—no lucid exposition,
and no evident conclusion. A great part of their discussion
was connected with the question, “whether students should be
confined to their classes, or allowed to graduate, when found
prepared, on examination?” On this subject, again, we find the
most discordant sentiments. The majority, perhaps, are in favour
of what they term “classification,” and adherence to
“tried and well-known courses;” whilst others, from the same
premises, have arrived at opposite conclusions:—the courses
having been, in their opinion, tried and found inadequate.

The most conflicting sentiments have been indulged on this point for
ages: whether, for example, it be advisable to permit a student to
select his own studies, or to compel him to enter and proceed with his
class: to pass a definite period at college, [Pg 302]if desirous of
attaining honours, and to offer himself for graduation only in company
with his class.

Most of the older universities adhere to the system, which requires
a fixed course to be followed, and for a certain time.
Many of the more modern, on the other hand, permit a free
choice; and some allow the student to become a candidate for
graduation, whenever he feels himself competent to offer.

In the United States, with but one or two exceptions, we believe,
the antiquated system, with more or less modification, is
adopted; and, in most, the distinctions into freshman and sophomore,
junior and senior classes, prevail: the sciences only
becoming predominant objects of the student’s attention in the
two last. The course of study in each of these continues for a
year, and is the same for every student, whatever may be his
capacity or tastes. To be received into any of those upon the
old system, it is made indispensable, that he should be acquainted,
to a certain extent, with the Greek and Latin languages.

“No boy,” says Mr. Gallatin, in an address characterized by
the same comprehensive and enlightened views, which we mark
in every thing emanating from that distinguished individual—”who
has not previously devoted a number of years to the study
of the dead languages; no boy, who, from defective memory,
or want of aptitude for that particular branch, may be deficient
in that respect, can be admitted into any of our colleges. And
those seminaries do alone afford the means of acquiring any other
branch of knowledge. Whatever may be his inclination or destination,
he must, if admitted, apply one-half of his time to the
further study of those languages. It is self-evident, that the
avenue to every branch of knowledge is actually foreclosed by
the present system, against the greater part of mankind.” Journal.
P. 175.

Mr. Gallatin does not seem to have been aware that there is one
university in the Union to which his strictures do not apply—the
University of Virginia. In it the student, except in the schools of
ancient languages, mathematics, and natural philosophy, is subjected to
no preliminary examination; and, moreover, he is required to pass
through no definite course or term of study; to attend no particular
classes, but is left free to select his own studies. When he has once
embraced them, however, he is not permitted to relinquish them, unless
by request of his parent or guardian, and by the permission of the
faculty; and whenever he esteems himself sufficiently informed on the
subject taught in any one of his schools, he is permitted to become a
candidate for graduation in it. This system, which, so far as it goes,
will bear the test of rigid and philosophical examination more than any
other, prevails more or less in the German universities, and has been
adopted, we believe, in the new London University.

[Pg
303]
Professor Vethake of Princeton, New-Jersey—a
communication from whom was read to the convention, and which exhibits
sound practical sense, and ingenious and discriminating
reflection—has exhibited the prevalent inaccuracy of information,
regarding the system adopted at the southern university, to which, from
its novelty, we have so frequently alluded. “I see no objection,” he
remarks, “to render it obligatory on them (the students) to attend at
the same period of time, a certain number of courses, unless specially
exempted for sufficient reasons, as is now the arrangement in the
University of Virginia.” Journal, P. 30. No such arrangement
exists in that institution. The professor has been guilty of an error
loci
; the plan is pursued at the old college of William and Mary, in
Virginia.

In canvassing the comparative merits of the two systems, and, indeed,
of every point of college discipline and education, it is necessary to
take into consideration the age at which the students are received. In
most of our colleges they are admitted when mere boys, and the course of
instruction is necessarily made more elementary. In the University of
Virginia, on the other hand, no student is received under the age of
sixteen, and when, whatever may be the fact, it is to be presumed, that
the more elementary portion of his education has been completed, and
that he is now prepared for the prosecution of more advanced academic,
or for professional, studies. To adopt a rigid rule, that students of
this age should be compelled to pass a period of four or more years at
college, before they can offer themselves for honours; or that they
should be confined to classes, with boys, to whom a few years is a
matter of comparatively little moment, would be manifestly unreasonable.
This much is certain, that in this country few can spare the time in the
mere attainment of academical or preliminary information. The truth is,
our universities are, like those of Scotland now, and Oxford and
Cambridge in former times—both schools and colleges. The under
graduate course, in those venerable seats of learning, seems at first to
have corresponded precisely, in point of age, with that of the modern
schools. Many of the statutes, still in force at Oxford and Cambridge,
respecting the discipline of students, sufficiently attest the boyhood
of those for whom they were enacted. One of these directs corporal
chastisement for those who neglect their lessons. Another, at Cambridge,
prohibits the undergraduates from playing marbles on the steps of the
senate house. In process of time, excellent schools arose, at which the
ordinary preliminary education was obtained, and the period of resorting
to college became thus postponed. The dislike to innovation, which
augments in intensity according to the age of the establishment,
prevented, however, any modification in the course of scholastic
instruction, [Pg
304]
and thus it would seem was occasioned the length of time
consumed there in preliminary education.[3]

It will be manifest, that the objections to the system of
classification are not so numerous or so weighty in those colleges into
which mere boys are received. It has been repeatedly urged, that by such
a system they are compelled to study subjects foreign to their
inclinations and capacities; but, until the age of sixteen or seventeen,
the mind cannot, perhaps, be better employed than in the acquirement of
such knowledge as forms part of the course prescribed in the generality
of our universities. The great objection is, that those of all ages are
subjected to the same restrictions.

The opposite course, as it at present prevails at the University of
Virginia, is also liable to animadversion; the less, however, as the
students are not received under sixteen years of age. It will most
generally happen, that neither the youth, nor his parent nor guardian,
is sufficiently acquainted with the course he ought to adopt with the
view of being well educated; and if the youth be left solely to the
exercise of his own discretion, which is often a negative quantity, he
will be apt to select those schools that require the least application,
and are the most interesting, to the exclusion of more severe and
elementary subjects. The best system is that which turns out the
greatest number of well instructed individuals, or which holds out the
greatest amount of incentives to regular study. This cannot be
accomplished by any plan which leaves the student, or the parent or
guardian—often less competent than the student—to be the
sole judge of what should be the course of instruction in all cases. The
University of Virginia, which admits this system to the full
extent—in no wise controlling the choice of the
student—affords us some elucidation of the comparative value
attached to different subjects of university instruction, by the
student, or by parents and guardians, and of the disadvantages of this
unrestricted plan. From the report of the rector and visiters of that
university for 1830, we find that there were attending the

School ofAncient Languages52
Mathematics60
Natural Philosophy47
Moral Philosophy16

We have selected those subjects only, which constitute the usual
course of academic instruction; and which, we think, ought to constitute
it. The school of chemistry we have omitted, because it was composed of
both academic and professional students, with the ratio of which to each
other we are unacquainted. The probability also is, that some of those
attending the departments [Pg 305]of natural and moral philosophy, were
students of law or medicine. From this list we find, that whilst the
schools of ancient languages, of mathematics, and of natural philosophy
were well attended, that of moral philosophy—one of eminent
importance in forming the youthful mind—was comparatively
neglected. The two first departments, as taught in most of our colleges,
are the subject of the first years’ attention; the latter are esteemed
more advanced studies, and, where free agency is allowed the pupil, he
will generally prefer the study of matter, with the advantage of the
beautiful and diversified elucidations afforded by the advanced state of
physical science, to that of mind, with all its arid, but by no means
sterile investigations.

We have said that, in the University of Virginia, the selection of
studies by the student is free and uncontrolled. An indirect influence
is, however, exerted by the graduation of the fees paid to the
professors. If the student attends but one professor, he is required to
pay $50; if two, $30 to each; if three or more, $25 to each. A similar
effect is produced by the enactment which requires that the student
shall enter three classes, unless his parent and guardian shall
authorize him, in writing, to attend fewer. Such regulations are
favourable only to diffusion of studies over three subjects; the evil
remains—of permitting the student to employ his own unassisted
judgment in the choice. Such a rule must, however, be generally
inoperative. If the collegiate regulation be known, the student will
take care to provide himself with the necessary authorization from his
parent or guardian; and if not known, it would be hard that the rule
should apply. But let us suppose that he arrives at the university
without any such authorization, and desires to join the elementary
departments of ancient languages and mathematics. When he discovers that
he is required to attend three schools, he will necessarily select one
that may afford the greatest attractions, and the attention to which may
be esteemed recreation rather than study. In such a case, the law,
independently of being productive of no clear advantage except that of
adding to the emolument of a greater number of professors, has the evil
of compelling an elementary student to adopt a more advanced subject of
study, or, at all events, an additional study to the disadvantage of the
main object for which he joined the university. Less objection would
have existed, if the regulation had required the student to attend
two schools under such circumstances. He might then devote
himself exclusively to elementary studies; or, if more advanced, he
could readily find a collateral subject, which would not distract his
attention from the main department, and might form an agreeable and
useful alternation.

The truth is, however, that the law is liable to all the objections
which apply to the old collegiate regulations, which make [Pg 306]time
the only element of qualification for distinction. The board of visiters
of that university should have gone a step further, and instead of
stating the number of schools which a pupil should be compelled
to attend, unless his parent or guardian wished otherwise, they should
have recommended, not enforced, a particular system of study for those
desirous of attaining high literary distinction, or of becoming well
educated; still retaining the valuable feature, that they, whose
opportunities, tastes, or capacities, do not admit of their following
the recommendation, may choose their own subjects.

What this system ought to be, we will now inquire into. It will enter
naturally into the consideration of the latter part of the question
canvassed before the Convention—”ought students to be confined to
their classes, or allowed to receive degrees when found prepared on
examination
?” The affirmative of the proposition, as regards
graduation, seems to be the natural view; yet there are few institutions
at which this course is permitted. If the pupil be constrained to follow
a prescribed and unbending series of studies, as is the case in most of
the universities of this country and of Europe, it would appear to
result as naturally that the negative view should be adopted.

In the Convention, the most opposing sentiments were here again
elicited; and, as on other topics, they seem to have arrived at no fixed
conclusion; all that we are informed being, that “the discussion of the
topic was discontinued.”

As regards the requisites for graduation in the different colleges of
the Union, they are as various as the colleges themselves. This
circumstance has, indeed, given occasion to the little estimation in
which the degrees are in general held. It often happens, in truth, that
the degree of Bachelor of Arts is conferred at one institution, on such
as would be utterly incapable of acquiring it at another; and, at the
close of his college career,—which differs in length in different
institutions,—every individual receives the first degree in the
arts: the examinations instituted being a matter of form, and, too
often, of farce. We cannot be surprised, then, that a degree, thus
obtained, should be contemned; and that, even in legislative assemblies,
members should be found to declare themselves totally unworthy of the
honours thus conferred upon them. This is not the case in the
universities of Europe. In the English universities, the Baccalaureate
is made the test of severe devotion to particular studies; and, whatever
objections may be made to the plan followed in those institutions, of
requiring accurate classical and mathematical knowledge, to the
exclusion of every thing else, the degree is, at all events, an evidence
that the possessor is unusually well instructed in those matters. Hence,
we find in that country the initials B. A. and M. A. proudly appended to
[Pg
307]
the names of the Bachelor or Master, and received by all
as emblems of literary distinction. How rarely do we see the title thus
added in this country? This comes from the causes already alluded
to;—the degree is too easily attained; and, when attained, is such
an insufficient evidence of learning, that it is discarded; and the
parchment and the seal and riband, and the pomp and ceremony of the day
for the distribution of honours, which excited so much juvenile
exultation, are, in after life, esteemed no criterion of literary
distinction. We cannot, then, be surprised, that one of the topics which
engaged the Convention, was, “whether the title of B. A. should be
retained?”

To the title Bachelor of Arts, unmeaning as it derivatively
is, we have but little objection, provided certain definite ideas are
attached to it. In the University of Virginia, the term graduate
seems to be considered more appropriate. We do not think it an
improvement upon the ancient appellation:—

“Sound them, it doth become the mouth as well—
Weigh them, it is as heavy.”

But few appellatives, in their received acceptation, would be found
to correspond with their derivative meaning. The French have their
“Bachelors” and “Masters of Sciences,” but these terms are not more
significant; whilst “Doctor” too often means any thing rather than
doctus—”Qui dit Docteur ne dit pas un homme docte, mais un
homme qui devrait être docte.”

Every well devised system of education should combine an attention to
language; to the sciences relating to magnitude and numbers; and to
those that embrace the phenomena of mind and of matter.

Little doubt, we think, can exist in the minds of the intelligent,
that the ancient languages should form one element. Much has been said,
and much will continue to be said, on both sides of this question, into
which we do not propose to enter: admitting, however, that the Latin
language, for example, is less necessary now than when it was the
exclusive language of the learned, and that the modern languages have
emerged from their then Patois condition, and risen in relative
importance, a certain knowledge of that tongue, as well as of the Greek,
ought still to form part of the education of every gentleman. The mind
of youth cannot be better engaged, during the early period of their
university career, than in becoming acquainted with the classic models
of antiquity, and practised in the habits of discrimination which the
study engenders. Whether it should be prosecuted to the extent
inculcated at the English universities, and to the comparative exclusion
of other subjects, is another question. In this country, at least, the
course would be injudicious and unfeasible, and has been canvassed by
Mr. Gallatin [Pg
308]
with that gentleman’s usual felicity of exposition. The
illustrious founder of the University of Virginia appears, however, to
have had different views on this subject from those we have expressed;
and views which appear somewhat inconsistent with freedom of graduation
in the separate schools.

In the earliest copy of the enactments, (1825,) we find it stated,
amongst other matters relating to the attainment of honours, that “the
diploma of each shall express the particular school or schools in which
the candidate shall have been declared eminent, and shall be subscribed
by the particular professors approving it. But no diploma shall be given
to any one who has not passed such an examination in the Latin language
as shall have proved him able to read the highest classics in that
language with ease, thorough understanding, and just quantity. And if he
be also a proficient in the Greek, let that too be stated in the
diploma; the intention being that the reputation of the university shall
not be committed but to those, who, to an eminence in some one or more
of the sciences taught in it, add a proficiency in those languages which
constitute the basis of a good education, and are indispensable to fill
up the character of a ‘well educated man.'”

Without dwelling on the unreasonableness of denying a diploma to one
who has sufficient knowledge of mathematics, or chemistry, or of natural
or moral philosophy, because he may not be thoroughly acquainted with
Latin, we cannot avoid expressing our surprise that it should not have
struck that philosophic individual, and his respectable colleagues, as
being a total prohibition to graduation in certain departments. To be
able “to read the highest classics in the Latin language with ease,
thorough understanding, and just quantity,” would, of itself, require as
much time as the majority of our youths are capable of devoting to their
collegiate instruction. Accordingly, we find, from the printed
enactments, that the faculty judiciously suggested a modification of the
rule relating to graduation, which was confirmed by the board of
visiters. As it now stands, it merely requires that every candidate for
graduation, in any of the schools, shall give the faculty satisfactory
proof of his ability to write the English language correctly.

For a university degree, then, the subject of ancient
languages should certainly be one element. This, we believe, is conceded
in all colleges: at least, the only exception with which we are
acquainted, is that of William and Mary, in Virginia.

As little doubt can there be, with regard to mathematics; which has,
in some institutions, been esteemed the study of primary importance. The
utility of a certain acquaintance with numbers and magnitude, is obvious
in every department of life; but the greatest advantage from the study,
is the precision and [Pg 309]accuracy which it gives to the
reasoning powers. When the student has attained this more elementary
instruction, he is capable of undertaking, satisfactorily, the study of
physics, and of becoming acquainted with the bodies that surround him,
and the laws that govern them, as well as of entering upon the science
of moral philosophy, and of comprehending the interesting subject of his
own psychology.

These seem to be the only departments that need be acquired for a
university degree. They embrace an acquaintance with the ancient
classics, and the philosophy of language, as well as with mathematical,
physical, and metaphysical facts and reasonings; and their acquisition
enables the student to enter upon professional or political life with
every advantage.

We have said nothing, it will be observed, of the modern languages.
The valuable stores to be drawn from these, especially from the French
and German, are, of themselves, attractions which render unnecessary
collegiate restraint or recommendation. No one can now be esteemed well
educated, who is thoroughly ignorant of them.

It has been remarked that the student is permitted, in the University
of Virginia, to graduate in the separate schools; and that an evil
exists there, in no course of study being advised. The consequence of
this is, that few can be expected to remain, for any length of time, at
that institution. We would by no means interfere with this graduation in
the schools; but, in addition to this, there ought, we think, to be some
goal of more elevated attainment, which might excite the attention and
emulation of those whose opportunities admit of their being well
educated. Let it bear the title of Bachelor of Arts, or Master
of Arts
, or graduate, and, if a definite meaning be affixed
to it by the college authorities, it cannot fail to be as well
understood as the unmeaning terms, sophomore, freshman, senior-wrangler,
&c. and let the requisites for this higher honour be graduation in, or a
sufficient knowledge of ancient languages, mathematics, natural
philosophy, and chemistry and moral philosophy. If this plan were
universally adopted, a certain degree of uniformity might exist amongst
the different colleges: the degree would be received as the test of
literary merit, and the possessor be proud of appending the title to his
name. At present, as Mr. Sparks has correctly observed, the “diplomas of
this country, as they are now estimated in the United States, appear to
be of little value.”

The only other topic on which we shall pause, relates to the mode in
which instruction should be conveyed, and to the examinations to be
instituted, with the view of ascertaining comparative merit, and of
exciting emulation. On this subject, as is well known, the English
universities of Oxford and Cambridge, and [Pg 310]that of Dublin, differ
essentially from the Scotch and many others: the latter teaching,
solely, by lectures delivered orally. The most successful plan is that
which combines both lectures and examinations. It is but rarely, that a
text book can be found to suit the views of the professor, and no
student pays the same degree of attention to a written composition. Even
in the departments of ancient languages and mathematics, where the
combination of lectures with examinations would appear most difficult, a
prælection, explaining the various points of the subsequent examination,
may be, and often is, premised with striking effect. In the ordinary
method of teaching the classics, little attention is paid, except to the
vocabulary; and many a student has thumbed his Horace for the fourth or
fifth time, without being aware of the import of the philological,
geographical, historical, and other allusions, with which the inimitable
productions of the satirist abound. The vocabulary is but the key, that
unlocks these various treasures. In a well devised prælection,
things can be thought as well as words. We do not, indeed,
know any department of science or literature, in which a union of
prælections and examinations may not be employed with advantage. There
is, however, another and a more serious objection to confining a
student, in most branches at least, to a text book:—the professor
is not stimulated to keep pace with the rapidly improving condition of
science. If indolent and devoid of enthusiasm, he confines the youth
closely to the text,—takes no pains to advance him
farther,—and the student leaves the institution with the most
insufficient instruction on the subject. The text books which are used
at this time, in some of our colleges, and have been so for the last
fifty years, are melancholy evidences of the imperfect mode in which
particular studies are taught there, and of the absence of all progress
on the part of the teachers.

We believe the very best system of instruction, where it can be
adopted, is:—to recapitulate the subject of the preceding lecture,
and, after the lecture of the day, to examine the class thoroughly on
the last lecture but one. In this manner, the facts and theories of a
science are impressed three times, upon the memory of the pupil; and if,
after this, he is unable to retain them, he must be pronounced
incorrigible. This plan we conceive to be the superlative; and to this
conclusion we are led, not from theory simply, but from practice.

The nature of certain subjects, and the shortness of time
appropriated, in some institutions, to lecture, may, occasionally,
preclude its fulfilment: the nearer it can be accomplished, the better.
Under this plan, the text book becomes a matter of comparatively
trifling moment,—as the student will, of course, be [Pg
311]
understood to come prepared for examination on the
subject of the lecture, as delivered ex cathedrâ.

With regard to public examinations, we need not dwell on the
question of their policy. All well-regulated universities in this
country and Great Britain, at least, have a system of rewards, as well
as of punishments; and this uniformity may be esteemed a fair criterion
of the opinions of the wise and reflecting of those countries on this
topic. However desirable it may be, that mankind should do their duty
without fear or expectation, every day’s experience testifies that the
hope of reward, or the dread of punishment, powerfully influences their
exertions, not only for temporal, but eternal purposes.

In the German universities, there are neither daily, nor semi-annual,
nor annual examinations; and, accordingly, we are not much surprised to
find them objected to by some who had received their education in that
country. The difference, however, which prevails upon this point in the
best colleges of different parts of the globe, ought to have suggested
some slight qualification of the sweeping censures that were passed upon
the system in the Convention. “The semi-annual examinations,” says Dr.
J. Leo Wolf, “as recommended by some of the gentlemen of the Convention,
lower the student to the rank of a schoolboy, while, being a man, as he
ought to be, they are useless, for he will know that it is for his own
good, to be assiduous in his studies. Moreover, the result of his
studies is proved at the time when he desires to graduate, and to be
licensed for the practice of his profession. Then he must pass a strict
rigid and public examination; and this I should warmly recommend. In
Prussia, these examinations are particularly severe, but quite impartial
and recorded.” P. 251. So far as we can judge from the involved and
almost unintelligible twaddle contained in the address of Mr. Woodbridge
on the subject of discipline, we should conceive him opposed to these as
well as to all other means, which would excite the emulation of
the student; thus discarding, on faulty metaphysical speculation, one of
the most powerful stimuli to all literary and honourable distinction;
and which, if rightly directed, can never, in collegiate life, act
otherwise than beneficially. Granting, then, that annual, or semi-annual
public examinations are of excellent policy in all higher schools, it
remains to inquire into the best mode of conducting them. The oral
system is that received into most of our colleges. In it the students
are necessarily interrogated on different subjects, so that it becomes a
matter of difficulty, nay of impracticability, to determine, with any
accuracy, their relative standing. Added to this, if the class be
numerous, it is impossible to put a sufficient number of questions to
each individual; and the bold and confident, will ever exhibit a
manifest advantage over [Pg 312]the timid and retiring. In every
respect, the oral, seems to us to be inferior to the written
examination, where either is practicable. In the departments of the
languages—ancient and modern—an admixture of the two would
always be requisite, for the purpose of determining the student’s
acquaintance with quantity or accent, etymology, syntax, &c.

The plan universally adopted into the higher schools of England, is
that by written answers. The students of a class are all furnished with
the same questions; and the answers to these are written in the
examination room. All communication between the examinants is prevented;
and no book allowed to be brought into the apartment. After the
expiration of a certain time the answers are collected.

The English method has, so far as we know, been received into one of
our universities only—the University of Virginia. It has now been
practised there for five years; and, we have reason to believe, the
results have been such, as to satisfy the faculty of its pre-eminence
over the methods usually practised. The following is its arrangement as
published in the Virginia Literary Museum.

“1. The chairman of the faculty shall appoint for
the examination of each school, a committee consisting of the professor
of that school, and of two other professors. 2. The professor shall
prepare, in writing, a series of questions to be proposed to his class,
at their examination, and to these questions he shall affix numerical
values, according to the estimate he shall form of their relative
difficulty, the highest number being 100. The list, thus prepared, shall
be submitted to the committee for their approbation. In the schools of
languages, subjects may also be selected for oral examination. 3. The
times of examination for the several schools shall be appointed by the
chairman. 4. At the hour appointed, the students of the class to be
examined shall take their places in the lecture room, provided with
pens, ink, and paper. The written questions shall then, for the first
time, be presented to them, and they shall be required to give the
answers in writing with their names subscribed. 5. A majority of the
committee shall always be present during the examination; and they shall
see that the students keep perfect silence, do not leave their seats,
and have no communication with one another or with other persons. When,
in the judgment of the committee, sufficient time has been allowed for
preparing the answers, the examination shall be closed, and all the
papers handed in. 6. The professor shall then carefully examine and
compare all the answers, and shall prepare a report, in which he shall
mark, numerically, the value which he attaches to each: the highest
number for any answer being that which had been before fixed upon as the
value of the corresponding question. For the oral examinations, the
values shall be marked at the time by the professor, with the
approbation of the committee, but the number attached to any exercise of
this kind shall not exceed 20. 7. This report shall be submitted to the
committee, and if approved by them, shall be laid before the faculty,
together with all the papers connected with it, which are to be
preserved in the archives of the university. 8. The students shall be
arranged into three separate divisions, according to the merit of their
examinations as determined by the following method. The numerical values
attached to all the questions are to be added together, and also the
values of all the answers given by each student. If this last number
exceeds three-fourths of the first, the student shall be ranked in the
first division; if it be less than three-fourths, and more than
one-fourth, in the second; and if less than one-fourth, in the
third.”

This scheme combines the advantages of affording both the [Pg
313]
positive and relative standing of the
pupil. And as those in the separate divisions are arranged
alphabetically, it does not necessarily expose the lowest in the third
division to the degradation and mortification, to which, however, they
are often richly entitled.

The plan of examinations for honours and prizes, in the University of
London, resembles the above essentially; differing from it, indeed, in
few particulars. It comprises one regulation, however, which might be
advantageously appended to the other. We copy it from the printed
“Regulations”—Session, 1828-29.

“The paper containing the answers must not be signed with the
student’s own name, but with a mark or motto; and the name of the
student using it, inclosed in a sealed envelope, inscribed with the mark
or motto must be left with the professor, to be opened after the merit
of the answers shall have been determined.” This prevents the
possibility of favouritism, in all classes, which are so large that the
professor does not become acquainted with the autographs of his
students. The examinants are there also placed, according to the merits
of their answers, in classes, denominated the first,
second, and third; provided the sum of their answers be
equal to a certain amount; all below this point are not classed.

We have now touched upon the most important topics presented by the
committee for the consideration of the Convention. Several others were
propounded, but they seem to have fallen still-born from their authors.
As regards the 11th, 12th, and 14th, “whether any religious service,
and, if any, what may with propriety be connected with a
university?”—”Whether any course of instruction on the evidences
of Christianity will be admissible?”—And, “Is it proper to
introduce the Bible as a classic in the institutions of a Christian
country?” We shall gladly follow the example of prudence exhibited by
the Convention, and pass them over. The affirmative view of the last
topic, meets with an enthusiastic supporter in the author of one of the
works, whose titles are placed at the head of this article.

One proposition only remains, on which, in conclusion, we may indulge
a few remarks:—”The importance of adding a department of English
language, in which the studies of rhetoric and English classics shall be
minutely pursued.” This subject, we regret to see, experienced the fate
of others, more deserving of neglect, and was not discussed.

We have long felt impressed, that the organization of our colleges is
defective in this respect. Into many of them the student is received,
after having been employed in scraping together a few Greek and Latin
words and phrases; yet lamentably ignorant of the literature, structure,
and even of the commonest principles of the orthography of his own
tongue. Such a chair ought [Pg 314]to be established in all our
universities, and a certain degree of proficiency in the subjects
embraced by it, should be a preliminary to every collegiate attainment.
It would be an instructive and delightful study to trace back, as far as
possible, the language of Britain to its aboriginal condition, and to
follow up the changes impressed upon it, by the Celtic, Gothic, Roman,
Saxon, Belgic, Danish, and Norman invaders; the investigation being
accompanied with elucidative references to the literature of the
different periods. The poetry, romances, and the drama would constitute
inquiries of abundant interest and information. To these might be added
didactic and rhetorical exercises for improving the student in the
practice of writing—not merely accurately, but elegantly and
perspicuously.

Such a professorship has been wisely established in the University of
London; and we trust the new University of New-York will follow the good
example. If we may judge, indeed, from the ungrammatical and inelegant
Journal of the Convention, an attention to this subject is as much
needed there as elsewhere; and were the professorship in the hands of an
accomplished individual, it could not fail to improve the literary taste
and execution of the community.


[1]
Memoir, Correspondence, &c. Vol. IV. P. 387.


[2]
Ueber die verfassung und verwaltung deutscher universitaten. Göttingen,
1801-2.


[3]
Quarterly Review, Vol. XXXVI. P. 229.


Art. II.The Life and Times of His Late
Majesty, George the Fourth: with Anecdotes of distinguished Persons of
the last fifty years.
By the Rev. George Croly,
A. M.
London: 1830.

C’est un métier que de faire un livre comme de faire
une pendule
—it is a trade to make a book just as much as to
make a watch—is a remark which was never better exemplified, than
by the manner in which the craftsmen of the book-making trade in London,
have compressed the Life of His Late Most Sacred Majesty, within the two
covers of a volume. That exalted personage may have descended to the
tomb unwept and unhonoured, in reality, however numerous the tears shed
upon his bier, or gorgeous the ceremonies attending his interment; but
he certainly has not gone down to it unsung, as the above work is only
one of several, if we are not much mistaken, in which his requiem has
been chanted with becoming loyalty. We have seen none of its fellows,
though the advertisement of them has met our eye. Judging, however, from
the reputation of its author, there is not much literary boldness in
pronouncing it the best which has appeared about its kingly subject.

Mr. Croly is well known as a candidate of considerable pretensions,
as well for the honours of Parnassus, as for those [Pg
315]
which an elevated seat on the prosaic mount, whatever may
be its name, can confer. But, in concocting this last production, it is
beyond doubt, that the main object he had in view, was one of a more
substantial kind than a mere increase of fame. “The Life, &c.” is,
in fact, a bookseller’s job, executed, we allow, by a man of genius.
There are evident marks about it of hasty and careless
composition,—of a desire to make a book of a certain number of
pages, with as little trouble and delay as possible. The style is often
deficient in purity and correctness, and overloaded with glittering
tropes and ornaments, not always in good taste; the arrangement wants
consecutiveness and perspicuity; and attention is sometimes bestowed
upon topics comparatively unimportant, to the detriment of such as are
of more moment. But it is, on the whole, a work of undeniable talent,
containing much powerful writing, richness and beauty of diction,
graphic delineation of character, interesting information, and amusing
anecdote. Some of the author’s sentiments are obnoxious to censure, and
we shall venture to disagree with him, occasionally, as we proceed.

It was on the 8th of September, 1761, that His Majesty, George the
Third, espoused Sophia Charlotte, daughter of the Duke of Mecklenburg
Strelitz; and, on the twelfth of August, in the following year, she
presented him with a son and heir, to his own great delight, and the
universal joy of the British empire. Ineffable as is the contempt which
is expressed at the present day, for the superstitious trust reposed in
omens by the heathen ancients, yet nothing of any consequence occurs,
without being attended by signs in which the Christian multitude discern
either fortunate or disastrous predictions. It has thus been carefully
recorded and handed down, that the birth of the royal infant happened on
the anniversary of the Hanover accession, and that the same day was
rendered trebly auspicious, by the arrival at London of wagons
containing an immense quantity of treasure, the fruits of the capture of
a Spanish galleon off Cape St. Vincent, by three English frigates. A few
days after his appearance in this world, His Royal Highness was created
Prince of Wales, by patent, and would have been completely crushed under
the load of honours that devolved upon him, had their weight been of a
kind to be physically felt; Duke of Cornwall, hereditary Steward of
Scotland, Duke of Rothsay, Earl of Carrick, and Baron of Rothsay, were
his other titles,—being those to which the eldest son of the
British throne is born. There is no harm in this, perhaps, as things are
constituted in England, but we have never been able to think of one of
the titles to which the second son is heir, without feeling an
inclination to smile;—the Duke of York is Bishop of
Osnaburgh;—nothing more ridiculous than this, can be discovered
even amid [Pg
316]
the nonsense that is inseparable from regal
institutions;—born a bishop!

At the time of the Prince of Wales’s birth, George the Third was at
the height of popularity,—the reasons for which, Mr. Croly has
detailed at some length. In depicting the character of this monarch, he
certainly has not employed the pencil with which it was darkened, as our
readers may recollect, by Mr. Coke of Norfolk, on a recent occasion, who
thus brought upon his own head a torrent of abuse. It was shocking, was
it said, to disturb the repose of one who had so long been slumbering in
the tomb, in the same way as it had been pronounced monstrous to say
aught in disparagement of His Majesty, when he had just been gathered to
his forefathers; as if kings were like private individuals, the effects
of whose acts either expire with themselves, or are of contracted
influence. It is far, however, from our wish, to dispute the fidelity of
Mr. Croly’s portrait; and we are perfectly willing to believe, that “no
European throne had been ascended for a hundred years before, by a
sovereign more qualified by nature and circumstances, to win golden
opinions from his people, than George the Third,” though, we must be
allowed to think, that circumstances did not qualify him to win “golden
opinions” from us Americans. “Youth, striking appearance, a fondness not
less for the gay and peaceful amusements of court life, than for those
field sports, which make the popular indulgence of the English
land-holder, a strong sense of the national value of scientific and
literary pursuits, piety unquestionably sincere, and morals on which
even satire never dared to throw a stain, were the claims of the king to
the approbation of his people;” but all these claims were neutralized,
by the appointment of Lord Bute, as his prime minister. The odium that
resulted from this measure, was carefully fomented by the arts of
demagogues, the most conspicuous of whom was Wilkes. It was ascribed to
an unworthy passion entertained for the handsome nobleman by the
princess dowager, and to arbitrary principles in the monarch; and, such
was the effect produced upon the latter, by the opposition and virulence
which he encountered, that he is said to have conceived the idea of
abandoning England, and retiring to Hanover. At one time, his
inclination to take this step was so great, that he communicated it to
the Lord Chancellor Thurlow, who honestly told him, that, “though it
might be easy to go to Hanover, it might be difficult to return to
England.”

In December, 1765, when not quite three years of age, the Prince of
Wales received a deputation from the Society of Ancient Britons, on St.
David’s day, and, in answer to their address, said,—”he thanked
them for this mark of duty to the king, and wished prosperity to the
charity,”—an early development [Pg 317]of that talent for
public speaking, which he is said to have possessed! In the same year,
he was invested with the order of the garter, along with the Earl of
Albemarle, and the hereditary Prince of Brunswick.

When the Prince had attained an age at which it was deemed necessary
for his education to commence, it was determined that it should be
conducted on a private plan; and Lord Holdernesse, “a nobleman of
considerable attainments, but chiefly recommended by dignity of manner
and knowledge of the court,” was appointed his governor, and Dr.
Markham, subsequently archbishop of York, and Cyril Jackson, were named
preceptor and sub-preceptor. This measure excited a violent outcry; it
was said that the heir to the throne should receive a public education
at one of the great schools; and this opinion Mr. Croly strenuously
advocates. It did not, however, produce any effect, and the whole course
of instruction which the Prince underwent was private, though the
preceptorship was twice changed. The Duke of Montague, Hurd, Bishop of
Litchfield, and the Rev. Mr. Arnold, formed the last preceptorial
trio.

In January, 1781, when the Prince was but a little more than
eighteen, he was declared of age, “on the old ground that the
heir-apparent knows no minority;” and a separate establishment, on a
small scale, having been assigned to him, he now became, in a measure,
his own master. In 1783, when about to take his place in the
legislature, arrangements were commenced for supplying him with an
income, and at the instigation of the king, the parliament voted him an
annual revenue of £50,000, besides an outfit of £100,000. The sum of
£60,000 for the outfit had been originally proposed by the king, but it
was increased in consequence of the demand of the cabinet, known by the
name of the Coalition Cabinet, some of the members of which, especially
Fox, insisted for a time upon making the grant £100,000 a year. This,
however, the king resolutely refused to allow, “for the double reason of
avoiding any unnecessary increase to the public burdens, and of
discouraging those propensities which he probably conjectured in the
Prince.” He accordingly demanded “but” the sums we have
mentioned. Can any one read the sentence just quoted from Mr. Croly,
without a smile? The precious fruits of royalty!—they even reduce
a man of sense to write what is ludicrous from its absurdity. It is,
without doubt, an admirable method of avoiding any unnecessary increase
of the public burdens, and discouraging the evil propensities of a young
man, to deprive the people of five hundred thousand dollars at once, and
half that sum every year, in order to bestow it upon the individual who
has no other use for it than to gratify those propensities. But, we
shall be told, the heir to a throne must support his dignity. In that
[Pg
318]
phrase is comprised as unanswerable an argument against
royal institutions, as can be desired. The people must be heavily
burthened, to enable the person by whom they are to be governed, to
indulge in all sorts of excesses, and thus disqualify himself for that
duty, in order that he may support the dignity of his station! Thank
Heaven we live in a land in which there is no such dignity to be
supported,—where the time of the great officers of state is never
occupied in wrangling about the extent of the facilities which shall be
afforded the successor to the administration of affairs, of bringing
disgrace upon himself, and the country,—where the people are
infinitely better governed, at an infinitely less expense, both of money
and honour!

“Now, fully,” says Mr. Croly, “began his checkered
career,”—which, properly interpreted, means, that now he fully
plunged into that reckless course of profligacy and folly, which
terminated only with his life, and which should render his name odious
to all who are friends of decency and virtue. We were afraid when we saw
the announcement of the work we are reviewing, that its author would
allow himself to be blinded by the regal blaze which surrounded its
subject, and would endeavour to palliate those violations by a king, of
the most sacred ordinances of the religion of which he is a minister,
which he would have branded with indelible infamy in a private
individual. Our fears, unfortunately, have not proved groundless. “There
are no faults that we discover with more proverbial rapidity, than the
faults of others,—and none that generate a more vindictive spirit
of virtue, and are softened down by fewer attempts at palliation, than
the faults of princes in the grave. Yet, without justice, history is but
a more solemn libel; and no justice can be done to the memory of any
public personage, without considering the peculiar circumstances of his
time.” Such is the sophistry with which he enters upon the task of
extenuation. The first part of the first period in the above extract, is
certainly undeniable—”fit nescio quomodo,” says Cicero, “ut magis
in aliis cernamus si quid delinquitur, quam nobismet in ipsis;” but,
though the second part may also be indisputable as a general position,
it is not at all applicable to this case. The historian or biographer,
who is discussing the character of a monarch long since “fixed in the
tomb,” will doubtless find it an easy matter to make

“His virtues fade, his vices bloom,”

should he be so inclined: no other considerations but those of
conscience operate then to influence his pen. But the case is quite
different when he is writing about a king scarcely yet cold in the
grave, when a species of popular infatuation commands that grave to be
strewn with flowers, when it is necessary, as it [Pg
319]
were, to sail with the stream or sink; and when the
brother of the deceased monarch has just ascended the throne, and, for
the sake of appearances, may deem himself called upon to consider every
thing said concerning his predecessor as touching himself. How many
motives combine here to warp the judgment and the conscience, and
convert sober history into funeral panegyric! Thus, if Mr. Croly had
undertaken the task of delineating the moral features of Richard the
III., or of James the II.—we adduce James the II., because our
author seems to regard Catholicity as so monstrous a crime that this
prince would, we are sure, not be drawn by him in the most flattering
colours—he would have found, to use his own words, that there are
no faults which generate a more vindictive spirit of virtue, than those
of princes in the grave; but in depicting George the IVth., he has
proved the reverse of this to be the fact. It is amusing, although at
the same time melancholy, to contrast the virtuous indignation with
which he pours out his anathemas against those who committed the
tremendous crime of advocating and effecting the emancipation of the
Catholics, with the gentle terms in which he comments upon the
wanderings of the Prince of Wales from the proper path, and the glosses
with which he softens their obliquity. One might be induced to suppose
that his creed holds religious liberality as the crime of deadly dye,
and dissipation of the lowest kind as a vice merely venial in its
character.

“Without justice,” he continues “history is but a more solemn libel,
and no justice can be done to the memory of any public personage,
without considering the peculiar circumstances of his time.” This remark
is true with regard to those public personages whom he has so severely
taken to task for their conduct respecting the Catholic question; had
not his mind’s eye been covered with a film, he would have perceived
that the “peculiar circumstances of the time” fully warranted that
change in the course pursued by Mr. Peel, the Duke of Wellington, and
others, with reference to that important question, which has drawn from
him such expressions of horror; but it is far from being equally
admissible where he has applied it. That less tenderness should be
extended towards the vices of princes than to those of subjects is, we
think, undeniable, when the weightier (secular) reasons they have for
keeping a strict control over their passions, are
considered,—reasons which should completely counterbalance any
greater temptations they may be obliged to undergo.

“A sovereign’s great example forms a people;
The public breast is noble or is vile,
As he inspires it.”
“The man whom Heaven appoints
To govern others, should himself first learn
To bend his passions to the sway of reason.”

[Pg
320]
Surely these two considerations—the potent effect
of his example, and the almost impossibility of governing others when
not able to govern himself—without referring to that paramount one
which operates for all men alike, ought to have been sufficient to
counteract the tendency of “the peculiar circumstances of his time,” to
inflame the “propensities” of the Prince; or, at least, should be enough
to prevent an extenuation on that ground, of his unrestrained indulgence
of them, by the historian of his life. What those circumstances were, we
will let Mr. Croly relate.

“The peace of 1782 threw open the continent; and it was scarcely
proclaimed, when France was crowded with the English nobility.
Versailles was the centre of all that was sumptuous in Europe. The
graces of the young queen, then in the pride of youth and beauty; the
pomp of the royal family and the noblesse; and the costliness of the
fêtes and celebrations, for which France has been always famous,
rendered the court the dictator of manners, morals, and politics, to all
the higher ranks of the civilized world. But the Revolution was now
hastening with the strides of a giant upon France: the torch was already
waving over the chambers of this morbid and guilty luxury. The
corrective was terrible: history has no more stinging retrospect than
the contrast of that brilliant time with the days of shame and agony
that followed—the untimely fate of beauty, birth, and
heroism,—the more than serpent-brood that started up in the path
which France once emulously covered with flowers for the step of her
rulers,—the hideous suspense of the dungeon,—the
heart-broken farewell to life and royalty upon the scaffold. But France
was the grand corruptor; and its supremacy must in a few years have
spread incurable disease through the moral frame of Europe.

“The English men of rank brought back with them its dissipation and
its infidelity. The immediate circle of the English court was clear. The
grave virtue of the king held the courtiers in awe; and the queen, with
a pious wisdom, for which her name should long be held in honour,
indignantly repulsed every attempt of female levity to approach her
presence. But beyond this sacred circle, the influence of foreign
association was felt through every class of society. The great body of
the writers of England, the men of whom the indiscretions of the higher
ranks stand most in awe, had become less the guardians than the seducers
of the public mind. The ‘Encyclopédie,’ the code of rebellion and
irreligion still more than of science, had enlisted the majority in open
scorn of all that the heart should practise or the head revere; and the
Parisian atheists scarcely exceeded the truth, when they boasted of
erecting a temple that was to be frequented by worshippers of every
tongue. A cosmopolite, infidel republic of letters was already lifting
its front above the old sovereignties, gathering under its banners a
race of mankind new to public struggle,—the whole secluded, yet
jealous and vexed race of labourers in the intellectual field, and
summoning them to devote their most unexhausted vigour and masculine
ambition to the service of a sovereign, at whose right and left, like
the urns of Homer’s Jove, stood the golden founts of glory. London was
becoming Paris in all but the name. There never was a period when the
tone of our society was more polished, more animated, or more corrupt.
Gaming, horse-racing, and still deeper deviations from the right rule of
life, were looked upon as the natural embellishments of rank and
fortune. Private theatricals, one of the most dexterous and assured
expedients to extinguish, first the delicacy of woman, and then her
virtue, were the favourite indulgence; and, by an outrage to English
decorum, which completed the likeness to France, women were beginning to
mingle in public life, try their influence in party, and entangle their
feebleness in the absurdities and abominations of political intrigue. In
the midst of this luxurious period the Prince of Wales commenced his
public career. His rank alone would have secured him flatterers; but he
had higher titles to homage. He was, then, [Pg 321]— one of the
handsomest men in Europe: his countenance open and manly; his figure
tall, and strikingly proportioned; his address remarkable for easy
elegance, and his whole air singularly noble. His contemporaries still
describe him as the model of a man of fashion, and amusingly lament over
the degeneracy of an age which no longer produces such men.

“But he possessed qualities which might have atoned for a less
attractive exterior. He spoke the principal modern languages with
sufficient skill; he was a tasteful musician; his acquaintance with
English literature was, in early life, unusually accurate and extensive;
Markham’s discipline, and Jackson’s scholarship, had given him a large
portion of classical knowledge; and nature had given him the more
important public talent of speaking with fluency, dignity, and
vigour.

“Admiration was the right of such qualities, and we can feel no
surprise if it were lavishly offered by both sexes. But it has been
strongly asserted, that the temptations of flattery and pleasure were
thrown in his way for other objects than those of the hour; that his
wanderings were watched by the eyes of politicians; and that every step
which plunged him deeper into pecuniary embarrassment was triumphed in,
as separating him more widely from his natural connexions, and
compelling him in his helplessness to throw himself into the arms of
factions alike hostile to his character and his throne.”

Our readers may compare the above portrait of his royal highness,
with that which Mr. Jefferson draws of him in one of his letters.

In 1787, the Prince had involved himself in debt to such an amount,
that it was found necessary to solicit Parliament, not only for a sum
sufficient to liquidate his obligations, but also for an increase of his
income, the salary first granted having proved quite inadequate for his
royal propensities. The following account of his debts and expenditure
was laid before the House of Commons, and furnishes a teeming commentary
on the blessings of hereditary government. In considering this matter,
one might be tempted to regard Parliament as a species of eleemosynary
institution, for the relief of insolvent royalty.

Debts.

Bonds and debts,£13,000
Purchase of houses,4,000
Expenses of Carlton House,53,000
Tradesmen’s bills,   90,804
 £160,804

Expenditure from July 1783, to July 1786.

Household, &c.,£29,277
Privy purse,16,050
Payments made by Col. Hotham, particulars delivered in to his
majesty,
37,203
Other extraordinaries,  11,406
£93,936
Salaries,54,734
Stables,37,919
Mr. Robinson’s,     7,059
£193,648

[Pg
322]
The debate upon the grant was of a highly animated
character, and in the course of it the Prince was not spared. He was
befriended by the opposition, with Fox at its head, having thrown
himself into the arms of that party, who were endeavouring in every way
to drive Pitt from his ministerial seat. But in this instance, as in
most others, the latter succeeded in carrying his point; in consequence
of which, £161,000 were issued out of the civil list to pay the Prince’s
debts, and £20,000 for the completion of Carlton House, but no
augmentation of his income was allowed. “Hopeless of future appeal,
stung by public rebuke, and committed before the empire in hostility to
the court and the minister, the Prince was now thrown completely into
Fox’s hands.”

Perhaps the two most interesting chapters in Mr. Croly’s book, are
those entitled “the Prince’s friends,” in which he has brought into
review most of the principal characters of that period of intellectual
giants, whose renown continues to shed increasing lustre around the
political and literary horizon of England. The world is never tired of
reading whatever has reference to those personages, and a book that
professes to speak respecting them, may be said to possess a sure
passport to public favour at the present day. Well may the old man now
living in England, the prime of whose life was passed in that time, be
allowed to be a “laudator temporis acti,” without having it imputed to
the fond weakness of senility. We shall make copious extracts from this
portion of our author’s work.

“England had never before seen such a phalanx armed against a
minister. A crowd of men of the highest natural talents, of the most
practised ability, and of the first public weight in birth, fortune, and
popularity, were nightly arrayed against the administration, sustained
by the solitary eloquence of the young Chancellor of the Exchequer.

“Yet Pitt was not careless of followers. He was more than once even
charged with sedulously gathering round him a host of subaltern
politicians, whom he might throw forward as skirmishers,—or
sacrifices, which they generally were. Powis, describing the ‘forces led
by the right honourable gentleman on the treasury bench,’ said, ‘the
first detachment may be called his body-guard, who shoot their little
arrows against those who refuse allegiance to their chief.’ This light
infantry were of course, soon scattered when the main battle joined. But
Pitt, a son of the aristocracy, was an aristocrat in all his nature, and
he loved to see young men of family around him; others were chosen for
their activity, if not for their force, and some, probably, from
personal liking. In the later period of his career, his train was
swelled by a more influential and promising race of political
worshippers, among whom were Lord Mornington, since Marquess Wellesley;
Ryder, since Lord Harrowby; and Wilberforce, still undignified by title,
but possessing an influence, which, perhaps, he values more. The
minister’s chief agents in the house of commons, were Mr. Grenville
(since Lord Grenville) and Dundas.

“Yet, among those men of birth or business, what rival could be found
to the popular leaders on the opposite side of the house,—to
Burke, Sheridan, Grey, Windham, or to Fox, that

“‘Prince and chief of many throned powers,
Who led the embattled seraphim to war.'”

[Pg
323]
Without adopting the bitter remark of the Duke de
Montausier to Louis the Fourteenth, in speaking of
Versailles:—’Vous avez beau faire, sire, vous n’en ferez jamais
qu’un favori sans mérite,’ it was impossible to deny their inferiority
on all the great points of public impression. A debate in that day was
one of the highest intellectual treats: there was always some new and
vigorous feature in the display on both sides; some striking effort of
imagination or masterly reasoning, or of that fine sophistry, in which,
as was said of the vices of the French noblesse, half the evil was
atoned by the elegance. The ministerialists sarcastically pronounced
that, in every debate, Burke said something which no one else ever said;
Sheridan said something that no one else ought to say, and Fox something
that no one else would dare to say. But the world, fairer in its
decision, did justice to their extraordinary powers; and found in the
Asiatic amplitude and splendour of Burke; in Sheridan’s alternate
subtlety and strength, reminding it at one time of Attic dexterity, and
another of the uncalculating boldness of barbarism; and in Fox’s
matchless English self-possession, unaffected vigour, and overflowing
sensibility, a perpetual source of admiration.

“But it was in the intercourses of social life that the superiority
of Opposition was most incontestable. Pitt’s life was in the senate; his
true place of existence was on the benches of that ministry, which he
conducted with such unparalleled ability and success: he was, in the
fullest sense of the phrase, a public man; and his indulgences in the
few hours which he could spare from the business of office, were more
like the necessary restoratives of a frame already shattered, than the
easy gratifications of a man of society: and on this principle we can
safely account for the common charge of Pitt’s propensity to wine. He
found it essential, to relieve a mind and body exhausted by the
perpetual pressure of affairs: wine was his medicine: and it was drunk
in total solitude, or with a few friends from whom the minister had no
concealment. Over his wine the speeches for the night were often
concerted; and when the dinner was done, the table council broke up only
to finish the night in the house.

“But with Fox, all was the bright side of the picture. His
extraordinary powers defied dissipation. No public man of England ever
mingled so much personal pursuit of every thing in the form of
indulgence with so much parliamentary activity. From the dinner he went
to the debate, from the debate to the gaming-table, and returned to his
bed by day-light, freighted with parliamentary applause, plundered of
his last disposable guinea, and fevered with sleeplessness and
agitation; to go through the same round within the next twenty-four
hours. He kept no house; but he had the houses of all his party at his
disposal, and that party were the most opulent and sumptuous of the
nobility. Cato and Antony were not more unlike, than the public severity
of Pitt, and the native and splendid dissoluteness of Fox.

“They were unlike in all things. Even in such slight peculiarities as
their manner of walking into the house of commons, the contrast was
visible. From the door Pitt’s countenance was that of a man who felt
that he was coming into his high place of business. ‘He advanced up the
floor with a quick firm step, with the head erect, and thrown back,
looking to neither the right nor the left, nor favouring with a glance
or a nod any of the individuals seated on either side, among whom many
of the highest would have been gratified by such a mark of recognition.’
Fox’s entrance was lounging or stately, as it might happen, but always
good-humoured; he had some pleasantry to exchange with every body, and
until the moment when he rose to speak, continued gaily talking with his
friends.”

*    *    * 
   *    *

“Of all the great speakers of a day fertile in oratory, Sheridan had
the most conspicuous natural gifts. His figure, at his first
introduction into the house, was manly and striking; his countenance
singularly expressive, when excited by debate; his eye large, black, and
intellectual; and his voice one of the richest, most flexible, and most
sonorous, that ever came from human lips. Pitt’s was powerful, but
monotonous; and its measured tone often wearied the ear. Fox’s was all
confusion in the commencement of his speech; and it required some
tension of ear throughout to catch his words. Burke’s was loud [Pg 324]and
bold, but unmusical; and his contempt for order in his sentences, and
the abruptness of his grand and swelling conceptions, that seemed to
roll through his mind like billows before a gale, often made the defects
of his delivery more striking. But Sheridan, in manner, gesture, and
voice, had every quality that could give effect to eloquence.

“Pitt and Fox were listened to with profound respect, and in silence,
broken only by occasional cheers; but from the moment of Sheridan’s
rising, there was an expectation of pleasure, which to his last days was
seldom disappointed. A low murmur of eagerness ran round the house;
every word was watched for, and his first pleasantry set the whole
assemblage in a roar. Sheridan was aware of this; and has been heard to
say, ‘that if a jester would never be an orator, yet no speaker could
expect to be popular in a full house, without a jest; and that he
always made the experiment, good or bad; as a laugh gave him the country
gentlemen to a man.’

“In the house he was always formidable; and though Pitt’s moral or
physical courage never shrank from man, yet Sheridan was the antagonist
with whom he evidently least desired to come into collision, and with
whom the collision, when it did occur, was of the most fretful nature.
Pitt’s sarcasm on him as a theatrical manager, and Sheridan’s severe,
yet fully justified retort, are too well known to be now repeated; but
there were a thousand instances of that ‘keen encounter of their wits,’
in which person was more involved than party.”

*    *    * 
   *    *

“Burke was created for parliament. His mind was born with a
determination to things of grandeur and difficulty.

“‘Spumantemque dari, pecora inter inertia, votis
Optat aprum, aut fulvum descendere monte leonem.'”

Nothing in the ordinary professions, nothing in the trials or
triumphs of private life, could have satisfied the noble hunger and
thirst of his spirit of exertion. This quality was so predominant, that
to it a large proportion of his original failures, and of his unfitness
for general public business, which chiefly belongs to detail, is to be
traced through life. No Hercules could wear the irresistible weapons and
the lion’s skin with more natural supremacy; but none could make more
miserable work with the distaff. Burke’s magnitude of grasp, and
towering conception, were so much a part of his nature, that he could
never forego their exercise, however unsuited to the occasion. Let the
object be as trivial as it might, his first instinct was to turn it into
all shapes of lofty speculation, and try how far it could be moulded and
magnified into the semblance of greatness. If he had no large national
interest to summon him, he winged his tempest against a turnpike bill;
or flung away upon the petty quarrels and obscure peculations of the
underlings of office, colours and forms that might have emblazoned the
fall of a dynasty.”

*    *    * 
   *    *

“Erskine, like many other characters of peculiar liveliness, had a
morbid sensibility to the circumstances of the moment, which sometimes
strangely enfeebled his presence of mind; any appearance of neglect in
his audience, a cough, a yawn, or a whisper, even among the mixed
multitude of the courts, and strong as he was there, has been known to
dishearten him visibly. This trait was so notorious, that a solicitor,
whose only merit was a remarkably vacant face, was said to be often
planted opposite to Erskine by the adverse party, to yawn when the
advocate began.

“The cause of his first failure in the house, was not unlike this
curious mode of disconcerting an orator. He had been brought forward to
support the falling fortunes of Fox, then struggling under the weight of
the ‘coalition.’ The ‘India Bill’ had heaped the king’s almost open
hostility on the accumulation of public wrath and grievance which the
ministers had with such luckless industry been employed during the year
in raising for their own ruin. Fox looked abroad for help; and Gordon,
the member for Portsmouth, was displaced from his borough, and Erskine
was brought into the house, with no slight triumph of his party, and
perhaps some degree of anxiety on the opposite side. On the night [Pg 325]of
his first speech, Pitt, evidently intending to reply, sat with pen and
paper in his hand, prepared to catch the arguments of this formidable
adversary. He wrote a word or two; Erskine proceeded; but with every
additional sentence Pitt’s attention to the paper relaxed; his look
became more careless; and he obviously began to think the orator less
and less worthy of his attention. At length, while every eye in the
house was fixed upon him, he, with a contemptuous smile, dashed the pen
through the paper, and flung them on the floor. Erskine never recovered
from this expression of disdain; his voice faltered, he struggled
through the remainder of his speech, and sank into his seat dispirited
and shorn of his fame.

“But a mind of the saliency and variety of Erskine’s, must have
distinguished itself wherever it was determined on distinction; and it
is impossible to believe, that the master of the grave, deeply-reasoned,
and glowing eloquence of this great pleader, should not have been able
to bring his gifts with him from Westminster-hall to the higher altar of
parliament. There were times when his efforts in the house reminded it
of his finest effusions at the bar. But those were rare. He obviously
felt that his place was not in the legislature; that no man can wisely
hope for more than one kind of eminence; and except upon some party
emergency, he seldom spoke, and probably never with much expectation of
public effect. His later years lowered his name; by his retirement from
active life, he lost the habits forced upon him by professional and
public rank; and wandered through society, to the close of his days, a
pleasant idler; still the gentleman and the man of easy wit, but leaving
society to wonder what had become of the great orator, in what corner of
the brain of this perpetual punster and story-teller, this man of
careless conduct and rambling conversation, had shrunk the glorious
faculty, that in better days flashed with such force and brightness;
what cloud had absorbed the lightnings that had once alike penetrated
and illumined the heart of the British nation.”

The following investigation of the authorship of Junius will be read
with interest.

“The trial of Hastings had brought Sir Philip Francis into public
notice, and his strong Foxite principles introduced him to the prince’s
friends. His rise is still unexplained. From a clerk in the War-office,
he had been suddenly exalted into a commissioner for regulating the
affairs of India, and sent to Bengal with an appointment, estimated at
ten thousand pounds a-year. On his return to England he joined
Opposition, declared violent hostilities against Hastings, and gave his
most zealous assistance to the prosecution; though the house of commons
would not suffer him to be on the committee of impeachment. Francis was
an able and effective speaker; with an occasional wildness of manner and
eccentricity of expression, which, if they sometimes provoked a smile,
often increased the interest of his statements.

“But the usual lot of those who have identified themselves with any
one public subject, rapidly overtook him. His temperament, his talents,
and his knowledge, were all Indian. With the impeachment he was
politically born, with it he lived, and when it withered away, his
adventitious and local celebrity perished along with it. He clung to Fox
for a few years after; but while the great leader of opposition found
all his skill necessary to retain his party in existence, he was not
likely to solicit a partisan at once so difficult to keep in order and
to employ. The close of his ambitious and disappointed life was spent in
ranging along the skirts of both parties, joining neither, and speaking
his mind with easy, and perhaps sincere, scorn of both; reprobating the
Whigs, during their brief reign, for their neglect of fancied promises;
and equally reprobating the ministry, for their blindness to fancied
pretensions.

“But he was still to have a momentary respite for fame. While he was
going down into that oblivion which rewards the labours of so many
politicians; a pamphlet, ascribing Junius’s letters to Sir Phillip,
arrested his descent. Its arguments were plausible; and, for a while,
opinion appeared to be in favour of the conjecture, notwithstanding a
denial from the presumed Junius; which, however, had much the air of his
feeling no strong dislike to being suspected of this [Pg 326]new
title to celebrity. But further examination extinguished the title; and
left the secret, which had perplexed so many unravellers of literary
webs, to perplex the grave idlers of generations to come.

“Yet the true wonder is not the concealment; for a multitude of
causes might have produced the continued necessity even after the death
of the writer; but the feasibility with which the chief features of
Junius may be fastened on almost every writer, of the crowd for whom
claims have been laid to this dubious honour: while, in every instance,
some discrepancy finally starts upon the eye, which excludes the
claim.

“Burke had more than the vigour, the information, and the command of
language; but he was incapable of the virulence and the disloyalty.
Horne Tooke had the virulence and the disloyalty in superabundance; but
he wanted the cool sarcasm and the polished elegance, even if he could
have been fairly supposed to be at once the assailant and the defender.
Wilkes had the information and the wit; but his style was incorrigibly
vulgar, and all its metaphors were for and from the mob: in addition, he
would have rejoiced to declare himself the writer: his well-known answer
to an inquiry on the subject was, ‘Would to Heaven I had!’ Utinam
scripsissem!
Lord George Germaine has been lately brought forward as
a candidate; and the evidence fully proves that he possessed the
dexterity of style, the powerful and pungent remark, and even the
individual causes of bitterness and partisanship, which might be
supposed to stimulate Junius: but, in the private correspondence of
Junius with his printer, Woodfall, there are contemptuous allusions to
Lord George’s conduct in the field, which at once put an end to the
question of authorship.

“Dunning possessed the style, the satire, and the partisanship; but
Junius makes blunders in his law, of which Dunning must have been
incapable. Gerard Hamilton (Single-speech) might have written the
letters, but he never possessed the moral courage; and was, besides, so
consummate a coxcomb, that his vanity must have, however involuntarily,
let out the secret. The argument, that he was Junius; from his
notoriously using the same peculiarities of phrase at the time when all
the world was in full chase of the author, ought of itself to be
decisive against him; for nothing can be clearer, than that the actual
writer was determined on concealment, and that he would never have toyed
with his dangerous secret so much in the manner of a school-girl,
anxious to develop her accomplishments.

“It is with no wish to add to the number of the controversialists on
this bluestocking subject, that a conjecture is hazarded; that Junius
will be found, if ever found, among some of the humbler names of the
list. If he had been a political leader, or, in any sense of the word,
an independent man, it is next to impossible that he should not have
left some indication of his authorship. But it is perfectly easy to
conceive the case of a private secretary, or dependent of a political
leader, writing, by his command, and for his temporary purpose, a series
of attacks on a ministry; which, when the object was gained, it was of
the highest importance to bury, so far as the connexion was concerned,
in total oblivion. Junius, writing on his own behalf, would have, in all
probability, retained evidence sufficient to substantiate his title,
when the peril of the discovery should have passed away, which it did
within a few years; for who would have thought, in 1780, of punishing
even the libels on the king in 1770? Or when, if the peril remained, the
writer would have felt himself borne on a tide of popular applause high
above the inflictions of law.

“But, writing for another; the most natural result was, that he
should have been pledged to extinguish all proof of the
transaction; to give up every fragment that could lead to the discovery
at any future period; and to surrender the whole mystery into the hands
of the superior, for whose purposes it had been constructed, and who,
while he had no fame to acquire by its being made public, might be
undone by its betrayal.

“The marks of private secretaryship are so strong, that all
the probable conjectures have pointed to writers under that relation;
Lloyd, the private secretary of George Grenville; Greatrakes, Lord
Shelburne’s private secretary; Rosenhagen, who was so much concerned in
the business of Shelburne house, that he [Pg 327]may be considered as a
second secretary; and Macauley Boyd, who was perpetually about some
public man, and who was at length fixed by his friends on Lord
Macartney’s establishment, and went with him to take office in
India.

“But, mortifying as it may be to the disputants on the subject, the
discovery is now beyond rational hope; for Junius intimates his having
been a spectator of parliamentary proceedings even further back than the
year 1743; which, supposing him to have been twenty years old at the
time, would give more than a century for his experience. In the long
interval since 1772, when the letters ceased: not the slightest clue has
been discovered; though doubtless the keenest inquiry was set on foot by
the parties assailed. Sir William Draper died with but one wish, though
a sufficiently uncharitable one, that he could have found out his
castigator, before he took leave of the world. Lord North often avowed
his total ignorance of the writer. The king’s reported observation to
Gen. Desaguiliers, in 1772, ‘We know who Junius is, and he will write no
more,’ is unsubstantiated; and if ever made, was probably prefaced with
a supposition; for no publicity ever followed; and what neither the
minister of the day, nor his successors ever knew, could scarcely have
come to the king’s knowledge but by inspiration, nor remained locked up
there but by a reserve not far short of a political error.

“But the question is not worth the trouble of discovery; for, since
the personal resentment is past, its interest can arise only from
pulling the mask off the visage of some individual of political
eminence, and giving us the amusing contrast of his real and his assumed
physiognomy; or from unearthing some great unknown genius. But the
leaders have been already excluded; and the composition of the letters
demanded no extraordinary powers. Their secret information has been
vaunted; but Junius gives us no more than what would now be called the
‘chat of the clubs;’ the currency of conversation, which any man mixing
in general life might collect in his half-hour’s walk down St. James’s
Street: he gives us no insight into the purposes of government;
of the counsels of the cabinet he knows nothing. The style
was undeniably excellent for the purpose, and its writer must have been
a man of ability. If it had been original, he might have been a man of
genius; but it was notoriously formed on Col. Titus’s letter, which from
its strong peculiarities, is of easy imitation. The crime and the
blunder together of Junius was, that he attacked the king, a man so
publicly honest and so personally virtuous, that his assailant
inevitably pronounced himself a libeller. But if he had restricted his
lash to the contending politicians of the day, justice would have
rejoiced in his vigorous severity. Who could have regretted the keenest
application of the scourge to the Duke of Grafton, the most incapable of
ministers, and the most openly and offensively profligate of men; to the
indomitable selfishness of Mansfield; to the avarice of Bedford, the
suspicious negotiator of the scandalous treaty of 1763; or to the
slippered and drivelling ambition of North, sacrificing an empire to his
covetousness of power?”

Mr. Croly has recorded a quantity of the “good things” that were said
by the wits of the day at the table of the Prince, who used the
facilities which his rank afforded him, of collecting around him all
that was most distinguished in intellect, with praiseworthy zeal. Had
his companions been chosen only from among that highest class, we might
have quoted with regard to him, the sentence of Cicero—”facillime
et in optimam partem, cognoscuntur adolescentes, qui se ad claros et
sapientes viros, bene consulentes rei publicæ, contulerunt: quibuscum si
frequentes sunt, opinionem afferunt populo, eorum fore se similes quos
sibi ipsi delegerint ad imitandum”—but unfortunately his intimacy
was habitually shared by far less worthy associates—persons whom
it was contamination to approach. Many of these [Pg 328]jeux d’esprit
are of respectable antiquity; we transcribe a few which are attributed
to the Prince himself, as specimens of royal humour.

“The conversation turning on some new eccentricity of Lord George
Gordon; his unfitness for a mob leader was instanced in his suffering
the rioters of 1780 to break open the gin-shops, and, in particular, to
intoxicate themselves by the plunder of Langdale’s great distillery, in
Holborn. ‘But why did not Langdale defend his property?’ was the
question. ‘He had not the means,’ was the answer. ‘Not the means of
defence?’ said the prince; ‘ask Angelo: he, a brewer, a fellow all his
life long at carte and
tierce.'”

“Sheridan was detailing the failure of Fox’s match with Miss
Pulteney. ‘I never thought that any thing would result from it,’ said
the prince. ‘Then,’ replied Sheridan, ‘it was not for want of sighs: he
sat beside her cooing like a turtle-dove.’

“‘He never cared about it,’ said the prince; ‘he saw long ago that it
was a coup manqué.'”

“Fox disliked Dr. Parr; who, however, whether from personal
admiration, or from the habit which through life humiliated his real
titles to respect—that of fastening on the public favourites of
the time, persecuted him with praise. The prince saw a newspaper
panegyric on Fox, evidently from the Dr.’s pen; and on being asked what
he thought of it, observed, that ‘it reminded him of the famous epitaph
on Machiavel’s tomb,’—

“‘Tanto nomini nullum Par elogium.'”

“If English punning,” says Mr. Croly, “be a proscribed species of
wit; though it bears, in fact, much more the character of the ‘chartered
libertine,’ every where reprobated, and every where received; yet
classical puns take rank in all lands and languages. Burke’s pun on ‘the
divine right of kings and toastmasters,’—the jure
de-vino
—perhaps stands at the head of its class. But in an
argument with Jackson, the prince, jestingly, contended that trial by
jury was as old as the time of Julius Cæsar; and even that Cæsar died by
it. He quoted Suetonius: ‘Jure cæsus videtur.'”

In October, 1788, George the III. was afflicted with a mental
disease, which totally incapacitated him for the duties of government.
We do not wish to be unjustly harsh, but when we consider the
irritability which, as may be inferred from the anecdote we have related
of the King’s intention to retire from England, must have formed a
prominent trait in his character, and the displeasure he could not help
manifesting in his communications to Parliament respecting the Prince’s
debts, it is impossible to reject the idea that the conduct of the
latter was a main cause of his affliction.

He recovered, however, before the preliminary arrangements for the
entrance of the Prince upon the regency had been completed. From this
period up to the moment
when the King became again a victim of the same dreadful malady, from
whose grasp he never afterwards was freed, the Prince mixed no more with
politics, but “abandoned himself,” in the words of our author, “to
pursuits still more obnoxious than those of public ambition.” The course
of his life was only varied by his disastrous marriage with the
unfortunate Caroline, Princess of Brunswick. One of Mr. Croly’s chapters
is headed “the Prince’s Marriage,” the next, “the Royal Separation.” We
need not [Pg
329]
occupy much space with a subject which must be familiar
to all of our readers, and of which the details are as disgusting as
they are pitiful. Of all the foul stains upon the character of the royal
profligate, it has stamped the foulest. Every principle of honour, of
virtue, of humanity, was violated in the grossest manner.

That the Prince of Wales was morally guilty of the crime of bigamy in
marrying the Princess Caroline, we have no hesitation in asserting. No
one can doubt that Mrs. Fitzherbert had the claims of a wife upon him
previously to his entering into this second engagement, however it may
be attempted, as has been done by Mr. Croly, to deny such claims, upon
the ground that the connexion was void by the laws of the land, although
the ordinances of religion may have been complied with. If it can be
supposed, that the Prince was determined, whilst binding himself at the
altar of God by the most sacred vows, to take advantage of the laws of
the land to cast aside the solemn obligations he thus assumed, as soon
as it suited his convenience, in what a despicable situation is he
placed! Deceit, perjury, sacrilege, would be terms too weak for the act.
But Mr. Croly’s own words are sufficient to prove that the lady was, and
is, considered to have been connected with him by other ties than those
of a mistress. He says, “she still enjoys at least the gains of the
connexion, and up to the hoary age of seventy-five, calmly draws her
salary of ten thousand pounds a year!” Would that salary be continued to
a mistress? It is evident from the English papers that Mrs. Fitzherbert
is treated with the greatest consideration by the present king and royal
family, and that she is received by them on the most intimate footing;
her name is recorded amongst those of the constant guests at the royal
table and social assemblages of every kind. On what other ground can
this circumstance be accounted for, than that she is regarded as a
sister-in-law by the sovereign, and as a reputable relative by his
family?

It is singular enough that Mr. Croly seems to consider a violation of
the laws of God less reprehensible than a violation of the laws of man.
Such at least is the unavoidable inference to be drawn from his remarks
on this matter. He is quite indignant at the idea of his Royal Highness
having married a woman of inferior rank, and a Roman Catholic (there is
the horrid part of the affair,) by which he would have been guilty of a
sin against the state, and evinces great anxiety to prove that the crime
was one of a much lighter dye—merely an adulterous connexion, by
which he transgressed one of the Divine Commandments. This Mr. Fox also
attempted to do in Parliament, when it was hinted by a member that the
liaison was not of the character which usually subsists between
individuals in the relative rank of the Prince and the lady, and the
attempt was disgraceful [Pg 330]enough even in a statesman—but in a minister of
religion!—we leave it however to speak for itself.

In 1811, George the III. was a second time a lunatic, and the Prince
ascended his throne, though only with the title of Regent, which he did
not change for that of King until 1820, when the nominal monarch died,
having survived his reason for nearly ten years. Ten years longer did
the Fourth George sway the sceptre of the noblest empire in the world;
and then he too mingled with the same dust as the meanest of his
subjects. “C’est ainsi,” in the words of Bossuet, “que la puissance
divine, justement irritée centre notre orgueil, le pousse jusqu’ au
néant, et que, pour égaler á jamais les conditions, elle ne fait de nous
tous qu’ une même cendre.”

During the last years of his life, George the IVth was the prey of
various maladies, with which a remarkably strong constitution enabled
him to struggle until the spring of 1830. His corporeal sufferings may
have been one cause of his almost entire seclusion at Windsor Castle,
where he was like the Grand Lama of Thibet, unseeing and unseen, except
by a chosen few, but it cannot be doubted that the knowledge of the
unpopularity under which he certainly laboured, had some effect in
producing the slight communication which took place between him and his
subjects. So notorious was his aversion to making an appearance in
London, that when he was first announced, last April, to be seriously
indisposed, it was rumoured for a time that the sickness was
fictitious—a mere pretence to avoid holding a levee which had been
fixed for a certain day in that month, and which was in consequence
deferred. But before the period had arrived to which it was postponed,
there was no longer a doubt that the angel of death was brandishing his
dart, and that there was little chance of averting the threatened
stroke. The bulletins which the royal physicians daily promulgated,
though couched in equivocal and unsatisfactory terms, shadowed out
impending dissolution. The reason of their ambiguity was currently
believed to be the circumstance, that the King insisted upon reading the
newspapers in which they were published; whilst the medical attendants
were anxious to withhold from him a knowledge of his true situation.

Besides being in the public prints, these bulletins appeared, in
manuscript copies, in the windows of almost every shop, and were
likewise shown every day at the Palace of St. James, by a lord and groom
in waiting, richly dressed, to all of the loving subjects who preferred
repairing thither for the satisfaction of their affectionate solicitude.
It was rather amusing to watch the manner in which this satisfaction was
obtained. The bulletins were thrust into the faces of all as they
entered into the great hall where the exhibitors were stationed, with
laudable earnestness [Pg 331]and zeal, and most of the visiters
looked with great interest—upon the paintings with which the
apartment was adorned. The multitudes of persons, however, of both
sexes, and often of high distinction, who filled the rooms that were
thrown open, during the fashionable hours of the day, rendered it an
entertaining scene. The most anxious faces were those of the owners of
dry-good shops, by whom the recovery of the monarch was indeed an object
devoutly desired, as they had already laid in their varieties of spring
fashions, which the universal mourning that was to follow the demise of
the crown, would convert almost into positive lumber.

At length, on the 26th of June, intelligence was received that the
monarch of Great Britain had been conquered by a still more powerful
king. What mourning without grief! what weeping without a tear! The
papers immediately commenced a chorus of lamentation and eulogy, in
which but one discordant voice was heard. This was the voice of the
“Times”—the only leading journal which had independence and spirit
enough to vindicate its character as a guardian of the public morals, by
disdaining to prostitute its columns to the purposes of falsehood. One
paper affirmed, among other fulsome and mendacious remarks, that the
royal defunct must have taken his departure from this world with a clear
conscience, as he had never injured an individual! After such an
assertion

“Quis neget arduis
Pronos relabi posse rivos
Montibus, Tiberimque riverti?”

Did the shades of an injured wife and an injured father never rise
before the imagination of the dying man? did the injury inflicted by a
life of evil example never appal the recollection of the dying King?
Yes, a life of evil example; we repeat the phrase. Look at his whole
career, from the moment when it first became free from control, to its
close. Does it not afford an almost uninterrupted series of the most
scandalous violations of the rules which a king especially should hold
sacred—the rules of religion, of morals? When young, he
countenanced by his deportment the extravagance and profligacy of all
the youth of the kingdom—when old, contemplate the avowed, the
flagrant concubinage he sanctioned—see one adulteress openly
succeeding another in his favour, and say whether his declining years
furnished a more exemplary model for imitation than those of his
boyhood. Worse than all, behold by whom, amongst others, his very
death-bed, we may say, is surrounded—the mistress who had last
sacrificed her virtue and honour, and the husband and the children of
that woman, who were occupying places in the royal household, as the
price of the wife and the mother’s shame. It is well known that it was
not until after [Pg 332]the accession of the present sovereign,
that Lady Conyngham, and the man from whom she derives the right of
being so entitled, together with their offspring, received an intimation
that their presence was no longer desirable at Windsor Castle, from
which they departed, in consequence, amid the ridicule and scorn of the
empire.

It was an interesting period for an American to be in London, that of
the death of one king, and the accession of another; and, as such events
are not of every-day occurrence, we esteemed ourselves particularly
fortunate in being on the spot at the time. The various ceremonies
consequent upon them,—the lying in state,—the
obsequies,—the proclamation,—the prorogation of Parliament,
and so forth, were well worth witnessing; but, by far the most
interesting result they produced, was the general election which
followed the dissolution of the legislature. We were enabled, through
the kindness of a gentleman who was a candidate, to study the whole
process of an election in a free borough, having accompanied him, at his
invitation, to the scene of political strife, and remained there until
the contest was brought to a close. By occupying a few pages with an
account of it, we may, perhaps, communicate some degree of information
and pleasure to a portion of our readers, without being guilty of too
wide a digression.

The two first days subsequently to our arrival in the town, were
spent in visiting those persons whose suffrages were not ascertained at
the time when the candidates made their canvass, two or three weeks
before, that is to say,—called personally upon every one who
possessed a vote, and requested his support. In this, there is no
mincing of the matter in the least,—the suffrage is openly asked,
and as openly promised or refused; but it is only among the more
respectable class, that this ceremonial is sufficient,—the others
“thank their God they have a vote to sell.” On the third day, the
election commenced. Two temporary covered buildings had been erected
near each other in the principal part of the town, in one of which were
the hustings and the polls, and the other was employed for the sittings
of a species of court, where the qualifications of suspected voters were
tried. About nine in the morning, the candidates, three in number,
proceeded to the former booth, if we may so term it, and, after the
settlement of the necessary preliminaries, were proposed and seconded as
representatives of the borough, in the order in which they stood on the
hustings. These were partitioned into three divisions,—one
belonging to each of the opposing gentlemen,—which were crowded
with their respective friends. Directly below the hustings, which were
considerably elevated, was a table, round which were seated the poll
clerks, and others officially connected with the election. This was
separated [Pg
333]
by a board running across the building, from the polls,
which were also divided into three parts, or boxes, corresponding with
the divisions of the hustings. All the proposers and seconders made
speeches, as well as the candidates,—and nothing could surpass the
amusing nature of the scene during the discourses of two of the
haranguers, who were particularly obnoxious to a large portion of the
assembled crowd. They were saluted with a vast variety of gentle
epithets, and almost every method of annoyance and interruption was put
in practice. After the speechification was concluded, the polling
commenced. It was done by tallies. The committee of each candidate,
marshalled in succession ten of their friends at a time, who appeared in
the box belonging to their party, and, on being asked, one after
another, for whom they voted, gave, vivâ voce, either a plumper for one,
or split their vote amongst two of the candidates. This system was
regularly prosecuted, until the diminished numbers of one of the
parties, rendered it difficult to collect ten men in time, when as many
as could be brought together, were sent in. On the last day of the
election, not more than one vote was polled in an hour in one of the
boxes.

The candidates were obliged to remain in their places on the
hustings, day after day, from the opening until the closing of the
polls, and thank aloud every one who gave them a vote. At the end of
every day’s polling, the three gentlemen made speeches, all pretty much
of the same purport, expressing their thanks for the support they had
received, and their perfect confidence of ultimate success. There were
not more than six or seven hundred voters in the town; and yet, for
eight days, was the contest carried on. On the ninth, one of the parties
retired from the field, and the other two were declared duly elected;
after which they were chaired. The reason of this protraction, was owing
in part to the unavoidable slowness of vivâ voce voting, but chiefly to
the number of votes objected to, by persons whose occupation it was to
point out every flaw they could discover in the qualifications of those
who appeared at the polls. One of those persons was in the employ of
each candidate, and, as the struggle was close and somewhat acrimonious,
objections were made on the slightest possible grounds, which were
furnished in abundance, by the variety of circumstances that
disqualified a man for voting in that borough. Whenever an objection was
made, the objector stated the cause of it; and, having written it down
on a piece of paper, handed it to the voter objected to, who repaired
with it to the other booth. Here, having shown it to the assessor, or
judge, who was invested with unlimited power to decide upon every
question of qualification, he was tried in his turn. This was by far the
more interesting and amusing of the two booths. The trial was conducted
[Pg
334]
in regular form. The accused, so to call him, was placed
at the bar of the court, where he was cross-questioned, and confronted
with friendly and adverse witnesses; and then the lawyers in attendance,
who had been respectively largely feed by the several candidates,
pleaded for, or against his qualifications, according as he was a
friend, or not, of their employer. When the arguments were finished, the
assessor either rejected his vote, or sent him back to the polls with a
certificate of qualification, which he exhibited, and had his suffrage
recorded. In some instances, the trials were speedily despatched; but,
generally, they occupied a considerable space of time, so that when the
polls were finally closed, there were at least a hundred names on the
books of the court, of persons who were yet to be arraigned.

It would require more space than is at our disposal, to enter
into any detail of the odd speeches which were made, and the
various scenes, laughable and serious, that occurred during the
course of the election. For the same reason, we cannot dwell
upon the observations which are naturally excited by the whole
matter; but, we may remark, that we became fully satisfied,
that frequent Parliaments, with the present election system,
would be one of the greatest evils which could be inflicted on
England. The seldomer, certainly, that such sluices of varied
corruption are opened, the better. Here was a whole town
for weeks in a state of the worst kind of commotion,—almost
all the usual labours of the lower classes were suspended;
unrestricted freedom of access to taverns and alehouses, at the
expense of those who were courting their sweet voices, was
afforded them; and some idea may be formed of the use that was
made of it, from the fact that the bill brought to one of the
candidates, by the keeper of an inn, for a single night’s debauch,
amounted to nearly a hundred pounds sterling. At the
bar of the court where the qualifications were examined, abundant
evidence was given, that this indirect species of bribery
was not the only kind which was in operation. The intense
eagerness manifested by the greater part of those to whose votes
objections had been made, to obtain a decision of the assessor
in their favour,—the quantity and grossness of the falsehoods
they uttered, in order to effect that object, rendered palpable
the existence of some very potent motive for desiring the
possession of a suffrage. That these evils are to be attributed
mainly to the vivâ voce mode of voting, we have little doubt,
and, assuredly, the tree which produces such fruit, cannot be
sound. But, we feel no desire to involve ourselves in a discussion
concerning the best system of election, which has been
debated usque ad nauseam, and we shall therefore return to
our proper subject.

[Pg
335]
There are various pictures afforded by the different
portions of the career of his late Majesty, which it may be of the
highest benefit for republican Americans to contemplate. It was
beautifully said by Sheridan, in one of the most brilliant of his
speeches, that Bonaparte was an instrument in the hands of Providence to
make the English love their constitution better; cling to it with more
fondness; hang round it with more tenderness: and in the same way we may
affirm that such kings as George IV. are eminently calculated to
strengthen our attachment to the republican institutions of this
country. The history of their lives furnishes that gross evidence of the
absurdities involved in the doctrine of hereditary right, which cannot
fail to disgust and revolt. It presents the spectacle of a ruler the
least fitted to rule. It proves that princes, from the very circumstance
of being princes, are the least likely to be able to execute those
duties which devolve upon them, with efficiency or
conscientiousness—that the situation in which they are placed by
their birth, nullifies the very reason for which their order was first
established, and renders them a curse instead of a blessing. What was
the source from which royal privileges and authority first flowed? Was
it not the superiority in various ways of the persons who were invested
with them, and which caused them to be considered as pre-eminently
qualified to discharge the functions incumbent on a king? And is not the
name of king at present, a by-word for inferiority in every respect in
which inferiority is degrading? Every deficiency indeed of talent,
knowledge, virtue, is regarded so much as a matter of course in a
personage of royal station, that the slightest proof of the possession
of either, which in an humbler individual would just be sufficient to
screen him from remark, is cried up as something wonderful. Think of a
king being able to quote a Latin line, or make a speech of ten minutes
in length!—the boast of Mr. Croly with regard to George IV. Such
an unusual occurrence is deemed almost incredible, and many persons,
even among his own subjects, will firmly believe that neither feat was
performed in consequence of original information and faculties, but
resulted from the suggestions of another.

But by far the most important light in which we republicans can
contemplate the career of George IV. in connexion with the object of
increasing our love for the institutions under which we live, is that of
morality and religion. The point may be conceded, which is always
advanced as the main argument in support of hereditary monarchical
government—that it is better adapted to preserve the peace of a
country by keeping the succession free from difficulty and doubt, though
a reference to history may perhaps warrant the denial even of this
position, by exhibiting the various usurpations, murders, unnatural
rebellions [Pg
336]
of children against parents, and other heart-sickening
crimes, the consequences of the right invested in one family of
exercising sovereign rule, which have so often plunged whole nations
into misery and blood;—but this point may be acknowledged; we may
admit that elections of chief magistrates are more likely to be the
source of frequent troubles. If it can nevertheless be shown, that there
is that in the very essence of monarchical institutions which is in any
way hostile to virtue, the question ought to be considered as settled in
favour of the system that is free from this insuperable objection; for
it cannot be denied, that any principle at all tending to aid the
propagation of immorality, is the worst which can be admitted into the
social and political compacts by which men are united together, and
should most be deprecated and eschewed. No matter what apparent or real
beneficial results may flow from it, they cannot counterbalance the
detriment it may inflict upon the surest guarantee of permanent good to
man, both in his individual and aggregate capacity—both with
regard to his temporal and eternal interests. National happiness and
prosperity of a durable character, are inseparable from national virtue.
The evils produced by dissensions concerning the chief power in a state,
are in a degree contingent and temporary; those engendered by immorality
are certain and lasting. Let then the pages, not merely of the book
which tells the story of George IVth of England, but of all history be
consulted, and who will deny that they furnish overwhelming evidence
that the moral atmosphere of courts has been at all times tainted and
baleful; that they have been ever the centres of corruption and vice,
and that they must ever be so? They must ever be so, we assert, because
the natural and unavoidable result of raising any collection of persons
above the opinion, as it were, of the rest of the world, and of
surrounding them with a species of prestige which prevents their
vices and follies from being viewed in their real hideousness, is to
ensure amongst them the sway of immorality. They thus form a sanctuary
for corruption, which can never be established in a country where no
factitious distinctions exist; there profligacy can have no refuge when
hard pressed by public opinion, no ramparts behind which to protect
itself from the assaults of that potent enemy; and it will never in
consequence be able to obtain there any other than individual
dominion.

If we turn our eyes upon the condition of the English court as it now
exists, although it may be less exceptionable than when George was at
its head, we shall find sufficient justification of the foregoing
remarks. The present sovereign, it is well known, is unfortunate in
possessing a mind of that nervous description, which renders any
considerable excitement a thing to be avoided; it was the effect
produced upon it by his appointment to the [Pg 337]Lord High Admiraltyship
during his brother’s life, which occasioned his removal from that post.
His moral character is certainly less disreputable than that of his
predecessor; but who can witness, without feelings akin to disgust, the
spectacle of a family of illegitimate offspring exalted in the palace,
and following him in all his perambulations? It is far from our wish to
cast any reflection upon those unfortunate persons, who are in no way
accountable for the ignominy and guilt connected with their birth. The
shame and the reproach are for the author of the stain, who exposes
himself to double reprehension, by the countenance he virtually lends to
the cause of immorality. William IV., however, is a paragon in
comparison to his next brother, the Duke of Cumberland, a person, who,
if he has given any warrant for the tenth part of the imputations which
rest upon him, can only have escaped the penalties inflicted by the law
on the greatest offences, because he is the brother of the king. We
cannot convey a better idea of the estimation in which he is held in
London, than by stating, that in all the caricatures where an attempt is
made to embody the evil spirit, his person is used for that purpose.

“What poor things are kings!
What poorer things are nations to obey
Him, whom a petty passion does command!”

These considerations, we repeat, are well adapted to promote the
important object to which we have alluded, of causing our institutions
to be properly appreciated and loved by ourselves. This is the great
desideratum with respect to them—the chief thing necessary for
their preservation. Our situation now is more enviable than that of any
country of the earth; and all which is requisite is, that we should be
aware of our own happiness, and rightly understand the source from which
it springs—the republican form of government. Let us be thoroughly
impressed with the conviction of the superior efficacy of this system
over every other, in promoting the end for which political societies
were instituted, and we are safe. We will then be furnished with the
best defence against the principal enemy from which danger need be
dreaded,—we mean that propensity to change, which is one of the
common infirmities of the human breast,—that restlessness which
renders the life of man a scene of constant struggle, tends to prevent
him from estimating and enjoying the blessings he possesses, and often
causes him to dash away with his own rash hand, the cup of happiness
from his lips. “Our complexion,” says Burke, “is such, that we are
palled with enjoyment, and stimulated with hope,—that we become
less sensible to a long-possessed benefit, from the very circumstance
that it is become habitual. Specious, untried, ambiguous prospects of
new advantage, recommend themselves [Pg 338]to the spirit of
adventure, which more or less prevails in every mind. From this temper,
men and factions, and nations too, have sacrificed the good of which
they had been in assured possession, in favour of wild and irrational
expectations.” To be satisfied, is, indeed, we fear, difficult for human
nature, even where there is no good to be reached beyond what we already
have obtained. A great object, in such case, is to be convinced that
there is no such good to be acquired—to suppose that we have
arrived at the utmost boundaries of mortal felicity.

Nothing, however, that we have advanced as fitted to aid that object,
inasmuch as it respects our political condition, is of such influence
for its accomplishment, as the contemplation of the actual state of the
European world. When the tempest howls without, the domestic hearth is
invested with a doubly inviting aspect; we gather round it with
eagerness, in proportion to the dismal appearance of external nature,
and bless it for the security which it affords from the rage of the
heavens. Should we not, in like manner, embrace with redoubled fondness,
the institutions which maintain us in prosperity and peace, now,
especially, whilst we are enabled to behold the fearful operation of the
consequences of monarchical rule—the horrors in which they are
involving the fairest and most civilized portions of the globe; and when
we know, too, that the motive which inspired the inhabitants of those
countries with courage to encounter the storm, by which they are tossed
about on the sea of revolution, was the hope of being driven by it into
some haven like that which shelters us from the fury of winds and waves?
When, if ever, they will attain to the possession of the blessings which
we enjoy,—how all the troubles by which they are agitated will
end, is what no human ken is competent to discern; but the
philanthropist and the Christian need never despair. Out of chaos came
this beautiful world; and the same Being who called it into existence,
still watches over its concerns,—is still as potent to convert
obscurity into brightness, as when He first said, “Let there be light,”
and there was light!


[Pg
339]
Art. III.Essay on
the Hieroglyphic System of M. Champollion, Jr. and the advantages which
it offers to sacred criticism.
By J. G. H.
Greppo
, Vicar-General of Belley. Translated from the French
by
Isaac Stuart, with notes and
illustrations.
Boston: pp. 276.

In former numbers of this journal, there are several
articles devoted to the subject of Egyptian hieroglyphics, particularly
as connected with the labours of Mons. Champollion. Every day seems to
give opportunity of additional observation, by furnishing new and
interesting facts. How much further the investigations may be carried,
it would be unsafe even to conjecture; but, in the present state of
things, we are fully authorized to consider the problem of hieroglyphics
as at last solved, and such general principles established, as must
render subsequent investigations comparatively easy. Every age seems to
be productive of some great genius peculiarly adapted to the
accomplishment of some great design, connected either with the
advancement of learning, or the melioration of the moral condition of
mankind. The present appears fruitful of great men, and France,
particularly favoured, whether we regard the great political events
which have called out the most gigantic exhibitions of practical wisdom,
or look at the onward march of science, which seems in no wise impeded,
by convulsions which scatter every thing but science, like the yellow
leaves of autumn. Let us not, however, be diverted from our
object,—the sober investigation of a sober subject, alike deeply
interesting to the philologer, the student of history, and the inquirer
into the sacred truths connected with divine revelation.

The work which stands at the head of this article, purports to be an
investigation of the hieroglyphic system developed in the published
works of Mons. Champollion, Jr. and the advantage which it offers to
sacred criticism. It is the performance of a clergyman of the Roman
Catholic Church, J. G. H. Greppo, Vicar-General of Belley. The original
work, however, is not before us. We examine it through the medium of a
translation made by Mr. Isaac Stuart, son of the Rev. Moses Stuart, one
of the most eminent scholars of our country, who vouches for the
accuracy of the translation, having inspected the whole, and compared it
with the original. Dr. Stuart has added some notes, where he has seen
occasion to differ from Mr. Greppo, on some points of Hebrew philology
and criticism. The reasons for his difference of opinion are given with
that candour for which the writer is distinguished, and the intelligent
reader is left to judge as to the merits of the question.

It is well known to the learned, that Mons. Champollion, the [Pg
340]
younger, has been spending several years in the
uninterrupted study of the Egyptian hieroglyphics. In his capacity of
Professor of History at Grenoble, he found his labours embarrassed by
the immense hiatus which occurs in Egyptian history, and, to the filling
up of this, he set himself to work with all the zeal and energy which
genius could inspire. In this work, he had the advantage of youth, and a
very superior education in the Coptic and other oriental languages,
connected with a patience of investigation, which appears almost
miraculous. He had the advantage of knowing, moreover, that, if ever any
just conclusion was to be gained, he must seek it by getting some
starting point, different from that whence all his predecessors had set
out. There had been a variety of learned men whose investigations were
directed to this point, such as Father Kircher the Jesuit, whose
different works on Egyptian antiquities had been successively published
in Rome, from 1636 to 1652—Warburton, the highly gifted author of
the Divine Legation of Moses, the learned Count de Gebelin, and others
of equal and less name. But these had all confessedly failed, and the
learned almost gave up the subject in despair, so much so, that
Champollion himself, states it as the only opinion which appeared to be
well established among them, viz. “that it was impossible ever to
acquire that knowledge which had hitherto been sought with great labour,
and in vain.”

In the midst of these discouragements, a circumstance occurred,
familiar probably to our readers, but to which we allude merely to
observe, that it seemed at once to open a new era of investigation, and
is among the many evidences of the fact, that events of apparently the
most inconsiderable description, are connected with results whose
magnitude cannot be estimated. At the close of the last century, while
the French troops were engaged in the prosecution of the war in Egypt,
it is well known, that a number of learned men were associated with the
expedition, for the prosecution of purposes far more honourable than
those of human conquest,—we mean the exploration of a hitherto
sealed country, with the express design of advancing the arts and
sciences. One division of the army occupied the village of
Raschid, otherwise called Rosetta; and, while they were
employed in digging the foundation for a fort, they found a block of
black basalt, in a mutilated condition, bearing a portion of three
inscriptions, one of which was in the Egyptian hieroglyphics. The fate
of the military expedition, lost to the French the possession of this
stone, as it fell into the hands of the British, by the capitulation of
Alexandria; it was afterward conveyed to London, and placed in the
British museum. Previously to the termination of the war, however, the
stone and its characters had been correctly delineated by the artists
connected with the commission, [Pg 341]and then, through the medium of an
engraving, placed in possession of the learned. This is a brief history
of the Rosetta stone, as it is called, but still it baffled the
investigations of the learned. They had gone upon the supposition, that
the hieroglyphic method of writing must, of necessity, be
ideographic, i. e. figurative or symbolical, and that each of
these signs was the expression of an idea. Here appears to have been the
great root of all their mistakes on the subject, mistakes naturally
fallen into by the moderns, inasmuch as the few incidental passages left
on the subject in the writings of the ancients, all recognized this as a
fact. Except Clement of Alexandria, one of the fathers of the church,
not a solitary writer had left on record any other opinion; and the
passage of Clement has itself never been understood, until since the
discoveries of Champollion. It seems to be one of those curious facts
connected with the history of the human mind, that it requires a great
intellect to seize on the simplest element of truth. It is easy to
speculate on data, which are assumed without a rigorous examination, and
then to make an exhibition of learning which may astonish the world;
but, it is the province of the greatest genius to lay hold of simple
truth, and establish a foundation utterly immoveable, before there is
any attempt at a superstructure. This was the business, and this the
achievement of Champollion. Now that the discovery is made, we are
amazed at the want of previous penetration. It struck the mind of
Champollion, that, if the Egyptian hieroglyphics were
ideographic, there must be exceptions, for two substantial
reasons: first, because proper names, or names of persons, do not
always admit of being expressed by any sign, that is, proper names have
not in all cases a meaning; and, second, because foreign names,
or those which have no relation to any particular spoken language, could
not be represented by conventional signs. These principles appear now to
be self-evident, and this is the basis of Champollion’s discovery. On
this he built the idea, that there must exist among the Egyptians
alphabetic characters, which should express the sounds of
the spoken language; and, in order to test this principle, he set about
the investigation of the celebrated Rosetta stone. This stone, let it be
remembered, had on it three inscriptions in different characters.
One of these inscriptions was written in Greek, and of course easily
decyphered; of the other two, one was written in hieroglyphics, and the
other in the common character of the country. The course pursued by
Champollion, was exceedingly simple, and, on that account, may be
considered masterly. In the Greek text, the name of Ptolemy occurred,
together with some names which were foreign to the Egyptian language. In
the hieroglyphic inscription, there were certain signs grouped together
and frequently repeated; and, what rendered them remarkable [Pg 342]was,
that they were enclosed in a kind of oval or ring, called a cartouche,
and maintained a relative position which seemed to correspond with the
Greek word Ptolemy. Champollion conjectured, that there must be some
connection between the signs clustered in these rings, and the name of
Ptolemy expressed by signs, which would sound like that word; and
this led him to expect, that he would get at what he was persuaded was
the truth, viz. that the hieroglyphic writing was alphabetic,
rather than exclusively ideographic. With the view of testing
this, he went into a close analysis of the group of signs which he
supposed designated the name of Ptolemy; and, as the result of this
analysis, obtained what he considered the equivalents to the letters in
the name of this prince.

In order to give our readers an idea of his process of investigation,
we will state the signs which he found in the group surrounded by a ring
on the Rosetta stone. These are the following: a square—half
circle—a flower with the stem bent—a lion in
repose—the three sides of a parallelogram—two feathers, and
a crooked line. The square, Champollion considered the equivalent of the
Greek letter Π—the half circle, Τ—the flower with the stem
bent, Ο—the lion in repose, Λ—the three sides of the
parallelogram, Μ—the feathers, Η,—and the crooked line, Σ.
This gave the name Ptolmês. At this stage of his investigations,
Champollion supposed that he had obtained seven signs of an alphabet;
but, could he have gone no further, he would have established nothing,
and his researches would have passed off with the labours of the learned
who had preceded him. To test his principle further, it was necessary,
therefore, that he should be able to get at some other monument, on
which there should be recognized some name also known by some Greek or
other connected inscription. Such a monument was found in an obelisk
discovered in the island of Philæ, and transported to London. On this
was discovered a group of characters also enclosed in a ring, and
containing more signs than the former, some of them similar. On a part
of the base which originally supported the obelisk, there was an
inscription in Greek, addressed to Ptolemy and Cleopatra.
Now, if the basis of Champollion was correct, there ought to be found in
the name Cleopatra, such signs as were common to both, and they must
perform the same functions which had been previously assigned them; and
this was precisely the result. We have this strikingly set forth in a
note of the translator, which is here presented.

“To prove that the conjectures of Champollion were true, the first
sign in the name of Cleopatra should not be found in the name of
Ptolemy, because the letter Κ does not occur in ΠΤΟΛΜΕΣ. This was
found to be the fact. The letter Κ represented by a
quadrant
.

“The second sign (a lion in repose which represents the Λ), is
exactly similar to [Pg 343]the fourth sign in the name of Ptolemy,
which, as we have already seen, represents a Λ.

“The third sign in the name of Cleopatra is a feather; which
should represent the single vowel Ε, because the two
feathers
in the name of Ptolemy represent double Epsilon,
which is equivalent to the Greek Η. Such is its import. As Greppo
remarks in a note, and as has been fully proved by subsequent
investigations of Champollion, the sign which resembles two feathers,
corresponds also with the vowels Ε, Ι, and with the
diphthongs ΑΙ, ΕΙ.

“The fourth character in the hieroglyphic cartouche of Cleopatra,
representing a flower with a stalk bent back (or a knop),
corresponds to the Ο in the Greek name of this queen. This sign
is the very same with the third character in the hieroglyphic name of
Ptolemy, which there represents Ο.

“The fifth sign is in the form of a square. It here represents
the Π, and is the same with the first sign in the
hieroglyphic name of Ptolemy.

“The sixth sign, corresponding to the Greek vowel Α in
Cleopatra, is a hawk; which of course ought not to be found in
the name of Ptolemy (as it has no letter Α), and it is not.

“The seventh character is an open hand, representing the
Τ; but this hand is not found in the hieroglyphic name of
Ptolemy, where Τ, the second letter in that name, is represented
by a half circle. The reader will see in Note G, why these two signs
stand for the same letter and sound.

“The eighth character in the name of Cleopatra, which is a
mouth
, and which here represents the Greek Ρ, should not be
found in the name of Ptolemy, and it is not.

“The ninth and last sign in the name of the queen, which represents
the vowel Α, is the hawk, the very same sign which
represents this vowel in the third syllable of the same name.

“The name of Cleopatra is terminated by two hieroglyphic symbolical
signs, the egg and the half circle, which, according to
Champollion, are always used to
denote the feminine gender.”

These were great advances, and our readers will now easily understand
the process by which the distinguished discoverer arrived at his
results. Step by step, he has thus been able to form his phonetic
alphabet
. In September, 1822, he gave an account of his discovery,
and of the principles of his system, in a letter to Mons. Dacier,
perpetual Secretary of the Academy of Inscriptions, and of Belles
Lettres. In 1824, Champollion published the first edition of his work,
“Précis du système hièroglyphique des anciens Egyptiens, ou recherches
sur les elémens premiers de cette ecriture sacrée, &c.” This is the
work which is reviewed in the number of this journal for June, 1827, p.
438. In the year 1828, a second edition of this work was called for, and
this second edition is rendered more valuable, by having appended to it
the letter to Mons. Dacier.

It is not the purpose of the present article, to go into an account
of the results of Champollion’s labours;—this has been amply done
in preceding pages of this journal. The essay of Mons. Greppo, gave us a
favourable opportunity, following the course of the author, of stating
in brief, the process by which Champollion arrived at his most valuable
and interesting conclusions. The object of the essay is to show the
advantages which this discovery gives to the study of sacred criticism.
[Pg
344]
This is the special aim of the work; and, in relation to
this, the author has observed:;—

“Some of the numerous facts, which the study of Egyptian monuments
with the aid of the hieroglyphic system has developed, will be applied
to the Holy Scriptures in some of those portions which relate to Egypt,
and they will shed much light upon these passages of the sacred annals.
We shall endeavour to accomplish this work with all the precision and
simplicity possible in researches which are necessarily scientific, but
which are of high interest on account of their tendency; and it is on
this account only, that we present them with such confidence.

“A religion whose origin is from above, is without doubt safe from
the vain attacks of a few blinded men; and, while it has been defended
for so many centuries by the most powerful minds that have shed a lustre
upon the sciences and upon literature, it scarcely needs our weak
defence. Yet it is consoling to a Christian, to witness the amazing
progress of human knowledge. The mind is ever attaining to new truths,
and is confirming the remark so often quoted from a celebrated English
Chancellor, (Bacon) a remark which applies as well to revealed as to
natural religion, of which Christianity is but the development; Leves
gustus in philosophia movere fortasse ad atheismum, sed pleniores
haustus ad religionem reducere
: i. e. superficial knowledge in
philosophy may perhaps lead to atheism, but a fundamental knowledge will
lead to religion
.”

The Essay of Mons. Greppo is composed of two parts, the first of
which is an explanation of the hieroglyphic system of Champollion; and
the second, the application of the hieroglyphic system to the
elucidation of the sacred writings. The relations of the Hebrews with
the Egyptians were such, that the history of the latter cannot be
otherwise than most intimately connected with the religion of the Bible.
In fact, there was no country in the world, foreign to Judea, whose name
is so conspicuous in the Bible, as that of Egypt; beginning at the time
of Abraham, and going down to the very Apostolic age; and it hence
follows, that he who would study in detail, the historic annals of the
Hebrews, ought to be as fully acquainted with those of ancient Egypt, as
the largest means will allow. In carrying out his intention, M. Greppo
has gone deeply into philological, historical, chronological, and
geographical considerations. By making the “précis” of Champollion the
basis of his argument, and bringing in to his assistance the labours of
the elder Champollion, called by way of distinction Champollion Figeac,
from the place of his residence; he has investigated the history of the
Pharaohs, as connected with the accounts given in the books of Genesis
and Exodus, and the later historical writings.

In the fourth chapter of the second part, there is an interesting
discussion relative to the difficulty of reconciling the position taken
in Exodus, as to the perishing of Pharaoh, with the conclusions drawn
from the investigations of Champollion. The last Pharaoh of the Exodus,
is ascertained to be the King Amenophis Ramses. According to
Manetho, he reigned twenty years; viz. from 1493 B. C., to 1473 B. C.,
so calculated also by Champollion Figeac. But the departure of the
children of [Pg
345]
Israel took place about the year 1491 B. C., consequently
in the second or third year of this Prince. If this Prince perished in
the Red Sea, how can this be reconciled with the fact, that Manetho
states him to have reigned twenty years, and this is confirmed by the
calculations of the elder Champollion. M. Greppo goes into an
interesting discussion, to prove that the text of the Book of Exodus
does not state that Pharaoh perished in the Red Sea. His examination of
the sacred text will be interesting to many of our readers:

“Scripture does not compel us to believe that the Pharaoh with whom
we now are concerned, participated in the fatal calamity of his army.
And first, Moses says not a word to this effect, when he relates the
miracle performed by the Lord in favour of his people. He informs us, it
is true, that Pharaoh marched in pursuit of the children of Israel;
And he made ready his chariot and took his people with him. And he
took six hundred chosen chariots, and all the chariots of Egypt, and
captains over every one of them. And the Lord hardened the heart of
Pharaoh king of Egypt, and he pursued after the children of Israel

(Exod. xiv. 6-8.). A little further on he says; And the Egyptians
pursued, and went in after them, into the midst of the sea, even all
Pharaoh’s horses, his chariots and his horsemen
(v. 23.). Finally he
adds; And the waters returned, and covered the chariots, and the
horsemen, and all the host of Pharaoh that came into the sea after them;
there remained not so much as one of them
(v. 28). Such are the
principal features of the narrative which Moses gives of this Egyptian
expedition, and of the terrible event in which it resulted. But in the
circumstantial account of this disaster, he does not name Pharaoh
personally except when he speaks of his departure. Now if the persecutor
of Israel entered the Red Sea with his army, and was swallowed up with
it, is it probable that the chief and legislator of the Hebrews would
have been silent about such a circumstance as the tragical death of this
prince? an event more important, perhaps, than even the destruction of
his army, and surely very proper as a striking illustration both of the
protection which God extended to his people, and of the chastisements
his justice inflicted upon the impious. And further; to strengthen the
faith of this people when in a state of distrust and murmuring, Moses
often recounts to them their deliverance from Egyptian bondage, their
passage through the Red Sea, and the other miracles which God had
wrought for them; and on all these occasions, when the allusion to the
death of an oppressive prince would have been so natural, he conveys no
such idea.

“The circumstance related by Moses, that no one escaped, there
remained not so much as one of them
, proves nothing relative to the
supposed disaster of Pharaoh. It refers to those who followed the
Hebrews into the sea, among whom Moses does not enumerate this prince.
We remark also, that the sacred historian seems designedly to leave room
for making exceptions to the general disaster, by the precise manner in
which he announces, that the waters covered the chariots and the
horsemen, and all the host of Pharaoh that came into the sea after
them
; this literally signifies that the waters covered only the
chariots and horsemen which entered into the sea, and leaves us to infer
that all did not enter. The incidental expression in verse 28, that
came into the sea after them
, seems then to modify the more general
expression in verse 23, even all, and authorizes us to understand
it with some latitude, rather than to restrain it to its rigorous sense.
All these circumstances of the narrative accord with the presumption,
not only that Pharaoh did not enter into the Red Sea, but perhaps even
that some of his infantry, if he possessed any, did not enter; and at
least, that this is true of some principal chiefs who surrounded him,
and who formed what we now call a body of staff-officers.

“In relating the miraculous passage of the Red Sea, the book of
Wisdom, which describes so often and in such an admirable manner,
the wonders of the Lord in conducting his people, and which celebrates
the illustrious men whom he made his instruments, makes no mention
either of Pharaoh or of his tragical [Pg 346]death. It is limited to
the remark, that in his wisdom he precipitated the enemies of Israel
into the sea (Wisdom of Solomon, x. 19).”

Mons. Greppo appears to be aware, that there are difficulties
attending his interpretation, arising out of the apparent positive
declarations contained in other parts of the sacred volume: for
instance, in Ex. ch. xv. 19th v., as also Ps. cxxxvi. 15th v. His answer
to these objections, and some collateral arguments by which he
endeavours to support his theory, are too long to be here introduced.
Professor Stuart, in a learned note, part of which we feel compelled to
quote, dissents from the reasoning of Mons. Greppo, and takes the safer
course of leaving to further discoveries, what, in the present state of
the researches, may not yet be considered as definitely settled.

“The modesty and ingenuity which M. Greppo has exhibited, in the
discussion which gives occasion to the present note, certainly entitle
him to much credit and approbation. Still it seems to me very doubtful,
whether the exegesis in question can be supported. When God says, in
Exod. xiv. 17, ‘I will get me honour upon Pharaoh, and upon all his
host, upon his chariots, and upon his horsemen;” and when he repeats the
same sentiment in Exod. xiv. 18; the natural inference seems to be, that
the fate of Pharaoh would be the same as that of his host, his chariots
and his horsemen. Accordingly, in Exod. xiv. 23, it is said, ‘The
Egyptians pursued, and went in after them [the Hebrews] into the midst
of the sea, every horse of Pharaoh and his chariot, and his
horsemen, into the midst of the sea.’ It is true, indeed, that כל
סוס פרעה
ורכבו
may mean, all the horses of
Pharaoh and all his chariots
, viz. all those which belonged to his
army. But is it not the natural implication here, that Pharaoh was at
the head of his army, and led them on? And when in Exod. xiv. 28 it is
said, that of all the host of Pharaoh that came into the sea after the
Israelites, there remained not so much as one of them, is not the
natural implication here, that Pharaoh at the head of his army went into
the sea, and perished along with them?

“In the triumphal song of Moses and the Hebrews, recorded in Exod.
xv., the implication in verses 4, 19, seems most naturally to be, that
Pharaoh was joined with his army in the destruction to which they were
subjected.

“But still more does this appear, in Ps. cvi. 11, where it is said,
‘The waters covered their enemies [the Egyptians]; there was not one
of them left
.’ How could this well be said, if Pharaoh himself, the
most powerful, unrelenting, and bitter enemy which they had, was still
preserved alive, and permitted afterwards to make new conquests over his
southern neighbours? This passage M. Greppo has entirely overlooked.

“In regard to Ps. cxxxvi. 15, the exegesis of our author is
ingenious; but it will not bear the test of criticism. For example; in
Exod. xiv. 27, it is said, ‘And the Lord overthrew the Egyptians, in the midst of the
sea; where the Hebrew word answering to overthrew is וינער from נער. But in Ps. cxxxvi. 15, the very
same word is applied to Pharaoh and his host; ‘And he overthrew
(ונער) Pharaoh and his
host
. In both cases (which are exactly the same), the word נער properly means, he drave
into
(hineintreiben, Gesenius.) Now if the Lord drave
the Egyptians into the midst of the sea, and also drave
Pharaoh and his host into the midst of the sea, we cannot well
see how Pharaoh escaped drowning. Accordingly, we find that such an
occurrence is plainly recognized by Nehemiah ix. 10, 11, when, after
mentioning Pharaoh, his servants, and his people, this distinguished man
speaks of the ‘persecutors of the Hebrews as thrown into the deep, as a
stone in the mighty waters.’

“As to any difficulties respecting chronology in this case,
about which M. Greppo seems to be principally solicitous, it may be
remarked, that the subject of ancient Egyptian chronology is yet very
far from being so much cleared up, as to throw any real embarrassments
in the way of Scripture facts. More light [Pg 347]will give more
satisfaction—as in the famous case of the zodiacs, so finely
described in the last chapter of M. Greppo’s book.”

The fifth and sixth chapters of the work of Mons. Greppo, are devoted
to the examination of the history of the Pharaohs mentioned in the
sacred writings, down to the time of Solomon, and of the other kings of
Egypt, who are distinguished by proper names.

The seventh chapter is devoted to the chronology of Manetho, the
official historiographer of Egypt; and several questions are discussed,
which relate to the difference between him, and the scripture
chronologers. In the close of the chapter, the author draws two
conclusions, which we are disposed to think entirely justified by the
present state of the investigations—these conclusions will be
better stated in the author’s own words:

“From the remarks which we have communicated
to our readers, we infer that there is no foundation for that fear about
the advance of Egyptian studies, which the religious zeal of some
estimable men has led them to cherish; neither is there any occasion to
distrust the data transmitted by the historian of the Pharaohs.
Nothing can authorize such a distrust. On the other hand, every thing
conspires to prove, at the present time, that the new discoveries and
their application to chronology, will disclose more and more the truth
and exactness of the historic facts in Scripture. We believe that men
are too apt to form a judgment of systems when they hardly understand
them; and perhaps they are too prone to forget that if true faith is
timorous, it is not distrustful, like the pride which is connected with
the vain theories of men; because it views the basis, upon which the
august edifice of divine revelation reposes, as immoveable. Inspired
with this thought, we have adopted, from entire conviction, all the
satisfactory results elicited by the labours of the Champollions; and we
wait, with impatience and with confidence, the new developments which
they promise, persuaded beforehand that revealed religion cannot but
gain from them.”

In the eighth chapter of his essay, Mons. Greppo applies the
discoveries of Champollion to the Egyptian geography, so far as the
scriptures are concerned. If it be true, as he conceives, that the city
of Rameses occupied the site of the Arabian city, now called Ramsis,
there seems to be an irreconcilable difference with some of the
scripture relations; for this city, Ramsis, is on the western
side of the river Nile, and not less than one hundred and fifty miles
from that position on the Red Sea, where it is believed that the passage
of the Israelites was made. However the question may eventually be
settled, it appears to us, that this location can in no sense consist
with the text of the sacred writings; for, in the first place, it would
have required that the Israelites should have crossed the Nile, on their
journey towards Palestine. Of this there is no account; neither had they
any means; and it would have required a miraculous interposition to
enable them so to do. But, second, the sacred text informs us, that, at
the close of the second day after the departure of the Israelites from
Rameses, they reached the borders [Pg 348]of the Red Sea. It is
utterly impossible that they could have crossed the Nile, and travelled
one hundred and fifty miles in two days. It is beyond all rational
calculation to suppose that they could have travelled at the rate of
more than twenty miles per day, and, consequently, we must look for the
situation of Rameses at a distance not greater certainly than forty
miles from the Red Sea, and on the eastern side of the Nile. If the
integrity of the sacred writings is to be preserved, the idea that the
Rameses of the Bible, and the Ramsis of the Arabians are identical, must
be abandoned, or, at any rate, not adopted until something far more
conclusive shall be found, than has yet been given. Professor Stuart, in
a note which we have above condensed, refers to a previous work of his,
where this subject is more largely discussed, and which, as it may not
be familiar to the mass of our readers, being a work distinctly
connected with theological studies, will be referred to for a moment. In
this work, the Professor enters largely into the examination of the
location of Rameses, which stands also for Goshen. He considers, and
with vast power of argument and illustration, that the royal residence
of the Pharaohs at the time of Joseph and Moses, was at Zoan, and not
Memphis, as has been generally supposed. There can be no question, that
Zoan was one of the oldest cities of Lower Egypt, and situated on the
eastern shore of the second or Tanitic mouth of the Nile, and this was
but a little distance from the Pelusiac or eastern branch, on which the
residence of the Israelites has generally been supposed to have been. It
was an extensive city, and its ruins in the time of the French
expedition, occupied an extensive country. Champollion has remarked that
the word signifies, “mollis, delicatus, jucundus,” which would make Zoan
to mean Pleasant town. The reader will be interested to observe, that,
in Ps. lxxviii, the writer alludes to Zoan, as the scenes of the
miracles of Moses: also Ps. v. verse 12, and also lxxii. verse 43. In
the time of Isaiah, it is quite clear, that Zoan was the place where the
Egyptian court resided, at least for a time. See ch. xix. verse 11.
There are objections to this view of Professor Stuart, but not stronger,
than to others; and the most probable is, that the kings of Egypt had
different places of royal residence, as is still customary. We know that
Cyrus, after conquering Babylon, spent part of his time there, and part
at the capital of his native country.

Contrary, therefore, to the opinion of Mons. Greppo, Professor Stuart
considers Rameses or Goshen, to be decidedly on the eastern side of the
Nile, and this is rendered more certain, if, as the Professor has
attempted to prove, Zoan was frequently a royal residence of the
Pharaohs. The opinion taken by Mons. Greppo, that Rameses was on the
western side of the [Pg 349]Nile, in what may be called Lower
Eastern Egypt, without the delta, is refuted in Michaelis Supp. ad
Lex.
Hebraica, p. 397. We make no pretentions to the ability of
settling these disputed points, and consider it perfectly safe to abide
by the present general idea, as to the location of Rameses, especially
as there is nothing yet in the shape of positive testimony against it.
The reader who is particularly interested in Biblical Archæology, will be highly
gratified by consulting the work of Dr. Stuart, entitled—”Course
of Hebrew Study.” In the ninth chapter of his Essay, the author has made
use of the discoveries of Champollion, to defeat certain objections to
the genuineness and authenticity of the Books of Moses, which were
started by Voltaire and others of his time. The high antiquity of the
Pentateuch was doubted, on the ground that writing in the common
language could not then have been known. Champollion has decyphered a
manuscript, which contains an act of the fifth year of the reign of
Thouthmosis III. This prince governed Egypt at a time when Joseph was
carried there as a slave, and this was at least two hundred years
previous to the time in which Moses wrote the Pentateuch.

An objection to the truth of the history of the Pentateuch, also,
arose out of the circumstance, that the magnificence and excellence of
the work said there to have been put upon the ark and its furniture in
the wilderness, was utterly beyond the state of the arts at the time
challenged in the relation. The discoveries of Champollion have
overthrown a supposition which had been held almost indisputable,
viz:—that the arts of Egypt had been indebted for their progress,
to the influence of those from Greece under the domination of the Lagidæ
kings. He has established the contrary, beyond doubt, and has proved
that the most brilliant epoch of the arts in Egypt, was under a dynasty
contemporary with the sojourn of the Israelites in Egypt.

The only remaining objection which is noticed by the author, is one
which he considers as capable of receiving the same satisfactory
solution.

It is objected that the name of Sesostris is not mentioned in
Scripture, nor any feature of his history recognised. To this, the
investigations made by Champollion and the calculations of Champollion
Figeac are made to answer. The commencement of the reign of Sesostris is
fixed by these, in the year 1473, B. C.; consequently, this was
seventeen or eighteen years after the departure of the Israelites from
Egypt. While they were wandering in the wilderness, Sesostris overran
Palestine, which was then in possession of its primitive inhabitants,
and before the Israelites reached that land, the expedition of Sesostris
had long passed, for Diodorus tells us, that it terminated in the ninth
year of his reign. The silence of Scripture, therefore, as to Sesostris,
[Pg
350]
is in no wise remarkable, as the people of Israel had no
connexion with him, either as friend or foe.

The tenth chapter of the Essay, relates to the Egyptian Zodiacs. To
our readers who have examined the subject at all, the history of these
is now familiar,—the curious may turn to the Number of this
Journal for December, 1827, p. 520, where will be found an ample
description.

We have thus given a detailed description of the Essay of Mons.
Greppo, and we cannot resist the pleasure before we close, of presenting
the few remarks with which he concludes his discussion.

“We come now to the conclusion of our undertaking. With the aid of
the new discoveries in Egypt, we think that we have shed some light upon
various passages of the sacred annals, and that we have resolved, in a
more satisfactory manner, certain difficulties which were opposed to
their veracity. We have attentively examined the resources which the
writings and monuments of Egypt afford, in the interpretation and
defence of a religion, whose lot has been, in all ages, to meet with
enemies, when it should have found only admirers and disciples. But the
researches to which we have been attending very naturally, as we think,
give rise to a thought consoling to the Christian.

“Providence, whose operations are so sensibly exhibited in the whole
physical constitution of the world, has not abandoned to chance the
government of the moral or intellectual world. By means often
imperceptible even to the eye of the man of observation, and which seem reserved for his own
secret counsel, God directs second causes, gives them efficiency
according to his will, and makes them serve, sometimes even contrary to
their natural tendency, to accomplish his own immutable decrees, and to
propagate and support that religion which he has revealed to us. It is
in this way that, consistently with his own will, he delays or
accelerates the march of human intellect; that he gives it a direction
such as he pleases; that he causes discoveries to spring up in their
time, as fruits ripen in their season; and that the revolutions which
renew the sciences, like those which change the face of empires, enter
into the plan which he traced out for himself from all eternity.

“Does not this sublime truth, which affords an inexhaustible subject
of meditation to the well instructed and reflecting man, but which needs
for its development the pen of a Bossuet,—does it not apply with
great force to the subject that we have been considering?

“Since the studies of our age have been principally directed to the
natural sciences, which the irreligious levity of the last age had so
strangely abused to the prejudice of religion, we have seen the most
admirable discoveries confirming the physical history of the primitive
world, as it is given by Moses. It is sufficient to cite in proof of
this fact, the geological labours of our celebrated Cuvier. Now that
historic researches are pursued with a greater activity than ever
before, and the monuments of antiquity illustrated by a judicious and
promising criticism, Providence has also ordered, that the writings of
ancient Egypt should in turn confirm the historic facts of the holy
books: facts against which a systematic erudition had furnished
infidelity with so many objections that were unceasingly repeated,
though they had been a thousand times refuted. We cannot doubt that
human knowledge, as it becomes more and more disengaged from the spirit
of system, and pursues truth as its only aim, will still attain, as it
advances, to other analogous results.

“Thus, as has been often said, revealed religion has no greater foe
than ignorance. Far from making it her ally, as men who deny the
testimony of all ages have not blushed to assert, she cannot but glory
in the advance of the sciences. She has always favoured them, and it is
chiefly owing to her influence, that they have been preserved in the
midst of the barbarism from which she has rescued us. Thus the progress
of true science, the progress of light (to use a legitimate [Pg
351]
though often abused expression,) far from being at
variance with revealed religion, as its enemies have
represented,—far from being dangerous to it, as some of its
disciples have appeared to fear, tends, on the contrary, each day to
strengthen its claims upon all enlightened minds, and to prove, in
opposition to the pride of false science, that this divine religion,
confirmed as it is by all the truths to which the human mind attains,
is the truth of the Lord which endureth forever.”

We have ventured upon this protracted notice of the Essay of Mons.
Greppo, because the subject itself is one of gratifying pursuit even to
the mere scholar, but still more because it is vitally connected with
the evidences of revealed religion in which we hope that none of our
readers are altogether uninterested. There is in the Essay, no question
as to any of the minor points of the Christian faith,—there is
here nothing but what all may peruse with satisfaction. The question is
one entirely connected with evidence; and science and literature are
pressed fairly into the service of truth. The work is peculiarly
valuable, because it is the only work connected with the labours of
Champollion which has been made to wear an English dress. The works of
both the Champollions are locked up in a foreign language from most of
our readers; and we fear that the time will not soon come when there
will be sufficient encouragement either to translate or publish in this
country the splendid volumes of these brothers, who are, by their
discoveries, raising up for France the gratitude of the world. Until
there shall be liberality enough in our republic of letters, to enable
us to possess these works, with all their riches of illustration, and
thus have ancient Egypt brought to the inspection of American eyes, we
would recommend the work of Mons. Greppo, as the best, and indeed only
substitute at present known, always excepting the pages of our own
journal.

It is needless to say, that the merits of the translation cannot be
questioned, after the testimonials furnished by the learned Dr. Stuart;
without the advantage of comparing it with the original, we can speak of
its excellence relatively, for the style is clear, concise, and
classical.


[Pg
352]
Art. IV.—IRON.

1.—Memorial of the workers in iron of Philadelphia, praying
that the present duty on imported iron may be repealed, &c.

2.—Report of the Select Committee (of the Senate of the
United States,) to whom was referred “the petition of upwards of three
hundred mechanics, Citizens of the City and County of Philadelphia,
employed in the various branches of the manufacture of iron,” and also,
the petition of the “Journeymen blacksmiths of the City and County of
Philadelphia, employed in manufacturing anchors and chain
cables.”

3.—Report of the minority of the Select Committee on certain
memorials to reduce the duty on imported iron.

4.—Remarks of the majority of the Select Committee on the
blacksmiths’ petition in reply to the arguments of the minority.

5.—Manuel de la Metallurgie de fer par C. I. B. Karsten, traduit de l’Allemand, par
F. I. Culman, seconde edition, entierement
refondue, &c.
3 vols. 8vo. pp. 504, 496, & 488. Mme. Thirl:
1830: Metz.

6.—Voyage Metallurgique en Angleterre, par MM. Dufrenoy et Elie de
Beaumont
. 1 vol. 8vo. pp. 572. Bachelier: Paris: 1827.

The discussion contained in the petitions and legislative
reports which we have prefixed to this article, is one of the most
powerful interest, not merely to those concerned in the manufacture of
iron, and the articles of commerce of which it is the material, but to
the whole community. Iron, if the cheapest and most abundant, is
intrinsically the most valuable of the metals. It may supersede, and
gradually has, in its applications, superseded the greater part of the
rest, and has taken the place of wood and stone in a great variety of
mechanical structures; it is indispensable in the modern arts of the
attack and defence of nations; and its possession is the distinctive
difference between civilized man and the savage. Well was it said to
Crœsus exhibiting his golden treasures, that he who possessed more
iron, would speedily make himself master of them, and the truth of the
maxim was even more powerfully verified, when the accumulated riches of
the Aztecs and Incas were acquired at the cost of a few pounds of Toledo
steel.

When we compare the state of manners and arts of the Mexicans and
Peruvians with that of their Spanish conquerors, we are almost compelled
to admit, that the possession of iron was [Pg 353]perhaps the only real
superiority in civilization which the latter possessed. Gunpowder played
but a small part in the contests where handfuls of men routed myriads;
the courage of the Indian warrior is not less firm than that of the
descendant of the Goths.

The sciences and arts which are now the boast of European
civilization, were then but awakening from a slumber of ages; in the
latter, the workmanship of Europe was in many instances inferior to that
of the new world, and in the former, to take as an instance that which
occupies the highest place, astronomy, the civil year of the Mexicans
was intercalated and restored to the solar, by a process more perfect
than that we even now employ; and the latter was not introduced into
Europe until half a century after the throne of Montezuma fell. The
bloody human sacrifices which excited to such a degree the abhorrence of
the conquerors, were not greater marks of savage cruelty, than were
their own auto da fes, and the tortures inflicted on Guatemozin.
Yet if not superior in bravery, in the arts, the sciences, and the more
distinctive attribute of civilization, humanity, the possession of iron
was sufficient to ensure the triumph of the Spaniards.

Of all the metallurgic arts, that by which iron is prepared from its
ores, demands the greatest degree of practical skill, and is the most
difficult to bring to perfection. Although ages have elapsed since it
first became an object of human industry, its manipulation and
preparation are yet receiving improvements, while those of the other
ancient metals appear hardly susceptible of modification or advancement.
Copper and its alloys, tin, lead, and mercury, were as well and as
cheaply prepared by the ancients as by the moderns; and the reduction of
the precious metals has received no important change, since the process
of amalgamation was first applied to them,—while the preparation
of iron is daily improving under our eyes, and its cost diminishing. It
may even be doubted whether the iron we first find mentioned in history,
was an artificial product, and not obtained from the rare masses in
which it is found existing in the native state, and which are supposed
to be of meteoric origin.

The original use of iron is ascribed in the sacred writings to Tubal
Cain, who lived before the flood;—but we have no proof that he did
not employ a native iron of this description. Be this as it may, the
united testimony of antiquity exhibits to us an alloy of copper used for
the purposes to which we apply iron, and the latter metal as
comparatively scarce, and of high value. The qualities of iron were
known and appreciated, but the art of preparing it was not understood.
The reason is obvious; those ores of iron which have an external
metallic aspect, are difficult of fusion and reduction, those which are
more readily converted, are dull, earthy in their appearance, and
unlikely to [Pg
354]
attract attention,—while gold and silver manifest
in their native state their brilliant characters, and the ores of copper
and lead exhibit a higher degree of lustre than the metals
themselves.

If, then, history does not show us the ancient nations employing iron
for their arms and instruments, it is because they were unable to
prepare it. Even in the middle ages, we find copper in use for arms,
because the nations that employed it, could not conquer the difficulties
that attend the preparation of iron.

The books of Moses, however, show that iron was known at that era to
the Egyptians, and the distinction he draws between it and brass, seems
in favour of our view of the origin of that which was then employed. The
stones of the promised land were to be iron, but brass was to be dug
from the hills. Twelve hundred years before Christ, if we receive the
testimony of Homer, who, if he be rejected as an historian, must still
be admitted as a faithful painter of manners. The Greeks used an alloy
of copper for their arms, but were unacquainted with iron, which they
estimated of much higher value.

Αυταρ
Πηλειδης
θηχεν σολον
αυτοχοωνον,

Ον πριν
μεν ριεπτασε
μεγα σφενος
Ηεβιωνος.

Αλλα ητοι
τον επεφνε
ποδαρχος
διος
Αχιλλευς,

Τον δ αγετ
εννηεσσι συν
αλλοισιν
χτεατεσσιν.

Στη δ
ορθος χαι
μυθον εν
Αργειοισιν
εειπεν.

Ορνυσθ, οι
χαι τουτου α
εθλου
πειρησησθε!

&c.      Iliad, Book
XXIII, 1. 826.

From this passage and the following lines, we learn the two-fold
fact: 1. That a mass of iron of no greater weight than could be used as
a quoit, by a man of great strength, was esteemed of sufficient value to
be cited as an important article in the spoil of a prince: 2. That its
use was confined to agricultural purposes, and not applied in war. Hence
the more valuable form steel, and its tempering, were unknown.

Five hundred years later, Lycurgus attempted to introduce the use of
iron, as money, into Sparta. The reasons usually cited for this act, do
not seem to apply; and we ought not to accuse that lawgiver of the want
of knowledge in political economy that is usually ascribed to him, in
endeavouring to give a base material a conventional value to which it
was not entitled. The iron was still, probably, more costly than brass,
and the error of Lycurgus did not lie in ascribing to it a value beyond
its actual cost, but in depriving it of the property of convertibility
to useful purposes, which was necessary to maintain its price.

In the construction of the temple by Solomon, 130 years before the
æra of Lycurgus, iron was employed in great abundance; and, from the
cost lavished upon that building, we are [Pg 355]almost warranted in
considering it as still bearing a high value, even in that country, so
far in the advance of Greece in the arts of civilized life.

Herodotus ascribes the discovery of the art of welding iron to
Glaucus of Chio, 430 years before the Christian æra. But, before this
period, the Greeks had carried the art of working it into Italy, Spain,
and Africa; and the famous mines of Elba, that are still worked, were
probably opened 700 years before Christ.

It is from the working of these mines that we are to date the
introduction of iron in such abundance as to reduce its price, bring it
into general use, and finally cause it to supersede wholly the alloys of
copper. This ore is of extremely easy reduction, by processes of great
simplicity, which furnish iron of excellent quality, and are, as we
shall hereafter see, still in use. We cannot, indeed, infer with
certainty, that these were the processes used by the ancients; but their
simplicity is a strong argument in favour of their remote invention.

Steel seems to have been known as different in qualities from iron,
at a very remote period; that is to say, it was understood that there
were varieties of iron, which when tempered, became hard, whilst others
remained soft. The intentional preparation of it, as a different
species, seems to have taken its rise among the Chalybes, a people of
Asia Minor, and it was afterwards obtained from Noricum. We still find
in the latter country, (Styria,) an ore that furnishes steel, by
processes as simple as those by which the iron is obtained from the ore
of Elba, and hence can form some tolerable guess at the mode in which
the steel of the ancients was obtained.

The third form in which we find iron as an article of commerce,
namely, cast iron, is of far more recent origin. It has been traced to
the banks of the Rhine, and it is certain that stove-plates were cast in
Alsace in A. D. 1494. From this epoch, then, dates the great improvement
in the preparation of iron, by which its price has been so far lessened,
as to render it available for innumerable purposes, from which a small
addition to its present cost would exclude it.


Iron, as may be inferred from what has been stated, is known in
commerce in three distinct forms—wrought or bar iron, cast or pig
iron, and steel. The received chemical theory on this subject is, that
the former is metallic iron nearly in a pure state, and that the two
latter are chemical compounds of iron and carbon. How far this is true
will be examined in the sequel.

When wrought iron is nearly pure, it has, when in bars of [Pg 356]not
less than an inch square, or plates not less than half an inch in
thickness, a granular structure. From the appearance of these grains, an
estimate may be had of its quality; grains without any determinate form,
neither presenting, when broken, crystalline faces, nor arranging
themselves in plates; and which, in the fracture of the bar, exhibit
points, and even filaments, manifesting the resistance they have
opposed, are marks of the best quality. If, when broken, a crystalline
character is exhibited, the quality is bad, and will, according to a
disposition difficult to describe in words, either break under the
hammer when heated, or be subject to rupture when cold. These two
opposite defects are, in the language of our manufacturers, called red
and cold short, or shear. The former fault unfits it for being easily
worked; the latter destroys its most important usefulness. When the
manufacture has been badly conducted, crystals will appear mingled with
tenacious grains, and a want of uniform consistence will render it unfit
for being cut and worked by the file. Iron of the latter character may,
notwithstanding, possess great tenacity.

In still smaller bars, good iron, in breaking, exhibits filaments
like those shown by a piece of green wood when broken across; this is
technically called nerve; and as it does not show itself in larger bars,
it has been supposed that it is the result of the process of drawing out
the bars. This is partially true, although the iron that presents a
crystalline structure will not acquire nerve, however frequently
hammered. To obtain nerve in larger masses, it is necessary to form them
of bundles of smaller bars, a process known under the name of
faggoting.


Iron contains in its ores many impurities of different natures,
according to circumstances, and is in its preparation exposed to several
others; by these its quality is frequently much affected. Its valuable
ores all contain the iron in the state of oxide. The oxygen, it is
generally believed, is not wholly separated even in the best malleable
iron, but enough still remains to impair in some degree its good
qualities. In its manufacture it is exposed to the action of carbon,
with which it is capable of combining. Much iron appears to contain some
of the combinations of this sort, existing in the form of hard
particles, technically known by the name of pins.

Of inflammable bodies, sulphur and phosphorus are frequently
contained in the ores of iron; and when pit coal is used in the
manufacture, the former substance is present, and may influence the
product. The union of sulphur, in very small quantities, with the iron,
creates the defect called red short, although it is probably not the
only substance that produces the same fault; [Pg 357]but when it is caused
by sulphur, all the good properties of the iron are impaired, which is
not always the case when it arises from other impurities. The defect of
breaking when cold, has been attributed to the presence of phosphorus by
high authority. There are, however, ores in this country, containing a
phosphate of lime, which yield iron of excellent quality.

A mixture of sulphur and carbon deprives iron of its property of
welding, and in the highest proportion gives the opposite defects of
being both red and cold short.

Ores of iron contain the earths, silex, alumina, lime, and magnesia.
With the bases of these earths the metal is capable of forming alloys;
those of the three first are often thus combined. Silicium has been
discovered combined with iron to the extent of 3-1/2 per cent. It has
been found to render this metal harder, more brittle, and more similar
in structure to steel; so small a quantity as 1/2 per cent. has been
sufficient to render it liable to break when cold; and it appears
probable, that by far the greater part of the cold short irons owe this
fault to the presence of silex, rather than to that of phosphorus. Iron
obtained from the ores by means of coal, is, under circumstances of
equality in other respects, more likely to be combined with silicium
than when made with charcoal. Karsten infers that a combination with
aluminum produces similar defects, and denies the assertion of Faraday,
that the good qualities of a steel brought from India are due to an
alloy with this earthy base. A combination with the metallic base of
lime, lessens the property that iron possesses of being welded, but does
not render it more liable to fracture, either under the hammer or when
cold.

Of the metals proper:

Copper renders iron red short.

Lead combines with iron with great difficulty, so that its presence
in the ores can hardly be considered dangerous, but when the combination
is formed, the iron is both liable to break when red-hot and when
cold.

A very small quantity of tin destroys the strength of iron in a great
degree when cold, but still leaves it fit to be forged.

Wrought iron does not appear to unite with zinc, but its presence in
the ores is injurious to the manufacture, for a reason that will be
hereafter stated.

Antimony renders iron cold short, the alloy is harder and more
fusible, and approaches in character to cast iron.

Arsenic produces a great waste in the manufacture of iron, and when
alloyed with it, injures or destroys its capability of being welded.

Ores which contain titanium, according to universal experience in
this country, give an iron inclining to the defect of red short, but
possessing the highest degree of tenacity. Such are several [Pg 358]of
the ores of the northern part of New-Jersey, and of Orange County,
New-York.

Manganese in small quantities renders iron harder, but injures none
of its good qualities. Many of our ores contain manganese, but when
carefully manufactured the iron appears to contain but an insensible
trace of this metal.

Nickel unites with iron in all proportions, and gives a soft and
tenacious alloy; no good property of the iron appears to be injured by
it. United with steel it gives an alloy of excellent quality. Nickel is
rare among the ores of iron that are not of meteoric origin. But native
malleable iron is occasionally found in large masses alloyed with this
metal, and its extrinsic source has been fully ascertained. The masses
are sometimes of very great size; we have already expressed our opinion
that the iron that first came into use was derived from this source, and
had been employed for ages before the processes for preparing it from
its more abundant ores were discovered.

Cast iron is distinguished into two varieties, which are obviously
distinct in character, the grey and the white; a mixture of the two
forms that which is called mottled. It is generally believed, and
usually stated in the books, that both of these are combinations of iron
with carbon, and that their difference in appearance and quality grows
out of the difference in the proportions in which the two substances
exist; that the grey iron contains the greatest dose of carbon, and the
white the least. There is, as will be seen, good reason to question the
latter part of this statement.

The grey iron requires the greatest degree of heat for its fusion, is
more fluid when melted, is softest, best fitted for castings which
require to be turned or filed, and for those that must be thin; the
white iron is very hard and brittle; the greatest degree of strength and
tenacity is due to the mixture, or mottled iron, and to that variety of
mottled in which the grey rather predominates.

The different varieties are readily convertible, for the grey iron
when melted and suddenly cooled becomes white, when cooled more slowly
is mottled, and when carefully preserved from rapid loss of heat,
retains its colour. On the other hand, experiments on a small scale have
shown, that white cast iron, subjected to a heat equal to that at which
the grey melts, and allowed to cool slowly, becomes grey. Hence their
difference can hardly be ascribed to chemical constitution. Neither can
the presence of a greater or less quantity of oxygen, as is sometimes
supposed, produce the difference, for under circumstances in all other
respects similar, except the rate at which they are cooled, iron of the
three different varieties may be produced, We therefore feel warranted
in rejecting the usual theory, particularly [Pg 359]as the reception of it
has rather impeded than advanced the manufacture of iron.

The theory of Karsten is far more consistent with the facts, and is
directly applicable to the practical purposes of the iron master. We
shall endeavour to give a succinct exposition of this theory,
introducing all that is necessary for its full explanation.

The ores of iron, which are all oxides, are reduced by exposing them
to the action of carbonaceous matter, at a high temperature. The carbon
first separates the oxygen from the ore, which becomes metallic, but as
it has for the carbon a high affinity, that substance tends to combine
with it. The iron combined with carbon is rendered far more fusible than
it is when pure, and thus readily melts; when the heat of the furnace is
little more than is sufficient for effecting this fusion, the two
substances are uniformly mixed, and probably form a compound analogous
to a metallic alloy; this is the white cast iron. When the compound is
exposed to a heat higher than is sufficient to melt it, a separation
appears again to take place, the carbon tending to assume in part the
form of plumbago, the iron to retain no more of carbon than is
sufficient to keep it liquid at the new temperature, and thus passes
from the state of cast iron to that of steel, and finally approaches to
that of malleable iron. If the cooling take place slowly, the carbon,
obeying its own law of crystallization, arranges itself in thin plates,
and the iron, consolidating afterwards, fills up all the interstices
with grains or imperfect crystals; and thus the mass assumes a dark grey
colour, partly owing to the natural colour of the iron, but in a greater
degree to the plumbago. When the cooling is rapid, the carbon still
disseminated throughout the mass, does not crystallize separately, but
the two substances again form an uniform compound.

Thus, according to the theory, there is no essential difference in
the proportion of carbon between grey and white cast iron, but the
former is a mechanical mixture of crystals of carbon, nearly pure, with
iron containing a less proportion of carbon than the white, while the
white iron is a homogeneous alloy of carbon and iron.

Upon this theory may be explained all the facts which have been found
wholly irreconcilable with the other.

1. The more intense the heat of the furnace, the deeper the colour,
and consequently the higher quality of the cast iron.

2. The changes that take place from grey to white cast iron, merely
by difference in the rate of cooling.

3. The reconversion of the white variety into grey, by simply heating
it above its melting temperature, and allowing it to cool gradually.

4. The formation of imperfect crystals of plumbago (kish) on
the surface of grey iron.

[Pg 360]5. The approach to
malleability of the grey iron, which is utterly irreconcilable with its
being a homogeneous compound, more charged with carbon than the
white.

The basis of white cast iron, appears to be a definite chemical
compound, of two atoms of iron to one of carbon, and is therefore
analogous in its chemical constitution to carburet of hydrogen and
carburet of sulphur, but like all metallic alloys it is capable of
containing an excess of one of the substances in a state of mixture
during fusion, and which does not separate on rapid cooling. The iron
alone is found in excess in this substance.

Steel appears to contain but half the quantity of carbon in its
chemical proportions that white cast iron does, but, like it, is
susceptible of a variety of mixtures; if the proportion of carbon amount
to three per cent., it loses the property of malleability, if the
proportion fall as low as one per cent. it can no longer be tempered,
and is identical with the harder varieties of bar-iron. As the carburets
of iron, whether in the form of pig or of steel, may be considered as
alloys, if they be presented to other metals, the results must
necessarily be different from what occurs when pure iron is exposed to
the same substance. The union that may take place in the one instance
may not occur in the other. It may often happen, that when the iron is
pure, a true chemical combination will occur, while in the other case,
no more than a mechanical mixture can be effected. For the same reason,
the consequence may be totally different when the third substance is
presented to the iron when first deoxidated, in the presence merely of
an excess of carbon, and when the combination with that substance has
actually occurred.

If reduced at the same time with the iron, the other metals will
unite with it more readily than with the carburet, and they may
afterwards prevent its union with carbon, for there are few, if any
metals, besides iron, which have any affinity for carbon.

Cast iron may contain the bases of the earths that form a part of its
ores. Of these, silicium is the most usual, and there is probably no
cast iron that does not contain a portion of it. It appears to render
this form of the metal harder and less suitable for the purposes of the
moulder, but is separated almost wholly when it is converted into
wrought iron.

We have seen a parcel of pig iron that was marked with a species of
white efflorescence, ascertained on examination to be silica; this was
rejected for its hardness by the founder, but on being manufactured by
the process of puddling, gave bar iron of good quality.

From what has just been stated, it appears that the other metals more
generally exist in cast iron, in a state of alloy with pure iron, which
is intimately mixed with the carburet. Thus as a general rule, the pig
which contains them, will be more [Pg 361]likely to be grey in
colour than that which does not, but it may, notwithstanding, be injured
in quality. The exact effect of such alloys upon cast iron, does not
appear to have been fully examined.


The ores whence iron is obtained, are all oxides, with the exception
of a carbonate whence steel is in a few places obtained directly. They
contain, in combination with the iron, or forming parts of a
heterogeneous aggregate, a variety of earthy substances. In the
reduction of these ores, two objects are to be accomplished, the
separation of the oxygen, and the fusion of the earthy mass. Carbon, in
some one of its native or artificial forms, is used to effect the former
purpose, upon the same principle that it is applied to the other
metallic oxides. Thus a furnace in which a fire of carbonaceous matter
is kept up and urged to the highest possible degree of intensity by
blowing machines, is necessary. When the earths are pure, even the
highest heat of furnaces is incapable of fusing them, and although the
oxides of the ancient metals, and among the rest, the oxide of iron,
increase the fusibility of one of the earths; still, if but one earth be
present, it is only in a few cases that the simple ore will furnish the
means of its own fusion. We are therefore compelled to make use of the
property possessed by the earths, of rendering each other more
fusible.

Silica is the earth to which we have referred, as being susceptible
of fusion when mixed with the oxide of iron. Silica, also, when mixed
with the other earths, renders them more fusible than is its own mixture
with oxide of iron. Hence it may be stated as a general rule, that ores
which do not contain silica, cannot be decomposed without the addition
of that earth. The most of our American ores contain silex in sufficient
abundance; hence it is usual to add to them, in the process of
reduction, carbonate of lime, which is called flux. Did not the
ore contain silica, this would not produce its effect, and a due
admixture of the three earths, silica, alumina, and lime, appears to be
necessary to cause the most advantageous results.

The remarks of Karsten on this head are new and worthy of
attention.

“It is upon the choice and the just proportion of the flux, that the
profit of the manufacturer in a great degree depends. Employed in too
great quantities they
fail in the important purpose of giving to the scoriæ a proper
consistence. It is very difficult to fix their proportions exactly, and,
in truth, these ought to vary with the manner in which the furnace
works; but a proportion determined for a state of the furnace when the
temperature is neither too high nor too low, is usually adopted.

“Chemists and metallurgists, have endeavoured to determine the degree
of fusibility of the earths when mixed with each other; but their
researches have shed but little light upon the management of blast
furnaces. We are, in spite of [Pg 362]them, still compelled to have recourse
to experience. Far, however, be it from me to depreciate the attempts of
Achurd, Bergman, Chaptal, Cramer, &c.; they are valuable at least,
in pointing out the road that is to be pursued in the experiments.

“It follows, in general terms, from these experiments, that lime,
silica, alumina, and magnesia, are infusible when not mixed with each
other; that no mixture of earths is fusible without the presence of
silica; that the fusion of the oxides of iron cannot take place by the
addition of any simple earth other than silica; that ternary mixtures
are more fusible than binary; that quaternary mixtures vitrify even more
readily, and that the oxide of manganese promptly determines the
liquefaction of all the earths.

“The theory of the vitrification of oxides, aided by trials on a
small scale, points out the kind of earthy mixture which ought to be
employed, but it cannot fix the exact proportion of the different earths
that ought to be adopted; nor does it teach the means of replacing an
earth by its chemical equivalent, as, for instance lime, by magnesia.
The solution of the question will depend rather upon the properties of
the silicates of lime and magnesia at high temperatures, than upon the
action of these silicates upon iron. It is hardly probable that the iron
obtained from all ores, could be equally good, even if the most proper
fluxes could be added to these ores. Those who have maintained this
opinion, have erroneously imagined that the reduction of the ore could
always be effected under the same circumstances, which would not be the
case, even if these fluxes were ascertained and made use of.”

Most of the ores of iron require, before they are subjected to the
process of reduction, a preparatory operation called roasting. This consists in exposing them to a
comparatively low heat. The more important use of this process is to
render the mass more susceptible of mechanical division, but it also
serves in many cases to separate the sulphur and arsenic that may exist
in the ore. There are some ores, as, for instance, those of a number of
mines in Morris and Sussex counties, New-Jersey, which are so free from
impurities, and which yield so readily to the mechanical means employed
for separating them, that this process is wholly unnecessary; but such
ores are rare, and the process of roasting must, generally speaking, be
performed.

The mechanical division, which exposes a larger surface to the action
of heat and of the chemical agents, is called stumping; this is usually
performed by appropriate machinery, but was in the infancy of the art
effected by hand.

The reduction of rich ores of iron, such as are almost wholly made up
of its oxides, and contain but little earthy matter, may be performed in
a common smith’s forge. The reduction in this case takes place
immediately in the blast of the bellows, where the intensely heated ore
is in contact with the burning charcoal; and if a carburet be formed, it
is immediately decomposed, and pure iron is the result. Such is probably
the more ancient of all the processes for obtaining malleable iron, and
it is still used to a certain extent even at the present day. The hearth
in which the operation is at present performed, differs from the forge
of a common smith only in its greater size, and in the increased power
of its bellows. A cavity is prepared, in which a charcoal lire is
lighted, and to which the nozzle or tuyere of [Pg 363]the
bellows is directed; ore in minute fragments is thrown upon the ignited
fuel, fresh coal and ore are added from time to time, and the latter
being reduced to the malleable state descends, as the charcoal burns
away, to the bottom of the cavity. Here the successive portions, still
kept hot by the fuel above them, agglutinate, and form a porous mass,
containing in its cavities a black vitreous substance, which is composed
of the earthy matter rendered fusible by the metallic oxide. This porous
mass is called the Loup.

It would be unsafe to subject the loup immediately to the action of
heavy hammers of iron. It is, therefore, after being withdrawn from the
fire, beaten with wooden mallets, to bring its parts into closer
contact, and press out the vitreous matter. While this is performed, it
cools so much as to require to be again heated, which is done in the
same fire. Indeed, the same forge is used in all the successive heats
that the iron in this process requires.

After the loup has been again heated, it may be subjected to the
hammer. This unquestionably was anciently one moved by hand; but now, in
all manufactories of this character, a heavy mass of case hardened iron
is employed for the purpose; this is lifted by machinery impelled by a
water wheel, and permitted to fall upon the loup. The loup is again
heated, and again beaten into an irregular octangular prism, called the
cingle; this, after a third heat, is formed into a rectangular block,
called a bloom; and the whole, or a proper proportion of this is drawn
into a bar, at three successive heats; the middle being beaten out
first, and the two ends in succession. Thus, in addition to the heat
employed in the original reduction, the iron must be at least six times
reheated before it becomes a finished marketable bar.

In this manner the ore of Elba is still manufactured in Catalonia and
Tuscany, and there can be little doubt that it is identical with the
original rude process, by which the iron of that most ancient of known
mines was prepared to be an object of commerce. The processes in these
two districts differ from each other in some minute particulars, and are
known on the continent of Europe as the processes à la Catalane
and à l’Italienne. This method is known in the United States by
the name of blooming.

Bloomeries are frequent in the United States, being found in many
parts of the primitive country, where the magnetic ore of iron is
abundant. The iron manufactured by blooming is, generally speaking,
remarkable for its nerve, being strong and tenacious in the highest
degree, unless the ore be in fault. It is not, however, homogeneous,
being liable to contain what are called pins, or grains that have the
hardness and consistence of steel.

[Pg 364]Blooming is
comparatively an expensive process. It requires, indeed, little original
capital, but the product in proportion to the capital employed is but
small. It is wholly impracticable with poor ores, and demands a great
length of time and expenditure of fuel, unless the ore be very fusible.
Another objection to it is common to a process we shall hereafter
describe, that of refining, and lies in the numerous successive heats,
which the small extent of fire, and the slow process of hammering render
necessary, before the bar is finished. It has been attempted in
New-Jersey to lessen the expense attending these heats, by performing
them in reverberatory furnaces. A saving of fuel to a small amount would
probably thus be effected, but the number of heats would still remain
the same. A more important and useful improvement has superseded the
last; the process of rolling, which will be hereafter described, has
been introduced, and by means of it a bar may be drawn out at a single
heat, and at far less expense of manual labour. Such establishments
exist at Dover and Rockaway, New-Jersey, which receive the iron
completely reduced from the neighbouring forges, and fashion it into
bars.

A forge fire, and, consequently, the process of blooming, is
insufficient to convert poor ores, or those that contain much earthy
matter, into iron. Treated in this way, those ores, if fusible at all,
would become a mass of slag, as the earth would require, at the
temperature of a forge fire, the whole, or the greater part of the
metallic oxide for its fusion.

Iron being introduced, and its valuable applications known, it became
necessary, in those countries that do not afford rich ores, to discover
a method by which the poorer might be reduced. This could only be
effected by giving such a degree of heat, as would render the earthy
matter capable of melting, at a less expense of metal. To increase the
mass of fuel, by increasing the depth of the cavity, and actually
forming it of walls, thus enabling it to contain a greater quantity,
would be obvious means of attaining this end. The ore must be added in
smaller proportions, and, being longer in contact with the heated
charcoal, would become carbureted; the carbon must therefore be finally
burned away, before malleable iron could be attained. A rude but
efficient process of this sort, is described by Gmelin as in use among
the Tartars; an analogous method, whose use has been superseded by iron
imported from Europe, was found among the nations of Guinea; and Mungo
Park saw a more perfect application of the same principle at Camalia, on
the Gambia. Furnaces of similar character, but more skilfully
constructed, are still used in some parts of Germany, and are called
stuckoffen.

As a carburet, or actual cast-iron, must be formed in these [Pg
365]
processes, and, as the separation of carbon at the bottom
of a deep cylinder, and where the metal would probably be covered by a
vitreous liquid, is difficult, the iron might sometimes resist the
efforts made to render it malleable, and run from the furnace in a
liquid form. It might therefore have readily occurred, that it would be
less costly to finish the process in a forge. The stuckoffen were
therefore converted into flossoffen, or melting furnaces, whence
the liquid carburet was withdrawn, and afterwards converted into bar
iron. Such was probably the cause that led to the original discovery of
cast iron, a discovery that cannot be traced further back than the end
of the fifteenth century.

The uses of cast iron for purposes to which wrought iron is
inapplicable, and the readiness with which it is fashioned, by pouring it into moulds, led to
the increase of the size of the flossoffen, and in the power of
the blowing apparatus, which has caused the introduction of the blast
furnace. This forms the basis of the methods by which iron in all its
forms is chiefly prepared at the present day, and is hence worthy of
particular consideration.

The difference between the blast furnace proper, and the ancient
fires from which it gradually took its rise, consists wholly in its
superior height, and in the greater power of the blowing machines, by
which its combustion is supplied with air.

This increase of height adds to the mass of the contained
combustible,—additional air is therefore required for effecting
its complete inflammation, and the joint effect is, that a much higher
temperature is generated. By this, the earthy matters either contained
in the ores, forming portions of the combustible, or added as
fluxes, are rendered fusible at a less expense of oxide of iron;
the carburet formed, becomes more fluid, and the product is more likely
to assume the character of grey pig-iron.

Charcoal, as in the other processes, was the fuel originally
employed, and is still principally used in most countries. But coal
deprived of its volatile parts, and charred or converted into coke, has
been substituted in some regions, as will hereafter be stated. Each of
these combustibles requires a furnace of appropriate character, and
demands a difference in the mode of management.

A blast-furnace is a hollow chamber enveloped, generally speaking, in
a mass of masonry, of the form of a truncated pyramid. The chamber is
composed essentially of three parts; the upper has the figure of a
truncated cone, whose greatest base is lowest: this may be called the
body of the furnace; the middle portion has also the figure of a
truncated cone, whose greater base is uppermost, and is common to it and
the upper portion: this contraction is called the boshes of the
furnace; the lower position is called the hearth, and is usually
enclosed on three sides by walls of refractory substances, on the fourth
it is [Pg
366]
bounded by two stones, one serving as a lintel, which is
called the tymp, the other resting on the foundation, and known by the
name of the dam. Such at least is the shape of the blast furnaces
in common use, and which will suffice for our present purpose.

The blast is introduced into the hearth, at a small distance above
the level of the upper edge of the dam, and is now generally performed
by means of two tuyeres; in the more ancient furnaces, there was
but one. The furnace being completely dried, a fire is lighted in the
hearth, and fuel gradually added, until the whole is filled to the
trundle head, which is the open and lesser base of the truncated
cone that forms the body of the furnace. The blast may then be applied,
slowly and gently at first, and increasing gradually, until it reach its
maximum of intensity. As the blast proceeds, the charcoal gradually
burns, and descends; its place is supplied at top by fresh fuel, by ore,
and by the earthy matter used as a flux. This is styled charging
the furnaces. The earlier charges often contain no ore, but are wholly
composed of charcoal and flux, and, in all cases, the proportion of ore
and flux is at first small, and is gradually augmented. The charges are
made as often as the mixed mass in the furnace descends sufficiently low
to admit the quantity that is chosen as the proper amount. The charcoal
is thrown in first, and the ore and flux are spread and mixed upon its
surface. The principles which govern the amount of the charge, are as
follows:

“The volume of the charges depends upon the
capacity of the furnace. If they be too large, they cool the upper part
of the furnace, which will cause great inconveniences, particularly if
zinc exist in the ore. On the other hand, small charges of charcoal will
be cut or displaced by the ore, which will occasion a descent by sudden
falls, in an oblique direction, or in a confused manner. It follows that
the volume of the charge, although proportioned to the volume of the
furnace, must be augmented: when the charcoal is light and susceptible
of being displaced; and with the friability, the weight, and the shape
of the fragments of the ore.”

“The heat, considered in any given horizontal section of the furnace,
will be intense in proportion to the thickness of the layer of charcoal
that reaches it. It follows, that the fusible ore requires smaller
charges of charcoal than one that is more refractory. If the beds of
charcoal and mineral are too thick, the upper part of the furnace will
not be sufficiently heated. Hence it is obvious, that there must be a
maximum and minimum charge for every different dimension of furnace, and
for every different species of ore and fuel.” Karsten.

The charge of charcoal being determined upon such principles, it is
added by measure, and always in equal quantities, while the proportion
of ore and flux is made to vary, not only by a gradual increase at the
beginning of the operation, but according to the working of the furnace.
The manner in which the furnace is working can be inferred, even before
its products are ascertained, by the appearance of the flame at the
trundle-head, and at the tymp, by the manner in which the charge
descends, [Pg
367]
and more surely still, by the appearance of the scoriæ.
By a strict attention to these circumstances the proportion of the
charge of ore may be regulated. A fortnight usually elapses from the
time of the first charge until it reaches a regular state of working,
and variations will occur even after that period, in consequence of the
greater or less moisture of the combustible and minerals, the continual
wearing away of the sides of the furnace, the variations in the state of
the atmosphere, and in the play of the blowing machines, the greater or
less attention of the workmen, and numerous other accidental
circumstances.

The mode of proceeding when coke is the fuel employed, rests upon the
same principles, but the dimensions of furnace that are best suited to
the different combustibles are different. As a general principle, the
height of furnaces must depend upon the force of the blast and the
density of the fuel. If the fuel be dense, and the blowing machine weak,
the furnace must not have a great height; and even if the blast can be
made strong, too high a furnace is disadvantageous for light charcoal.
Coke, on the other hand, may be used in furnaces of greater height than
any species of charcoal, provided the blast be of sufficient power. So
long as the imperfect bellows were used in blowing, the height of the
furnace was limited wholly by their action. More powerful apparatus in
the form of cylinders, analogous in form and arrangement to those of
steam-engines, and like them, either single or double acting, have now
been introduced; the intensity of the blast is in them only limited by
the moving power, which is applied to them, and when this is the steam
engine, it may be said, that no limit can arise from the want of blast.
We may, therefore, at the present day, regulate the height of furnaces
by the nature of the fuel that is consumed in them.

The greater part of the furnaces in our country still retain the
ancient and imperfect form of bellows, hence their height is restricted
to the limits of from eighteen to twenty-four feet, and rarely or never
reaches thirty. But when the apparatus is such as to supply a proper
quantity of air, it has been found that even with light and porous
charcoal, such as is given by white pine, the height ought not to be
less than thirty feet, and when hard woods are used should be as great
as thirty-six feet. Furnaces of even forty feet have been found to
answer an excellent purpose, where the charcoal was prepared from oak.
When coke is used, furnaces have been made as high as fifty, or even as
seventy feet; but experience in England has shown, that from forty-five
to forty-eight feet is the proper limit. This height is not at present
exceeded in that country, even when the furnace has the greatest
dimensions in other respects, and has been found efficacious, even when
the vast quantity of eighteen tons has been furnished daily by a single
furnace.

[Pg
368]
The force of the blast will depend upon the nature of the
fuel, the volume of air, the quantity of mixed material the furnace
holds; and thus furnaces in which coke is used, will require the most
powerful blast, whether we have regard to the volume or the intensity.
The latter may be measured by a column of mercury adapted in a syphon
tube to the air pipes, exactly as the gauge is adapted to the pipes of
the steam engine.

The reduction and liquefaction of the metal take place progressively,
as the charges descend in the furnace. The separation of the oxygen is
due to the presence of carbonaceous matter at high temperatures, begins
at the surface of the pieces of ore, and proceeds gradually inwards; the
earthy parts of the ore, of the fuel employed, and the flux, unite and
melt; they are thus separated, and being sooner fused than the metal,
make their way through the charcoal, and descend first to the hearth.
The reduced metal, continuing in contact with the burning carbon,
acquires a greater or less portion of that substance, becomes fusible,
melts, and follows the liquified earths. Dropping into the hearth that
already contains the liquid vitrified earths, it passes by its superior
gravity to the bottom, and is protected by them from the blast. Even at
the bottom of the hearth, the heat is sufficient to retain the
carbureted metal in a liquid state, and this is permitted gradually to
accumulate, until it rises nearly to the level of the dam.

It now becomes necessary to withdraw or cast the metal. This
is done by forcing a way through a channel left beneath the dam in the
masonry of the hearth, and closed with clay; the inner portion of this
is baked hard, and requires to be broken through with a steel point. As
soon as the passage is opened, the metal runs out, and is received in a
long trench formed in the sand floor of the moulding house, to which are
adapted a number of less trenches, at right angles, each containing
about one hundred weight of metal. The metal in the longer trench is
also broken into pieces of the same size, and the ingots thus formed are
called pigs, whence the term for this variety, pig
iron
.

From one to three days will elapse from the time of the first charge
until the furnace can be tapped, and pigs cast. From that time the
casting succeeds with tolerable regularity, according to the working of
the furnace, and at intervals depending upon the volume of the charge,
and the capacity of the hearth.

It appears probable that the fusion of the iron is effected always by
a direct chemical union of that metal with carbon, in the proportion of
two atoms of the former to one of the latter. This constitutes, as we
have seen, the white variety of pig iron. But as it continues, generally
speaking, in the furnace, long after its fusion takes place, it acquires
a temperature higher than [Pg 369]its proper melting point, and a
tendency to separation takes place, the iron retaining in combination no
more of the carbon than is necessary to maintain it in a fluid state at
the increased temperature. Thus the grey variety of pig iron is formed;
and on casting it, the carbon, in a form similar to that of plumbago, is
disseminated throughout the mass, or forms on its surface the
efflorescence that is called kish, and which is always a sign of a high
quality in the iron it accompanies.

In conformity with this theory, we find that a high temperature in
the furnace always produces grey cast iron; and that a low temperature,
from whatever cause it may arise, renders the iron more or less
inclining to white. So also if the metal be not exposed to the heat for
a sufficient length of time, it becomes white.

Karsten classes these several causes of whiteness in the product, in
the following order:

“In conformity with the observations that
have hitherto been made, white cast iron is obtained:

“1. By the use of ores that are too easily fusible, or which is the
same thing, by an excess of flux, by a want of density in the charcoal,
and by too strong a blast, even when the working of the furnace is
regular.

“2. By a surcharge of ore, which deranges the action of the furnace,
and produces impure cinder, containing uncombined iron.

“3. By boshes of too rapid a slope, and a blast of too great a
velocity; and this may occur even where the cinder is pure.

“4. By too low a temperature, even when the cinder is pure, and the
furnace works regularly.

“5. By a derangement in the action of the furnace, arising not from a
surcharge of ore, but from an irregularity in the descent of the
charge.

“6. By the substances contained in the body of the furnace exercising
too great a pressure upon those beneath; the heat in this case,
concentrated in the hearth, cannot reach the boshes, and the upper part
of the furnace; the working may be regular, the cinder and flame may in
this case give no sign of derangement.

“7. By too great a breadth in the furnace.

“8. When coke is used, it may arise from too great a quantity of
ashes, or of fossil charcoal, (anthracite,) being contained in it. The
presence of these will keep down the heat of the furnace. An excess of
ashes may be remedied, by using the ore and flux in proper proportions
to fuse them, but a diminution in the charge must be made; the cinder
becomes viscid, and likely to obstruct the descent of the charges.

“9. By an accidental cooling, arising from humidity, and other
similar causes.”

Among the last may be reckoned the presence of zinc in the ore. This
metal, although volatile, is not separated at the temperature given in
the process of roasting, nor does it sublime in the upper and cooler
parts of the furnace. But, as the ore descends, it passes into the state
of vapour, and requires for its conversion, great quantities of heat
that becomes latent. It hence cools the lower part of the furnace far
more rapidly than even wet coal, or moist ores. The cooling thus caused,
may not be effected until the melted metal reach the hearth, and may
there [Pg
370]
cause it to become solid. Thus the solid mass called a
salamander, may, in some cases, be formed; and thus may be explained the
fact, that ores of iron that contain the more easily fusible metal zinc,
are more liable to interrupt the action of the furnace in this manner,
than others. The volatilized zinc rises to the upper part of the
furnace, where the heat is often insufficient to retain it in the state
of vapour, and is then deposited on the sides. In this position, it will
also disturb the action of the furnace.

Coke being more dense than charcoal, will, in its combustion, furnish
a more intense heat;—hence it is hardly possible to obtain by a
charcoal fire, iron of as deep a colour as may be procured by the use of
the former fuel. It will also resist the pressure of far greater weights
than charcoal, and hence the proportion of ore may be much greater when
it is used; containing more and less fusible earthy matters than
charcoal, it requires a greater quantity of flux.

In the manufacture of cast iron then, coke gives iron better suited
for small castings, for those which require turning or filing, and
yields a far greater quantity from a furnace. Hence arises the very
great superiority which Great Britain has, until recently, possessed
over most other countries, in those fabrics in which these qualities are
valuable; and hence it has been found until lately, in this country,
hardly possible to manufacture fine machinery that requires workmanship
after it is cast, without the aid of the higher qualities of Scotch
iron, which, in these qualities, exceeds even the English. Recently,
however, iron fully equal to the best Scotch, but like it wanting in
tenacity, has been manufactured at the Bennington furnace in
Vermont:—so also at the Greenwood furnace in Orange county, N. Y.,
and at West Point, iron approaching to the Scotch in softness, but very
superior in strength, has been produced. In these cases, the height of
the furnace has been carried up to the limits we have before laid down,
and powerful blowing cylinders substituted for the ancient bellows.

When the pig iron is to be used for re-casting, every effort ought to
be used to obtain it of the deepest possible colour. This, as may be
seen from what has been already stated, will be effected by keeping the
furnace at the highest possible temperature, and exposing the metal to
it a sufficient length of time. In effecting this, however, certain
defects may arise:—thus a longer exposure to a high heat, will
cause the reduction of other oxides that may be present, as of manganese
and the metallic bases of the earths; and the iron in becoming more
soft, and approaching in fact more nearly to the form of the pure metal,
will combine and form alloys with these bases. In this way, it will, as
has been stated, become cold short; and to this may be [Pg
371]
attributed the want of strength in the greater part, if
not all, of the British iron. The use of coke as a fuel, tends to
increase this defect, in consequence of the great quantity of earthy
matter it contains.

When the ores are pure, cast iron manufactured by charcoal, is not
liable to such a fault. Hence the cast iron of Sweden and the United
States, manufactured from the magnetic iron, or, in some cases in this
country, from rich hæmatites, has very superior tenacity, insomuch that
these two nations have alone been able to use this material in the
construction of field pieces. When white iron is obtained from a
furnace, it may have two different qualities. The first arises from a
mere defect of heat, where all other circumstances are favourable, and
the ore is completely reduced. The second arises when the reduction is
not complete, and the separation of the earths and other oxides has not
been fully effected. Of all the varieties of cast iron, this latter is
by far the worst. It is indeed more easily converted into wrought iron
than the other species, but the product is always of very inferior
quality; it is rarely or never produced by furnaces fed with charcoal,
but may be obtained by accident or design in those where coke is used,
by a surcharge of ore, or by too great a proportion of flux, and
sometimes cannot be avoided in warm and moist weather, where the air is
rarefied and charged with vapour.

The grey iron obtained by the use of each of the different kinds of
fuel, has its own peculiar advantages; that made with coke possessing,
as a general rule, when melted, a higher degree of fluidity which adapts
it for more delicate castings; being softer and better suited for
fitting; while that manufactured with charcoal, possesses a greater
degree of strength. One solitary instance has been quoted, in which a
manufacturer of great intelligence has obtained by the use of charcoal,
from a very pure ore, a union of both these valuable properties, and
another, in which iron as soft as that made with coke, has been produced
by means of charcoal.

In spite of this apparent balance in the properties of the two fuels,
the introduction of coke into the art of reducing iron has been attended
with the most important advantages. These lie in the superior economy of
the process, and in the enormous quantity of the product. The
manufacture of iron by charcoal is limited, by the growth of the
forests, which replace themselves only at distant periods, by the large
space they occupy, and the consequent labour of transportation; by the
cost of cutting the wood and preparing the coal; and finally, even when
the fuel can be obtained in abundance, and at small cost, the burden of
the furnace, and the heat obtained in a given space are less than when
coke is used, and the quantity of metal yielded [Pg 372]is in consequence
comparatively small. The coke furnaces of Great Britain, have therefore
supplied cast iron in such abundance and at such diminished prices as to
have brought it into use for a great variety of purposes, to which,
until recently, it was hardly considered applicable.

In England, as in other countries, charcoal was the only fuel at
first used; and after bloomeries had been in vogue for centuries, the
blast furnace was introduced from the shores of the Rhine. For many
years the growth of the forests proved sufficient to supply the demand,
but at length the increase of population caused them to be encroached
upon by cultivation; the growth of the manufacture was first prevented,
and finally, almost extinguished.

The method by charcoal appears to have reached its acme of
prosperity, at the close of the reign of the First James, when the
furnaces of the kingdom yielded 180,000 tons of pig iron. About this
period, Dudley first proposed the use of pit coal; but the time had not
yet arrived in which it was absolutely necessary to seek for a new
process, in consequence of the failure of the old one.

In 1745, or in the course of one hundred and thirty years, the
forests had been so far encroached upon, that the product of the
furnaces had fallen to 17,000 tons per annum, and in 1788, the quantity
made with charcoal had dwindled as low as 13,000 tons. At this epoch,
coke was introduced into blast furnaces, and in eight years the whole
quantity produced by both methods had mounted up to 150,000 tons, or
increased more than tenfold.

At nearly the lowest ebb of the British manufacture, the art of
preparing iron was introduced into her then provinces, the present
United States; and in 1737 it was attempted to obtain permission to
introduce the product into England. The attempt failed, and in 1750 an
act was passed to protect the exportation of English iron to America,
and to prevent the establishment of forges. Had the other policy
prevailed, England would probably have seen her manufacture of iron
transferred to the United States, and with great immediate advantage
both to herself and her then most valuable colony; but she would
probably have seen herself at the present day degraded from her high
stand in the scale of nations, to the secondary place in which the
extent of her territory would keep her, were it not for the superiority
of her manufacturing industry, of which iron is the basis. The quantity
of iron now produced in England, exceeds that furnished by the rest of
the world united, and does not fall short of 800,000 tons. It has a
value even in its raw state of near four millions sterling, and is of
far greater intrinsic worth, in consequence [Pg 373]of the spur which its
abundance gives to every other branch of industry.

Bar iron is at the present day principally manufactured from the pig.
The process originally used for this purpose is called refining. The
fire in which it is performed is a forge, similar in form and character
to that employed in blooming. In blooming, the iron must be reduced,
combines with carbon, and is subsequently decarbureted; while in the
refining, the latter part of the operation alone remains. In this last
process, while the carbon is burning away, the metallic bases of the
earths are then oxidated, combine with oxide of iron, and form a
vitreous substance. Hence, when it is carefully conducted, by far the
greater part of the impurities contained in the cast iron may be
removed. Refined iron, if made from ore of equal purity, is not inferior
in tenacity to bloomed, and is superior in other respects, being more
homogeneous, free from pins, and more easily treated by the smith. As a
general rule, it is also less costly, that is to say, the same quantity
of charcoal and workmanship will furnish a greater quantity of refined
iron. It requires, however, a much greater capital, and the labour of
transporting the coal from the greater distances which the increased
consumption of a single blast furnace and several refineries will
demand, may swell the cost of that article. A bloomery fire does not
require more than 2000 acres of woodland, while a blast furnace will use
the charcoal of 5000. Thus it happens, that it may be more advantageous
to spread a number of bloomeries over a given district of country, than
to unite a blast furnace and an equal number of refineries in a single
place. The celebrated iron of Sweden and Russia is refined, and our
country furnishes iron prepared in the same manner not inferior in
quality. The principle objection to the process is the great expense of
the fuel employed, in the successive heats to which the iron must be
exposed in drawing it into bars, after the processes of conversion and
the separation of impurities have been effected.

As charcoal became scarce in England, it was attempted to employ coke
in lieu of it, in the refineries. This, however, constantly failed, in
consequence of the great intensity of the heat, by which the pig was
melted suddenly instead of being exposed to the blast, long enough to
burn away the carbon. Reverberatory furnaces were next tried, and with
partial success, but a combined process has finally been introduced
which has been successful and which is called, from a part of the
operation, the method of puddling.

The manufacture of wrought iron, by means of bituminous coal, is
executed at three successive processes, and is facilitated by very great
improvements in the machinery. Where hammers are still used, they are
much increased in weight, and [Pg 374]driven with greater velocity; but by
far the greater part of the operation of drawing the bars is effected by
means of rollers. The plan of these is in some measure borrowed from the
slitting mill, in which bar iron is reduced into rods and thin rolls for
various uses. These rollers are in sets, composed each of two of equal
diameter, lying in a horizontal position, and placed one vertically
above the other. Grooves corresponding to each other are cut in the two
rollers, between which the heated iron is drawn by their revolution, and
forced to assume a section that just fills up the two grooves. By
passing in succession through grooves gradually decreasing in size, any
form or magnitude may be given to the bars; and the operation is so
rapid, that the bar may be drawn from the loup at a single heat.

The first operation to which the pig iron is subjected, consists in
melting it in a fire called a finery, similar in form and character to
the bloomeries and refineries of which we have spoken, but in which the
fuel is coke. The melted metal is drawn off by tapping the furnace from
beneath, and is cast into thin plates. In this way it assumes the
characters of the white cast iron, which has been described as formed,
when the reduction of the metal is complete, a form that cannot be given
when the blast furnace in which it is made is supplied with coke. The
rapidity of the cooling is increased, by throwing water on the surface
of the plates. It thus appears, that this operation is adopted in order
to bring the cast iron into a slate that it may often assume when
manufactured by charcoal, and which cannot be given to it by coke. In
conformity with this view of the subject, it has been found, that when
wrought iron is manufactured by puddling, from American pig prepared by
charcoal, this preliminary operation is unnecessary.

The fine metal, obtained in the manner we have described, is next
broken into pieces, and subjected to heat in a reverberatory furnace. A
rapid heat is given at first to liquefy the iron, and is then diminished
by means of dampers; the melted mass is violently stirred to expose it
to the action of air and heat, by which the carbon is burnt away, and a
part of the oxides of iron and the earthy bases combined and vitrified; as the carbon is
separated, the metal gradually loses its liquidity, and finally dries,
or assumes the consistence of sand: this shows that the carbon is
separated, and the iron has assumed its malleable nature. The addition
of water aids the oxidation of the several substances, and facilitates
the process. The heat is again increased, and the metal collected under
it, and rolled together into parcels suited to the action of the drawing
machinery, and to the size of the bar that is to be made; these are
pressed together, and a partial union takes place among their particles.
When they have attained a white heat, they are withdrawn in succession.
[Pg
375]
In some cases, where the number of puddling furnaces is
great, they are immediately carried to the rollers and drawn down. But
where quality is more regarded than quantity, they are first subjected
to the action of the hammer, and finally rolled. The latter process has
the advantage of separating more completely the vitrefied oxides, than
can be done by rolling alone, but it will often require a second heat,
which is given in a forge fire called the chaffery. When rollers
are used alone, a minute and half is sufficient to form the bar; and a
power of thirty houses will roll two hundred tons per week.

The iron in this state is still of very inferior quality, although
its external appearance may be good. It is, notwithstanding, sometimes
thrown into the market, and this has given rise to the impression that
prevails in this country of the bad quality of English rolled iron. It
may, however, be used in some cases, where it need not be fashioned by
forging; thus, where it requires no more than to be cut into lengths, or
where the original bars will answer the purpose, its cheapness may
recommend it. Iron for rail-roads is of this quality; and the punching
of holes, by which it may be fastened down, is effected by a simple
addition of steel teeth, at proper distances, to the last groove through
which it is passed. In this form, ready to lay down, rail-road iron may
be shipped from England at the low price of 7l. 10s.
sterling per ton; and a similar quality in the simple bar may probably
be afforded at about 7l. We have never heard of its being sold so
low as is stated in the evidence before the Committee of Congress, say
5l. 5s. There was, however, a period, when an excess of
production, caused by a competition between the manufacturers of Wales
and Staffordshire, entailed ruin on many of them, and their articles
were sold far below the price of production. The price which we have
stated is lower than that which has recently been paid in England for
rail-road iron, and is that of some shipped from Liverpool, 1st March,
1831, when a considerable fall had taken place.

In order to render the iron which has undergone this process
merchantable, it is subjected to the third of the operations which we
have enumerated. For this purpose, the bars are made from three to four
inches in breadth, and half an inch in thickness. These are cut into
lengths, proportioned to the weight of the bar of finished iron that is
to be made, and piled together by fours, in a reverberatory furnace,
similar in character to the puddling furnace. Here they are exposed to a
white heat, by which the four pieces of each pile are made to adhere;
they are then withdrawn, and subjected to rollers similar to those used
after the puddling process, but of more careful workmanship. The cost of
finishing bar iron in this way, when the pig is made by the manufacturer
himself, as ascertained upon the [Pg 376]spot by Dufrênoy and de
Beaumont, is, in Wales, 8l. 15s., in Staffordshire,
9l. 12s. The cost of making pig iron in Wales is
4l. 7s., or about half that of the finished bar iron, and
in Staffordshire 5l 2s.

The iron prepared by the three processes of which we have spoken,
although merchantable, and suited for various common purposes, is still
far from good. We give the characters by which it is distinguished, from
the work of Karsten:

“The iron prepared in the English manner, appears
dense and exempt from cracks and flaws. But this goodness is only
apparent; the uniform pressure to which the bars are subjected at every
point, masks their defects. If a piece of this kind be taken, that in
its fracture appears dense and homogeneous, and it be heated in order to
be drawn out under a common forge hammer, it dilates and exhibits
numerous flaws, that sometimes increase to such a degree, that the bar
will fall to pieces under the hammer. It is probable that the cause of
this phenomenon is due to the scoriæ, which, in this mode of working,
remain mixed in the mass.”

The translator adds:

“It is not however true, that the English method of
itself, injures the quality of iron,—experience has proved the
contrary: it appears that soft irons lose their harshness in this
operation, and become better for many uses.”

It may therefore be inferred, that, when the English method is
applied to pig iron, that would produce a good wrought metal by the
process with charcoal, it will produce one that is equally good by means
of coal, but that the latter is capable of hiding the apparent defects
of even the worst iron.

The inferiority of the puddled iron is well understood in England,
and therefore when it is to be used for chain cables and anchors, it is
again heated, and rolled a third time, its price will be then raised to
10l. 10s. Another quality still superior, is made by
uniting scraps of the better qualities that we have mentioned, into
loups in the puddling furnace, drawing it in the puddle rolls, balling
or piling, and again rolling. Its cost will thus be raised to
12l. Even this is yet inferior to Swedes and Russia iron, which
sell in the English market from 13l. to 15l. sterling per
ton. For particular purposes in the fabrication of machinery, charcoal
is still used in England, in manufacturing a very small quantity of
iron, but of very superior quality; this, we have recently understood
from good authority, is sold as high as 22l. per ton.

Thus it appears that the manufactories of England produce five
different descriptions of wrought iron, four of which bear a lower
price, and are therefore inferior in quality to those of Sweden and
Russia, and, consequently, to the best American iron. No more than one
of these, and that the lowest in quality, is usually shipped to this
country, and it was the influx of this cheap and almost worthless
material, which in 1816 and ’17, completely prostrated the American
manufacture. Under a protecting [Pg 377]duty, it has again revived, but has not
reached its former level. New capital has been invested in it under this
protection, and it would be a breach of faith suddenly to withdraw it.
Still sound policy would dictate that this protection should not be
perpetual, provided it can be incontestably proved that it bears so hard
upon other branches of industry, as to injure the country through them
to a greater extent, than the benefit it derives from the manufacture of
iron. But this is far from being the case. The manifest and habitual
policy of our government, is to derive its revenue indirectly through
the custom house, instead of seeking it in direct taxation. When these
duties descend to a level with the minimum expenditure, they cannot be
considered burthensome, because they in fact replace revenues that must
be drawn from other sources. If, for instance, the iron employed in a
specific object, appear to cost more than in some other country, that
object may yet be afforded cheaper with us, in consequence of its maker
being free from other burthens, which the repeal of the duty on iron,
would throw upon him as a necessary substitute. If then our furnaces and
forges, when a sufficient capital shall be invested in them under a
protecting duty, can afford iron as cheap as it can be imported from
other countries, under a minimum of duty, it cannot in truth be said,
that this raw material will enhance the price of the articles
manufactured from it. Let us see whether there be any reasonable
prospect that we shall have iron produced in our own country, which will
compete with foreign iron of equal quality, paying a duty of 25 per
centum. If this be the case, the profits arising from the present
protection, must, in a few years, call forth such production as will
reduce the price to a proper level.

The best grey pig iron of American manufacture, superior in strength,
and equal in all other respects to the Scotch, is now sold in the New
York market at $45 per ton. Good grey iron of the usual character, is worth $35 per ton,
and there is no question that forge pig could be obtained by the
manufacturer of bar iron, for $25. If it were even to cost $30, it is
still cheaper than Staffordshire iron, far less fit for the purpose, can
be imported. The Muirkirk iron, so valuable for the casting of
machinery, used to cost to import it, at the present rate of duty, $55
and $56. The Bennington furnace commenced the competition with it at
this rate, but has been compelled, after driving the Scotch iron from
the market, to sell at $45, which is as low as the foreign could be
imported at a minimum duty.

Taking the cost of forge pig at $25, the price of converting into
bars by charcoal, would be, according to the Philadelphia memorial, $18,
and the ton of wrought iron ought to cost no more than $43. We however
believe that this cost is far underrated, and that even by the aid of
rollers in a part of the process, [Pg 378]iron of the best
quality could not be produced under $50. This is as cheap as
merchantable English puddled iron can be imported, paying 25 per cent.
duty. But, even if the pig cost $35, and the wrought iron, $60, it is
still cheaper than the English iron, worth in that market 10l.
10s. can be imported; and the latter is the cheapest which can be
obtained in that country, suitable for the manufacture of anchors and
chain-cables. At the present moment, however, iron cannot be produced so
cheaply, for the forges and furnaces may be considered as in a great
measure new, and undergoing all the difficulties of new establishments.
Capital above all is wanting, from a want of confidence in the success
of the enterprize, growing out of a fear of the repeal of the duty, and
the recollection of the former catastrophe; and even credit, so
essential where capital is deficient, is at a low ebb. Hence, if profit
be made, it rather centers in the capitalist who makes the advances,
than in the maker. Thus we have known iron in the bloom, sold at $45 per
ton; and, when finished for the market by rolling, bring $100. The
latter price, however, could not long be maintained, and has descended
to $75 and $80, which still leaves the greater part of the profit to the
capitalist.

But we are of opinion, that the manufacture of iron by charcoal is
not that to which our country should look for its final supply. It is at
best a precarious resource, and its production must diminish with the
advance of agriculture, and the consequent demand, while every increase
in the price of land must raise the cost. It is then to a total change
in the seat and mode of manufacture, that we are to be hereafter
beholden for the supply of this first necessary of civilized life. A
change will first take place in the sites of the two branches; pig iron
will continue to be manufactured by charcoal, and the bar converted by
coal. For this the great coal field of Pennsylvania will afford the
earliest facilities. No doubt can be entertained that the more freely
burning varieties of anthracite will work well in the puddling furnace,
as they have been successfully employed in the rolling and slitting of
bar iron. When the same species of coal is mixed with charcoal in the
blast furnace, it produces excellent forge pig, and thus the two species
of fuel may be advantageously united, although the coal alone will not
answer the purpose. The value of this coal in the mine and the cost of
raising it, is as yet less than that of bituminous coal in any part of
Europe, and thus we cannot avoid concluding that when it shall be
brought into use, our manufacturers might compete with the English even
if unprotected by duty. Our fields of bituminous coal are yet too
distant from dense population, and too far removed from easy
communication, to be looked to at present, but unless modes be invented
by which the anthracite coal can be used without mixture in the [Pg
379]
blast furnace, these will become the ultimate seats of
the manufacturing industry of the United States.

But for reducing the price of iron, by competition within our
country, to a level with that of other countries, capital is required,
and to divert it to this purpose, the capitalist must feel assured that
he shall derive a certain profit from its investment, and that he shall
be subjected to no fluctuations in price and still more in demand, from
a vacillating course in the government. The establishment of works so
perfect as to compete in their manipulations with the English, is a
serious business, and till they be established in numbers, we must be
dependent on foreign countries for no small proportion of the important
article of iron that we consume. A forge for manufacturing puddled iron
cannot be profitable unless its machinery be kept in regular employ, for
the cost of that will be the same in all cases. This constant employment
cannot be given by fewer than eighteen reverberatory furnaces, and the
first cost of the works will not be less than $100,000, of which the
machinery alone costs $50,000. To supply an establishment of this
magnitude with pig, would employ three blast furnaces working with coke,
or six with charcoal, the cost of which would reach at least $120,000.
The value of the manufactured article would not fall short of a million
of dollars, and would require to carry it on a floating capital of not
less than $250,000. Thus it appears that a system of works for the
manufacture of iron, which should compete to advantage with those of
England, would find employment for a capital of half a million of
dollars, even with the advantage of credit, and the ready conversion of
its securities into cash through the banks. So long, then, as the policy
of our government is unsettled, we can hardly expect that so vast an
operation can be undertaken either by individual or by corporate funds.
A division of the business has been indeed attempted; there is more than
one puddling forge in the United States that relies upon the purchase of
pig for its supply. These unquestionably do a fair and profitable
business, but do not act to the same advantage as they would were the
two branches of the manufacture united. The chief difficulty under which
they labour is, that they must consult, in their location, convenience
in the supply of the raw material, and must therefore neglect what would
in the abstract be the most important consideration, the supply of fuel.
Thus, at least one of the puddling forges of which we have spoken, is
compelled to use imported fuel, and none are situated where alone the
nation could derive essential benefit from them, immediately over a rich
bed of coal.

It is not pretended to maintain that the present duties on iron are
not too high in general for a permanent rate, and that the distribution
of their rates is not injudicious. All that we would [Pg
380]
contend for is, that there shall be no sudden change in
the principle, by which a valuable branch of industry would be at once
destroyed beyond the possibility of re-establishment. We have been able
to discover no argument in the blacksmith’s petition, or in the report
of the majority of the committee of the Senate, in favour of an entire
repeal of duty on raw iron, that does not apply equally to the articles
manufactured from it; and we presume that those useful and respectable
mechanics would think their principles carried a step too far, should
they be made to bear upon the fabrics of their own industry. We are
willing, in addition, at once to admit that where the scale has been
founded upon improper principles, it ought to be instantly changed.

To attain the first object, as we presume it will not be contended
that iron shall ever be imported free of duty, while the nation needs a
revenue to meet its current expenditure, let a minimum be fixed beyond
which it shall not descend, and which will, evidently, when correctly
viewed, place our consumers of iron on an equal footing with those who
pay direct taxes in other countries; to this minimum, after a certain
definite period, let the duty be gradually and almost insensibly
reduced. Less than twenty-five years would probably be insufficient to
effect this without incurring a wanton waste of property. We are aware,
indeed that our national legislature can perform no act which its
successors may not annul, but a hearty concurrence on the part of Mr.
Dickerson and Mr. Hayne, representing, as they do, the two great
opposing interests in this question, would be a pledge that might be
acted upon by capitalists. The expediency of investment would then
become a subject of strict calculation, and we do not fear the
result.

As to the injudicious adjustment of the scale, the higher rates of
duties fall upon articles, which under present circumstances are not
capable of being protected, except by actual prohibition. These are the
small forms of rod and round iron, hoops and sheets. The introduction of
the joint operations of puddling and rolling, has altogether changed the
manner of manufacturing these in Europe; they are now, with the
exception of sheets, made directly from the pig, by as few operations as
common bars; our own puddling forges are adopting the same method, and
so soon as they are capable of supplying the market, must drive out the
articles of these descriptions, made by those who use merchantable bar
iron, and roll it down or slit it. The slitting and rolling mills which
are conducted on this last principle, are therefore beyond the reach of
support. The inequality in the duty too, is more than the cost of
performing the additional operation upon the bar, and is hence rather
injurious than otherwise, to the interest of the producers of the raw
iron, while it bears with great severity upon those consumers who are
themselves [Pg
381]
manufacturers of hardware. The duty upon these articles
should then be adjusted so as to bear the proportion to that upon bar
iron, which their values do in the foreign market whence they are
derived.

On the other hand, there are certain articles, of which the price of
the raw material, whether cast or bar iron, forms the chief value, and
which are actually convertible to the same purposes with their base. On
these, there can be no question, that every consideration of policy and
justice requires that the duty should be raised. Several articles of
this description are enumerated by the Philadelphia memorialists, where
the fabric is of wrought iron; and it is obvious that there are others,
made at a blast furnace from the metal at its first reduction, which
might be used as a substance for pig. Such articles, however, cannot be
numerous; for iron is, after all, a material of such low price, that it
can be hardly wrought into any important species of goods, in which the
value of the workmanship will not exceed the cost of the raw article.
The ad valorem duty must, therefore, in most cases, be an
efficient protection, both to the maker of iron and the manufacturer of
hardware. Where however it is not, an easy principle will restore the
irregularity; for it is only necessary to collect the duties by weight,
and affix to them the same rates which the raw iron pays.

The plan we have proposed, of continuing the present duty for a
limited time, is consistent with the policy of all civilized nations,
who do not hesitate to grant monopolies for definite periods to the
inventers of new processes in the arts, and most of whom give equal
encouragement to those who merely introduce them. Our government,
indeed, has never adopted the latter principle, but it may well be
questioned whether it have not in this way prevented the introduction of
many important branches of manufacture. The former has been adopted in
its full extent, and its utility is unquestioned. If, then, it be sound
and highly profitable policy, to grant a monopoly to individuals for
limited periods, thereby excluding our own citizens from advantages
which in most cases lie open to foreign countries, much more will it be
politic and profitable, to protect a whole class of our own artificers
from external competition for a similar period, leaving the price to be
lessened by the competition that security, from a change of system, will
infallibly create. The usual limit of a patent right having been found
efficient in drawing forth inventive talent, an equal duration of
protecting duty might be depended upon as sufficient to induce the
investment of capital in a business whose processes are understood, and
in relation to which strict calculations can be made. But these
protecting duties must not suddenly cease; for if they do, a spirit of
speculation, both on our part and on that of foreign merchants, would
[Pg
382]
infallibly throw into the market an excess of the article
from abroad; and although the importer might not be exempted wholly from
the ruinous consequence of the over trade, infallible destruction would
visit our own establishments. Such was the case in 1816 and 1817. The
losses on the iron trade were not confined to our own manufacturers, but
visited the importers, whether British or American, and reached in their
remote consequences, but with diminished effect, the forges and furnaces
of England. The latter were, however, protected by the whole capital of
the merchant, which was annihilated before the ruin could reach them,
while the American establishments were directly exposed to it. The
adventurous spirit of British commerce, in fact, produced on this
occasion an effect similar to that which the people of the continent
have erroneously ascribed to the government of that country. New markets
are no sooner opened, than loads of British fabrics are thrown in, and
necessarily sacrificed; those who see no more than their own domestic
misfortunes, naturally ascribe to the policy of the nation, what is in
fact the misjudged enterprise of rash individuals. The effect has,
however, been in many cases the same, as if the act had been the result
of a deliberate national system; for the foreign industry has been often
prostrated, while the capital of the British has enabled it to bear the
momentary shock, and then to replace its losses by the undivided
enjoyment of the disputed market.

Having proposed that the duty on imported iron, after remaining for a
limited period at its present rate, should thereafter be gradually
reduced to a minimum, it remains that we should examine at what rate
this minimum should be fixed. This we conceive may be adjusted merely as
a question of revenue. Raw iron being a material of great weight, in
proportion to its value, cannot be smuggled; it will therefore bear,
among all articles, nearly the highest rate of impost, in proportion to
its cost. This rate of duty should be calculated upon the higher
qualities of wrought and bar iron, and be applied equally to all the
different shades of each article. For a wise policy would dictate that
the import of the inferior sorts should be more impeded than that of the
best descriptions. This is analogous to the system at present sanctioned by law,
and is dictated by sound views. Fixing then the minimum duty at about
twenty-five per cent, on the value of the better qualities of the two
varieties of raw iron, it will amount to about seven and a half dollars
on the pig, and fifteen dollars on the bar. To this limit we believe
that the duty may be finally reduced, without causing injury to our own
trade, provided the present duties remain in force for fourteen years,
and be then gradually lessened to this assumed minimum.

[Pg
383]
It will be seen, that our views neither go the whole
length of those of the sticklers for either system, the tariff or
the anti-tariff,—and we fear, that, at the moment, they
will be equally objectionable to the advocates of both. We however
cannot but believe, that they are founded upon sound and just
principles. We give the fullest meed of praise to that policy which has
recalled into existence by a protecting duty, the most important of
manufactures, because the basis of all the rest. But, we cannot see that
it would be judicious to continue this duty, after it shall have
produced its whole vivifying effect. While, therefore, on the one hand,
it appears to be no more than a fulfilment of a solemn contract, that
the manufacture of iron shall be protected, we cannot urge that that
protection should continue forever; and, in relation to the diminution
of duty, we conceive that it ought to be gradual, and not sudden.
Modified in conformity with such principles, we conceive that a
“judicious tariff” might be rendered popular in all parts of the
Union.

In the northern and eastern states, the tariff policy has no
opponents, except in the merchants engaged in foreign commerce; in the
western States, the opinion in favour of the present system, is almost
unanimous. The southern states, and a portion of the mercantile interest
of the north, are alone in direct opposition to protecting duties. The
agricultural interest of the north and west, seeing and feeling directly
the benefits which the establishment of manufactures confers upon it,
has given what is called the American system,—which is in
principle, if it err occasionally in detail, the sound and true policy
of the nation—its full and undivided support. We cannot but hope
to see the day arrive, when the mist raised by designing politicians,
and soi disant economists, shall be dissipated, and when the
southern states will see that they are not merely indirectly, but as
directly benefited by the creation of manufacturing industry in the
northern districts of the Union, as they have been by that part of the
system which has secured them a complete monopoly of the home market for
their own products. Of all the states of the Union, Louisiana has
derived the most immediate and important advantages from protecting
duties, but they have also been shared by her neighbours; and we cannot
hesitate to conclude, that, next to Louisiana, South Carolina has been
most benefited. The cotton of India, which would have been preferred,
from its low price, for the manufacture of the coarse articles with
which our factories have in all cases commenced their business, is in
fact prohibited; the creation of the growth of sugar has occupied land
and capital, which, if applied to the culture of cotton, must have
driven the whole upland staple from the markets of the world; and, more
than all, a growing domestic demand has arisen, which foreign
interference cannot controul or diminish. In [Pg 384]return for such
advantages, it might fairly have been expected that some burthen would
fall upon the southern states, and no doubt it might appear to be
capable of plausible proof, that a portion of the increased duties
amounted to an actual tax. But this appearance on which so much stress
has been laid, is only upon paper, and does not exist in reality, for we
believe that they may be challenged, and must fail if they attempt, to
prove that the cost of the production of any one staple has been in the
slightest degree increased. We believe that it has, on the contrary,
diminished. It would lead us too far to show how this has been the
natural result: we appeal therefore to the fact alone.

And so in respect to the clamour which it has been attempted to
excite among importing merchants, we might appeal to the growing
prosperity of that interest, as a proof that the clamour has no
foundation. We however believe that the obvious cause lies, in the
latter instance, upon the surface, and exists in the plan of credit
duties, the wise conception of the illustrious Hamilton, by which, so
long as the limit at which smuggling would be profitable, or consumption
diminished, is not reached, every addition of duty increases the
effective capital, and adds to the net profits of the importer. In
illustration of this view of the subject, we may cite the
well-established fact, that most of the great mercantile fortunes of our
commercial cities, have owed their more important increase to the
judicious employment of the capital, thus in effect loaned by the
government without interest.

To use the words of the majority of the Committee of the Senate of
the United States, quoted at the head of this article:

“Of all the metals, iron contributes most to the
wealth, the comfort, and the improvement of society. It enters most
largely into the consumption of all ranks and constitutions of men. It
furnishes the mechanic with his tools, the farmer with the implements of
his husbandry, the merchant with the means of fitting out his ship, and
the manufacturer with the very instruments of his wealth and
prosperity.”

The wisdom of Europe draws very different conclusions, from a similar
view of the importance of iron, from those which are deduced by the
majority of the Committee of the Senate.

“The preparation of iron has become the most
essential branch of industry, in consequence of the immediate profit it
produces to the masters of forges, of the general good that society
draws from it, and of the advantages it offers to governments. No other
occupies so many arms, produces so active or so constant a circulation
of money, or exercises so direct an influence on the riches of the state
and the ease of the people. It is therefore the particular interest of
every government to favour it, to sustain it by the most efficacious
measures, and to carry it to the highest degree of prosperity.”
Karsten—(Introduction.)

The measures proposed for this purpose, include bounties, the advance
of capital, and the prohibition of foreign iron. Such is the uniform
practice of by far the greater part of the nations [Pg 385]of
Europe. The governments receive the most advantageous returns for such
protection.

“In the imposts of all kinds, that it derives
directly or indirectly from the establishments themselves, the workmen
employed, and the numerous personnel whose existence is linked to
that of the manufacture of iron. But that which ought most particularly
to fix the attention of government, consists in the precious advantages
which are derived from it by rural economy, by other branches of
industry, and which it affords for internal security and external
defence.” Karsten.

It has been seen, that we cannot consider that measures of such
extent are required in our own country. Still, were we, as all European
nations are, in direct contact with rival or hostile powers, their
necessity would be imperative.


Art. V.—The Siamese Twins. A Satirical
Tale of the Times, with other Poems, by the Author of Pelham,
&c.
J. & J. Harper: New-York: pp. 308.

This production furnishes one of the most remarkable
instances to be found in the history of literature, of the wide
difference between notoriety and merit. No work ever came from the press
whose anticipated excellence was more loudly proclaimed, and none, we
are persuaded, ever more disappointed high-wrought expectation. That the
author of Pelham was about to favour the world with a great poetical
production of a satirical character, was announced in the different
periodical works, with all that elation and pomposity which indicated
the assurance that some important addition to the poetical literature of
England, was about to take place. Prophetic eulogy was strained to the
uttermost. Public anxiety for the appearance of the mighty work, became
all that the booksellers could wish. Every one was not only eager to
read, but prepared to admire, and impatient to praise—for the
fashion of praising this author, whether he wrote well or ill, had set
in; and who in this age of polite pretensions, would dare to be
unfashionable?

Nor has the attentive author himself been deficient on this occasion,
in the fatherly duty of bespeaking public opinion in favour of his
offspring. In a preface remarkable for that startling species of modesty
by which a man becomes the trumpeter of his own greatness, he predicts
that, if not immediately, at least in eight or ten years hence, his
works will make such an impression, as to occasion a revolution in the
poetical taste of mankind, and become the model of a new school in the
“Divine Art.” The confidential puffers to whom the idea was imparted, in
despite of whatever doubts they might entertain on the subject, [Pg
386]
scrupled not to give publicity to the prediction. A work
destined to such an illustrious career, could not fail to be endowed
with an exalted and overpowering excellence of some kind, and also of a
kind different altogether from any that had hitherto given satisfaction
to the readers of poetry. The poetical tastes and habits of our nature
were, in fact, to be entirely changed by the influence of this mighty
satire. No wonder, therefore, that curiosity respecting the work was
sufficiently awakened to occasion for it a large demand on its first
appearance.

Many of the conductors of the periodical press, who gave publicity to
this exaggerated strain of praise, were, no doubt, sceptical as to its
being altogether merited, and must have acted from motives either of
interest or of courtesy. Yet there may have been some who believed in
the possibility of the wonders which were predicted. Indeed, in this
strange age, when miracles are scarcely to be accounted
wonders—when ships are propelled without wind, and carriages
without horses—when schoolboys and journeymen printers overturn
governments and make and unmake kings with almost as much facility as
the manager of a play-house casts the character of a drama; what
extraordinary things may not with propriety be credited? Even philosophy
may now, without reproach, believe in absurdity; and thoughtless
paragraphists, without being laughed at, may be permitted to suppose
that an adventurous rhymester may speak truth, when he asserts that he
is about to revolutionize the principles of poetical taste and
composition!

When mutation is the order of the day, why may not human nature
itself be changed? When all physical obstructions to locomotion, and all
impediments to the march of mind, are yielding to the ingenuity and
activity of man, why may not his own natural feelings and dispositions
also yield, and become changed? But hold—the author of this
Siamese satire has discovered that they have already changed! Not merely
have the opinions and pursuits of society taken a new direction, and the
habits and views of the present, become different from those of the past
generation—this would be readily admitted—but a much more
important alteration in the constitution of man, he affirms, has taken
place. It is not only the condition, but the nature of the
species that he asserts to be changed. With the last generation, all the
old impulses of the heart—all susceptibility of love or hatred,
friendship or enmity, pity or revenge—all feelings of pride,
avarice, ambition, or love of fame—all emotions of joy, grief,
anger, remorse—all generosity, charity, desire of happiness, and
self-preservation—all, all are passed away!

“Has not a new generation,” our author asks, in his odd and hardly
intelligible preface, “arisen? Has not a new impetus [Pg 387]been
given to the age? Do not new feelings require to be expressed?
and are there not new readers to be propitiated, who sharing but in a
feeble degree the former enthusiasm
, will turn, not with languid
attention, to the claims of fresh aspirants.”

These are some of the changes which have brought about, as he
imagines—the circumstances that call for the new and “less
enthusiastic” school of poetry, which, founded by him, is to secure the
admiration of at least part of the present, and the whole of the ensuing
generation. “A poet,” he says, “who aspires to reputation, must be
adapted to the coming age, not rooted to that which is already gliding
away.” He admits that “the worn out sentiments, the affectations and the
weaknesses of our departed bards, may, by the elder part of the
community, be still considered components of a deep philosophy, or the
signs of a superior mind.” But, for this unfortunate circumstance, which
militates so much against the immediate success of his new school, he
consoles himself with the persuasion that “the young have formed
a nobler estimate of life, and a habit of reasoning, at once founded
upon a homelier sense, and yet aspiring to more elevated
conclusions.”

What this, as well as many other equally awkward sentences in this
presumptuous preface, exactly means, it is not easy to say. Our sons, on
whose admiration of his poetry, Mr. Bulwer depends for the success of
his new system, are, in order to qualify themselves for relishing its
beauties, to form a nobler estimate than we entertain of life,
while their habits of reasoning are to be founded on a homelier
sense; and yet, homely as they are to be in their reasoning, they are to
aspire to more elevated conclusions! If, indeed, such
inconsistencies are to characterize our sons; if their intellects are to
be so utterly confused and perplexed as is here predicted, they may
possibly become admirers of the new school, of which the redoubtable
satire before us is to be the origin. But we hope better things of our
posterity. We cannot think that their natural feelings will vary so very
far from our own, as to induce them to prefer insipid verbosity and
unintelligible doggerel, to the animating strains of genuine poetry, or
the sprightly wit and stinging ridicule of true satire.

Since the work which was to perform such miracles has appeared, and
has been found so egregiously to disappoint expectation, why do those
who puffed it on trust, still continue to extol it? The expression of
their favourable anticipations might be excused; for they may have
believed all that they asserted. But their eyes must now be open. The
most prejudiced, on perusing the work, must be convinced of its
imbecility as a satire, and its insipidity as a poem. Why, then, persist
in error? Complaisance to the prevailing fashion, and a desire to swim
[Pg
388]
with the current, may be the feelings which generally
prompt to such conduct. But they are poor apologies for wilfully
deceiving the public in a matter so essential to the interests of
poetical literature. The critic who knowingly recommends an undeserving
poem, ought to be aware that he is contributing to destroy the public
confidence in all new poetry; for when men find that tame and
uninteresting works are so freely recommended, they very naturally
conclude that the times produce none others worthy of
recommendation.

We should think, indeed, that experience had, by this time, taught
the world the little reliance which ought to be placed generally on
contemporary criticism, particularly that description of it usually
found in newspapers. But the wide diffusion of this species of
periodical work, gives them an influence which no experience, however
palpable, of their erroneous judgments in literary matters, has yet been
able to counteract. The public, in truth, has hitherto had its attention
but little drawn towards this subject. The fate of a new book seems to
be a matter so uninteresting to any but the author and the publisher,
that whether editors speak of it favourably or unfavourably, or pass
over it with entire neglect, is considered of no importance. It is
forgotten that good literature forms the chief and most permanent
glory of a country; that its prosperity is, therefore, of much national
value, and ought, for the public benefit, to be assiduously promoted.
But the chance of good literature being properly encouraged, will be
ever extremely small, so long as worthless productions are forced into
even temporary eclat, by those ready and often glowing commendations of
careless editors, which must always, more or less, give direction to
public patronage.

There is an erroneous opinion, unfortunately too prevalent among all
classes, that no book can become generally noticed and much praised in
the periodical works, but in consequence of its merit. To those who hold
this opinion, the system of reverberating praise from one journal to
another, must be unknown. In this country this system is, at present,
carried to a great extent. It is chiefly produced by indolence or want
of leisure, preventing our editors from carefully reading and judging
for themselves, aided by a desire which actuates many of them to be
thought fashionable in their opinions. The literary idol of the day is
generally set up in the English metropolis. Of course, the fashion of
worshipping him commences there. We soon hear of him on this side of the
ocean. We wait not to examine whether he be entitled to homage. We take
that for granted, since we are told that he is considered so in London.
With slavish obsequiousness, we hasten to follow the capricious example
of the great metropolis, and shout pæans for the fashionable [Pg
389]
idol, with as much zeal as if we really discerned in his
works merit sufficiently exalted to entitle him to such applause,
although the probability is, that, while we are bestowing it, we have
scarcely glanced over his productions.

Now all this is, on our parts, exceedingly ridiculous and irrational.
It not only exposes our servility, but it betrays our ignorance of many
of the temporary excitements in favour of certain authors and their
works, which take place in London. It shows that we are not aware of the
fact, that, in the majority of cases, the rage for a new book, is owing
to circumstances not at all connected with its merit. An influential and
enterprising publisher,—a striking or a popular subject,—a
sounding title,—a bold,—a wealthy or an eccentric
author,—and, above all, a continued series of well-managed puffs,
invariably do much more towards making a new book fashionable, than any
excellence it may possess; and the inducement to purchase it is more
frequently the knowledge that it is fashionable, than the conviction
that it is good. Hence, it is to their title-pages, rather than to their
nature or quality, that new books are mostly indebted for their
immediate success. Their permanent success—that is, their enduring
fame—is another matter. Merit, and merit only, can secure that;
for it is the result of the cool and deliberate approbation which is
awarded by the judgment of mankind, when the adventitious circumstances
which first excited attention towards the book, have passed away, and
can operate no longer on curiosity. The history of literature amply
proves this. Books have often had, for a time, great mercantile value,
and been highly profitable to the booksellers, that have been utterly
worthless in a literary point of view. Of this fact the book-dealers are
so well aware, that, rather than risk the expense of publishing the most
beautiful composition of an unknown author, they will pay largely for
manuscripts of the merest trash, from the pen of one to whom some lucky
accident has already drawn public attention. Many of our well-meaning
echoers of the London puffs of new books, are certainly ignorant of this
circumstance, or they would not lend their aid to give circulation and
temporary repute to much of the vile literature, which, under the names
of novels, poems, travels, &c. the press of London has so largely
poured forth, during the last eight or ten years, to the great
deterioration not only of the literary taste, but of the manners and
morals of the age.

It is indeed a sad mistake to suppose, that nothing but the literary
excellence of a new book, renders it saleable. Yet it is a mistake so
very general, that the booksellers find that the most effectual mode of
recommending a new work, is, to allege that it sells rapidly. Who
does not know, when a book with the reputation of being in great demand,
comes amongst us, the [Pg 390]eagerness with which it is sought
after? No matter how dull it may be, while it is considered saleable, it
is perused with delight. A thousand beauties are discovered in it, which
cool and unprepossessed judgment could never discern; and, as to faults,
although they should stare the deluded reader in the face, as thickly
and visibly as trees in a forest, he will doubt the accuracy of his own
sensations, rather than admit that he perceives them. Such, over weak
minds, is the magic influence of a fashionable name,—nay, such is
the influence, when the name is only supposed to be
fashionable.

That the work before us would sell well, at least for a season, let
its poetry be ever so bad, was to be expected, from the circumstances
under which it appeared. Its publishers, Colburn and Bentley, are now
the most fashionable in London, and are considered to possess more
influence over the periodical works, than even the magnificent Murray;
its author is a man of bustle, boldness, and notoriety, who has acquired
considerable repute as the writer of three or four novels, which got
into extensive circulation by professing, however untruly, to give
genuine and unsparing delineations of fashionable life. To speak
technically, his name was up; and, by the aid of this lucky
elevation, his active publishers could not fail to dispose of an edition
or two of his satire, in despite of its worthlessness as a literary
performance.

We have thus, we imagine, satisfactorily shown that it is possible
for a work to be, for a time, noted, saleable and fashionable, without
possessing any great share of literary merit. We may, therefore, be
allowed to deny, that the present demand for this poem, which, we
believe, will be of but brief continuance, is any evidence of its
deserving that unlimited homage which its author claims for it. That it
will ever effect the great poetical revolution which he so modestly
anticipates, we imagine that, by this time, few are more inclined to
believe, than ourselves. From its appearance, therefore, we feel no
alarm for the stability of that reputation which our favourite bards
have gained by those immortal works, to whose noble and animating
strains, the hearts of millions have so often responded!

But, it is time that we should enter into some examination of the
character of this work, and show our reasons for the disapprobation of
it as a poem and a satire, which we have so freely expressed.

It will be admitted, we presume, that, when an author does not
succeed in accomplishing his design, his work is a failure. The design
of the author of this poem was, as we are informed by the title-page, to
write a satire, has he done so? Those who are loudest in commendation of
the poem, have acknowledged its satirical portions to be feeble, and
without point. But they [Pg 391]contend that it contains a sufficiency
of good poetry of another description, to atone for this defect. We
confess that we have not been fortunate enough, after a careful perusal,
to discover this redeeming poetry. Whether it be of the sentimental,
descriptive, or ethical species, we therefore cannot tell. Perhaps it is
an ingenious mingling of them in one mass, in which the beauties of
each, conceal those of the others from view? If so, how many
disinterested readers will submit to the trouble of extricating them
from the confusion in which they lie, so as to see them distinctly, and
become fully aware of their latent splendour? We attempted, as in
duty bound, to hunt for these gems. We discovered a few that sparkled a
little,—but they were indeed so few, and their lustre so faint,
that we could not consider them worth the labour of exploring one moiety
of the abundance of rubbish in which they are buried. We believe that
the generality of readers will be equally disappointed; and that the
book will be almost invariably laid down with a feeling that it is
tedious, awkward, and dull,—in short, in respect to its
poetical as well as its satirical character, a failure without
redemption.

But the author calls it a satire. It is therefore as a satire, that
it ought to be judged. In our opinion, it is no more a satire than a
sermon; nay, we have read sermons in which the satiric thong is wielded
with much more effect against wickedness and folly, than in this
production. We need not enter into a philological explanation of the
term satire,—the word is common enough, and we presume that every
reader who understands plain English, knows its meaning. To render vice
disgusting, and folly ridiculous, is the legitimate office of the
satirist. Sarcasm and wit are his most usual and effectual weapons.
Ridicule and reprobation are also used; the former when the intention is
to excite derision, and the latter when the arousing of indignation is
the object. The great aim of the satirist ought always to be the
reformation of depraved morals, corrupt institutions, absurd customs, or
offensive manners. The contemporary prevalence of such, is what excites his
indignation, or provokes his ridicule; and, if he possesses power and
dexterity to apply the lash, he performs a real service to society, and
acquires a deserved and enviable name among the useful and agreeable
writers of the day.

Has Mr. Bulwer applied the lash in this manner? Against what vice
does he awaken the indignation of his readers, or what folly does he
expose to their contempt? We ask for information, for we have not, with
our best efforts, been able ourselves to make the discovery. It is true,
that, in the perusal of his work, we met with some awkward attempts to
be witty at the expense of Basil Hall, the Duke of Wellington, Thomas
Moore, Joseph [Pg
392]
Hume, and two or three others of the conspicuous
characters of the times. But, if satire never launches keener arrows
against these men, than are to be found in this book, we fear that,
whatever may be their faults or foibles, no dread of her power will
induce them to reform. The only feelings they can experience from the
harmless missiles of Mr. Bulwer, are pity for his vanity, and contempt
for his weakness.

There is but one passage in this long poem which contains upwards of
eight thousand lines, that deserves to be called satirical. It is in
relation to the missionary Hodges. In this some tolerable hits
are made at the union of selfishness and prejudice which too frequently
characterize the religious missionaries of all sects, who are employed
by the zeal of the wealthy and pious at home, to convert to Christianity
the heathen inhabitants of foreign countries. The missionary in
question, who is the only character in the work drawn with any power of
dramatic conception, is represented as haranguing the people of Siam on
the inferiority of their institutions to those of England, (in which, by
the by, neither Americans nor Englishmen will be apt to discover much
satire,) and threatening, in language as coarse as that of the canting
Maworm, to reform them, whether they will or not, from the evil ways of
their ancestors. We shall quote part of the passage, and as it is
unquestionably the cleverest satirical portion of the whole poem, the
friends of Mr. Bulwer cannot accuse us of doing him injustice by the
selection.—

“Accordingly our saint one day,
Into the market took his way,
Climbed on an empty tub, that o’er
Their heads he might declaim at ease,
And to the rout began to roar
In wretched Siamese.
‘Brethren! (for every one’s my fellow,
Tho’ I am white, and you are yellow,)
Brethren! I came from lands afar
To tell you all—what fools you are!
Is slavery, pray, so soft, and glib a tie,
That you prefer the chain to liberty?
Is Christian faith a melancholy tree,
That you will only sow idolatry?
Just see to what good laws can bring lands,
And hear an outline of old England’s.
Now, say if here a lord should hurt you,
Are you made whole by legal virtue?
For ills by battery or detraction,
Say, can you bring at once your action?
And are the rich not much more sure
To gain a verdict than the poor?
With us alike the poor or rich,
Peasant or prince, no matter which—
Justice to all the law dispenses,
And all it costs—are the expenses!
Here if an elephant you slay,
Your very lives the forfeit pay:
[Pg 393]
Now that’s a quid pro quo—too seri-
Ous much for beasts naturæ feræ.
     *    * 
   *    *    *

     *    * 
   *    *    *

These are the thing’s that best distinguish
men—

These make the glorious boast of Englishmen!
More could I tell you were there leisure,
But I have said enough to please, sure:
Now then if you the resolution
Take for a British constitution,
A British king, church, commons, peers—
I’ll be your guide! dismiss your fears.
With Hampden’s name and memory warm you!
And, d—n you all—but I’ll reform you!
As for the dogs that wont be free,
We’ll give it them most handsomely;
To church with scourge and halter lead ’em,
And thrash the rascals into freedom.”

This fine speech, it appears, had much the same effect on its
auditors, that we believe Mr. Bulwer’s poem will have on nine-tenths of
his readers;—it produced a sensation of disdain for the
understanding as well as the principles of its author. Under the
influence of this feeling, the men of Siam could not forbear executing a
practical joke on the orator. They elevated him in a palanquin, raised
by means of tall poles, to a great height above their heads; from which
altitude, after parading him in mock triumph through the streets of
their chief city, they, with little regard to consequences, tossed him
into the air. The poem says—

“So high he went, with such celerity,
It seemed as for some god-like merit he
Carried from earth, like great Alcides,
To Jupiter’s ambrosial side is.
But, oh! as maiden speakers break
Down when their highest flight they take;
Ev’n so, (while fearing to be crushed
Each idler from beneath him dodges),
Swift, heavy—like an avalanche—rushed
To earth the astonished form of Hodges.
He lay so flat, he lay so still,
He seemed beyond all farther ill.
They pinched his side, they shook his head,
And then they cried, ‘The man is dead!’
On this, each felt no pleasing chill;
For ev’n among the Bancockeans,
A gentleman for fun to kill,
Is mostly punished—in plebeians.
They stare—look
serious—mutter—cough—

And then, without delay, sneak off;
Nor at a house for succour knocked, or
Thought once of sending for the doctor.”

The twins, Chang and Ching, remain behind, and taking pity on the
maltreated missionary, convey him to their father’s house, which was
convenient. Here he is treated with kindness, and [Pg 394]soon
recovers of the contusions and a broken leg, occasioned by his fall.

A notable scheme now seized the fertile brain of the money loving
missionary. The lusus naturæ which connected the bodies of the
twins, he conceived would render their exhibition profitable in England.
He obtained the consent of their father to carry them to Europe, by
stipulating to allow them one-half of the earnings of their exhibition.
The acquiescence of the youths themselves he easily procured by
inflaming their curiosity to witness the glory and happiness of England,
which he described in the most glowing terms of national panegyric.

The twins, however, resolved to consult one of the magicians of the
country relative to the result of their intended enterprise, before they
should commit themselves to the care of an absolute stranger who was to
convey them so far from home. The account of this consultation—the
temple of the magician—his manner of consulting the fates, and the
mystical style of his addressing the twins, form by much the most
fanciful and readable portion of the book, and would certainly entitle
the author to some credit for wild and weird conceptions, were it not
for the unfortunate circumstance, that the whole is a palpable imitation
of the celebrated incantation scene in Der Freischutz. It is also
infested with the besetting sin of the whole poem, prolixity. Mr. Bulwer
too plainly shows in this work, that he is a bookmaker by profession,
and if the faculty of hammering a given number of ideas into as many
words as possible, be a useful branch of the craft, it is one in which
he has assuredly few competitors.

The arrival of Hodges and the twins in London, is at length announced
in the newspapers, and then begins what the author unquestionably
intended should be the principal business of the poem—namely, the
quizzing of London life and manners—or to use his own phrase,
satirizing the times. The idea of bringing Oriental strangers to Europe
in order to exhibit their surprise at witnessing customs and manners
totally different from those of their own country, is rather stale, and
the humour of it, if there be any humour in it, has been exhausted by
much finer writers than Mr. Bulwer has as yet shown himself to be.
Various essayists, both of France and England, have had recourse to this
method of exposing the vices and absurdities of their respective
countries. Turkish spies, Persian envoys, and Chinese philosophers, have
all been brought into requisition for this purpose. No novelty,
therefore, can be claimed for the employment of our Siamese adventurers
on such trodden ground. It is, indeed, sufficiently apparent, that the
idea of making them a vehicle for satire upon the English, was suggested
by Goldsmith’s Citizen of the World. To try his strength with such a
writer as [Pg
395]
Goldsmith, especially in the walks of satire, was at
least courageous on the part of Bulwer; and if any circumstance could,
in our estimation, atone for his woful failure, it would be the
hardihood which induced him to make the attempt. We believe no reader
ever became wearied of perusing Goldsmith’s Citizen of the World. But
how any reader can toil through this Siamese production, without
becoming exhausted, we own is beyond our comprehension.

In London, the twins meet with various adventures, which, no doubt,
the author intended should be extremely amusing to the reader. To us
they appear extremely jejune and silly. For instance, Lady Jersey sends
one of them a ticket of admission to Almacks, without recollecting to
pay the same compliment to the other. On appearing for entrance, the
door-keeper refuses to admit him who had been neglected. This obstacle,
of course, prevents the other from availing himself of his right to
enter. Lady Cowper, however, very soon sets all right by furnishing them
with another ticket. Now what there is either facetious or satirical in
this, we confess we cannot conceive. Equally silly is the incident of
the one brother being seized by a recruiting sergeant who had enlisted
him, while the other is arrested by a bailiff for debt. But as the
brothers cannot be separated, they get clear, the recruiting officer not
daring to carry off Ching who had not enlisted, and the bailiff being
equally afraid of the consequence of imprisoning Chang against whom he
had no writ—an old joke.

Now such bungling inventions appear to us insufferable. In the first
place, there is no emotion whatever, either of surprise, merriment, or
pity, awakened by the narrative, and in the next, the occurrences are so
contrary to all probability, that even poetical license, in its fullest
range, will not sanction their introduction. The deformity of the twins
would render either of them ineligible to be enlisted. The bailiff’s
writ might, it is true, authorize the arrest of one only; but even that
is inconsistent with the statement previously made that their earnings
and expenses were all in common. We should suppose, therefore, that no
creditor would make such an invidious distinction between partners so
closely connected. These inconsistencies, however, might be pardoned, if
the stories were told with sufficient sprightliness and vigour to make
them interesting. But when an ill-contrived tale is drowsily told, the
reader must possess an immense fund of good nature not to scold the
author in his heart.

We shall pass over the rest of these dull adventures, which rebuke no
vice, and satirize no folly, and shall give a very brief outline of the
remainder of the poem. The brothers, unlike [Pg 396]the real twins from
whom the title of the poem is borrowed, are represented as of entirely
different characters. Chang’s disposition is grave, contemplative, and
sentimental, while Ching is light-hearted, gay, and volatile. Their
protector, Hodges, has a handsome daughter, with whom the meditative
Chang falls in love; but, without any apparent cause, he imagines that
she has given her heart to Ching. He becomes exceedingly jealous, and
absurdly enough, considering the nature of their connexion, meditates
the murder of his brother. He however discovers his mistake in time to
prevent the deed, and feels a reasonable share of remorse. In the
meantime, Mary, the lady in question, who commiserates their condition,
contrives, while they are asleep, to introduce a surgeon and his
assistant, who successfully cut through the connecting bond of flesh,
and, to the great joy of Chang, who had long felt much mortification at
the unnatural union, they are separated. Chang now cherishes strong
hopes of becoming acceptable to Mary, which are destined soon to be
blasted for ever. By an incident which detracts much from the
sentimental dignity with which he has been hitherto invested, for it
represents him as an eavesdropper, he discovers that she is irrevocably
engaged to her cousin, who is called Julian Laneham. This discovery
arouses him to a certain fit of magnanimity. He understands that Mary’s
father objects to her union with Laneham, on account of the young man’s
poverty. He suddenly disappears; and four days afterwards, two letters
are received, one by Hodges, and one by Ching, which, as the author
says, “shows the last dénouement of the story.” The public
curiosity had rendered the brothers rich; and in his letter to Hodges,
Chang generously bestows on him his share of their property, on
condition that he will give his daughter to Laneham.

The old gentlemen agrees to the compact; and if the reader should
have patience enough to carry him so far through the book, he will,
towards its conclusion, be rewarded with a marriage, according to the
old established laws of romance writing. Why did Mr. Bulwer so far
forget the “originality of matter and of manner,” in other words, the
new school of poetry, which he promised us in the preface, as to put us
off with so trite a conclusion?

In a passage towards the close of the poem, the indomitable egotism
of our author appears, in a curious allusion which he makes to the
failure of his efforts to become a member of parliament at the last
general election. His hero Laneham, for he is the true hero of the work,
had been a more successful candidate for the people’s favour. The poet
says, without jealousy, we presume,—

[Pg 397]
“Moreover in the late election
He won a certain Burgh’s affection.
Dined—drank—made love to wife and daughter,

Poured ale and money forth like water,
And won St. Stephen’s Hall to hear
This parliament may last a year!
The sire’s delight you’ll fancy fully—
He thinks he sees a second Tully;
And gravely says he will dispense
With Fox’s force and Brinsley’s wit,
So that our member boast the sense
Of that great statesmen—Pilot Pitt!
For me, my hope lies somewhat deeper;
We’ll now, they say, be governed cheaper!
So Julian, pour your wrath on robbing,
And keep a careful eye on jobbing.
If you should waver in your choice
To whom to pledge your vote and voice,
You’ll waver only, we presume,
Between an Althorpe and a Hume.
But mind—one
vote—o’er all you hold,

And let the Ballot conquer
Gold.

Don’t utterly forget those asses,—
Ridden so long,—the lower classes;
But waking from sublimer visions,
Just see, poor things! to their provisions.
Let them for cheap bread be your debtor,
Cheap justice, too—that’s almost better.
And though not bound to either College,
Don’t clap a turnpike on their knowledge.
     *    * 
   *    *    *

And ne’er forget this simple rule, boy,
Time is an everlasting schoolboy,
And as his trowsers he outgoes,
Be decent, nor begrudge him clothes.
     *    * 
   *    *    *

In these advices towards your policy,
Many, dear Julian, will but folly see;
Yet what I preach to you to act is
But what had been your author’s practice,
Had the mercurial star that beams
Upon elections blessed his dreams,
Had—but we ripen with delay,
And every dog shall have his day!”

From the last couplet, it appears, that our author has not yet
relinquished his expectations of being gratified with a seat in St.
Stephens.

In the following concluding lines, which succeed those we have just
quoted, the Twins are finally disposed of. We insert them here as a
notable instance of long efforts to kindle a blaze, at last dying away
in the suffocation of their own smoke.—

“And Ching?—poor fellow!—Ching can never
His former spirits quite recover;
Yet he’s agreeable as ever,
And plays the C——k as a lover.
[Pg 398]In every place he’s vastly fêted,
His name’s in every lady’s book;
And as a wit I hear he’s rated
Between the Rogers’s and Hook.
But Chang?—of him was known no more,
Since, Corsair like, he left the shore.
Wrapped round his fate the cloud unbroken,
Will yield our guess nor clew nor token.
He runs unseen his lonely race,
And if the mystery e’er unravels
The web around the wanderer’s trace—
I fear we scarce could print his travels.
Since tourists every where have flocked,
The market’s rather overstocked—
And so we leave the lands that need ’em
Throughout this ‘dark terrestrial ball,’
To be well visited by freedom,—
And slightly nibbled at by Hall!”

Art. VI.—Europe and America; or, the
relative state of the Civilized World at a future period. Translated
from the German of
Dr. C. F. Von
Schmidt-Phiseldek
, Doctor of Philosophy, one of his Danish
Majesty’s Counsellors of State, Knight of Dannebrog, &c. &c.

By Joseph Owen. Copenhagen: 1820.

Although the translator of this book professes in his
Preface to have been principally induced to undertake the task by “the
desire of being the humble instrument of imparting to the American
nation, that picture of future grandeur and happiness, which the author
so prophetically holds out to them,” we believe it is but little known
among the readers of this country. Yet it is in every respect a very
interesting and curious work. It will be seen by the title-page, that it
was not only translated into, but printed in English, at Copenhagen,
with the view of disseminating a knowledge of its contents among the
people of the United States. Yet we do not recollect that it was noticed
at the time of its publication in any of our critical journals, and the
only copy that has ever fallen under our notice is that now before us,
which has been in our possession many years. Nevertheless, it is the
work of a man of very extensive views, and of deep sagacity. His
speculations on the state of the different kingdoms of Europe, in
relation to the past and the present, seem to us equally just and
profound; and the predictions which ten years ago the author announced
to the world, are every day, nay, almost every hour, becoming matters of
history.

It has been said, and said reproachfully, that the people of the
United States are somewhat boastful and presumptuous. One [Pg
399]
reason doubtless is, that they have had to bear up on one
hand against much obloquy and injustice, and on the other against
certain airs of affected superiority on the part of the nations of
Europe, equally offensive. Those who are perpetually assailed, are
perpetually called upon to defend themselves; and what in other cases
would be an offensive pretension, is, in ours, simply self-defence. It
is not boasting, but a manly assertion of what is due to ourselves, in
reply to those who take from us what is our right. But even if the
charge of national pride were true, we are among those who rather
approve than lament it. National pride is a commendable and manly
feeling; it is the parent of virtue and greatness—the foundation
of a noble character; and if the nation which has led the way in the
bright path of freedom—which, young as it is, has become already
the beacon, the example, the patriarch of the struggling nations of the
world—has not a fair right to be proud, we know not on what basis
national pride ought to erect itself.

For these reasons, we feel no hesitation in calling the attention of
the people of the United States, to a work eminently calculated to
awaken the most lofty anticipations of the destiny which awaits them.
Nothing but good can come of such contemplations of the future. They
will serve to impress upon the nation the necessity of being prepared
for such high destiny; of fitting herself to maintain it with honour and
dignity; of attaching herself, heart and hand, body and soul, to that
sacred union of opinions, interests, and reflections, which alone can
lead us steadily onward in the path of prosperity, happiness, and
glory.

“The 4th of July in the year 1776,” observes Dr.
Von Schmidt, “points out the commencement of a new period in the history
of the world. Not provoked to resistance by the intolerable oppression
of tyrannical power, but merely roused by the arbitrary encroachments
upon well earned, and hitherto publicly acknowledged principles, the
people of the United States of North America declared themselves on that
memorable day independent of the dominion of the British Islands,
generally speaking mild and benevolent in itself, and under which they
had hitherto stood as colonies, in a state, not of slavish servitude,
but of partial guardianship, under the protection of the mother
country.”

The author has here marked the nice and peculiar feature which
distinguishes the American Revolution from all others, and confers on it
a degree of philosophical dignity. It was not a ferment arising from
momentary impatience of existing and operating hardships; nor the result
of extensive distresses pressing upon a large mass of the nation. When
the people of the United Colonies rose in resistance to the mother
country, they were in possession of a greater portion of all the useful
means of happiness, than the mother country itself. It was not therefore
a revolution originating in the belly, but the head; it was a revolution
brought about by principles, not by distresses. The early emigrants to
the new world, [Pg 400]brought these principles with them from
England;—every year added to their strength, and every accession
of strength, brought the crisis nearer to maturity. The annals of each
one of the colonies, exhibit every where evidence of the existence of
this leaven of freedom, which was perpetually rising and agitating the
surface; and, although like the eruption of a volcano, it broke forth at
first in one particular spot, it was only from accidental causes. The
whole interior was equally in a ferment, and the boiling mass must have
forced a vent somewhere, and soon. It had long been evident, that,
wherever the pressure should be greatest, there would be the point of
resistance.

That the American revolution, though unquestionably precipitated, was
not produced by a sudden excitement originating in any particular
measure of the British government, we think must appear to all those who
read with attention the early records of our colonial history. As long
ago as the year 1635, representations were made to the government of
England, touching the disloyalty of the people of Massachusetts.

“The Archbishop of Canterbury,” says Hutchinson,
“the famous High Churchman Laud, kept a jealous eye over New England.
One Burdett of Piscataqua, was his correspondent. A copy of a letter to
the Archbishop, wrote by Burdett, was found in his study, and to this
effect: ‘That he delayed going to England, that he might freely inform
himself of the state of the place as to allegiance, for it was
not new discipline which was aimed at, but sovereignty; and that
it was accounted perjury and treason in their general court, to speak of
appeals to the king.'”[4]

But to return to the immediate subject before us. Dr. Von
Schmidt-Phiseldek, after stating the result of this declaration in the
establishment of our independence, proceeds to notice the second war
between the United States and England, in which the former successfully
maintained the positions she had assumed, as the grounds of
hostility:

“By these occurrences,” he says, “which we have
only cursorily touched upon, the North American confederacy had tried
her strength, preserved her dignity by the rejection of illegal
pretensions, and vigorously proved and maintained her right as an active
member in the scale of nations, to take part in the grand affairs of the
civilized world. From that moment, the impulse to a new change of
events, ceased to proceed exclusively from the old continent, and it is
possible that in a short time it will emanate from the new one.

The author then proceeds to deduce the attempts of the South American
Provinces, which, however, at that period, had not been consummated,
from the example of North America, which had inspired them with the
desire of emancipation:

“This word, as intimating the resistance of a
people feeling themselves at maturity, to their wonted tutelage, and
desirous of taking upon themselves the management of their own affairs,
most suitably expresses the spirit of the times, which, being called
to light in 1776, has spread itself over the new and old world
.”

[Pg
401]
Having indicated his belief, that the South American
States will acquire independence, Dr. Von Schmidt-Phiseldck gives it as
his opinion, “that the similitude of their constitutional forms, and an
equal interest in rejecting the European powers, will unite these new
states in a close compact with the North American confederacy; and, if a
quarter of a century only elapsed before North America began to act
externally with vigour, it may be presumed that the younger states of
the Southern Continent, endowed with more ample resources, and more
ancient culture, will require a shorter period to arrive at a state of
respectable force.”

Having traced a rapid sketch of the situation and prospects of the
new world, the author next turns his attention to the old governments of
Europe, of which he gives a masterly analysis:

“The new spirit which had been called to life on the other side of
the Atlantic, and the universal fermentation it caused, happened at a
period in which the most excessive laxity reigned predominant on the old
continent. The political existence of the people was for the most part
extinguished; their active industry had been directed abroad, and the
governments finding no opposition or dangerous collisions internally,
followed with the stream. Commerce, exportations, colonial systems,
every means of acquiring money, were cherished and
protected,—riches presenting the only possibility of investing the
low with consideration and influence, and the high with power and
inordinate dominion. The maxims by which the nations were governed, lay
less in the ground pillars of an existing constitution, than in the
changeable systems of the cabinets, and the character of their rulers;
there remained, for the most part, nothing for the great body of the
people, but to be spectators.

“Germany, the grand heart of Europe, presented now nothing more than
the shadow of a political body united in one common confederacy; the
imperial governments, as also the administration of the federal laws,
were without energy, and united efforts to repel invasions from abroad,
had not been witnessed since the fear of Turkish power had ceased to
operate. The larger states had outgrown their obedience, and often
ranged themselves in opposition to the head, which was scarcely able to
protect either itself or the weaker states against injuries.

“The internal affairs of the individual vassal states, were
exclusively conducted according to the will of their regents; the energy
and importance of the representative popular states, were become
dormant, and the standing armies which had been introduced by degrees
even into the smallest principalities, since the peace of Westphalia,
being perfectly foreign to the hearts and dispositions of the people,
threw an astonishing weight into the scale of unlimited sovereignty.
Being mercenary soldiers recruited from every nation, modelled upon a
system of subordination, and raised by Frederick of Prussia to the
highest pitch of perfection, they had been accomplices in diffusing this
system of despotism over all the relations of the state, and in
leaving the people who were freed from military services, nothing but
the acquisition of gain
.

“Agriculture, agreeably to the direction given it, had been improved,
and with a population increased; industry supported by the progress of
the mechanical arts, had also been considerably extended. But each
separate state had its own little jealous feelings of aggrandisement,
its own petty internal policy, viewing its neighbour with a jealous eye;
and the whole of Germany never reaped any beneficial result from a
system, which, had it been general, would have conduced highly to the
wealth and power of the confederated states, of which it was composed.
All these various institutions, at the same time that they conflicted
with each other, were reared on loose foundations, and it was evident
must fall together, on the first external shock,—circumstances
like these were incapable of producing an universal national character.
There, where no reciprocal [Pg 402]tie binds the individuals of a state
together, who, living under the equal laws of one community, ought to
form one solid whole, the spirit of the nation loses itself in different
directions; the attainment of individual welfare is possible in such a
state of things, but never will a sense of what is universally good and
great, be promoted.

“If in Germany,” proceeds the author, “where the imperial crown
represented a mere shadow, deprived of power and consequence, the mighty
vassals were all; in France the crown was every thing, after it had
subdued the powerful barons of the country. The people represented,
indeed, one body, but were deprived, like the several German states, of
all political weight, and were arbitrarily subjected to every impulse of
the government. The same was the case with Spain and Portugal, where
religious intolerance more powerfully suppressed every utterance of
contrary opinions, and every doctrine which might lead to a deviation
from the maxims of the state, so intimately connected with those of the
priesthood. The latter, chained since Methuen’s celebrated treaty, to
the monopoly of England from
which it had vainly attempted to free itself under Pombal’s
administration, was nearly sunk to the condition of a British colony
working its gold mines in the Brazils for the benefit of the proud
islanders.

“Italy, parcelled out amongst different powers, presented upon the
whole, the same political aspect as Germany, only with this difference,
that it was totally divested of the shadow of unity, which the latter at
least appeared to present. Upper, and a great part of middle Italy,
being dismembered, were entirely subservient to foreign impulse. The
lower part, with the fertile island on the other side of the Pharos,
presented, to be sure, since 1735, the outward appearance of one
national whole, but was too weak to withstand the fate of the more
powerful Bourbon families, from which, according to treaties, it had
derived its sovereigns. There reigned in the papal state alone, which
could not derive its weight from its worldly sovereignty, but from the
spiritual supremacy of its ruler, the ancient maxims of the Romish
pontificate, with the economical state faults of a clerical government.
But the consideration and the power of the former were visibly sunk; the
journeys of the pope of that period to Vienna, were like the
contemporary ones of the Hierarch of Thibet to China, rather
prejudicial, than favourable to spiritual dignity; and the faulty
internal administration of the state seemed to invite every attempt at
innovation. The republics on the east and the west of the Adriatic Gulf,
were, since the rise of the other great naval states, only the ruins of
past glory, sinking daily into insignificance. But notwithstanding this,
neither was the image of former greatness blotted from their memories,
nor a proper feeling for it extinguished in the minds of the inhabitants
of the luxuriant peninsula. The pride of the more noble, fed itself on
the sublime remains of lionian antiquity; and the monuments of the
golden age of the family of Medicis indemnified a people given to the
arts, and full of imagination for the loss of present grandeur, and kept
up a lively anticipation of a better futurity, founded on the merits of
its ancestors.

“Helvetia, hemmed in between Italy, Germany, and France, by its
mountains, continued in the peaceable enjoyment of its liberties through
the respect its venerable age had universally diffused. Nevertheless,
the disturbances at Geneva, and the increased spirit of emigration, were
sufficient to indicate that a people who become indifferent to the
present order of things, would willingly have recourse to a system of
innovation, and that the ancient ties which had held the Swiss nation so
many centuries together, were gradually relaxing.

“The dissolution of the existing form of government, in the
north-western Netherlands, which ought never to have been separated from
the German corporation, was more visibly approaching. The unwieldiness
of their disorganized union had no remedy to administer to the decline
of their commerce, and naval power, which became more and more felt,
being a natural consequence of the daily concentration of the larger
states; and it was evident that the fate of the republic would be
decided by a blow from abroad.

“The British islands, at that time the only country in Europe which
united under a monarchical head, moderate, but on that account more
solid principles of freedom, with an equal balance of the different
powers of the state, were at [Pg 403]the commencement of the American
disturbances in a progressive state of the most flourishing prosperity.
For this happy condition they were indebted to their freedom and
eligible commercial situation, together with the inexhaustible treasures
nature had deposited in their mines of coal and iron, on the existence
of which the industry of their diligent inhabitants is principally
founded. Political ebullition existed in no higher degree than was
necessary to give proper life, and less, perhaps, than was necessary to
preserve it in all its purity, a constitution which, long since acquired
after the most bloody struggles, was more deeply rooted in the modes of
thinking, and in the manners and customs of the nation, than it was
imprinted on them by the letter of the law. The government had
sufficient leisure to direct its attention abroad, and by means of
hostile enterprises, and political treaties, which must sooner or later
give a naval power a decided ascendency, held out a helping hand to the
commercial spirit of the people who aimed at making (and with increasing
hopes of success) the remainder of the world tributary to it, for the
productions of its fabrics and manufactures.

“The plan of supporting commerce upon territorial acquisitions, and
of forming an empire out of the conquered provinces of India, whose
treasures should flow back to the queen of cities on the Thames, was
already fully developed, and the exasperation against the western
colonies was to be attributed as much to a mistaken commercial interest
as to a spirit for dominion. The ingredients of the British national
character, ever more coldly repulsive than amiable or attractive in its
nature, had produced an almost universal antipathy not alone of the
public mind, but also of the individual affections, against a people in
so many points of view so highly respectable, and being unceasingly fed
by that envy which every species of superiority involuntarily creates,
produced the most conspicuous influence in the development of subsequent
events.”

The author then proceeds to notice the proceedings of Russia,
Austria, and Prussia, in relation to Poland, until its final
dismemberment in 1795:

“It is unnecessary,” he says in conclusion, “to
give a further exposition of the leading principles of the three courts
which began this work of annihilation, and still persevered in it,
contrary to the solemn stipulations of treaties lately entered into,
just at the moment when a new constitution, enthusiastically received,
had offered every guaranty of security, the want of which had served to
give an air of legitimacy to the first spoliations. External
aggrandisement in the acquisition of territory and population, and
internal considerations, so far as they afforded means of attaining the
object in view, are, in short, the features of these unnatural
principles. This economical digestion of an administration merely of
things, not persons, may be termed excellent in its kind. Taken in this
point of view, the Prussian government gave the most splendid proofs of
the beneficial results which may be attained by military organization.
Austria and Russia had followed this example; and it required later
events to prove, that the calculation is not always correct, that a
standing army, forming a state within the state, is the only support and
rallying point of a government, and that no system is safe, but that
which is founded on the internal strength and unanimity of the
people
.”

Having sketched the political situation of Europe, at the
commencement of the American revolution, the author proceeds to notice
the interference of France and Spain;—the situation in which the
colonies of North America were left after the acknowledgment of their
independence;—the adoption of the new constitution;—the
extraordinary prosperity which followed;—the immense acquisitions
of territory, and the accession of wealth and numbers. He then traces
the effects produced in Europe, and most especially in France, by a
participation in the struggle [Pg 404]between England and her colonies, and
the contemplation of their subsequent prosperity and happiness. The
spirit of emancipation was caught from the new, and was fast spreading
itself over the old world. This spirit first produced its practical
effects in France, whence it reached England, and almost all the states
on the continent of Europe, begetting a revolution of ideas at least, if
not leading to the revolution of governments, as it did in France.

The spirit of conquest which was perhaps forced upon France, by the
necessity of giving to the enemies of the new order of things,
employment at home, in order to prevent their interference abroad, was
fatal to the beneficial results of the revolution. The rapid conquests
achieved by Napoleon, drew the eyes and hearts of a people fond of
glory, and full of a military spirit, from their internal affairs, to
foreign conquests; and, while they were subduing a world, they were
themselves subdued by the same power. Then came the empire of Napoleon;
the confederacy of nations,—not merely of kings and their armies,
but of nations, instigated partly by their own wrongs, and partly by the
promises of their rulers, to rise in mass, and do what neither their
kings nor their armies had been able to perform. It was the people of
Europe that at length overthrew Napoleon.

When, after this great event, it became necessary to reorganize
Europe, which had been cast from its ancient moorings, by the gigantic
power, and gigantic mind of the child of democracy, who had devoured his
mother, there arose a schism between the people and their sovereigns.
The former expected the fulfilment of those promises, which the latter
had made in the hour of extreme peril, in order to rouse them to
effectual resistance against the French. These promises in Germany,
Prussia, the Netherlands, &c. consisted principally in the
establishment of representative governments, which would leave the
sovereign in possession of a hereditary power, checked by a body elected
by the people. On the other hand, the sovereigns, unmindful of the
preservation of their thrones, which they owed to the people,
refused to fulfil their solemn stipulations. In the hour of success,
they as usual forgot the hour of adversity, and insisted upon the
unconditional re-establishment, if not of old boundaries, at least of
the old political regime. Hence we may trace the origin of what is
called seriously by some, in derision and scorn by others, the Holy
Alliance
, which originated in the fears and the weakness of kings,
who, being unable to maintain singly their antiquated pretensions at
home, sought in a close union of policy and interests, the means of
doing that, which each one alone was inadequate to achieve. By this
alliance, Europe was dismembered—millions of acres, and millions
[Pg
405]
of people, were parcelled out among the different
sovereigns, and the balance of Europe was either believed, or affected
to be believed, restored by placing whole nations under a dominion which
they abhorred. It is obvious that such an unnatural state of things
could endure only while cemented by a mutual fear of the powers which
had constituted it; which fear would subside immediately, or very soon
after the dissolution of the great confederacy. A large portion of
Europe had been fermenting for nearly fifteen years, under the
oppressions of this union of despots, and the moment of its separation,
would naturally be that of the downfall of the system they had attempted to impose on
mankind. But we are anticipating our brief analysis of the work before
us:

“After twenty-three years of blood and revolution,”
continues the author, “Louis was again seated on the throne of his
forefathers, and the principles of monarchy seemed firmly established in
Europe. But the principle of government was in reality no longer the old
one, and the spirit of the relation in which the ruled stood to the
rulers, although it had not yet been brought to light in visible forms,
and specified limits, was materially changed. Mutual struggles of kings
and their people against foreign aggression, and mutual sufferings in
consequence of the division between the people and their rulers, the
latter of whom owed esteem and acknowledgment for services rendered by
the former, laid the foundation of a relation between them mutually more
honourable. For centuries, indeed, the monarchs of Europe had not been
identified and interwoven with their people; nor had they shared as now,
the privations and humiliations, the domestic and public calamities, of
the nations they governed; nor had they fought by their sides, and
conquered by their efforts, as they had lately done in the late stormy
period of the world.”

Mutual suffering had taught them to feel a community of interests
they had not before recognised. Calamity brings all ranks to a level,
and the monarch exiled from his throne, can sympathise with the peasant
driven from his hovel.

In this state of feelings, one would suppose Europe might have
reposed in peace. But the elements of internal discord, lay buried
deeply in her bosom, and the internal relations of the different powers
had been so altered, as to present ample materials for dissension
abroad. With the necessity of appealing to the patriotism of their
people, by promises of privileges and immunities, expired the disposition to comply with them.
This breach of faith, produced on one hand indignation and discontent,
on the other, jealousy and apprehension. The discontents of the people,
caused their rulers to depend more on the support of their standing
armies, than on the attachment of their subjects, and these armies were
accordingly augmented to such an extent, that the unfortunate people
were at length impoverished by the very means used in enslaving them. At
this moment, nearly the whole of Europe, including the British islands,
constitutes a mass of military governments. Every where the civil power
is inadequate to the preservation of order, the [Pg 406]enforcement of
obedience to the king and the laws, and every where a standing army
under some form or other presides over the opinions and actions of the
people. Hence results the curious and ominous, not to say awful
spectacle of the rights of property at the mercy of a mob; and on the
other hand, the rights of person, the liberties of the citizen, subject
to the arbitrary domination of the bayonet. At this moment, such is the
state of every monarchy in Europe.

Such a juxtaposition of kings and their people, must of necessity
alienate them from each other every day; and thus by degrees, the
feeling of loyalty towards the one, and of parental affection towards
the other, will be finally extinguished in mutual fears and mutual
injuries, that will for ever disturb their repose, until the people are
either perfectly satisfied, or totally subdued.

Another fruitful source of the discontents now agitating all Europe,
is the state of the labouring classes, not only manufacturing but
agricultural. The means of producing the necessaries and luxuries of
life have been multiplied by the increase of paper capital and
artificial expedients, until the supply exceeds the demand, and the
price of labour, even where labour can be procured, bears no proportion
to the price of bread. During fifteen years of peace, America and Europe
have augmented their powers of supplying their own wants and those of
the rest of the world, by means of improvements in arts, sciences,
machinery, &c., to an extent which cannot be estimated. The whole
world is glutted with the products of machinery, and exactly in the
proportion that these increase upon us, is the increase of the poverty
of the labouring classes. Millions of people in Europe, the largest
proportion of whom are inhabitants of the richest country in the world,
and one producing the greatest quantity of the results of industry, want
bread, because they either have no employment, or their wages will not
obtain it for them. Let political economists reason as they will, this
is the state of the labouring classes of Europe, and this state is
aggravated precisely in the proportion that the facility of supplying
the necessities and luxuries of life by artificial means is
increased.

The cause of this singular state of things to us is sufficiently
obvious. The powers of wealth, the force of example, opinion, authority,
laws, of every concentrated influence that can be brought to bear upon
human affairs, have, all combined, been directed to a reduction of the
price of labour, and consequently to diminishing the consumption of the
products of human industry; for the great mass of mankind have nothing
but the fruits of their labour to offer in exchange for those products
which are necessary to their subsistence and comfort. In vain may it be
[Pg
407]
urged, as we have seen it done repeatedly, and most
especially in an address of a clergyman of England to the labouring
classes of that country—in vain may it be urged, that the decrease
of the price of labour has been met by a corresponding decrease in the
price of the necessaries of life, and that, therefore, the labouring
classes are no worse off, nay better off, than before the vast increase
of machinery either threw them out of employment, or forced them to
labour for almost nothing. This comfortable gentleman, who, we
understand, has a good fat living, and will probably be made a bishop if
he can only stop the mouths of the sufferers with reasons instead of
bread, asks these poor people if they don’t get their hats, shoes,
&c. one half cheaper in consequence of the perfection of machinery,
the improvements of the arts, &c. But he takes care not to ask them
if the difficulty of earning this half price is not increased in a much
greater proportion, in consequence of the diminution of their wages, and
whether bread, meat, beer, and all the essentials of human existence,
are not enhanced rather than diminished in price. We could illustrate
the theory of the reverend gentleman, by an honest matter of fact story,
which we can vouch for, as it happened to a near relative of ours.

He had a gardener named Dennis, an honest fellow, full of simplicity,
and a dear lover of Old Ireland, as all Irishmen are, at home or abroad.
One day he was dilating with much satisfaction on the difference between
the price of potatoes in this country and Ireland. “In Ireland, your
honour, now I could git more nor a barrel of potatoes for a pishtareen,
but here it costs as much as a dollar and a half.” The gentleman asked
him good naturedly why he did not remain where potatoes were so cheap.
Dennis considered a moment, and answered with the characteristic
frankness of his country—”why to tell your honour the honest
truth, though the potatoes were so cheap, I never could get the
pishtareen to buy them.”

Here is the solution of the whole enigma. Every thing is cheap we
will say; but labour, which is the only equivalent a large mass of
mankind have to offer for every thing, is cheaper than all. Evident, as
we think this will appear, still it seems to have no influence on those
who govern mankind. And how should it? Their emoluments, their means of
expenditure, are derived, not from their own physical labour, but the
labours of others. The cheaper they can procure this, the deeper they
can revel in luxuries. With them, the relative proportion between the
remuneration of toil, and the means of living is nothing. Hence the
rulers of nations, hence capitalists, and all the brood of monopolists,
are stirring their energies abroad, to increase the supply of the
products of labour, at the same time that they take from the labourer
the due rewards of his labours, and thus prevent [Pg 408]the
consumption of the vast accession of manufactures, &c. occasioned by
the increase and perfection of machinery. Inanimate powers are daily
substituted for human hands, and productions continue to multiply in an
equal ratio. This is a benefit to a single nation, while it possesses
all the advantages of superiority, and is enabled to supply a portion of
the rest of the world. But when other nations, as is the case now, adopt
the same system, and avail themselves of the same means of supply, a
glut takes place in the market, at home and abroad, and poverty and
distress among the labourers are the inevitable consequence.

Such seem to us the principal elements of combustion now at work in
Europe. Political disgust, and physical distresses are co-operating with
each other, and in order to quiet these disturbances, it is not only
necessary to give them more liberty, but more bread. But to return once
more to the speculations of our author,

“If we turn our view to the present state of
agriculture,” continues Dr. Von Schmidt, “in many countries of Europe,
it will appear evident, that even the paternal soil in many districts,
is becoming too confined to afford nourishment to those who have
remained faithful to its bosom. If in the mountainous countries, as for
example, in the west and south of France, on the Alps, and along the
Rhine, every spot is occupied, and the very earth and manure have for
centuries been carried aloft upon the naked rock attended with the most
boundless labour, in order to furnish soil for the vine, the olive, and
for the different species of cerelia, and at present no further room
exists for a more extended cultivation; it is not possible for a more
numerous growing generation to find nourishment in these districts,
whose productions are not susceptible of increasing progression. The too
frequent practice of parcelling out common lands, and large estates,
originally beneficial in itself, has produced similar consequences in
other states. It was undoubtedly a wise and humane plan to transform
commons, and extensive pastures into fruitful fields, and by dividing
large estates which their owners could not overlook, into smaller lots,
thus ensure more abundant crops, and an increasing population, by a more
careful cultivation. But if, as is the case at the present day, in many
places, useful lands have been split into so many small independent
possessions, as to render it hardly possible for families occupying
them, to subsist in the most penurious manner, by cultivating them;
whence, then, is sustenance to be obtained for their more numerous
posterity, and from what source is the state to derive its taxes? It is
evident, that this condition of things must lead to the most poignant
distress, and that a breadless multitude, either driven by irretrievable
debts from their paternal huts, or voluntarily forsaking them on account
of an inadequate maintenance, will turn their backs upon their country;
and it may be considered a fortunate resource if they, as has frequently
occurred in later times, carry with them the vigour of their strength to
the free states of America, which stand in need of no one thing but
human hands, to raise them to the highest degree of prosperity. Those
governments in which such an unnatural distension of the state of
society prevails, ought not, most assuredly, for their own advantage,
and for the sake of humanity, by any means to throw obstacles in the
way, but rather favour such emigration, and render it easy and
consolatory for all, since they have it not in their power to offer a
better remedy for their present misery. By doing this, they will prevent
dangerous ebullitions and unruly disaffections of a distressed and
overgrown population; they will lighten the number of poor which is
increasing to a most alarming extent, and put an end to that angry state
of abjectness and misery which is felt by every honest heart, and under which thousands have sunk
down, who, with numerous families in hovels of wretchedness, prolong
their existence [Pg 409]upon more scanty means than the most
common domestic animals, and who appear only to be gifted with reason in
order to be more sensible to their forlorn and pitiable fate.”

From the foregoing premises, the author deduces the conclusion, that
the free states of North America will increase in population more
rapidly than any other country has ever done, partly from emigration,
and partly from the unequalled facility of obtaining the comforts of
life, by which the numbers of mankind are regulated. The people, equally
free from political oppression, and the evils of abject poverty, such as
scanty nourishment, and crowded habitations, will at first make a rapid
progress in the useful, and subsequently, in the elegant arts, and more
abstract sciences. The freedom of their institutions will continually
offer every stimulus to the development of the features of independence,
and animate that spirit of intelligence, which always increases in
proportion to the freedom with which the human faculties are exercised.
Thence he proceeds to the supposition, that the states of South America
having attained to independence, will establish constitutional
governments similar to those of the North, whose example first
stimulated them to resistance to the mother country,—that this
similarity will naturally produce a close union of interest and policy
among all the states of the Western Continent, and that such a union
will give a death blow to the colonial system of Europe, at no distant
period.

The discovery and colonization of America, led to consequences which
re-modelled all Europe; and her emancipation from European thraldom
will, in like manner, force upon that portion of the world a new state
of things. Europe, in her present situation, cannot do without
America,—while, on the other hand, America has no occasion for
Europe.
America can, and will, therefore, become independent of
Europe; but, in the present state of things, Europe cannot become
independent of America. That almost universal empire which Europe
attained by the superiority of her intelligence,—by the tribute
she exacted from every other quarter of the globe, and by the
superiority of her skill as well as of her industry, cannot be sustained
for a much longer period.

Wrapped up in a sense of his superiority, the European reclines at
home, shining in his borrowed plumes, derived from the product of every
corner of the earth, and the industry of every portion of its
inhabitants, with which his own natural resources would never have
invested him, he continues, as the author observes, revelling in
enjoyments which nature has denied him;—accustomed from his most
tender years, to wants which all the blessings and donations of the land
and the ocean, produced within the compass of his own quarter of the
globe, [Pg
410]
are unable to satisfy. While, therefore, the rest of the
world has become tributary to him, he, in return, has become dependent
on it, by those wants,—the supply of which, custom and education
have made indispensably necessary.

America alone furnishes in a sufficient quantity those precious
metals, which constitute the basis on which the existing relations of
all the different classes of society, and indeed the whole concatenation
of the civil institutions of society in general, have been formed, and
retained to the present time. All the elements of modern splendour were
derived from her,—and it was her gifts to Europe, which changed
almost all the constituents of social life. The costly woods of the new
world, banished the native products of the old;—her cochineal and
indigo furnish the choicest materials for the richest dyes;—her
rice is become an article of cheap and general nourishment to the
European world;—her cotton, tobacco, coffee, sugar, molasses,
cocoa and rum;—her numerous and valuable drugs;—her diamonds
and precious stones;—her furs, and, in time of scarcity, the rich
redundant stores of grain she pours forth from her bosom, constitute so
large a portion of the wants and luxuries of Europe, that it is not too
much to say, the latter is in a great measure dependent upon America. A
great portion of these cannot be domesticated in the former, or produced
in such quantities, as to supply the demand which custom has made
indispensable, nor upon such terms, as would enable the people of Europe
to indulge in their consumption. On the contrary, experience has
demonstrated, that all the natural productions of Europe, its olives,
and even its boasted vines, can be naturalized in some one of the
various regions of this quarter of the globe, which comprehends in
itself every climate and every soil. There is not the least doubt, that,
when the habits of the people, or the interests of the country point to
such a course, all these will be produced in sufficient quantities, not
only for domestic use, but foreign exportation.

America, thus standing in need of none of the natural productions of
Europe, and possessing within herself much more numerous, as well as
precious gifts of nature, than any other quarter of the globe, will soon
be able to dispense with the products of foreign industry. Whenever she
can command the necessary stock of knowledge, and a sufficient number of
industrious hands, which emigration, aided by her own increasing
population, will soon place at her disposal, this will inevitably take
place. Where there exist materials, and understanding to use them, the
freedom of using them at pleasure, and security in the enjoyment of the
fruits of labour, the spirit of enterprise is inevitably awakened into
life and activity, and with it must flourish every species of
industry:—

[Pg 411] “North America,” observes the author,
“at the commencement of her revolution, found herself nearly destitute
of all mechanical resources and means of resistance,—whereas now
she possesses fortifications, and plenty of military supplies of all
kinds, with the means of multiplying them, as occasion may require. She
has already formed an efficient, spirited and increasing navy, which
will before long dispute the empire of the seas; she is complete
mistress of the several branches of knowledge, and contains within
herself all the mechanical institutions requisite for the increase and
maintenance of these things. She can equip an army or a navy, without a
resort to Europe, for the most insignificant article.”

The author then goes on to express an opinion that the complete
emancipation of South America, which he anticipates as soon to happen,
will lead to similar results, in that portion of the continent, and
produce an entire and final independence, political as well as
commercial. He does not pretend to designate the precise period in which
this will take place, but confines himself to the assertion, that in the
natural and inevitable course of things, it must and will happen, after
a determined opposition from European jealousy.

An inquiry is then commenced, into the possibility that Europe will
be enabled to supply the loss of America, by means of new connexions
with the other quarters of the globe. If she cannot procure a new market
for her surplus manufactures, how is she to acquire the means of
purchasing those productions of the new world, which have become
indispensable to her existence, in the sphere she has hitherto occupied?
To do this she must not only retain in their fullest extent, all the
remaining branches of her commerce, but obtain others, by entering into
new connexions with Asia and Africa, and colonizing new regions. To do
this, not only does the necessary energy seem wanting, but Europe will
have to encounter the competition of America, with all our unequalled
celerity of enterprise, and all our rapidly increasing powers of
competition. She is much more likely to lose her remaining colonies than
to acquire new ones; and it approaches to an extreme degree of
probability, that she will be driven from many of her accustomed
branches of commerce, by the superior energy and enterprise of America,
rather than obtain new marts for her manufactures. Already the North
American cottons are finding their way to India, and banishing the
productions of the British looms from the markets of the southern
portion of this continent. The trade to China is already assuming an
entire new character, and will probably before long be carried on
without the instrumentality of Spanish dollars.

We think the positions of our author are eminently entitled to
consideration. The situation of a part of the continent of America,
south of the Isthmus of Darien, is much more favourable to a commercial
intercourse with Asia, western Africa, than that of Europe. The coast of
Guinea can be much more easily visited [Pg 412]from Caraccas, Cayenne,
and Surinam, than from any portion of Europe; and the Cape of Good Hope,
lying directly to the east of the great river La Plata, is much better
adapted to an intercourse with Rio Janeiro, and Buenos Ayres, than any
of the Dutch or English colonies. The Isles of France, Bourbon, and
Madagascar, situated between the Cape of Good Hope, and the eastern
coast of Africa, are much more suited to a communication with the new
states of South America, than with the mother countries. Such is the
case with the Philippine islands, New-Holland, the Marquesas, the
Friendly and Society islands. The geographical relations between all
these, and different portions of South America, sufficiently indicate
that when the reins shall have fallen from the hands of Europe, the
intercourse will in a great measure change its course, and centre in the
new instead of the old world.

The principle, we are aware, has been assumed, that whatever state
supports the most powerful navy for the protection of its commerce, will
always take the lead. But it hardly now remains a question, whether the
states of the new world will not be able ere long, to direct trade into
the free channel which nature herself seems to point out for all
nations, but which the exorbitant naval power of one has forced into
artificial and circuitous directions.

Europe will not for ever be able to wield the trident of the seas,
nor sway the sceptre of intellectual superiority. There is a time for
all things. There was a time when she borrowed her arts, her literature,
her refinements, and her civilization, from Asia. These are for ever
passing from one nation, and from one continent to another. The
descendents of Europeans in the new world, have not degenerated, and
possessing as they do as many advantages of situation as were ever
enjoyed by any people under the sun, with as great a field for their
exercise as was ever presented for human action, it would be departing
from the natural order of things, and the ordinary operations of the
great scheme of Providence; it would be shutting our ears to the voice
of experience, and our eyes to the inevitable connexion of causes and
their effects, were we to reject the extreme probability, not to say
moral certainty, that the old world is destined to receive its impulses
in future, from the new. Already we see the bright dawnings of this new
relation, in the universal diffusion of the spirit of emancipation,
first sought in the wilds of America. It was there that was first
lighted that spark which is now animating and stimulating the nations of
the old world to become free and happy like ourselves. The unshackled
genius of the new world is now exerting itself with gigantic vigour,
aided by the infinite treasures of nature, to strengthen its powers,
increase its commerce, its resources, and its wealth. No other [Pg
413]
quarter of the globe, much less a single nation, will
eventually be able to dispute the empire of the seas, with the new
world.

We shall devote the remainder of this article to a consideration of
events which have occurred in Europe since the publication of the work
before us, which richly merits a better translation, as well as a
republication in this country. This course is necessary to our purpose,
although it is our humble opinion, that the writers and publications of
this country, give a disproportionate attention to the affairs of other
people, and of consequence, neglect our own. Let us look to ourselves;
preserve the purity of the national manners and
institutions—foster our natural and accidental advantages, and
observe, and gather lessons of wisdom as well as moderation from the
folly and excesses of rulers and people in the old superannuated world.
Above all, let us ever bear in mind and continue to act upon the
sentiment of Daniel Webster, and be careful that “while other nations
are moulding their governments after ours, we do not break the
pattern
.”

The present state of Europe, we think, offers additional
probabilities to the theory laid down in the work of the Danish
philosopher. Two great principles are now approaching to a struggle,
which will, in all human probability, ere long, produce not only wars,
but the worst of wars, internal dissensions, aggravated by external
struggles with foreign powers. Although the principle of emancipation is
common to the revolution of America, and the revolutionary spirit now at
work in Europe, all other circumstances are essentially different. With
us, it was throwing off a dominion seated at a vast distance beyond the
seas, and only known among us by its representatives. In Europe, on the
contrary, it is a central power existing in the heart, and pervading
every portion of the body politic. A revolution then, must overturn
thrones, church establishments, standing armies, hereditary orders, and
prejudices hallowed by ages of reverence and submission. The whole frame
and organization of society must be dissolved, changed into new
elements, and be arranged into new forms.

The enemies of statu quo, and the genius of change, are now
arraying their respective powers, and in proportion as the people have
been debarred from all participation in the government, will be their
ardour to govern without controul. Such a struggle cannot end in a day,
or in a year,—nor will it be decided in all probability, except
through a long series of gradations, which will finally rest at last on
a basis suitable to the present state of the human mind. We cannot,
therefore, but anticipate heavy times for Europe. A long course of
internal and external wars, is fatal to the great interests of a state.
Commerce decays, and seeks other more peaceful climes—agriculture
is robbed of its labourers, and of the products of labour, [Pg 414]to
recruit and feed the armies,—and manufacturers are deprived of
their foreign purchasers. The powers of the intellect, too, are diverted
from the pursuits of science and literature, into the bloody paths of
warfare,—and thus it has ever happened, that a long continuance of
national struggles, produces a neglect of the arts of peace, and an
approach to barbarism.

Insecurity of property is one of the inevitable consequences of civil
wars. The products of the land are the common stock of plunder for both
parties, and the land itself becomes a prey to confiscation. At this
day, a vast portion of the wealth of Europe is vested in stocks, which
are still more fatally operated upon by civil wars. Their value, in
fact, becomes, in such a state of things, merely nominal; and it depends
upon the success of one or other of the parties in the struggle, whether
they again attain to their original prices, or become worthless. Such a
crisis seems fast approaching in Europe. When once the conflicting
elements of anarchy and despotism commence their warfare, who shall say
where and when it will end? Prophecy, in this case, would be
presumption,—when it does end, the result will be equally
uncertain. Whether a chastened freedom, guarantied by a fair
representation of the people in the governments, a despotism without
limits, or an anarchy without controul, is beyond the reach of human
foresight to predict.

One thing, however, we think, is certain. This unsettled state of
life, liberty and property, in Europe, will produce a vast accession of
wealth and population in the new world, and accelerate its progress to
the sceptre of intellect and power, hitherto, for so long a time,
wielded by the old. The neighbouring nations of Europe, being all nearly
in the same state of internal insecurity, afford no safe refuge to
fugitives or property, from each other—even if their national
antipathies did not present a barrier to emigration. The United States,
on the contrary, with nothing to disturb their tranquillity, but the
peaceable struggles of an election, and stretching out a hand of welcome
to all nations, and all ranks of mankind, from the exiled monarch to the
mechanic or peasant, coming in search of employment and bread, will
present a safe deposit for the wealth of Europe,—a sanctuary where
the persecuted, the harassed, and the timid spirit, may find repose from
the storms that vex his native land.

Thus, to our native energy, intelligence, and resources, will be
added a large portion of those of the other quarter of the world, and
the united result, in all human probability, must be the
fulfilment of the great prophecy, that the empire of the world was
travelling towards the setting sun. The sceptre will depart from the
east, and be wielded by the west. Power, dominion, science, literature,
and the arts, hitherto the satellites of [Pg 415]despotism, will become
the bright and beautiful handmaids of a brighter goddess than
themselves, and the glory of Europe, like that of Asia, be preserved in
her history and her traditions.

The anticipation is as rational as glorious to an American. Look at
the state of Europe once more, and separate it into its constituent
parts. Let us begin with France. What has she gained by her revolution
of July but a branch of the same tree, in the room of the rotten trunk?
Has she won freedom or repose? Not even the freedom of
complaint,—nor any other repose, but the repose of the National
Guards. What is the cry of the people of Paris? Not liberty alone, but
“give us employment and bread.” Thus irritated by a feeling of
disappointment on one hand, and goaded on by hunger, can they stop where
they are? Certainly not; it is not in the nature of man, nor the nature
of things. Two such impulses can only be satisfied by the grant of their
demands, and only quelled by force.

Look at the great rival of France on the opposite side of the
channel. The same mighty evils are at work there—discontent
aggravated by hunger. At the moment we are writing, a question is
depending in the Parliament of England, which agitates the island to its
centre, and the decision of which, either one way or other, is
acknowledged by both parties to amount to the signal of a revolution.
The opponents of the Bill of Reform maintain, that, if carried, it will
destroy the basis of the government; and the advocates assert, that, if
not carried, it will produce a revolution, originating in the
disappointment and indignation of the people.

Will the aristocracy of England—the most wealthy and powerful
aristocracy in the world—voluntarily, and without a mighty
struggle, divest themselves of one of their chief sources of power in
the state. Will they sacrifice their parliamentary influence, which
constitutes one of the regular modes and means of providing for younger
sons and poor relations? Nay, which enables them to dictate to their
sovereign? We believe not. Will the people remain quiet under the
disappointment of their newborn hopes, aggravated as it will be by
poverty and distress, among so large a number? Perhaps they will, so
long as there is an army of sixty or eighty thousand men, disposed so
happily for the protection of order in the United Kingdom, that
every breath of discontent is met by a bayonet. But let the monarchs who
maintain order in Europe, by means of standing armies, recollect
the lesson of history, which teaches us, that throughout all ages, and
countries, the power which sustained the throne by force, in the end by
force overthrew it. There is but one solid permanent support of power,
and that is, the attachment of the people.

In the present state of Europe, we incline to the opinion [Pg 416]that
the safest course for kings to take, would be to identify themselves
with the people, and become the organs of their wishes. We see no other
means for the present King of England to make head successfully against
the weight of the opposition of the church and nobility, in case he
decisively sustains the present ministry in their plans of parliamentary
reform, than to make common cause with his people, and say to them
honestly, “I have become your champion, do you become my supporters.”
The government of England is acknowledged on all hands to be a mixed
government of king, lords, and commons. Who represents the commons of
England? The House of Commons. But can it do this effectually, while a
large portion of the members are returned by the House of Lords? We
should think not. The spirit and purity of the system can only be
preserved by the commons, and the commons alone, selecting their
representatives in their own house, and not the nobility. Does the House
of Commons interfere in the same way in the creation of the members of
the House of Lords? They have no voice or influence in the business.
Why, then, should the House of Lords interfere in the election, or
appointment rather, of the members of the House of Commons? In this
point of view, therefore, we can perceive no sort of foundation for the
argument of the opponents of reform, that the measure will operate to
destroy the balance of the government. We rather think it will restore
the balance, and bring it back to the true old theory of three distinct
powers—king, lords, and commons.

We believe that the people will be satisfied with this reform for a
time, if it take place. When they shall see, as no doubt they will see,
that the burthens of the state, and consequently their own, remain the
same, or perhaps increase with the increase of those who require relief,
and the decrease of those who are able to bestow it; when they shall
find that a reform in Parliament will not give them liberal wages, or
feed their suffering families, then will they become more dissatisfied
than ever. Then, too, will the result disclose where the shoe of reform
pinched the opponents of reform. The increased representation of the
people will then enable the people to make themselves heard and
felt, and to force the government into measures that may indeed destroy
the constitution of England, if there be any such invisible being.
Whichever way we look, therefore, we perceive the same causes of
discontent, the same spirit of emancipation at work, that agitates the
continent of Europe; and so long as this state of things continues, it
requires no spirit of prophecy to predict, that England, so far from
advancing in power or intelligence, will, in all probability, invincibly
slide from the summit of power, and become the victim of internal
weakness at last.

[Pg
417]
The state of Holland and Belgium, of Italy and Germany,
and Russia and Prussia, and Spain and Poland, is still more unfavourable
to arts, science, commerce, literature, and agriculture. The rulers are
employed in schemes for keeping the people in subjugation, and the
people in wresting the promised privileges from their rulers. In such a
state of things, the one party has no time to devise schemes for
enriching or enlightening the people, but is employed, on the contrary,
in placing them, as far as possible, in ignorance and poverty. The other
is so taken up with politics, that its habits of economy, steadiness,
and enterprise, are forgotten by degrees in the whirlpool of turbulent
excitement. Each and all of these countries, with the exception perhaps
of Russia, instead of advancing, will gradually recede in wealth and
intelligence, not only from internal dissensions, but on account of the
large portion of both, that will from time to time, as long as this
state of things shall last, direct its course to the new world.

The change from old to new times; from the inapplicable maxims of the
past, to the practical truths of the present, has, every where, and in
all past ages, been a period of suffering to the human race. The
approaches to this state of regeneration, are marked by turbulent
disaffection on one hand, inflexible severity on the other; its progress
is marked by the dissolution of the social ties, and its crisis with
blood and tears. The people have to encounter the most formidable
difficulties, under which they probably sink many times, before they
rise at last and make the great successive effort. These evils are
aggravated and perpetuated as long as possible, by the stern inflexible
rigidity of old-established institutions, worthless in proportion to
their obstinacy, aided by the blind besotted pride of kings, who seem
never to have learnt the lesson of yielding to the changes produced by
time and circumstance, and sacrificing gracefully, what will otherwise
be taken from them by force.

But all that is great, or good, or valuable, in this world, must be
attained by labour, perseverance, courage, and integrity. Liberty is too
valuable a blessing to be gained or preserved without the exercise of
these great virtues. It must have its victims, and its charter must be
sealed with blood. A people afraid of a bayonet, are not likely to be
free while Europe swarms with standing armies, having little or no
community of interests or feeling with those who maintain them by the
sweat of their brow. When the oppressed states of Switzerland, sent
forth patriots who made a breach in the forest of German bayonets
opposed to them, by circling them in their arms, and receiving them into
their bosoms, they deserved to be free—they became free, and their
liberties are still preserved. But so long [Pg 418]as a host often
thousand brawling and hungry malcontents, can be quieted and dispersed
by the sound of a bugle, the clattering of a horse’s hoofs, or the
glittering of a musket barrel, can such people expect to be free?
Assuredly not, we think. No where will despotism or aristocracy
peaceably resign their long established preponderance without a
struggle, and like our own revolution, the contest will at last come to
the crisis—”we must fight, Mr. Speaker, we must fight,” as
said the intrepid Patrick Henry,—and we did fight. So must Europe
if it expects emancipation. All the governments of that quarter of the
globe, are now sustained by a military force—and by force only can
they be overthrown or modified, to suit the great changes which have
taken place in the feelings and relative situation of the different
orders of society.

That the present state and future prospects of that renowned and
illustrious quarter of the globe, are ominous of a continued succession
of storms and troubles, we think appears too obvious. The night that is
approaching, will be long and dark, in all human probability—it
may end in a total regeneration—in a confirmed and inflexible
despotism; or in that precise state of things which characterized what
are called, the dark ages of Europe—in the establishment of a
hundred petty states, governed by a hundred petty tyrants, eternally at
variance, and agreeing in nothing but in oppressing the people. Great
standing armies are at present the conservators of the great powers of
Europe, and public sentiment is no longer the sole or principal cement
of empires; when these are gone, as they must be, ere the nations which
they oppress can be free, then all the little sectional and provincial
jealousies and antipathies, every real or imaginary opposition of
interests, and even feelings of personal rivalry, will have an
opportunity of coming into full play, and the result may very probably
be, the erection of a vast many petty states, which will never be
brought to act together in any great system of policy. Thus situated,
they will never be able to make head against the growing power of the
vast states of the new world, which whatever may be their minor causes
of difference, will naturally unite in those views of commercial policy,
which being common to all, will be sought by a common effort.

The South American states, it is true, have not yet realized the
blessings of emancipation, partly owing to their inexperience in the
practical secrets of civil liberty; partly to the want of public virtue
in the people, and their rulers, and partly, as we are much inclined to
suspect, to the secret intrigues of more than one European power. But
their natural and inevitable tendency is, we believe, towards a stable
government, combining a complete independence of foreign powers, with
such a portion of civil liberty as may suit their present circumstances
and situation. [Pg 419]They are serving their
apprenticeship—they will soon be out of their time, and may safely
set up for themselves.

But, however doubtful may be the final result of the great struggle
between the kings and the people—or of the aristocracy and the
people—for this seems to be the real struggle after
all—whatever may be its final result, one thing is certain as
fate. While it continues, it must inevitably arrest the prosperity of
Europe, such as it is, and force it to retrograde for a time. Instead of
devoting their attention to the interests of the nation abroad, and
encouraging the industry and intelligence of the people at home, kings
will be employed in watching and restraining their subjects. Fearing the
intelligence and wealth, as the means of increasing their discontents as
well as their power, they will seek to diminish both by new restraints
or new exactions; and thus the best ends of government will be perverted
to purposes of ignorance and oppression. This is the history of the
degradation, and consequent internal weakness of all nations, and a
perseverance in such a course in Europe, will only afford another
example, that the same effects proceed from similar causes, every where,
and at all times.

In the mean while, as oppression, civil wars, internal disaffection,
anarchy, and expatriation of wealth and numbers, all combined, are
gradually undermining the strength of Europe, and draining her veins,
the new world will be, in all human probability, every day acquiring
what the old is losing. If she once pass the other, if it be only by the
breadth of a single hair, it is scarcely to be anticipated that age and
decrepitude will ever be able to regain the vantage ground, against the
primitive energies of vigorous youth. Once ahead, and the new world will
remain so, until the ever revolving course of time, and the revolutions
it never fails to accomplish, shall perhaps again transfer to Asia the
sceptre of arts, science, literature, power, and dominion, which was
wrested from her by Europe.

To realize these bold anticipations, nothing seems necessary but for
the people of the United States to bear in mind, that they are the
patriarchs of modern emancipation—that the spark which animates
the people of Europe was caught from them—that they led the way in
the great common cause of all mankind—that the eyes of the
world are upon them—and that they stand under a solemn obligation
to do nothing themselves, to suffer their leaders to do nothing, which
shall bring the sacred name of liberty into disgrace, or endanger the
integrity of our great confederation. “While other nations are
moulding their governments after ours, may we not destroy the
pattern.


[4]
Hutchinson’s History of Massachusetts, Vol. I, pages 84, 85.


[Pg
420]
Art. VII.Speeches
and Forensic Arguments, by
Daniel
Webster
: 8vo. pp. 520. Boston: 1830.

It has often enough been objected to books written and
published in the United States, that they want a national air, tone, and
temper. Unhappily, too, the complaint has not unfrequently been well
founded; but the volume before us is a striking exception to all such
remarks. It consists of a collection of Mr. Webster’s Public Addresses,
Speeches in Congress, and Forensic Arguments, printed chiefly from
pamphlets, already well known; and it is marked throughout, to an
uncommon degree, with the best characteristics of a generous
nationality. No one, indeed, can open it, without perceiving that,
whatever it contains, must have been the work of one born and educated
among our free institutions,—formed in their spirit, and animated
and sustained by their genius and power. The subjects discussed, and the
interests maintained in it, are entirely American; and many of them are
so important, that they are already become prominent parts of our
history. As we turn over its pages, therefore, and see how completely
Mr. Webster has identified himself with the great institutions of the
country, and how they, in their turn, have inspired and called forth the
greatest efforts of his uncommon mind, we feel as if the sources of his
strength, and the mystery by which it controuls us, were, in a
considerable degree, interpreted. We feel that, like the fabulous giant
of antiquity, he gathers it from the very earth that produced him; and
our sympathy and interest, therefore, are excited, not less by the
principle on which his power so much depends, than by the subjects and
occasions on which it is so strikingly put forth. We understand better
than we did before, not only why we have been drawn to him, but why the
attraction that carried us along, was at once so cogent and so
natural.

When, however, such a man appears before the nation, the period of
his youth and training is necessarily gone by. It is only as a
distinguished member of the General Government,—probably in one of
the two Houses of Congress, that he first comes, as it were, into the
presence of the great mass of his countrymen. But, before he can arrive
there, he has, in the vast majority of cases, reached the full stature
of his strength, and developed all the prominent peculiarities of his
character. Much, therefore, of what is most interesting in relation to
him,—much of what goes to make up his individuality and momentum,
and without which, neither his elevation nor his conduct can be fully
understood or estimated, is known only in the circle of his private
friends, or, at most, in that section of the country from which he
derives his origin. In this way, we are ignorant of [Pg 421]much
that it concerns us to know about many of our distinguished statesmen;
but about none, probably, are we more relatively ignorant than about Mr.
Webster, who is eminently one of those persons, whose professional and
political career cannot be fairly or entirely understood, unless we have
some acquaintance with the circumstances of his origin, and of his early
history, taken in connection with his whole public life. We were,
therefore, disappointed, on opening the present volume, not to find
prefixed to it a full biographical notice of him. We were, indeed, so
much disappointed and felt so fully persuaded, that neither the contents
of the volume itself, nor the sources of its author’s power, nor his
position before the nation, could be properly comprehended without it,
that we determined at once to connect whatever we should say on any of
these subjects, by such notices of his life, as we might be able to
collect under unfavourable circumstances. We only regret that our
efforts have not been more successful,—and that our notices,
therefore, are few and imperfect.

Mr. Webster was born in Salisbury, a farming town of New-Hampshire,
at the head of the Merrimack, in 1782. His father, always a farmer, was
a man of a strongly marked and vigorous character,—full of
decision, integrity, firmness, and good sense. He served under Lord
Amherst, in the French war, that ended in 1763; and, in the war of the
Revolution, he commanded a company chiefly composed of his own
towns-people and friends, who gladly fought under his leading nearly
every campaign, and at whose head he was found, in the battle of
Bennington, at the White Plains, and at West-Point, when Arnold’s
treason was discovered. He died about the year 1806; and, at the time of
his death, had filled, for many years, the office of Judge of the Court
of Common Pleas, for the state of New-Hampshire.

But, during the early part of Mr. Webster’s life, the place of his
birth, now the centre of a flourishing and happy population, was on the
frontiers of civilization. His father had been one of the very first
settlers, and had even pushed further into the wilderness than the rest,
so that the smoke sent up amidst the solitude of the forest, from the
humble dwelling in which Mr. Webster was himself born, marked, for some
time, the ultimate limit of New England adventure at the North.
Undoubtedly, in any other country, the sufferings, privations, and
discouragements inevitable in such a life, would have precluded all
thought of intellectual culture. But, in New England, ever since the
first free school was established amidst the woods that covered the
peninsula of Boston, in 1636, the school-master has been found on the
border line between savage and civilized life, often indeed with an axe
to open his own path, but always looked up [Pg 422]to with respect, and
always carrying with him a valuable and preponderating influence.

It is to this characteristic trait of New England policy, that we owe
the first development of Mr. Webster’s powers, and the original
determination of his whole course in life; for, unless the school had
sought him in the forest, his father’s means would not have been
sufficient to send him down into the settlements to seek the school. The
first upward step, therefore, would have been wanting; and it is not at
all probable, that any subsequent exertions on his own part, would have
enabled him to retrieve it. The value of such a benefit cannot, indeed,
be measured; but it seems to have been his good fortune to be able in
part, at least, to repay it; for no man has explained with such
simplicity and force as he has explained them, the very principles and
foundations on which the free schools of New England rest, or shown,
with such a feeling of their importance and value, how truly the free
institutions of our country must be built on the education of all. We
allude now to his remarks in the Convention of Massachusetts, where,
speaking of the support of schools, he says:

“In this particular we may be allowed to claim a merit of a very high
and peculiar character. This commonwealth, with other of the New England
states, early adopted, and has constantly maintained the principle, that
it is the undoubted right, and the bounden duty of government, to
provide for the instruction of all youth. That which is elsewhere left
to chance, or to charity, we secure by law. For the purpose of public
instruction, we hold every man subject to taxation, in proportion to his
property, and we look not to the question, whether he, himself, have or
have not children to be benefited by the education for which he pays. We
regard it as a wise and liberal system of police, by which property, and
life, and the peace of society are secured. We seek to prevent, in some
measure, the extension of the penal code, by inspiring a salutary and
conservative principle of virtue, and of knowledge, in an early age. We
hope to excite a feeling of respectability, and a sense of character, by
enlarging the capacity, and increasing the sphere of intellectual
enjoyment. By general instruction, we seek, as far as possible, to
purify the whole moral atmosphere; to keep good sentiments uppermost,
and to turn the strong current of feeling and opinion, as well as the
censures of the law, and the denunciations of religion, against
immorality and crime. We hope for a security, beyond the law, and above
the law, in the prevalence of enlightened and well principled moral
sentiment. We hope to continue and to prolong the time, when, in the
villages and farm houses of New England, there may be undisturbed sleep,
within unbarred doors. And knowing that our government rests directly on
the public will, that we may preserve it, we endeavour to give a safe
and proper direction to that public will. We do not, indeed, expect all
men to be philosophers, or statesmen; but we confidently trust, and our
expectation of the duration of our system of government rests on that
trust, that by the diffusion of general knowledge, and good and virtuous
sentiments, the political fabric may be secure, as well against open
violence and overthrow, as against the slow but sure undermining of
licentiousness.” pages 209, 210.

“I rejoice, Sir, that every man in this community may call all
property his own, so far as he has occasion for it, to furnish for
himself and his children the blessings of religious instruction and the
elements of knowledge. This celestial, and this earthly light, he is
entitled to by the fundamental laws. It is every poor man’s undoubted
birth-right, it is the great blessing which this constitution [Pg 423]has
secured to him, it is his solace in life, and it may well be his
consolation in death, that his country stands pledged, by the faith
which it has plighted to all its citizens, to protect his children from
ignorance, barbarism and vice.” p. 211.

How Mr. Webster’s education was advanced immediately after he left
these primary schools, is, we believe, not known. It was, however, with
great sacrifices on the part of his family, and severe struggles on his
own. At last, when he was fifteen or sixteen years old, after a very
imperfect preparation, he was entered at Dartmouth College; at least, so
we infer, for he was graduated there in 1801. What were his principal or
favourite pursuits during the three or four years of his academic life,
we do not know. We remember, however, to have met formerly, one of his
classmates, who spoke with the liveliest interest of the generous and
delightful spirit he showed among his earliest friends and competitors,
in the midst of whom, he manifested, from the first, aspirations
entirely beyond his condition, and, when the first year was passed,
developed faculties which left all rivalship far behind him. Indeed, it
is known, in many ways, that, by those who were acquainted with him at
this period of his life, he was already regarded as a marked man; and
that, to the more sagacious of them, the honours of his subsequent
career have not been unexpected.

Immediately after leaving college, he began the study of the law in
the place of his nativity, with Mr. Thompson, soon afterwards a member
of Congress; a gentleman who, from the elevation of his character, was
able to comprehend that of his pupil and contribute to unfold its
powers. But the res augustæ domi pressed hard upon him. He was
compelled to exert himself for his own support; and his professional
studies were frequently interrupted and impaired by pursuits, which
ended only in obtaining what was needful for his mere subsistence.

Circumstances connected with his condition and wants at this time,
led him to Boston, and carried him, when there, into the office of Mr.
Gore. This was, undoubtedly, one of the deciding circumstances of his
life. Mr. Gore was a lawyer of eminence, and a gentleman, in the
loftiest and most generous meaning of the word. His history was already
connected with that of the country. He had been appointed district
attorney of the United States for Massachusetts, by Washington; he had
served in England as our commissioner under Jay’s treaty; and he was
afterwards governor of his native state, and its senator in Congress.
His whole character, private, political, and professional, from its
elevation, purity and dignity, was singularly fitted to influence a
young man of quick and generous feelings, who already perceived within
himself the impulse of talents and the stirrings of an ambition whose
direction was yet to be determined. Mr. Webster felt, that it was well
for him to be there; [Pg 424]and Mr. Gore obtained an influence over
his young mind, which the peculiarly kind and frank manners of the
instructer permitted early to ripen into an intimacy and friendship that
were interrupted only by death.

Mr. Webster finished the study of his profession in Boston, and was
there admitted to the bar in 1805;—Mr. Gore, who presented him,
venturing, at the time, to make a prediction to the court respecting his
pupil’s future eminence, which has been hardly more than fulfilled by
all his present fame. At first, he began the practice of his profession
in Boscawen, a small village adjacent to the place of his birth; but in
1807, he removed to Portsmouth, where, no doubt, he thought he was
establishing himself for life.

As a young lawyer, about to lay the foundations for future success,
his portion could, perhaps, hardly have been rendered more fortunate and
happy than it was now in Portsmouth. He rose rapidly in general regard,
and was, therefore, almost at once, ranked with the first in his
profession in his native state. Of course, his associations and
intercourse were with the first minds. And, happily for one like him,
the presiding judge of the highest tribunal in New-Hampshire was then
Mr. Smith, afterwards governor of the state, whose native clearness of
perception, acuteness, and power, united to faithful and accurate
learning in his profession, and the soundest and most practical wisdom
in the fulfilment of his duties on the bench, and in his intercourse
with the bar, gave him naturally and necessarily great influence over
its younger members. Mr. Webster, as the most prominent among them, came
much in contact with him, and profited much from his sagacious foresight
and wise and discriminating kindness. He came, too, still more in
contact with Mr. Mason, afterwards a senator in Congress, and then and
still the leading counsel in New-Hampshire. Mr. Mason was his senior by
several years, but there was no other adversary capable of encountering
him; and the intellect with which Mr. Webster was thus called to contend
on equal terms was one of the highest order, of ample resources, and of
the quickest penetration; whose original reach, firm grasp, and
unsparing logic, left no safety for an adversary, but in a vigour,
readiness and skill, which could never be taken unprepared or at
disadvantage. It was a severe school; but there is little reason to
doubt, Mr. Webster owes to its stern and rugged discipline much of that
intellectual training and power, which render him, in his turn, so
formidable an adversary. He owes to it, also, notwithstanding their
uniform and daily opposition in court, the no less uniform personal
friendship of Mr. Mason in private life.

It was in the midst, however, of this period, both of discipline and
success as a lawyer, in New-Hampshire, that he entered [Pg
425]
public life. In the government of his native state, we
believe, he never took office of any kind; and his first political
place, therefore, was in the thirteenth Congress of the United States.
He was chosen in 1812, soon after the declaration of war; and as he was
then hardly thirty years old, he must have been one of the youngest
members of that important Congress. His position there was difficult,
and he felt it to be so. He
was opposed to the policy of the war; he represented a state earnestly
opposed to it; and he had always, especially in the eloquent and
powerful memorial from the great popular meeting in Rockingham,
expressed himself fully and frankly on the whole subject. But he was now
called into the councils of the government, which was carrying on the
war itself. He felt it to be his duty, therefore, to make no factious
opposition to the measures essential to maintain the dignity and honour
of the country; to make no opposition for opposition’s sake; though, at
the same time, he felt it to be no less his duty, to take good heed that
neither the constitution, nor the essential interests of the nation,
were endangered or sacrificed—ne quid detrimenti respublica
accipiat
. This, indeed, seems to have been his motto up to the time
of the peace; and his tone in relation to it is always manly, bold, and
decisive. When Mr. Monroe’s bill for a sort of conscription was
introduced, he joined with Mr. Eppes, and other friends of the
administration, in defeating a project, which, except in a moment of
great anxiety and excitement, would probably have found no defenders.
But when, on the other hand, the bill for “encouraging enlistments” was
before the house, he held, in January 1814, the following strong and
striking language, in which, now the passions of that stormy period are
hushed, all will sympathize.

“The humble aid which it would be in my power to
render to measures of government, shall be given cheerfully, if
government will pursue measures which I can conscientiously support. If,
even now, failing in an honest and sincere attempt to procure a just and
honourable peace, it will return to measures of defence and protection,
such as reason, and common sense, and the public opinion, all call for,
my vote shall not be withholden from the means. Give up your futile
projects of invasion. Extinguish the fires that blaze on your inland
frontiers. Establish perfect safety and defence there by adequate force.
Let every man that sleeps on your soil sleep in security. Stop the blood
that flows from the veins of unarmed yeomanry, and women and children.
Give to the living time to bury and lament their dead, in the quietness
of private sorrow. Having performed this work of beneficence and mercy
on your inland border, turn, and look with the eye of justice and
compassion on your vast population along the coast. Unclench the iron
grasp of your embargo. Take measures for that end before another sun
sets upon you. With all the war of the enemy on your commerce, if you
would cease to make war upon it yourselves, you would still have some
commerce. That commerce would give you some revenue. Apply that revenue
to the augmentation of your navy. That navy, in turn, will protect your
commerce. Let it no longer be said, that not one ship of force, built by
your hands since the war, yet floats upon the ocean. Turn the current of
your efforts into the channel, which national sentiment has already
[Pg
426]
worn broad and deep to receive it. A naval force,
competent to defend your coast against considerable armaments, to convoy
your trade, and perhaps raise the blockade of your rivers, is not a
chimera. It may be realized. If, then, the war must continue, go to the
ocean. If you are seriously contending for maritime rights, go to the
theatre, where alone those rights can be defended. Thither every
indication of your fortunes points you. There the united wishes and
exertions of the nation will go with you. Even our party divisions,
acrimonious as they are, cease at the water’s edge. They are lost in
attachment to the national character, on the element where that
character is made respectable. In protecting naval interests by naval
means, you will arm yourselves with the whole power of national
sentiment, and may command the whole abundance of the national resource.
In time, you may be enabled to redress injuries in the place where they
may be offered; and, if need be, to accompany your own flag throughout
the world with the protection of your own cannon.”[5] Speech, pp. 14, 15.

Later in the same Congress, the subject of the establishment and
principles of a national bank came into discussion, and the finances of
the country being then greatly embarrassed, this subject rose to
paramount importance, and absorbed much of the attention of Congress up
to the moment when the annunciation of peace put a period, for the time,
to all such debates. On the whole matter of the bank and the currency,
Congress was divided into three parties. First, those who were against a
national bank under any form. These persons consisted chiefly of the
remains of the old party, which had originally opposed the establishment
of the first bank in Washington’s time, in 1791, and in 1811 had
prevented the renewal of its charter. They were, however, generally,
friends of the existing administration, whose position now called
strongly for the creation of a new bank; and, therefore, while they
usually voted on preliminary and incidental measures with the favourers
of a bank, they voted, on the final passage of the bill, against it; so
that it was much easier to defeat the whole of any one project, than to
carry through any modification of it. Second, there was a [Pg
427]
party consisting almost entirely of friends of the
administration, who wished for a bank, provided it were such a one as
they thought would not only regulate the currency of the country, and
facilitate the operations of the government, but also afford present and
important aid by heavy loans, which the bank was to be compelled to
make, and to enable it to do which, it was to be relieved from the
necessity of paying its notes in specie;—in other words, it was a
party that wished to authorize and establish a paper currency for the
whole country. The third party wished for a bank with a moderate
capital, compelled always to redeem its notes with specie, and at
liberty to judge for itself, when it would, and when it would not, make
loans to the government.

The second party, of course, was the one that introduced into
Congress the project for a bank at this time. The bill was originally
presented to the Senate; and its main features were, that the bank
should absorb a large amount of the depreciated public debt of the
United States, and grant to the government heavy loans on the security
of a similar debt to be created; that its capital should consist of
fifty millions of dollars, of which five millions only were to be
specie, and the rest depreciated government securities; and that the
bank, when required, should lend the government thirty millions. At the
time when this plan was brought forward, all the numerous state banks
south of New-England had refused to redeem their notes, or, as it was
called “to ears polite,” had “suspended specie payments,” in consequence
of which, their notes had fallen in value from 10 to 25 per cent., and
specie, of course, had risen proportionally in value, and disappeared
from circulation entirely. To afford the contemplated national bank any
chance for carrying on its operations, or even for beginning them, it
was to be authorized “to suspend specie payments,” which meant, that it
was to be authorized never to begin them; for, without this authority,
their specie would be drained the moment their notes should be issued
equal to its amount. On the other hand, all the taxes and revenues of
the government were to be receivable in the paper of the bank, however
much it might fall in value. In short, the whole scheme was one of those
vast Serbonian bogs, where, from the days of Laws’s Mississippi Company,
armies whole of legislators and projectors have sunk, without leaving
even a monument behind them to warn their followers of their fate.

We must not, however, be extravagantly astonished, that a project
which we now know was in its nature so wild and dangerous, should have
found favourers and advocates. The finances of the country were then in
a critical, and even distressing position; and all men were anxious to
devise some means to relieve [Pg 428]them. A large part of the nation, too,
sincerely entertained the chimerical notion, now universally exploded,
that it was practicable to establish and maintain a safe and stable
paper currency, even when not convertible into specie at the pleasure of
the holder; and the example of England and its national bank was
referred to with effect, though, from its history since, the same
example could now be referred to with double effect on the other side of
the discussion. After an earnest and able debate, then, the bill, on the
whole, passed the Senate, and it was understood that a considerable
majority of the House of Representatives was in its favour.

When brought there on the 9th of December, 1814, it excited a very
animated discussion, which, with various interruptions from the forms
and rules of the House, references to committees, and occasional
adjournments, was continued till the 2d of January. In this protracted
debate Mr. Webster took a conspicuous part; and his efforts, of which
the speech now published is but an inconsiderable item, did much to
avert the threatened evil, and to establish his reputation, not merely
as an eloquent and powerful debater, which had already been settled in
the previous session, but as a sagacious and sound statesman.

His principal opposition to the bill was made on the last day of its
discussion. He then introduced a series of resolutions, bringing the
bank proposed within the limits of the specie-paying principle, and
taking off from it the restraints, which placed it too much within the
power of the government to make it useful as a monied institution,
either to the finances or to the commerce of the country. The objections
to the plan then before Congress, and the disasters that would probably
follow its adoption, he portrayed in the following strong language,
which none, however, will now think to have been too strong.

“The capital of the bank, then, will be five millions of specie, and
forty-five millions of government stocks. In other words, the bank will
possess five millions of dollars, and the government will owe it
forty-five millions. This debt from government, the bank is restrained
from selling during the war, and government is excused from paying until
it shall see fit. The bank is also to be under obligation to loan
government thirty millions of dollars on demand, to be repaid, not when
the convenience or necessity of the bank may require, but when debts due
to the bank, from government, are paid; that is, when it shall be the
good pleasure of government. This sum of thirty millions is to supply
the necessities of government, and to supersede the occasion of other
loans. This loan will doubtless be made on the first day of the
existence of the bank, because the public wants can admit of no delay.
Its condition, then, will be, that it has five millions of specie, if it
has been able to obtain so much, and a debt of seventy-five millions, no
part of which it can either sell or call in, due to it from
government.

“The loan of thirty millions to government, can only be made by an
immediate issue of bills to that amount. If these bills should return,
the bank will not be able to pay them. This is certain, and to remedy
this inconvenience, power is given to the directors, by the act, to
suspend, at their own discretion, [Pg 429]the payment of their
notes, until the President of the United States shall otherwise order.
The President will give no such order, because the necessities of
government will compel it to draw on the bank till the bank becomes as
necessitous as itself. Indeed, whatever orders may be given or withheld
it will be utterly impossible for the bank to pay its notes. No such
thing is expected from it. The first note it issues will be dishonoured
on its return, and yet it will continue to pour out its paper, so long
as government can apply it in any degree to its purposes.

“What sort of an institution, sir, is this? It looks less like a
bank, than a department of government. It will be properly the
paper-money department. Its capital is government debts; the amount of
its issues will depend on government necessities; government, in effect,
absolves itself from its own debts to the bank, and by way of
compensation absolves the bank from its own contracts with others. This
is, indeed, a wonderful scheme of finance. The government is to grow
rich, because it is to borrow without the obligation of repaying, and is
to borrow of a bank which issues paper, without liability to redeem it.
If this bank, like other institutions which dull and plodding common
sense has erected, were to pay its debts, it must have some limits to
its issues of paper, and therefore, there would be a point beyond which
it could not make loans to government. This would fall short of the
wishes of the contrivers of this system. They provide for an unlimited
issue of paper, in an entire exemption from payment. They found their
bank, in the first place, on the discredit of government, and then hope
to enrich government out of the insolvency of their bank. With them,
poverty itself is the main source of supply, and bankruptcy a mine of
inexhaustible treasure.” Pp. 224-5.

The resolutions proposed by Mr. Webster, and supported in this
speech, were not passed. Probably he did not expect them to pass, when
he proposed them; but the same day, the main question was taken upon the
passage of the bill itself; and, as it was rejected by the casting vote
of the speaker, there can be no reasonable doubt, that without his
exertions this portentous absurdity would not have been defeated. It is
but justice, however, to the supporters of the measure, to say, that the
mischievous consequences of its adoption, were by no means so apparent
then as they are now. We have since had no little experience on the
whole matter. It required all the power and influence of the general
government, and of the present sound and specie-paying Bank of the
United States, acting vigorously in concert for several years after the
war, to relieve the country from the flood of depreciated notes of the
state banks with which it was inundated, and to restore a safe and
uniform currency. When or how this evil could have been remedied, if, at
the very close of the war, it had been almost indefinitely increased by
the establishment of a vast machine, issuing every day as much
irredeemable paper as would be taken at any and every discount, and thus
co-operating with the evil itself, instead of opposing it, is more than
any man will now be bold enough to conjecture. We should, no doubt, have
been in bondage to it to this hour, and probably left it as a yoke upon
the necks of our children.

But, at the time referred to, the necessities of the government were
urgent; and, on motion of Mr. Webster, the rule that prevented [Pg 430]a
reconsideration at the same session of a subject thus disposed of, was
suspended the very next day, and a bill for a bank was on the same day,
January 3, recommitted to a select committee. On the 6th, the committee
reported a specie-paying bank, with a much diminished capital, which was
carried in the house, with the fewest possible forms, on the 7th; Mr.
Webster and most of his friends voting for it. It passed the senate,
too, though with some difficulty; but was refused by the president, on
the ground, that it was not sufficient to meet the exigencies of the
case, which, indeed, we now know, no bank would have been able to meet.
This project, however, being thus rejected, another was immediately
introduced into the senate, the basis of which was to be laid, like that
of the first bank proposed, in a paper currency. It passed that body;
but on being brought into the house met a severe and determined
opposition, which ceased only when, on the 17th, the news of peace being
received, the bill was indefinitely postponed.

Mr. Webster’s exertions, however, on the subject of the currency, did
not cease with the overthrow of the paper bank system. He was re-elected
to New-Hampshire for the fourteenth Congress, and sat there during the
sessions of 1815-16; and 1816-17. The whole state of things in the
nation was now changed. The war was over, and the great purpose of sound
statesmanship was therefore to bring the healing and renovating
influences of peace into the administration and finances of the country.
The present bank was chartered in April 1816, and was placed,
substantially on the principles maintained in Mr. Webster’s resolutions
of the preceding year. But still it seemed doubtful whether this
institution, however wisely managed, would alone have power enough to
restore a sound currency. The small depreciated notes of the state banks
south of New-England, still filled the land with their loathed
intrusion; and, what was worse, the revenue of the general government,
receivable at the different custom-houses, was collected in this
degraded paper, to the great injury of the finances of the country, and
to the still greater injury of the property of private individuals, who,
in different states, paid, of course, different rates of duties to the
treasury, according to the value of the paper medium in which it
happened to be received. Mr. Webster foresaw the mischiefs that must
follow from this state of things, if a remedy were not speedily applied.
He, therefore, in the same month of April 1816, introduced a resolution,
the effect of which was, to require the revenue of the United States to
be collected and received only in the legal currency of the United
States, or in bills equal to that currency in value.

In stating the nature of the evil, after showing by what means [Pg 431]the
paper of the state banks south of New-England had become depreciated; he
says,—

“What still farther increases the evil is, that
this bank paper being the issue of very many institutions, situated in
different parts of the country, and possessing different degrees of
credit, the depreciation has not been, and is not now, uniform
throughout the United States. It is not the same at Baltimore as at
Philadelphia, nor the same at Philadelphia as at New-York. In
New-England, the banks have not stopped payment in specie, and of course
their paper has not been depressed at all. But the notes of banks which
have ceased to pay specie, have nevertheless been, and still are,
received for duties and taxes in the places where such banks exist. The
consequence of all this is, that the people of the United States pay
their duties and taxes in currencies of different values, in different
places. In other words, taxes and duties are higher in some places than
they are in others, by as much as the value of gold and silver is
greater than the value of the several descriptions of bank paper which
are received by government. This difference in relation to the paper of
the District where we now are, is twenty-five per cent. Taxes and
duties, therefore, collected in Massachusetts, are one quarter higher
than the taxes and duties which are collected, by virtue of the same
laws, in the District of Columbia.” Pp. 233-4.

A little further on, after showing that if this state of things is
not changed by the government, it will be likely to change the
government itself, he adds,

“It is our business to foresee this danger, and to avoid it. There
are some political evils which are seen as soon as they are dangerous,
and which alarm at once as well the people as the government. Wars and
invasions therefore are not always the most certain destroyers of
national prosperity. They come in no questionable shape. They announce
their own approach, and the general security is preserved by the general
alarm. Not so with the evils of a debased coin, a depreciated paper
currency, or a depressed and falling public credit. Not so with the
plausible and insidious mischiefs of a paper money system. These
insinuate themselves in the shape of facilities, accommodation, and
relief. They hold out the most fallacious hope of an easy payment of
debts, and a lighter burden of taxation. It is easy for a portion of the
people to imagine that government may properly continue to receive
depreciated paper, because they have received it, and because it is more
convenient to obtain it than to obtain other paper, or specie. But on
these subjects it is, that government ought to exercise its own peculiar
wisdom and caution. It is supposed to possess on subjects of this
nature, somewhat more of foresight than has fallen to the lot of
individuals. It is bound to foresee the evil before every man feels it,
and to take all necessary measures to guard against it, although they
may be measures attended with some difficulty and not without temporary
inconvenience. In my humble judgment, the evil demands the immediate
attention of Congress. It is not certain, and in my opinion not
probable, that it will ever cure itself. It is more likely to grow by
indulgence, while the remedy which must in the end be applied, will
become less efficacious by delay.

“The only power which the general government possesses of restraining
the issues of the state banks, is to refuse their notes in the receipts
of the treasury. This power it can exercise now, or at least it can
provide now for exercising in reasonable time, because the currency of
some part of the country is yet sound, and the evil is not universal. If
it should become universal, who, that hesitates now, will then propose
any adequate means of relief? If a measure, like the bill of yesterday,
or the resolutions of to-day, can hardly pass here now, what hope is
there that any efficient measure will be adopted hereafter?” pp.
235-6.

The doctrine of this speech is as important as it is true. A sound
and uniform currency is essential, not only for the convenient and safe
management of the fiscal concerns of a government; [Pg 432]but,
no less so, for the security of private property. It is, indeed, at once
the standard and basis of all transfer and exchange; and, whenever the
circulating medium has become much deranged in any country, it has been
found an arduous, and sometimes a dangerous task, to restore it to a
sound state. The effort almost necessarily brings on a conflict between
the two great classes of debtor and creditor, into which every community
is divided,—the creditor claiming the highest standard of value in
the currency, and the debtor the lowest; and the results of such a
conflict have not unfrequently been found in changes, convulsions, and
political revolution. From such a conflict we were saved in this
country, by the defeat of the paper-currency bank proposed in
1814,—by the establishment of the present specie paying bank, and
by the adoption of Mr. Webster’s resolution, which was approved by the
President on the 30th of April, 1816.

It was at this period, however, that Mr. Webster determined to change
his residence, and, of course, to retire for a time at least, from
public life. He had now lived in Portsmouth nine years; and they had
been to him years of great happiness in his private relations, and, in
his relations to the country, years of remarkable advancement and
honour. But, in the disastrous fire, which, in 1813, destroyed a large
part of that devoted town, he had sustained a heavy loss, which the
means and opportunities offered by his profession in New Hampshire were
not likely to repair. He determined, therefore, to establish himself in
a larger capital, where his resources would be more ample, and, in the
summer of 1816, removed to Boston, where he has ever since resided.

His object now was professional occupation, and he devoted himself to
it for six or eight years exclusively, with unremitting assiduity,
refusing to accept office, or to mingle in political discussion. His
success corresponded to his exertions. He was already known as a
distinguished lawyer in his native state; and the two terms he had
served in Congress, had placed him, notwithstanding his comparative
youth, among the prominent statesmen of the country. His rank as a
jurist, in the general regard of the nation, was now no less speedily
determined. Like many other eminent members of the profession, however,
who have rarely been able to select at first what cases should be
entrusted to them, it was not for him to arrange or determine the time
and the occasion, when his powers should be decisively measured and made
known. We must, therefore, account it for a fortunate accident, though
perhaps one of those accidents granted only to talent like his, that the
occasion was the well known case of Dartmouth College; and, we must add,
as a circumstance no less fortunate, that the forum where he was [Pg
433]
called to defend the principles of this great cause, and
where he did defend them so triumphantly, was that of the Supreme Court
of the United States, at Washington.

There is, indeed, something peculiar in this grave national tribunal,
especially with regard to the means and motives it offers to call out
distinguished talent, and try and confirm a just reputation, which is
worth notice. The judges themselves, selected from among the great
jurists of the country, as above ignorance, weakness, and the
temptations of political ambition,—with that venerable man at
their head, who for thirty years has been the ornament of the
government, and, in whose wisdom has been, in no small degree, the
hiding of its power—constitute a tribunal, which may be truly
called solemn and august. The advocates, too, who appear before it, are
no less a chosen few, full of talent and skill, and eager with ambition,
who go there from all the ends of the country, to discuss the gravest
and most important interests both public and private,—to settle
the conflicts between domestic and foreign jurisprudence, or the more
perilous conflicts between the authority of the individual states, and
that of the general government;—in short, to return constantly
upon the first great principles of national and municipal adjudication,
and take heed, that, whatever is determined shall rest only on the deep
and sure foundations of truth, right, and law. And, finally, if we turn
from the bench and the bar, to the audience which is collected around
them, we shall find again much that is remarkable, and even imposing. We
shall find, that, large as it is, it is gathered together from a city
not populous, where every thing, even the resources of fashion, must
have a direct dependence on the operations of government; and where the
senators themselves, and the representatives of foreign powers, no less
than the crowds collected during the session of Congress, by the
solicitations of an enlightened curiosity, or of a strenuous indolence,
can, after all, discover no resort so full of a stirring interest and
excitement, as that of the Supreme Court, into whose arena such
practised and powerful gladiators daily descend, rejoicing in the
combat. Taking it in all its connexions, then, we look upon this highest
tribunal of the country, not only to be solemn and imposing in itself,
but to be one of peculiar power over the reputations of these jurists
and advocates, who appear before it, and who must necessarily feel
themselves to be standing singularly in presence of the nation,
represented there as it is, in almost every way, and by almost every
class, from the fashion and beauty lounging on the sofas in the recesses
of the court-room, up to the eager antagonists, who are impatiently
waiting their time to contend for the mastery on some great interest or
principle, and the judges who are ultimately to decide it.

[Pg
434]
Mr. Webster had already appeared once or twice before
this tribunal;—but not in any cause which had called seriously
into action the powers of his mind. The case of Dartmouth College,
however, was one that might well task the faculties of any man. That
institution, founded originally by charter from the king of Great
Britain, had been in successful operation nearly half a century, when,
in 1816, the Legislature of New Hampshire, from some movements in party
politics, was induced, without the consent of the college, to annul its
charter, and, by several acts, to give it a new incorporation and name.
The trustees of the college resisted this interference; and, in 1817,
commenced an action in the state courts, which was decided against them.
A writ of error was then sued out by the original plaintiffs, to remove
the cause for its final adjudication, to the Supreme Court of the United
States; and it came on there for argument in March, 1818.

The court room was excessively crowded, not only with a large
assemblage of the eminent lawyers of the Union, but with many of its
leading statesmen,—drawn there no less by the importance of the
cause, and the wide results that would follow its decision, than by the
known eloquence of Mr. Hopkinson and Mr. Wirt, both of whom were engaged
in it. Mr. Webster opened it, on behalf of the college. The question
turned mainly on the point, whether the acts of the Legislature of
New-Hampshire, in relation to Dartmouth College, constituted a violation
of a contract; for, if they did, then they were contrary to the
Constitution of the United States. The principles involved, therefore,
went to determine the extent to which a legislature can exercise
authority over the chartered rights of all corporations; and this of
course gave the case an importance at the time, and a value since,
paramount to that of almost any other in the books. Mr. Webster’s
argument is given in this volume at p. 110, et seq.; that is, we have
there the technical outline, the dry skeleton of it. But those who heard
him, when it was originally delivered, still wonder how such dry bones
could ever have lived with the power they there witnessed and felt. He
opened his cause, as he always does, with perfect simplicity in the
general statement of its facts; and then went on to unfold the topics of
his argument, in a lucid order, which made each position sustain every
other. The logic and the law were rendered irresistible. But, as he
advanced, his heart warmed to the subject and the occasion. Thoughts and
feelings, that had grown old with his best affections, rose unbidden to
his lips. He remembered that the institution he was defending, was the
one where his own youth had been nurtured; and the moral tenderness and
beauty this gave to the grandeur of his thoughts; the sort of religious
sensibility it imparted to his urgent appeals and [Pg
435]
demands for the stern fulfilment of what law and justice
required, wrought up the whole audience to an extraordinary state of
excitement. Many betrayed strong agitation; many were dissolved in
tears. When he ceased to speak, there was a perceptible interval before
any one was willing to break the silence; and, when that vast crowd
separated, not one person of the whole number doubted, that the man who
had that day so moved, astonished, and controlled them, had vindicated
for himself a place at the side of the first jurists of the country.

From this period, therefore, Mr. Webster’s attendance on the Supreme
Court at Washington has been constantly secured by retainers, in the
most important causes; and the circle of his professional business,
which has been regularly enlarging, has not been exceeded, if it has
been equalled, by that of any other lawyer who has ever appeared in the
national forum. The volume before us contains few traces of all this. It
contains, however, two arguments upon constitutional questions of great
interest and wide results. One is the case of Gibbons vs. Ogden,
in 1824, involving the question, how far a state has authority to grant
the exclusive right of navigating the tide-waters within its territorial
limits; refusing that right to all persons belonging to other states, as
well as to its own citizens. This question struck, of course, at the
great steam-boat monopoly granted by the state of New-York, from motives
of public munificence, to Mr. Fulton, the admirable first mover of that
national benefit, and Chancellor Livingston, its early and adventurous
patron. The case was argued by Mr. Webster and Mr. Wirt against the
monopoly, and by Mr. Oakley and Mr. Emmet for it; so that probably as
much ability was brought into the discussion on each side, as has been
called for by any single cause in our judicial annals. The result was,
that the monopoly was declared to be unconstitutional; and thus another
great national blessing was obtained, hardly less important than the
original invention,—that of throwing open the right to
steam-navigation to the competition of the whole Union.

There were circumstances which gave uncommon interest to this cause,
independently of its great constitutional importance, and the wide
consequences involved in it. It had been litigated, during a series of
years, in every form, in the state courts of New-York, where the
monopoly had triumphed over all opposition. And it need hardly be said,
that the state courts of New-York have maintained as proud a reputation
for learning, research, and talent, as any in the Union. What lawyer has
not sat gladly at the feet of Chancellor Kent, and Chief Justice
Spencer? And what state, in relation to her jurisprudence, can so boldly
say

“Quæ regio in terris nostri non plena laboris?”

[Pg
436]
Mr. Webster’s argument in the opening of this
case,—which was closed with great power by the Attorney-General,
Mr. Wirt,—furnishes, even in the meagre outline still preserved,
p. 170-184, a specimen of some of the characteristics of his mind. We
here see his clearness and downright simplicity in stating facts; his
acute suggestion and analysis of difficulties; his peculiar power of
disentangling complicated propositions, and resolving them into elements
so plain, as to be intelligible to the simplest minds; and his wariness
not to be betrayed into untenable positions, or to spread his forces
over useless ground. We see him, indeed, fortifying himself, as it were,
strongly within the narrowest limits of his cause, concentrating his
strength, and ready at any moment to enter, like a skilful general, at
all the weak points of his adversary’s position. This argument,
therefore, especially as it was originally pronounced in court, we look
upon, as a whole, to have been equally remarkable for depth and
sagacity; for the choice and comprehensiveness of the topics; and for
the power and tact exhibited in their discussion. Yet we are carried
along so quietly by its deep current, that, like Partridge in Tom Jones,
when he saw Garrick act Hamlet, all seems to us so spontaneous, so
completely without effort, that we are convinced, nay, we feel sure,
there is neither artifice nor mystery, extraordinary power nor genius,
in the whole matter. But, to those who are familiar with Mr. Webster,
and the workings of his mind, it is well known, that, in this very
plainness; in this earnest pursuit of truth for truth’s sake, and of the
principles of law for the sake of right and justice, and in his obvious
desire to reach them all by the most direct and simple means, is to be
found no small part of the secret of his power. It is this, in fact,
above every thing else, that makes him so prevalent with the jury; and,
not only with the jury in court, but with the great jury of the whole
people.

The same general remarks are applicable to his argument in the case
of Ogden against Saunders, in 1827, which we notice now, out of the
regular series of events, in order to finish at once the little we can
say of his professional career as a lawyer. The case to which we now
refer, involved the question of the constitutionality of state insolvent
laws, when they purported to absolve the party from the obligation of
the contract, as well as from personal imprisonment, on
execution. In a legal and constitutional point of view, this has always
been thought one of Mr. Webster’s ablest and most convincing arguments.
With the court he was only half successful; there being a remarkable
diversity of opinion among the judges. But, taken in connexion with the
opinion of Chief Justice Marshall, delivered in the case, with which Mr.
Webster’s argument coincides, both in reasoning [Pg 437]and in conclusion, it
seems absolutely to have exhausted the whole range of the discussion on
that side, and to furnish all that future inquirers can need to master
the question.

But, during the years we have just passed over, Mr. Webster’s success
was not confined to the bar. In the year 1820-21, a convention of
delegates was assembled in Boston, to revise the constitution of
Massachusetts. As it was one of those primary assemblies, where no
office disqualifies from membership, and as the occasion was one of the
rarest importance, the talent and wisdom, the fortunes and authority of
that commonwealth were, to a singular degree, collected in it. The
venerable John Adams, then above eighty-five years old, represented his
native village; Mr. Justice Story, of the Supreme Court of the United
States, was a delegate from Salem; Judge Davis, of the District Court of
the United States, and the greater part of the judicial officers of the
state were there, as well as a large number of the leading members of
the Massachusett’s bar, and a still larger number of its wealthiest or
most prominent land-holders and merchants. No assembly of equal dignity
and talent was ever collected in that commonwealth. Mr. Webster was one
of the delegates from Boston. What influence he exerted, or how
beneficial, or how extensive it was, can be entirely known only there
where it was put forth. But, if we may judge from the important
committees on which he served; the prominent interests and individuals
his duty called him occasionally to defend, to encounter, and to oppose;
and the business-like air of his short remarks, which are scattered up
and down through the whole volume of the “Journal of Debates and
Proceedings” of this convention, published soon afterwards, we should be
led to believe, that, though he was then but a newly adopted child of
Massachusetts, he had already gained a degree of confidence, respect and
authority, to which few in that ancient commonwealth could lay claim.
The fruits of it all, in the present volume, are, a short speech on
“Oaths of Office;” another on “the removal of Judges upon the address of
two-thirds of each branch of the Legislature;” and a more ample and very
powerful one on the “Principle of representation in the Senate.” They
are all strong and striking; and it would be easy to extract something
from each, characteristic of its author; but we have not room, and must
content ourselves with referring, for a specimen of the whole, to the
remarks on the free schools of New-England, from the speech in the
Senate, which we have already cited; adding merely, that, to this
remarkable speech of Mr. Webster, and to another of great beauty and
force, by Mr. Justice Story, was ascribed, at the time, a change in the
opinions and vote of the convention, which, considering the importance
[Pg
438]
of the subject, and the long discussion it had undergone,
was all but unprecedented.[6]

While this convention was still in session, a great anniversary came
round at the north. The two hundredth year from the first landing of the
Pilgrims at Plymouth, was completed on the 22d of December, 1820; and
every man born in New-England, or in whose veins stirred a drop of
New-England blood, felt that he had an interest in the event it
recalled, and demanded its grateful celebration. Preparations,
therefore, for its commemoration, on the spot where it occurred, were
made long beforehand; and, by the sure indication of the public will,
and at the special invitation of the Pilgrim Society, Mr. Webster was
summoned as the man who should go to the Rock of Plymouth, and there so
speak of the centuries past, as that the centuries to come should still
receive and heed his words. Undoubtedly he amply fulfilled the
expectations that waited on this great occasion. His address, which
opens the present volume, is one of the gravest productions it contains.
He seems to feel that the ground on which he stands is holy; and the
deep moral sensibility, and even religious solemnity, which pervade many
parts of this striking discourse,—where he seems to have collected
the experience of all the past, in order to minister warning and
encouragement to all the future,—is in perfect harmony with the
scene and the occasion, and produced its appropriate effect on the
multitude elected, even at that inclement season, from the body of the
New-England states, to offer up thanksgivings for their descent from the
Pilgrim fathers. The effect, too, at the time, has been justified by a
wider success since; and the multiplied editions of the printed
discourse, while they have carried it into the farm-houses and hearts of
the New-England yeomanry, are at the same time ensuring its passage
onward to the next generation and the next, who may be well satisfied,
when the same jubilee comes round, if they can leave behind them
monuments equally imposing, to mark the lapse and revolutions of
ages.

It would not be difficult to select eloquent passages from this
discourse. We prefer, however, to take one containing what was then a
plain and adventurous prediction; but what is now passing into history
before our very eyes. We allude to the remarks on the principle of the
subdivision of property in France, as affecting the permanency of the
French government, which Mr. Webster ventured to call in question, on
the same general grounds, on which he undertook to prove the permanency
of our own.

“A most interesting experiment of the effect of a subdivision of
property on government, is now making in France. It is understood, that
the law regulating [Pg 439]the transmission of property, in that
country, now divides it, real and personal, among all the children,
equally, both sons and daughters; and that there is, also, a very great
restraint on the power of making dispositions of property by will. It
has been supposed, that the effects of this might probably be, in time,
to break up the soil into such small subdivisions, that the proprietors
would be too poor to resist the encroachments of executive power. I
think far otherwise. What is lost in individual wealth, will be more
than gained in numbers, in intelligence, and in a sympathy of sentiment.
If, indeed, only one, or a few landholders were to resist the crown,
like the barons of England, they must, of course, be great and powerful
landholders with multitudes of retainers, to promise success. But if the
proprietors of a given extent of territory are summoned to resistance,
there is no reason to believe that such resistance would be less
forcible, or less successful, because the number of such proprietors
should be great. Each would perceive his own importance, and his own
interest, and would feel that natural elevation of character which the
consciousness of property inspires. A common sentiment would unite all,
and numbers would not only add strength, but excite enthusiasm. It is
true, that France possesses a vast military force, under the direction
of an hereditary executive government, and military power, it is
possible, may overthrow any government. It is in vain, however, in this
period of the world, to look for security against military power, to the
arm of the great landholders. That notion is derived from a state of
things long since past; a state in which a feudal baron, with his
retainers, might stand against the sovereign, who was himself but the
greatest baron, and his retainers. But at present, what could the
richest landholder do, against one regiment of disciplined troops? Other
securities, therefore, against the prevalence of military power must be
provided. Happily for us, we are not so situated as that any purpose of
national defence requires, ordinarily and constantly, such a military
force as might seriously endanger our liberties.

“In respect, however, to the recent law of succession in France, to
which I have alluded, I would, presumptuously, perhaps, hazard a
conjecture, that if the government do not change the law, the law, in
half a century, will change the government; and that this change will be
not in favour of the power of the crown, as some European writers have
supposed, but against it
. Those writers only reason upon what they
think correct general principles, in relation to this subject. They
acknowledge a want of experience. Here we have had that experience; and
we know that a multitude of small proprietors, acting with intelligence,
and that enthusiasm which a common cause inspires, constitute not only a
formidable, but an invincible power.” Pp. 47-8.

In less than six years from the time when this statesman-like
prediction was made, the King of France, at the opening of the
Legislative Chambers, thus strangely and portentously echoed it,

“Legislation ought to provide by successive
improvements, for all the wants of society. The progressive
partitioning of landed estates essentially contrary to the spirit of a
monarchical government
would enfeeble the guaranties which the
charter has given to my throne and to my subjects. Measures will be
proposed to you, gentlemen, to establish the consistency which ought to
exist between the political law and the civil law; and to preserve the
patrimony of families, without restricting the liberty of disposing of
one’s property. The preservation of families is connected with, and
affords a guaranty to political stability, which is the first want of
states, and which is especially that of France after so many
vicissitudes.”

But the discovery came too late. The foundations, on which to build
or sustain the cumbrous system of the old monarchy, were already taken
away; and the events of the last summer, while they would almost
persuade us, that the “Attendant Spirit” so boldly given by the orator
in this very discourse to one of the great founders of our government,
had opened to him, [Pg 440]also, on the Rock of Plymouth, “a
vision of the future;”[7]—these
events, we say, can leave little doubt in the mind of any man, that the
speaker himself may live long enough,—as God grant he
may!—to witness the entire fulfilment of his own extraordinary
prophecy, and to see the French people erecting for themselves a sure
and stable government, suited to the foundation, on which alone it can
now rest.

In 1825, Mr. Webster was called to interpret the feelings of
New-England, on another great festival and anniversary. Fifty years from
the day, when the grave drama of the American Revolution was opened with
such picturesque solemnity, as a magnificent show on Bunker’s Hill,
witnessed by the whole neighbouring city and country, clustering by
thousands on their steeples, the roofs of their houses, and the
hill-tops, and waiting with unspeakable anxiety the results of the scene
that was passing before their eyes,—fifty years from that day, it
was determined to lay, with no less solemnity, the corner stone of a
monument worthy to commemorate its importance. An immense multitude was
assembled. They stood on that consecrated spot, with only the heavens
over their heads, and beneath their feet the bones of their fathers;
amidst the visible remains of the very redoubt thrown up by Prescott,
and defended by him to the very last desperate extremity;[8] and with the names of Warren,
Putnam, Stark, and Brooks, and the other leaders or victims of that
great day frequent and familiar on their lips. In the midst of such a
scene and with such recollections, starting like the spirits of the dead
from the very sods of that hill-side, it may well be imagined, that
words like the following, addressed to a vast audience,—composed
in no small degree of the survivors of the battle, their children, and
their grandchildren,—produced an effect, which only the hand of
death can efface.

“We know, indeed, that the record of illustrious
actions is most safely deposited in the universal remembrance of
mankind. We know, that if we could cause this structure to ascend, not
only till it reached the skies, but till it pierced them, its broad
surfaces could still contain but part of that, which, in an age of
knowledge, hath already been spread over the earth, and which history
charges [Pg
441]
itself with making known to all future times. We know,
that no inscription on entablatures less broad than the earth itself,
can carry information of the events we commemorate, where it has not
already gone; and that no structure, which shall not outlive the
duration of letters and knowledge among men, can prolong the memorial.
But our object is, by this edifice, to show our own deep sense of the
value and importance of the achievements of our ancestors; and, by
presenting this work of gratitude to the eye, to keep alive similar
sentiments, and to foster a constant regard for the principles of the
Revolution. Human beings are composed not of reason only, but of
imagination also, and sentiment; and that is neither wasted nor
misapplied which is appropriated to the purpose of giving right
direction to sentiments, and opening proper springs of feeling in the
heart. Let it not be supposed that our object is to perpetuate national
hostility, or even to cherish a mere military spirit. It is higher, purer, nobler. We
consecrate our work to the spirit of national independence, and we wish
that the light of peace may rest upon it for ever. We rear a memorial of
our conviction of that unmeasured benefit, which has been conferred on
our own land, and of the happy influences, which have been produced, by
the same events, on the general interests of mankind. We come, as
Americans, to mark a spot, which must for ever be dear to us and our
posterity. We wish, that whosoever, in all coming time, shall turn his
eye hither, may behold that the place is not undistinguished, where the
first great battle of the Revolution was fought. We wish, that this
structure may proclaim the magnitude and importance of that event, to
every class and every age. We wish, that infancy may learn the purpose
of its erection from maternal lips, and that weary and withered age may
behold it, and be solaced by the recollections which it suggests. We
wish, that labour may look up here, and be proud, in the midst of its
toil. We wish, that, in those days of disaster, which, as they come on
all nations, must be expected to come on us also, desponding patriotism
may turn its eyes hitherward, and be assured that the foundations of our
national power still stand strong. We wish, that this column, rising
towards heaven among the pointed spires of so many temples dedicated to
God, may contribute also to produce, in all minds, a pious feeling of
dependence and gratitude. We wish, finally, that the last object on the
sight of him who leaves his native shore, and the first to gladden his
who revisits it, may be something which shall remind him of the liberty
and the glory of his country. Let it rise, till it meet the sun in his
coming; let the earliest light of the morning gild it, and parting day
linger and play on its summit.” Pp. 58-9.

The last formal address delivered by Mr. Webster on any great public
occasion, was unexpectedly called from him in the summer of 1826, in
commemoration of the services of Adams and Jefferson;—an occasion
so remarkable, that what was said and felt on it, will not pass out of
the memories of the present generation. We shall, therefore, only make
one short extract from Mr. Webster’s address at Faneuil Hall—the
description of the peculiar eloquence of Mr. Adams, in giving which, the
speaker becomes, himself, a living example of what he describes.

“The eloquence of Mr. Adams resembled his general
character, and formed, indeed, a part of it. It was bold, manly, and
energetic; and such the crisis required. When public bodies are to be
addressed on momentous occasions, when great interests are at stake, and
strong passions excited, nothing is valuable, in speech, farther than it
is connected with high intellectual and moral endowments. Clearness,
force, and earnestness are the qualities which produce conviction. True
eloquence, indeed, does not consist in speech. It cannot be brought from
far. Labour and learning may toil for it, but they will toil in vain.
Words and phrases may be marshalled in every way, but they cannot
compass it. It must exist in the man, in the subject, and in the
occasion. Affected passion, intense expression, the pomp of declamation,
all may aspire after it—they cannot reach it. It comes, if it come
at all, like the outbreaking of a fountain [Pg 442]from the earth, or the
bursting forth of volcanic fires, with spontaneous, original, native force. The
graces taught in the schools, the costly ornaments, and studied
contrivances of speech, shock and disgust men, when their own lives, and
the fate of their wives, their children, and their country, hang on the
decision of the hour. Then words have lost their power, rhetoric is
vain, and all elaborate oratory contemptible. Even genius itself, then
feels rebuked, and subdued, as in the presence of higher qualities.
Then, patriotism is eloquent; then, self-devotion is eloquent. The clear
conception, outrunning the deductions of logic, the high purpose, the
firm resolve, the dauntless spirit, speaking on the tongue, beaming from
the eye, informing every feature, and urging the whole man onward, right
onward to his object—this, this is eloquence; or rather it is
something greater and higher than all eloquence, it is action, noble,
sublime, god-like action.” page 84.

During a part, however, of the period, over which we have thus very
slightly passed, Mr. Webster was again in public life. He was elected to
represent the city of Boston, in the seventeenth Congress, and took his
seat there in December, 1823. Early in the session, he presented a
resolution in favour of appointing a commissioner or agent to Greece;
and the resolution being taken up on the 19th of January following, Mr.
Webster delivered the speech, which usually passes under the name of
“the Greek Speech.” His object, however, in presenting the resolution,
did not seem, at first, to be well understood. It was believed, that,
seeing the existence of a warm public sympathy for the suffering Greeks,
and solicited by the attractions of the subject itself, and of the
classical associations awakened by it, his object was to parade a few
sentences and figures, and so make an oration or harangue, which might
usher him, with some éclat, a second time, upon the theatre of
public affairs. The galleries, therefore, were thronged with a brilliant
and fashionable audience. But the crowd was destined to be
disappointed;—Mr. Webster, after a graceful and conciliating
introduction, in which he evidently disclaimed any such purpose,
addressed himself at once to the subject, and made, what he always
makes, a powerful, but a downright business speech. His object, instead
of being the narrow one suggested for him, was apparent, as he advanced,
to be the broadest possible. It was nothing less, than to take occasion
of the Greek revolution, and the conduct pursued in regard to it by the
great continental powers, in order to exhibit the principles laid down
and avowed by those powers, as the basis on which they intended to
maintain the peace of Europe. In doing this, he went through a very able
examination of the proceedings of all the famous Congresses, beginning
with that of Paris, in 1814, and coming down to that of Laybach, in
1821;—the principles of all which were, that the people hold their
fundamental rights and privileges, as matter of concession and
indulgence from the sovereign power; and that all sovereign powers have
a right to interfere and controul other nations, in their desires and
attempts to change their own governments:

[Pg 443] “The ultimate effect of this alliance
of sovereigns, for objects personal to themselves, or respecting only
the permanency of their own power, must be the destruction of all just
feeling, and all natural sympathy, between those who exercise the power
of government, and those who are subject to it. The old channels of
mutual regard and confidence are to be dried up, or cut off. Obedience
can now be expected no longer than it is enforced. Instead of relying on
the affections of the governed, sovereigns are to rely on the affections
and friendship of other sovereigns. They are, in short, no longer to be
nations. Princes and people no longer are to unite for interests common
to them both. There is to be an end of all patriotism, as a distinct
national feeling. Society is to be divided horizontally; all sovereigns
above, and all subjects below; the former coalescing for their own
security, and for the more certain subjection of the undistinguished
multitude beneath.” page 249.

But, as he says afterwards,

“This reasoning mistakes the age. The time has been, indeed, when
fleets, and armies, and subsidies, were the principal reliances even in
the best cause. But, happily for mankind, there has arrived a great
change in this respect. Moral causes come into consideration, in
proportion as the progress of knowledge is advanced; and the public
opinion
of the civilized world is rapidly gaining an ascendency over
mere brutal force. It is already able to oppose the most formidable
obstruction to the progress of injustice and oppression; and, as it
grows more intelligent and more intense, it will be more and more
formidable. It may be silenced by military power, but it cannot be
conquered. It is elastic, irrepressible, and invulnerable to the weapons
of ordinary warfare. It is that impassable, unextinguishable enemy of
mere violence and arbitrary rule, which, like Milton’s angels,

‘Vital in every part,
Cannot, but by annihilating, die.’

“Until this be propitiated or satisfied, it is vain for power to talk
either of triumphs or of repose. No matter what fields are desolated,
what fortresses surrendered, what armies subdued, or what provinces
overrun. In the history of the year that has passed by us, and in the
instance of unhappy Spain, we have seen the vanity of all triumphs, in a
cause which violates the general sense of justice of the civilized
world. It is nothing, that the troops of France have passed from the
Pyrenees to Cadiz; it is nothing that an unhappy and prostrate nation
has fallen before them; it is nothing that arrests, and confiscation,
and execution, sweep away the little remnant of national resistance.
There is an enemy that still exists to check the glory of these
triumphs. It follows the conqueror back to the very scene of his
ovations; it calls upon him to take notice that Europe, though silent,
is yet indignant; it shows him that the sceptre of his victory is a
barren sceptre; that it shall confer neither joy nor honour, but shall
moulder to dry ashes in his grasp. In the midst of his exultation, it
pierces his ear with the cry of injured justice, it denounces against
him the indignation of an enlightened and civilized age; it turns to
bitterness the cup of his rejoicing, and wounds him with the sting which
belongs to the consciousness of having outraged the opinion of
mankind.

“In my own opinion, Sir, the Spanish nation is now nearer, not only
in point of time, but in point of circumstance, to the acquisition of a
regulated government, than at the moment of the French invasion. Nations
must, no doubt, undergo these trials in their progress to the
establishment of free institutions. The very trials benefit them, and
render them more capable both of obtaining and of enjoying the object
which they seek.” page 253.

How completely does the mighty drama now passing before our eyes on
the great theatre of Europe, justify these hold and sagacious
predictions! A great revolution has just taken place in France, and a
distinguished prince, out of the regular line of succession, has been
invited to the throne, on condition of [Pg 444]governing according to
the constitution prescribed by the representatives of the popular will.
Belgium is doing the same thing. Devoted Poland has attempted it. Italy
is in confusion,—and Germany disturbed and uneasy;—so that,
it seems already no longer to be in the power of any conspiracy of kings
or Congresses, to maintain permanently in Western Europe, a government
not essentially founded on free institutions and principles. We will
only add, that Mr. Webster has, on hardly any other occasion, entered
into the discussion of European politics; and the consequence has been,
that, if this speech has found less favour at home than some of his
other efforts, it is one, that has brought him great honour abroad;
since, besides being printed wherever the English tongue is spoken, it
has been circulated through South America, and published in nearly every
one of the civilized languages of Europe, including the Spanish and the
Greek.

In April, 1824, he took a part in the great discussion of the tariff
question; and his speech on that occasion, as well as the one he
delivered on the same subject in May, 1828, are both given in the volume
before us. But the whole matter is so fresh in the recollections of the
community, and Mr. Webster’s constant defence of a tariff adapted to the
general interests of the country, encouraging alike the cause of
American manufactures and the interests of commerce, are so well known,
from the first tariff of 1816, to the present moment, that it cannot be
needful to speak of them. We would remark, however, that, in the speech
of 1824, two subjects are discussed with great ability;—the
doctrine of exchange, and the balance of trade. Both of them had been
drawn into controversy in Congress, on previous occasions, quite
frequently, calling forth alternately “an infinite deal of nothing,” and
the crudest absurdities; but, from the period of this thorough and
statesmanlike examination of them, they have, we believe, hardly been
heard of in either house. The great points involved in both of them,
have been considered as settled.

We have thus far spoken of Mr. Webster almost entirely as a public
orator and debater, or as a jurist. But there is another point of view,
in which he is less known to the nation, but no less valued at
Washington. He has few equals in the diligence of the committee-rooms.
Reputation in and out of Congress, is, in this respect, very differently
measured. Nothing is more common in either House than moderately good
speakers, prompt in common debate, and sufficiently well instructed not
to betray themselves into contempt with the public. Because they
can speak and do speak; and especially because they speak
often and vehemently, they obtain a transient credit
abroad for far more than they are worth, and far more than they are, at
last, [Pg
445]
able to maintain. It may, indeed, be said, as a general
truth, that those who speak most frequently in Congress are least
heeded, and least entitled to distinction. Members of real ability speak
rarely; and, when they do speak, it is from the fulness of their minds,
after a careful consideration of the subject, and with a deference for
the body they address, and a regard to the public service, which does
not permit them to occupy more time than the development of their
subject absolutely requires. They are, therefore, always heard with
attention and respect; and often with the conviction, that they may be
safely followed.

But there is another class in Congress, less known to the public at
large, and yet whose services are beyond price. We speak now of those
excellent men, who, as chairmen and members of the committees, in the
retired corners of the capitol, are doing the real business of
legislation, and giving their days and nights to maturing schemes of
wise policy and just relief; men who are content, week after week, and
month after month, to sacrifice themselves to the negative toil of
saving us from the follies of indiscreet, meddlesome, and ignorant
innovators, or from the more presumptuous purposes of those who would
make legislation the means of furthering and gratifying their own
private, unprincipled ambition. Such business-men,—who should be
the heads of the working party, if such a party should ever be
formed,—are well understood within the walls of Congress. They are
marked by the general confidence that follows them; and when they speak,
to propose a measure, they are listened to; nay, it may almost be said,
they are obeyed.

Mr. Webster has long been known as an efficient labourer in these
noiseless toils of the committee-rooms and of practical legislation; and
we owe to his hand not a few important improvements in our laws. The
most remarkable is, probably, the Crimes-Act of 1825, which, in
twenty-six sections, did so much for the criminal code of the country.
The whole subject, when he approached it, was full of difficulties and
deficiencies. The law in relation to it remained substantially on the
foundation of the first great Act of 1790, ch. 36. That act, however,
though deserving praise as a first attempt to meet the wants of the
country, was entirely unsuited to its condition, and deficient in most
important particulars. Its defects, indeed, were so numerous, that half
the most notorious crimes, when committed where the general government
alone could have cognizance of them, were left beyond the reach of human
law and punishment;—rape, burglary, arson and other malicious
burnings in forts, arsenals, and light-house establishments, together
with many other offences, being wholly unprovided for. Mr. Webster’s
Act, which, as a just tribute to his exertions, already bears [Pg 446]his
name, cures these gross defects, besides a multitude of others; and it
was well known at the time, that he wished to go much further, and give
a competent system to the country on the whole criminal code, but was
deterred by the danger of failure, if he attempted too much at once.
Indeed, the difficulty of obtaining a patient hearing for any bill of
such complexity and extent, is well understood in Congress; and it is
not, perhaps, an unjust reproach upon our national legislature to
confess, that even the most experienced statesmen are rarely able to
carry through any great measure of purely practical improvement.
Temporary projects, and party strifes, and private claims, and
individual jealousies, and, above all, the passion for personal display
in everlasting debate, offer obstacles to the success of mere patriotism
and statesmanship, which are all but insurmountable. Probably no man, at
that time, but Mr. Webster, who, in addition to his patient habits of
labour in the committee-room, possessed the general confidence of the
House, and had a persevering address and promptitude in answering
objections, could have succeeded in so signal an undertaking. Sir Samuel
Romilly and Mr. Peel have acquired lasting and merited reputations in
England for meliorations of their criminal code. But they had a willing
audience, and an eager support. Mr. Webster, without either, effected as
much in his Crimes-Act of 1825, as has been effected by any single
effort of these statesmen, and is fairly to be ranked with them among
those benefactors of mankind, who have enlightened the jurisprudence of
their country, and made it at once more efficient and more humane.

At the same session of Congress, the great question of internal
improvements came up, and was vehemently discussed in January, on the
appropriation made for the western national road. Mr. Webster defended
the principle, as he had already defended it in 1816; and as he has
defended it constantly since, down to the last year and the last
session, without, so far as we have seen, receiving any sufficient
answer to the positions he took in debate on these memorable occasions.
Perhaps the doctrine he has so uniformly maintained on this subject, is
less directly favourable to the interests of the northern than of the
western states; but it was high-toned and national throughout, and seems
in no degree to have impaired the favour with which he was regarded in
New-England. At any rate, he was re-elected, with singular unanimity, to
represent the city of Boston in the nineteenth Congress, and took his
seat there anew in December, 1825.

In both sessions of this Congress, important subjects were discussed,
and Mr. Webster bore an important part in them; but we can now only
suggest one or two of them. As chairman of the Judiciary Committee, he
introduced the bill for enlarging [Pg 447]the number of judges of
the Supreme Court of the United States. His views in relation to it are
contained in the remarks he made on the occasion, and had great weight
with the House; but the bill was afterwards lost through an amendment of
the Senate. So, too, on the question of the Panama mission, involving
the points that were first moved in 1796 in the House of
Representatives, on occasion of the British Treaty, Mr. Webster has left
on record his opinions, doctrines, and feelings, in a speech of great
beauty and power, which will always be recurred to, whenever the right
of the House of Representatives to advise the executive in relation to
the management of foreign missions may come under discussion. But we are
compelled to abstain from any further notice of them both, by want of
room.

In 1826, he had been elected, we believe, all but unanimously, to
represent the City of Boston, in the House of Representatives; but,
before he took his seat, a vacancy having occurred in the Senate, he was
chosen to fill it by the Legislature of Massachusetts, of which, a great
majority in both its branches, besides the council and the governor,
belonged to the old republican party of the country. He was chosen, too,
under circumstances, which showed how completely his talents and lofty
national bearing had disarmed all political animosities, and how
thoroughly that commonwealth claimed him as her own, and cherished his
reputation and influence as a part of her treasures. There was no
regular nomination of him from any quarter, nor any regular opposition;
and he received the appointment by a sort of general consent and
acclamation, as if it were given with pride and pleasure, as well as
with unhesitating confidence and respect.

How he has borne himself in the Senate during the four sessions he
has sat there, is known to the whole country. No man has been found tall
enough to overshadow him; no man has been able to attract from him, or
to intercept from him, the constant regard of the nation. He has been so
conspicuous, so prominent, that whatever he has done, and whatever he
has said, has been watched and understood throughout the borders of the
land, almost as familiarly and thoroughly as it has been at
Washington.

But though the eyes of all have thus been fastened on him in such a
way, that nothing relating to him can have escaped their notice, there
is yet one occasion, where he attracted a kind and degree of attention,
which, as it is rarely given, is so much the more honourable when it is
obtained. We refer now, of course, to the occasion, when, in 1830, he
overthrew the Doctrines of Nullification. Undoubtedly, in one sense of
the word, Mr. Webster was taken completely by surprise, when these
doctrines, for the first time in the history of the country, were
announced in the Senate; since he was so far from any particular [Pg
448]
preparation to meet or answer them, that it was almost by
accident he was in his place, when they were so unexpectedly, at least
to him and all his friends, brought forth. In another and better sense
of the phrase, he was not taken by surprise at all; for the time was
already long gone by, when, on any great question of national interest
or constitutional principle, he could be taken unprepared or unarmed. We
mean by this, that the discussion of the most important points in the
memorable debate alluded to, came on incidentally; or rather that these
points were thrust forward by a few individuals, who seemed
predetermined to proceed under cover of them, to the ultimate limits of
personal and party violence.

Mr. Foot’s resolution to inquire respecting the sales and the surveys
of western lands, was the innocent cause of the whole conflict. It was
introduced on the 29th of December, 1829; and was not then expected by
its author, or, perhaps, by any body else to excite much discussion, or
lead to any very important results. When it was introduced, Mr. Webster
was absent from Washington. Two days afterwards he took his seat. The
resolution had, indeed, called forth a few remarks, somewhat severe, the
day after it was presented, and then had been postponed to the next
Monday; but, apparently from want of interest in its fate, or from the
pressure of more important business, it was not called up by the mover
till January 13. From this time, a partial discussion began; but it
lingered rather lifelessly, and, in fact, really rose even to
skirmishing only one day, until the 19th, when General Hayne, a
distinguished senator from South Carolina, in a vehement and elaborate
speech, attacked the New-England States for what he considered their
selfish opposition to the interests of the West; and endeavoured to show
that a natural sympathy existed between the Southern and Western States,
upon the distribution and sales of the public lands, which would
necessarily make them a sort of natural allies. With this speech, of
course, the war broke out.

While it was delivering, Mr. Webster entered the Senate. He came from
the Supreme Court of the United States; and the papers in his hands
showed how far his thoughts were from the subjects and the tone, which
now at once reached him. As soon as General Hayne sat down, he rose to
reply; but Mr. Benton of Missouri, with many compliments to General
Hayne, and apparently willing the Senate should have all the leisure
necessary to consider and feel the effects of his speech, moved an
adjournment; Mr. Webster good naturedly consented. Of course, he had the
floor the next day; and in a speech, which will not be forgotten by the
present generation, poured out stores of knowledge long before
accumulated, in relation to the history of the public lands and to the
legislation concerning them; defending [Pg 449]the policy of the
government towards the new states; showing the dangerous tendency of the
doctrines respecting the Constitution, current at the South, and
sanctioned by General Hayne; and repelling the general charges and
reproaches cast on New-England, especially the charge of hostility to
the West, which,—if there was meaning in words or acts,—he
proved to be distinctly applicable to the language and votes of the
South Carolina delegation in the House of Representatives in 1825. The
war was thus, at once, carried into the enemy’s country.

The next day, January 21, it being well known that Mr. Webster had
urgent business, which called him again into the Supreme Court of the
United States, one of the members from Maryland moved an adjournment of
the debate. It would, perhaps, have been only what is customary and
courteous, if the request had been granted. But General Hayne objected.
“The gentleman,” he said, “had discharged his weapon, and he (Mr. H.)
wished for an opportunity to return the fire.” To which Mr. Webster
having replied;—”I am ready to receive it; let the discussion go
on;”—the debate was resumed. Mr. Benton then concluded some
important remarks he had begun the day before; and Mr. Hayne rose, and
opened a speech, which occupied the Senate the remainder of that day,
and the whole of the day following. It was a vigorous speech, embracing
a great number of topics and grounds;—calling in question the
fairness of New-England, the consistency of Mr. Webster, and the
patriotism of the State of Massachusetts;—and ending with a bold,
acute, and elaborated exposition and defence of the doctrines now, for
the first time, formally developed in Congress, and since well known by
the name of the Doctrines of Nullification. The first part of the
speech was caustic and personal; the latter part of it grave and
argumentative;—and the whole was delivered in presence of an
audience, which any man might be proud to have collected to listen to
him.

Mr. Webster took notes during its delivery; and it was apparent to
the crowd, which, for two days, had thronged the senate-chamber, that he
intended to reply. Indeed, on this point, he was permitted no choice. He
had been assailed in a way, which called for an answer. When, therefore,
the doors of the senate-chamber were opened the next morning, the rush
for admittance was unprecedented. Mr. Webster had the floor, and rose.
The first division of his speech is in reply to parts and details of his
adversary’s personal assault,—and is a happy, though severe
specimen of the keenest spirit of genuine debate and retort;—for
Mr. Webster is one of those dangerous adversaries, who are never so
formidable or so brilliant, as when they are most rudely
pressed;—for then, as in the phosphorescence of the ocean, the
degree of the violence urged, may always be taken as the measure [Pg 450]of
the brightness that is to follow. On the present occasion, his manner
was cool, entirely self-possessed, and perfectly decided, and carried
his irony as far as irony can go. There are portions of this first day’s
discussion, like the passage relating to the charge of sleeping on the
speech, he had answered; the one in allusion to Banquo’s ghost, which
had been unhappily conjured up by his adversary; and the rejoinder
respecting “one Nathan Dane of Beverly, in Massachusetts,”—which
will not be forgotten. The very tones in which they were uttered, still
vibrate in the ears of those who heard them. There are, also, other and
graver portions of it,—like those which respect the course of
legislation in regard to the new states; the conduct of the North in
regard to slavery, and the doctrine of internal
improvements,—which are in the most powerful style of
parliamentary debate. As he approaches the conclusion of this first
great division of his speech, he rises to the loftiest tone of national
feeling, entirely above the dim, misty region of sectional or party
passion and prejudice:

“The eulogium pronounced on the character of the state of South
Carolina, by the honourable gentleman, for her revolutionary and other
merits, meets my hearty concurrence. I shall not acknowledge that the
honourable member goes before me in regard for whatever of distinguished
talent, or distinguished character, South Carolina has produced. I claim
part of the honour, I partake in the pride, of her great names. I claim
them for countrymen, one and all. The Laurenses, the Rutledges, the
Pinckneys, the Sumpters, the Marions—Americans, all—whose
fame is no more to be hemmed in by state lines, than their talents and
patriotism were capable of being circumscribed within the same narrow
limits. In their day and generation, they served and honoured the
country, and the whole country; and their renown is of the treasures of
the whole country. Him, whose honoured name the gentleman himself
bears—does he esteem me less capable of gratitude for his
patriotism, or sympathy for his sufferings, than if his eyes had first
opened upon the light of Massachusetts, instead of South Carolina? Sir,
does he suppose it in his power to exhibit a Carolina name, so bright,
as to produce envy in my bosom? No, Sir, increased gratification and
delight, rather. I thank God, that, if I am gifted with little of the
spirit which is able to raise mortals to the skies, I have yet none, as
I trust, of that other spirit, which would drag angels down. When I
shall be found, Sir, in my place here, in the Senate, or elsewhere, to
sneer at public merit, because it happens to spring up beyond the little
limits of my own state, or neighbourhood; when I refuse, for any such
cause, or for any cause, the homage due to American talent, to elevated
patriotism, to sincere devotion to liberty and the country; or, if I see
an uncommon endowment of Heaven—if I see extraordinary capacity
and virtue in any son of the South—and if, moved by local
prejudice, or gangrened by state jealousy, I get up here to abate the
tithe of a hair from his just character and just fame, may my tongue
cleave to the roof of my mouth!

“Sir, let me recur to pleasing recollections—let me indulge in
refreshing remembrance of the past—let me remind you that in early
times, no states cherished greater harmony, both of principle and
feeling, than Massachusetts and South Carolina. Would to God that
harmony might again return! Shoulder to shoulder they went through the
revolution—hand in hand they stood round the administration of
Washington, and felt his own great arm lean on them for support. Unkind
feeling, if it exist, alienation and distrust, are the growth, unnatural
to such soils, of false principles since sown. They are weeds, the seeds
of which that same great arm never scattered. [Pg 451]

“Mr. President, I shall enter on no encomium upon
Massachusetts—she needs none. There she is—behold her, and
judge for yourselves. There is her history: the world knows it by heart.
The past, at least, is secure. There is Boston, and Concord, and
Lexington, and Bunker Hill—and there they will remain forever. The
bones of her sons, falling in the great struggle for independence, now
lie mingled with the soil of every state, from New England to Georgia;
and there they will lie forever. And, Sir, where American liberty raised
its first voice; and where its youth was nurtured and sustained, there
it still lives, in the strength of its manhood and full of its original
spirit. If discord and disunion shall wound it—if party strife and
blind ambition shall hawk at and tear it—if folly and
madness—if uneasiness, under salutary and necessary
restraint—shall succeed to separate it from that union, by which
alone its existence is made sure, it will stand, in the end, by the side
of that cradle in which its infancy was rocked: it will stretch forth
its arm with whatever of vigour it may still retain, over the friends
who gather round it; and it will fall at last, if fall it must, amidst
the proudest monuments of its own glory, and on the very spot of its
origin.” pages 406, 407.

The next day, Mr. Webster went into a grave and formal examination of
the doctrines of nullification, or the right of the state
legislatures to interfere, whenever, in their judgment, the general
government transcends its constitutional limits, and to arrest the
operation of its laws. Four days had hardly elapsed, since this doctrine
had been announced with an air of assured success in the Senate; and
these four days had been filled with active debate and contest. Of
course, here again, there had been neither time nor opportunity for
especial preparation. Happily, too, there was no need of it. The fund,
on which the demand was so triumphantly made, was equal to the draft,
great and unexpected as it was. Mr. Webster’s mind is full of
constitutional law and legislation. On all such subjects, he needs no
forecast, no preparation, no brief;—and, on this occasion, he had
none. He but uttered opinions and arguments, which had grown mature with
his years and his judgment, and which were as familiar to him as
household words. We have, therefore, no elaborate, documentary
discussion,—no citation of books or authorities. It is with
principles, great constitutional principles, he deals; and it is in
plain, direct arguments, which all can understand, that he defends them.
There is nothing technical, nothing abstruse, nothing indirect, either
in the subject or its explanation. On the contrary, all is straight
forward—obvious—to the purpose. For instance, after stating
the question at issue to be, “whose prerogative is it, to decide on
the constitutionality or unconstitutionality of the laws?
” he goes
on:

“This leads us to inquire into the origin of this
government, and the source of its power. Whose agent is it? Is it the
creature of the state legislatures, or the creature of the people? If
the government of the United States be the agent of the state
governments, then they may control it, provided they can agree in the
manner of controlling it; if it be the agent of the people, then the
people alone can control it, restrain it, modify, or reform it. It is
observable enough, that the doctrine for which the honourable gentleman
contends, leads him to the necessity of maintaining, not only that this
general government is the creature of the states, but that it is the
creature of each of the states severally; [Pg 452]so that each may assert
the power, for itself, of determining whether it acts within the limits
of its authority. It is the servant of four and twenty masters, of
different wills and different purposes, and yet bound to obey all. This
absurdity (for it seems no less) arises from a misconception as to the
origin of this government and its true character. It is, Sir, the
people’s constitution, the people’s government,—made for the
people,—made by the people,—and answerable to the people.
The people of the United States have declared that this constitution
shall be the supreme law. We must either admit the proposition, or
dispute their authority. The states are, unquestionably, sovereign, so
far as their sovereignty is not affected by this supreme law. But the
state legislatures, as political bodies, however sovereign, are yet not
sovereign over the people. So far as the people have given power to the
general government, so far the grant is unquestionably good, and the
government holds of the people, and not of the state governments. We are
all agents of the same supreme power, the people.—The general
government and the state governments derive their authority from the
same source. Neither can, in relation to the other, be called primary,
though one is definite and restricted, and the other general and
residuary. The national government possesses those powers which it can
be shown the people have conferred on it, and no more. All the rest
belongs to the state governments, or to the people themselves. So far as
the people have restrained state sovereignty, by the expression of their
will, in the constitution of the United States, so far, it must be
admitted, state sovereignty is effectually controlled. I do not contend
that it is, or ought to be controlled farther. The sentiment to which I
have referred, propounds that state sovereignty is only to be controlled
by its own “feeling of justice;” that is to say, it is not to be
controlled at all; for one who is to follow his own feelings is under no
legal control.—Now, however men may think this ought to be, the
fact is, that the people of the United States have chosen to impose
control on state sovereignties. There are those, doubtless, who wish
they had been left without restraint; but the constitution has ordered
the matter differently. To make war, for instance, is an exercise of
sovereignty; but the constitution declares that no state shall make war.
To coin money is another exercise of sovereign power; but no state is at
liberty to coin money. Again, the constitution says that no sovereign
state shall be so sovereign as to make a treaty. These prohibitions, it
must be confessed, are a control on the state sovereignty of South
Carolina, as well as of the other states, which does not arise “from her
own feelings of honourable justice.” Such an opinion, therefore, is in
defiance of the plainest provisions of the constitution.” pages 410,
411.

Again, what can be more sure and convincing than such plain reasoning
as this:

“I maintain, that, between submission to the
decision of the constituted tribunals, and revolution, or disunion,
there is no middle ground—there is no ambiguous condition, half
allegiance, and half rebellion. And, Sir, how futile, how very futile it
is, to admit the right of state interference, and then attempt to save
it from the character of unlawful resistance, by adding terms of
qualification to the causes, and occasions, leaving all these
qualifications, like the case itself, in the discretion of the state
governments. It must be a clear case, it is said, a deliberate case; a
palpable case; a dangerous case. But then the state is still left at
liberty to decide for herself, what is clear, what is deliberate, what
is palpable, what is dangerous. Do adjectives and epithets avail any
thing? Sir, the human mind is so constituted, that the merits of both
sides of a controversy appear very clear, and very palpable, to those
who respectively espouse them; and both sides usually grow clearer as
the controversy advances. South Carolina sees unconstitutionality in the
tariff; she sees oppression there, also; and she sees danger.
Pennsylvania, with a vision not less sharp, looks at the same tariff,
and sees no such thing in it—she sees it all constitutional, all
useful, all safe. The faith of South Carolina is strengthened by
opposition, and she now not only sees, but resolves, that the
tariff is palpably unconstitutional, oppressive, and dangerous: but
Pennsylvania, not to be behind her neighbours, and equally [Pg
453]
willing to strengthen her own faith by a confident
asseveration, resolves, also, and gives to every warm affirmative
of South Carolina, a plain, downright, Pennsylvania negative. South
Carolina, to show the strength and unity of her opinion, brings her
assembly to a unanimity, within seven voices; Pennsylvania, not to be
outdone in this respect more than others, reduces her dissentient
fraction to a single vote. Now, Sir, again, I ask the gentleman, what is
to be done? Are these states both right? Is he bound to consider them
both right? If not, which is in the wrong?—or rather, which has
the best right to decide? And if he, and if I, are not to know what the
constitution means, and what it is, till those two state legislatures,
and the twenty-two others, shall agree in its construction, what have we
sworn to, when we have sworn to maintain it? I was forcibly struck, Sir,
with one reflection, as the gentleman went on in his speech. He quoted
Mr. Madison’s resolutions, to prove that a state may interfere, in a
case of deliberate, palpable, and dangerous exercise of a power not
granted. The honourable member supposes the tariff law to be such an
exercise of power; and that, consequently, a case has arisen in which
the state may, if it see fit, interfere by its own law. Now, it so
happens, nevertheless, that Mr. Madison deems this same tariff law quite
constitutional. Instead of a clear and palpable violation, it is, in his
judgment, no violation at all. So that, while they use his authority for
a hypothetical case, they reject it in the very case before them. All
this, Sir, shows the inherent—futility—I had almost used a
stronger word—of conceding this power of interference to the
states, and then attempting to secure it from abuse by imposing
qualifications, of which the states themselves are to judge. One of two
things is true; either the laws of the Union are beyond the discretion,
and beyond the control of the states; or else we have no constitution of
general government, and are thrust back again to the days of the
confederacy.” pp. 416, 417.

This is a striking fact about Mr. Madison; but one still more
striking occurred after the publication of the speech. His great name
and authority had been constantly and confidently appealed to, not only
in this debate, by General Hayne, but, on previous occasions, by other
favourers of the South Carolina doctrines, until at last it began to be
almost feared, that Mr. Madison sustained the positions of the
nullifiers. But as he had already shown that the tariff law was quite
constitutional, so, now, with no less promptness and power, he came out
against the whole doctrine of nullification, and showed that his
resolutions of 1798, on which its friends had rested the wild fabric of
their argument, as its main pillars, had nothing to do with it; and
thus, in conjunction with what had been done in the Senate, brought down
the whole temple they had built with such pains and cost, upon the heads
of their uncircumcised presumption and extravagance. His letter, indeed,
on this subject, is one of the most characteristic efforts of his great
wisdom, and one of the most important results of this discussion, since
it took from the advocates of nullification all the support of his
authority—the magni nominis umbra—the shade and
shelter of his great name.

But to return to Mr. Webster; the general tone of the last half of
his speech is uncommonly grave and imposing; but there is one passage in
which a lighter accent is assumed. It is that in which he runs out
General Hayne’s nullifying doctrine into practice, and sets him, as a
military man, to execute his own [Pg 454]nullifying law. The
argument of this passage is the more efficacious, because it is
concealed under so much wit and good-humour.

“And now, Mr. President, let me run the honourable gentleman’s
doctrine a little into its practical application. Let us look at his
probable modus operandi. If a thing can be done, an ingenious man
can tell how it is to be done. Now, I wish to be informed,
how this state interference is to be put in practice. We will
take the existing case of the tariff law. South Carolina is said to have
made up her opinion upon it. If we do not repeal it, (as we probably
shall not,) she will then apply to the case the remedy of her doctrine.
She will, we must suppose, pass a law of her legislature, declaring the
several acts of Congress, usually called the Tariff Laws, null and void,
so far as they respect South Carolina, or the citizens thereof. So far,
all is a paper transaction, and easy enough. But the collector at
Charleston, is collecting the duties imposed by these tariff
laws—he, therefore, must be stopped. The collector will seize the
goods if the tariff duties are not paid. The state authorities will
undertake their rescue; the marshal, with his posse, will come to the
collector’s aid, and here the contest begins. The militia of the state
will be called out to sustain the nullifying act. They will march, Sir,
under a very gallant leader: for I believe the honourable member himself
commands the militia of that part of the state. He will raise the
Nullifying Act on his standard, and spread it out as his banner.
It will have a preamble, bearing that the tariff laws are palpable,
deliberate, and dangerous violations of the Constitution! He will
proceed, with his banner flying, to the custom-house in Charleston;

‘All the while,
Sonorous metal blowing martial sounds.’

Arrived at the custom-house, he will tell the collector that he must
collect no more duties under any of the tariff laws. This, he will be
somewhat puzzled to say, by the way, with a grave countenance,
considering what hand South Carolina herself had in that of 1816. But,
Sir, the collector would, probably, not desist, at his bidding. He would
show him the law of Congress, the treasury instruction, and his own oath
of office. He would say, he should perform his duty, come what might.
Here would ensue a pause: for they say that a certain stillness precedes
the tempest. The trumpeter would hold his breath awhile, and before all
this military array should fall on the custom-house, collector, clerks,
and all, it is very probable some of those composing it, would request
of their gallant commander-in-chief, to be informed a little upon the
point of law; for they have, doubtless, a just respect for his opinions
as a lawyer, as well as for his bravery as a soldier. They know he has
read Blackstone and the Constitution, as well as Turrene and Vauban.
They would ask him, therefore, something concerning their rights in this
matter. They would inquire, whether it was not somewhat dangerous to
resist a law of the United States. What would be the nature of their
offence, they would wish to learn, if they, by military force and array,
resisted the execution in Carolina of a law of the United States, and it
should turn out, after all, that the law was constitutional? He
would answer, of course, treason. No lawyer could give any other answer.
John Fries, he would tell them, had learned that some years ago. How,
then, they would ask, do you propose to defend us? We are not afraid of
bullets, but treason has a way of taking people off, that we do not much
relish. How do you propose to defend us? ‘Look at my floating banner,’
he would reply, ‘see there the nullifying law!’ Is it your
opinion, gallant commander, they would then say, that if we should be
indicted for treason, that same floating banner of yours would make a
good plea in bar? ‘South Carolina is a sovereign state,’ he would reply.
That is true—but would the judge admit our plea? ‘These tariff
laws,’ he would repeat, ‘are unconstitutional, palpably, deliberately,
dangerously.’ That all may be so; but if the tribunal should not happen
to be of that opinion, shall we swing for it? We are ready to die for
our country, but [Pg 455]it is rather an awkward business, this dying without touching the
ground! After all, that is a sort of hemp-tax, worse than any
part of the tariff.

Mr. President, the honourable gentleman would be in a dilemma, like
that of another great general. He would have a knot before him which he
could not untie. He must cut it with his sword. He must say to his
followers, defend yourselves with your bayonets; and this is
war—civil war.” pp. 421, 422.

After this his tone becomes even more grave and solemn than before,
until, when he approaches the conclusion, he bursts forth with the
expression of feelings of attachment to the Union and the Constitution,
which it seemed no longer possible for him to suppress. We should quote
the passage, but that it has been quoted every where, and is familiar to
every body.

We forbear to pursue this debate any further. Mr. Hayne replied in a
short speech, which he afterwards expanded in the newspapers into a long
one; and Mr. Webster rejoined with a syllogistic brevity, exactness, and
power, which carried with them the force and conclusiveness of a
demonstration; and thus ended the discussion as between these two. It
was afterwards continued, however, for several weeks, and a majority, or
nearly a majority, of the whole Senate took part in it; but whenever it
is now recollected or referred to, the contest between the two principal
speakers, from the 19th to the 23d of January, is, we believe, generally
intended.

The results of this memorable debate are already matter of history.
The vast audience that had contended for admission to the
senate-chamber, till entrance became dangerous, were the first to feel
and make known its effect; for, with his peculiar power of explaining
abstruse and technical subjects, so that all can comprehend them, Mr.
Webster there expounded a great doctrine of the constitution, which had
been powerfully assailed, so that all might feel the foundations on
which it rests, to have been consolidated rather than disturbed by the
attempt to shake them. Their verdict, therefore, was given at the time,
and heard throughout the country. But since that day, when the crowd
came out of the senate-chamber rejoicing in the victory which had been
achieved for the constitution, nearly twenty editions of the same
argument have been called for in different parts of the country, and
thus scattered abroad above an hundred thousand copies of it, besides
the countless multitudes that have been sent forth by the newspapers,
until almost without a metaphor, it may be said to have been carried to
every fire-side in the land. The very question, therefore, which was
first submitted to an audience in the capitol,—comprising, indeed,
a remarkable representation of the talents and authority of the country,
but still comparatively small,—has since been submitted by the
press to the judgment of the nation, more fully, probably, than any
thing of the kind was ever submitted before; and the same remarkable
plainness, the same power of elucidating great legal [Pg 456]and
constitutional doctrines
till they become as intelligible and simple as the occupations of daily
life, has enlarged the jury of the senate-chamber till it has become the
jury of the whole people, and the same verdict has followed. What,
therefore, Chancellor Kent said in relation to it, is as true as it is
beautiful;—”Peace has its victories as well as war;”—and the
triumph which Mr. Webster thus secured for a great constitutional
principle, he may now well regard, as the chief honour of his life.

Indeed, a man such as he is, when he looks back upon his past life,
and forward to the future, must needs feel, that his fate and his
fortunes, his fame and his ambition, are connected throughout with the
fate and the fortunes of the constitution of his country. He is the
child of our free institutions. None other could have produced or reared
him;—none other can now sustain or advance him. From the days
when, amidst the fastnesses of nature, his young feet with difficulty
sought the rude school-house, where his earliest aspirations were
nurtured, up to the moment when he came forth in triumph from the
senate-chamber, conscious that he had overthrown the Doctrines of
Nullification, and contended successfully for the Union of the States,
he must have felt, that his extraordinary powers have constantly
depended for their development and their exercise on the peculiar
institutions of our free governments. It is plain, indeed, that he has
thriven heretofore, by their progress and success; and it is, we think,
equally plain, that in time to come, his hopes and his fortunes can be
advanced only by their continued stability and further progress. We
think, too, that Mr. Webster feels this. On all the great principles of
the constitution, and all the leading interests of the country, his
opinions are known; his ground is taken; his lot is cast. Whoever may
attack the Union on any of the fundamental doctrines of our government,
he must defend them. Prima fortuna salutis monstrat iter. The
path he has chosen, is the path he must follow. And we rejoice at it. We
rejoice, that such a necessity is imposed on such a mind. We rejoice,
that, even such as he cannot stand, unless they sustain the institutions
that formed them; and that, what is in itself so poetically just and so
morally beautiful, is enforced by a providential wisdom, which neither
genius nor ambition can resist or control. We rejoice, too, when, on the
other hand, a man so gifted, faithfully and proudly devotes to the
institutions of his country the powers and influence they have unfolded
and fostered in him, that, in his turn, he is again rewarded with
confidence and honours, which, as they can come neither from faction nor
passion, so neither party discipline nor political violence can diminish
nor impair them. And, finally, and above all, we rejoice for the great
body of the people, that the decided and unhesitating support they have
so freely given [Pg 457]to the distinguished Senator, with
whose name “this land now rings from side to side,” because he has
triumphantly defended the Union of the States and the principles of the
Constitution;—we rejoice, we say, for the people, because,
such a support given by them for such a cause, not only strengthens and
cements the very foundations of whatever is most valuable in our
government; but at the same time, warns and encourages all who would
hereafter seek similar honours and favours, to consult for the course
they shall follow, neither the indications of party nor the impulses of
passion, but to address themselves plainly, fearlessly, calmly, directly
to the intelligence and honesty of the whole nation, “and ask no
omen but their country’s cause.”


[5]
These are the last words of the speech; and the sentiment they contain
in favour of a navy and naval protection, has been maintained with great
earnestness by Mr. Webster for nearly thirty years, on all public
occasions. In an oration delivered July 4th, 1806, and printed at
Concord, N. H., he says, “an immense portion of our property is in the
waves. Sixty or eighty thousand of our most useful citizens are there,
and are entitled to such protection from the government as their case
requires.” In another oration, delivered in 1812, and printed at
Portsmouth, he says, “a navy sufficient for the defence of our coasts
and harbours, for the convoy of important branches of our trade, and
sufficient, also, to give our enemies to understand, when they injure
us, that they too are vulnerable, and that we have the power of
retaliation as well as of defence, seems to be the plain, necessary,
indispensable policy of the nation. It is the dictate of nature and
common sense, that means of defence shall have relation to the danger.”
These doctrines in favour of a navy were extremely unwelcome to the
nation when they were delivered; the first occasion referred to, being
just before the imposition of the embargo; and the second, just before
the capture of the Guerriere. How stands the national sentiment now? Who
doubts the truth of what Mr. Webster could not utter in 1806 and 1812
without exciting ill-will to himself?


[6]
North American Review, 1821. Vol. xii. p. 342.


[7]
See the beautiful passage respecting the fortune and the life of John
Adams at p. 44.


[8]
In an able article on the battle of Bunker’s Hill, which is found in the
North American Review, 1818, VII. 225-258, and is understood to have
been written by Mr. Webster, he says,—”In truth, if there was any
commander-in-chief in the action, it was Prescott. From the first
breaking of the ground to the retreat, he acted the most important
part
; and if it were now proper to give the battle a name from any
distinguished agent in it, it should be called, Prescott’s battle.” We
have no doubt this is but an exact measure of justice to one of those
who hazarded all in our revolution, when the hazard was the greatest.
The whole review is strong, and no one hereafter can write the history
of the period it refers to, without consulting it. The opening
description of the battle is beautiful and picturesque.


Art. VIII.—POLAND.

1.—Histoire de Pologne par M.
Zielinski
, Professeur au Lycée de Varsovie. Tome premier,
pp. 383. Tome second, pp. 422: Paris: 1830.

2.—Polen, zur Zeit der zwey letzten Theilungen dieses
Reichs: Historisch, Statistisch, und Geographisch beschrieben, &c.
&c. Poland, at the time of the two last divisions of this kingdom;
Historically, Statistically, and Geographically, described, with a map,
exhibiting the divisions of Poland, in the years 1772, 1793, and
1795
: pp. 551.

3.—Histoire de l’Anarchie de Pologne, par M. Rulhiere.

4.—Spittler’s Entwurf der
Geschichte Polens, Miteiner Fortsetrung bis auf die neuesten Zeiten
verslhen von
Georg Sartorius, in
Spittler’s Essay at the History of the European States
. Vol. II. pp.
460-546: Third edition: Berlin: 1823:

We venture to invite public attention to a review of the
history of Poland. The subject excites a deep but melancholy interest;
we dread to hear the result of the glorious but unhappy conflict, in
which that devoted country is engaged. We know, indeed, that the Poles
will be faithful to their cause; we know, that they are encouraged by
the sincere prayers of all who desire the permanent and extended welfare
of the world; we know, that though single-handed, hemmed in by hostile
powers, and all unprovided as they are with the means of conducting war,
they will sustain the terrible struggle with fearless intrepidity. But
Warsaw, like the Carthage of old, must fall at last; though the excited
spirit of patriotism may cover its fall, with a glory which will not
fade. But we fear almost to read of partial successes. [Pg 458]The
generous enthusiasm of the Poles for political independence, is
identified with the best interests, the security and permanent repose of
Europe; it has not failed to achieve brilliant actions in its contest
against the fearful odds of an immense empire; it may perform yet more
honourable deeds upon the great theatre of the contest; but all these
temporary advantages fail to excite in us a thrill of triumph. We fear
for the result. The brave opposition which has been made, displays the
more fully the merits of the nation which is doomed as a victim, and we
almost shrink from admiring the gallantry which will eventually render
more bloody and more severe the sacrifice that must at last be offered
on the unholy altars of despotism. The nationality of Poland has excited
the struggle; has animated her sons to battle; and has armed them in the
panoply of an heroic despair. That nationality will be utterly destroyed
by the impending successes of Russia. The alarum was rung too late for
the devoted people; they rallied to the watchword of liberty, but their
glory and strength were already departed. Its name will be erased from
the list of nations; and the beautiful plains on which the proud cavalry
of its nobles used to assemble in the haughty exercise of their elective
rights, will be confounded with the great mass of lands, which
constitute the vast empire of the North.

Before our remarks can meet the eyes of our readers, perhaps, this
result will have been accomplished. There was a short interval in the
history of our age, when the monarchs, in their resistance to Napoleon,
made their appeal to their people, acknowledged the power and aroused
the enthusiasm of the many, and seemed inclined to give durability to
their institutions by conciliating the general good will. It was during
that short period, that the residue of Poland, having by the fortunes of
war become occupied by Russian troops, was annexed to Russia, not as an
integral part of its empire, but as a coordinate and independent
kingdom. No such system had ever before been pursued; but Alexander was
for a while seized with the general love of constitutions, and believed
them still consistent with his independent sway. In consequence, Poland,
that is, the small remaining portion of the ancient kingdom, received
its separate existence, and under a free constitution. But the absolute
politicians soon discovered that this would prove in their doctrines an
anomaly. It soon became evident that the liberties of Poland were
inconsistent with the abject submission of Russia; and since we cannot
hope, that the latter will as yet claim a change in its government, it
seems assured, that the Poles will be compelled to submit to the same
servitude. Such appears to us the necessary issue of the present
conflict; Polish [Pg 459]nationality will be entirely subverted;
and the kingdom of Poland be merged in the consolidated empire.

We regard such an issue, as one deeply to be deplored. The favorite
poet of Italy, in searching for objects to illustrate the general decay
of human affairs, and to pourtray the insignificance of personal
sufferings, as compared with the larger proofs of the instability of
fortune, exclaims with pathetic truth;

“Cadono le città, cadono i regni
E l’uom d’esser mortal par che si sdegni.”

Of the ruin of a realm, we have a most appalling example. In the
places of many of the old Polish cities, it is said, that dense forests
have now sprung up; that the traveller, as he makes his way through
their interminable shades, finds the pavement of streets and the relics
of deserted towns in the midst of a lifeless solitude. And now, that the
sum of evils may be full, the nation of the Poles seems destined to a
fall, from which there will be to them no further resurrection.

Yet the former history of Poland hardly palliates the position which
the sovereigns and states of Europe have assumed towards her. In the
days of her republican pride, was she not the chosen ally of France and
the rightful mistress of Prussia? The crowns of Sweden and of Bohemia
have at separate times been worn by her kings; the Danube was hardly the
limit of her southern frontier; the coasts of the Euxine were hers; and
when Vienna itself was about to yield to the yoke of Turkish barbarism,
it was a Polish king that stayed the wave and rescued Christendom from
the danger of Turkish supremacy. If France had on the one side saved
Europe from the Saracens, Poland had in its turn protected it against
the Turks; and John Sobieski alone deserves to be named with Charles
Martel, as the successful defenders of Christendom in the moments of its
greatest danger.

But in the foreign politics of European powers, generosity and
gratitude have usually prevailed no more than other moral
considerations. The interests of the state have sometimes disputed the
ascendency with the intrigues of courtiers, or the cabals of
ecclesiastics; but the voice of justice has rarely been heard in its own
right. Political vice has usually been counteracted by political vice;
and if the right of the stronger has been sometimes resisted, it was
only from the multiplication of jealousies. Thus, we shall see, that the
crisis of Poland was delayed, not by its intrinsic strength, but by the
collision of foreign interests.

A consideration of the revolutions in Polish history is full of
instruction for our nation. The inquirer finds, that the causes of the
decline of that unhappy country were deeply rooted in its constitution;
that it yielded to foreign aggression, only [Pg 460]because it had been
reduced to anarchy by the licentious vehemence of domestic feuds. The
Poles themselves struck the wounds of which their republic bled; and
their efforts at resistance would have been ample and effectual, if they
had not continued their factions till the ruin was complete; if the
alarums which aroused them to united action, had not been the knell of
their country.

The Poles are a branch of the great Slavonian family of nations. No
history reveals, no tradition reports their origin. The plains upon the
Vistula were at a very early period the seat of their abode; and when,
in the seventh century, the Bulgarians excited movements on the Danube,
new tribes crossed the Carpathian mountains, and perhaps contributed to
the development of the political condition among their brethren whom
they joined.

The name itself of Poles, does not occur till the end of the tenth
century; but fable has not omitted to lend an aspect of romance to the
early fortunes of the nation. Shall we repeat the wonderful tale of the
hospitable peasant Piast, who is said have been chosen in 840 to be the
Polish king? His descendants are said to have been kings in Poland till
the time of Casimir III.; and so late as 1675 were princes in Silesia.
It was owing to the virtues of this plebeian monarch, that the natives
among the Poles, when elected to be kings, were called Piasts.

The German kings were zealous to diffuse Christianity beyond the
Vistula; and Mjesko, who was baptized in 964, was the first of the
Polish chiefs who embraced Christianity, and at the same time became the
vassal of the German king. Yet it is hard to assign a fixed character to
the government during this earliest historical period. As Poland is a
plain, its natural aspect invited aggressions from all sides; and it was
in its turn fond of war as a profession. Its limits were uncertain, and
the power of its chiefs ill defined. Nor was its relation to Germany
established. International law was but faintly developed; nor could it
be said, whether the masters of Poland did homage for the whole, or only
for a portion of their territory. Indeed, it was sometimes utterly
refused. To the peremptory demand of tribute, on the part of the Emperor
Henry V., the Polish Duke replied, “no terror can make me own myself
your tributary, even to the amount of a penny; I had rather lose my
whole country, than possess it in ignominious peace.” Unsuccessful in
the field, the emperor relied on his treasures to make his supremacy
acknowledged. “See here,” said he to the Polish deputation, opening his
chest, “the resources which shall enable me to crush you.” A Polish
envoy immediately drew from his finger a ring of great value, and
throwing it in, exclaimed, [Pg 461]“add this to your gold.”[9] Venality was not in fashion in those
days, and the emperor suffered a complete overthrow.

So it was, that for the four first centuries in Polish history,
prowess in the field rendered the nation glorious and passionately fond
of war. The pressure of external force at last led to the formation of a
permanent territory, and an acknowledged form of government, after a
long subdivision of the country among various chiefs, and a confused
political condition, eminently favourable to the leaders of a barbarous
aristocracy.

The first permanent mass that arose out of the chaos of separate
principalities, was Great Poland, on the Wartha; and this was at last
united under the same master with Little Poland, on the Vistula. The
nation desired a king, as their only refuge from anarchy and invasions.
The Pope John XII. had been desired to appoint the king; he pleaded the
principle of nonintervention, and bade the nation execute its own laws
and its own will. In consequence, Ladislaus was crowned with great
solemnity at Cracau, in 1320, and the series of Polish kings is from
that time uninterrupted. But the period of aristocratic anarchy had
impressed a character upon the government and the nation. There existed
no established laws, no rising commerce, no pure religious worship. The
bravery of the Poles in the field was brilliant, but barren. Their
enthusiasm won victories, but could not turn them to the advantage of
the country. And when, at the epoch we have named, a king was chosen for
the whole state, his power was already limited, not by a fair
representation of the interests of the nation, but solely by the high
aristocracy. Without their consent no laws could be established, nor
wars declared, nor government administered, nor justice decreed.

And yet the ensuing period of Polish history is that of greatest
national prosperity. The vices of the constitution were not fully
developed till the close of the sixteenth century. Indeed, Casimir the
Great, the immediate successor of Ladislaus, was able, like Augustus of
Rome, during a reign of thirty-seven years, to establish something like
justice and tranquillity in his kingdom. If he lost territory on the one
side, he gained large provinces from Russia on the other. But his
greatest merit consisted in his functions as a law-giver. His code was
written in the Latin, expressed in neat and clear language, and was
favourable to the industry and prosperity of the country. The Polish
historians delight to recount the magnificence which his economy enabled
him to maintain; and applying to him what [Pg 462]used to be said of the
Roman, declare that he found Poland of wood, and left it of brick.

But the seeds of evil were also planted by him. According to his
desire, Lewis, the king of Hungary, was elected his successor. The
consent of the nobles could be purchased only by concessions; and in
order to secure the royal dignity in his family to one of his daughters,
he was compelled to enter into terms with the oligarchy. Freedom from
taxation was the great point demanded and promised. All towns, castles,
and estates, belonging to the nobles, were freed from taxation forever;
and no services of any kind were to be required. In case of war, the
nobles were to take the field on horseback, for the defence of the
country; but if necessity required the employment of troops abroad, it
was to be at the charge of the king. Thus the paternal ambition of the
king, uniting with the avarice of the nobles, laid the foundation of
anarchy and weakness, by concessions wholly at variance with the
existence of an equitable liberty. The people, having no means of making
their rights heard, were abandoned entirely to the tyranny of their
immediate masters. Such was the origin of the pacta conventa, and
such the first venal bargain, by which the energies of Poland were
bartered away, and aristocratic tyranny made the basis of the
constitution.

Fatal as was this arrangement for the political progress of Poland,
it was yet favourable for the extension of its territory. Hedwiga, the
daughter of Lewis, succeeded to the throne; and by accepting for her
husband Jagellon, the grand duke of Lithuania, she annexed that dutchy
to Poland, and was the means of converting its inhabitants from
paganism. It was in 1386 that the grand duke was baptized, and with him
the celebrated family of the Jagellons obtained the Polish crown.

The Lithuanians were converted to Christianity, not by fire and
sword, nor by any process of argument. It was the will of their prince;
and besides, excellent woollen coats and leather shoes, were distributed
to the neophytes. He who could repeat the pater noster and the
decalogue, was received as a Christian. They were a barbarous
race,—yet, like the Poles, formed a part of the Slavonian family,
and had gradually become an independent nation. The complete union of
the two countries did not take place for nearly two centuries.

The family of the Jagellons, for seven successive reigns, extending
through 186 years, obtained the throne. The praises of that period form
the theme of eulogy among the patriotic writers of Poland. It was the
period of the greatest harmony between the kings and the nation. They
were admired for the fidelity with which they maintained their
covenants; the crown of Sweden was repeatedly proffered to
them,—and they had [Pg 463]conferred on Poland, the lasting
benefit of uniting to it a country, which before had been the theatre of
constant hostilities. But yet so far as the sovereigns themselves are
observed, not one of them displayed the highest excellence of a ruler.
They were abundantly distinguished for the virtues which constitute
personal worth; but they were not of the persevering energy, or prudent
discernment, which could alone have given a sure foundation to the
Polish government.

The first in the line, to secure the accession of his son, confirmed
the privileges of the nobles. The peasantry was forgotten; the class of
citizens hardly remembered, but the personal rights and the property of
the nobles was sacredly assured. It was further stipulated, that none
but natives should be appointed to the high offices of the state. A
stipulation of that sort, would have rendered the genius of Peter the
Great inadequate to the reforms which he planned and executed; the
limitation in Poland undoubtedly retarded the progress of culture.

The second in the series, a minor at his accession, was elected king
of Hungary also; and he had hardly begun to exercise his power and
display his valour, before he fell in the famous battle of Varna, in the
effort to save the Greek empire from the Turks. His brother and
successor, Casimir IV., had two powerful enemies, the Teutonic knights, and the Polish
nobility. The latter war was the more formidable,—for, as the
power of his foreign adversaries compelled him to resort frequently to
the diets, of which he convoked no less than forty-five, it is not
strange, that the nobles wrung some new privilege from every occurrence,
which rendered their co-operation necessary. At length it was
established, that no new law should be enacted, nor any levy of troops
be made, without the consent of the general diet. The custom of sending
deputies now became prevalent, because the frequency of the diet
rendered a general attendance troublesome. The number of delegates was
at first fixed by no rule, and the whole form grew up as chance, as
gradual usage prescribed; but, as the excessive power of the nobility
increased, the rights of the peasantry were impaired. The code of
Casimir the Great, had left the labourer the choice of his residence; it
was now decreed, that the peasant should be considered as attached to
the soil, and the fugitive might be pursued and recovered as a run-a-way
slave. A third estate was hardly known; and, if the deputies of cities
sometimes appeared in a convention, their chief privilege was to kiss
the new king’s hand, or sign decrees, on which they were not invited to
deliberate. Polish politics established the rule, that none but nobles
were citizens.

While the general diet thus received its character as the
representation of the nobility, elected in the provincial assemblies,
[Pg
464]
another body now gradually assumed an active existence.
The highest civil and religious officers of the kingdom formed a senate;
and they were constituted members, not because they were great
proprietors, but in consequence of the office, to which they had been
named by the king.

Casimir was succeeded by his three sons. Under the first, John
Albert, the power of the oligarchy was confirmed, and not a semblance of
an independent prerogative remained to the crown. Under Alexander, it
was further decreed by the diet, that nothing should in future be
transacted, except communi consensu. The nobility had already
usurped all the sovereign authority; they now in their zeal to confirm
their usurpations, introduced the ambiguous clause, which was afterwards
to be perverted to their own ruin. A dismal inadvertence failed to
insert, that the will of the majority should be binding; and hence it
became possible at a later day to interpret the law, as investing each
deputy with a tribunicial authority. Under Sigismund, the third son of
Casimir, all attempts to restore the royal authority were futile. The
equality of the nobles was established by law;—yet a portion of
them already began to look with contempt on their less wealthy peers,
and would gladly have
separated themselves from the great mass of “the plebeian nobility.”

With Sigismund Augustus, the son of Sigismund, the race of the
Jagellons expired. At that time, Poland was still powerful; the Prince
of Stettin and the Prince of Prussia were its vassals; the palatines of
Wallachia and Moldavia owed allegiance to it; the Duke of Courland did
it homage; Livonia was incorporated among its territories. Nothing but a
government was wanting to render it one of the most brilliant states of
Europe. Copernicus had already rendered it illustrious in science; and,
in no part of Europe was the knowledge of the Latin language so
generally diffused.

Now that the royal dynasty was at an end, the succession to the
throne, which had hitherto been in part hereditary, became necessarily
elective. But no forms had been prescribed for the occasion. It was not
known who were the rightful depositaries of power during the
interregnum, nor who were possessed of a voice in the election of king.
At length the right of convoking the diet was assigned to the primate,
and the elective franchise was decided to appertain in an equal degree
to each of the nobles, without the intervention of electors.

To maintain religious peace was the next concern. The reformation had
made its way to Poland,—but not merely under the forms of
Calvinism and Lutheranism. The Socinians existed also as a powerful
party. Those who were not Catholics, were at variance with each other;
the diet, therefore, with great consideration, decreed, that no one
should be punished or persecuted [Pg 465]for his religious
opinions. The term, dissidents, was originally used of them all,
as expressing their mutual differences; in process of time, it was,
however, applied exclusively to those who were out of the Roman
church.

At length the day for the election arrived. The Polish nobility, each
on his war-horse, appeared at the appointed place in countless troops,
and it seemed as though an army had been assembled, rather than an
electoral body. The candidates were proposed,—the ambassadors of
the leading foreign powers admitted to address the electors, and freedom
given to any Pole to offer himself as a candidate, for the suffrages of
his countrymen. Yet, before proceeding to the election, a constitution
was formed, embodying all the privileges of the oligarchy, and
conferring on that order, the unequivocal sovereignty. After this work
was accomplished, the vote was taken, and Henry of Anjou was chosen
king.

It was wise for the nation, which showed a spirit of religious
tolerance, to exact of their new king, a pledge in favour of religious
peace. An oath was not too strong a guarantee to be required of him, who
was a leader in the massacre of St. Bartholomy’s night! It was wise,
also, to require money and other advantageous stipulations of France.
But the Poles felt still greater satisfaction in the law which was now
established, prohibiting the choice of a successor, during the lifetime
of the king.

The Duke of Anjou left the siege of Rochelle for the Polish crown;
and four months after his coronation, he fled from Poland by night, as a
fugitive, on horseback, accompanied by seven attendants. The Poles,
dismayed and humiliated by the procedure, fixed a limit for his return,
and when that period had expired, they declared the throne to be vacant,
and proceeded to a new election.

Stephen Bathory, the duke of Transylvania, was the successful
candidate. Under his short reign, Poland saw the last years of its
prosperity; and from the epoch of his death, the spirit of faction
prevailed over every sentiment of justice or patriotism. The king had no
further authority to concede; and internal feuds, sustained by the most
bitter passions, now divided the nobility.

It was in 1586 that king Stephen died. At that time Poland extended
from Brandenburgh and Silesia to Esthonia; its power along the Baltic
was undisputed; and the shores of the Euxine had as yet submitted to no
other dominion. Wallachia and Hungary were its southern limits; while,
in the east, it still contended with Russia for an extended frontier.
Its soil was productive of the most valuable returns; its plains were
intersected by navigable rivers; its population amounted to sixteen
millions, [Pg
466]
and its resources seemed to promise the means of easily
sustaining more than three-fold that number. The principle of religious
equality was recognized by its law; and it believed itself to possess a
greater degree of liberty than any nation of Europe. How could such a
state, so magnificent in its resources, so commanding in its actual
strength, so celebrated for daring valour, sink into the gloom and
debility of anarchy? How could such a nation in its glory submit to
unconnected activity, and, like the fabled Titan, suffer the birds of
prey to gorge upon its vitals, without one effectual struggle in
self-defence?

The wildest spirit of party was displayed at the next election of a
king. The factions were respectively led by two powerful and ambitious
families; and to the former evils in the state were now added those
political feuds, fostered by the passion for aggrandizement, and
rendered virulent by the excess of personal hatred. The dominant party
declared Sigismund III. to be elected the king of Poland.

The new king was, unluckily, first, an imbecile and narrow-minded
man, with all the obstinacy belonging to weakness; next, he was heir to
the Swedish throne; thirdly, he was a bigotted Catholic; and, lastly,
and for Poland the saddest of all, he lived to reign forty-five years.
His blind stupidity left the storms of party to rage unrestrained, and
the usurpations of the nobility to proceed unchecked: his hereditary
claim on Sweden, which wisely rejected his right, and preferred Gustavus
Adolphus, led to a war, in which Poland was the chief sufferer; his
bigotry prevented him from healing the intestine divisions by wise
toleration; and, finally, his long life gave almost every one of his
neighbours an opportunity of aggrandizement by aggressions on his realm.
The dismemberment of the Polish dominions began. The Porte secured
Moldavia; the Swedes took possession of Livonia and Courland; and,
though the short anarchy in Russia led to some success in that quarter,
it was a greater loss that the Elector of Brandenburgh, contrary to the
stipulations of ancient treaties, claimed and obtained the succession to
the fief of the Prussian Dutchy. In short, the reign of Sigismund was
marked by deadly errors of policy, and foolish obstinacy of character.
The continued oppression of the peasantry, and the constant recurrence
of eventual losses in wars, were in no degree compensated by the display
of warlike virtues on the part of a democratic nobility.

It was of little advantage to the Poles, that Ladislaus IV., the son
and successor of Sigismund, was a man of distinguished merit. At his
accession the nobles devised a new condition. Hitherto they had guarded
themselves against taxation; they now proceeded to tax the king. For a
long period, one quarter [Pg 467]of the income of the royal domains had
been set apart for the military service, especially for the artillery;
they now demanded a concession of a full moiety. But, it may be asked,
what was done for the people? The answer would be, absolutely nothing.
It did not seem to be imagined, that the labouring class had any rights;
not a law was proposed for the benefit of the millions, who cultivated
the soil. Even the peasants on the estates of the king were equally
oppressed;—why? It was the nobles who farmed the royal
domains.

Every thing stagnated. Every thing, do we say? The natural instinct
of freedom in the Cossacks could brook their abject servitude no longer.
They reclaimed their partial independence, complained that their rights
were infringed, and found demagogues, who were desirous and were able to
lead them.

At this crisis the king died, and his brother, John Casimir, a man
tried by misfortunes, who, having been the inmate of a French dungeon,
afterwards, from disappointment and chagrin, became a Jesuit and a
Cardinal, was elected his successor.

The powers and the revenues of the king had been plundered; one thing
more was alone wanting to give full development to the Polish
constitution. In the year 1652, a diet was dissolved by the opposition
of a single deputy; this was remarkable enough; but it was still more
strange, that what had been once effected by passion, should remain an
acknowledged right; and that while the country rung with curses against
the deputy who had set the example, the power should still have been
claimed as a sacred privilege. No redress could be obtained except by
confederations; and it was now the height of anarchy, that public law
recognized these separate assemblies. Indeed, the days of the liberum
veto
were necessarily the days of legalized insurrection. It was a
sort of dictatorship, invented for the new contingency. Only the misery
was, that there could be as many confederations as there were separate
factions.

Poland had, all this while, formidable foreign enemies to encounter.
The Swedes, the Czar, the Porte, were all greedy for aggrandizement.
This was no time for domestic dissensions. The only wonder is, that the
nation could have resisted its enemies at all. As it was, several
provinces were lost; in 1657, the Duke of Prussia seized the opportunity
of freeing himself altogether from his relation as vassal to the Polish
crown.

The melancholy Casimir could not endure all this. He held a diet in
1661, and told the deputies plainly: “First or last, our state will be
divided by our neighbours. Russia will extend itself to the Bug, and
perhaps to the Vistula; the Elector of Brandenburgh will seize upon
Great Poland and the neighbouring districts; and Austria will not remain
behind, but will take Cracau and other places.” The prophecy was uttered
in vain; [Pg
468]
and a few years after, the philosophic monarch, having
buried his wife, for whose sake alone he had been willing to reign,
resigned the crown, and removed to France.

This was a new state of things. A diet of election was convened, and
the decree ratified, that henceforward no king of Poland should be
allowed to resign
. One would think the decree very flattering to the
nation!

The next object was the choice of a king. We have seen, that the
Poles had usually elected a member of the previous royal family. They
had adhered to the Jagellons, and now also to the Sigismunds, until the
families were extinct. The field was therefore open; and this time the
division lay, not between contending factions of the high aristocracy,
but between the high aristocracy, on the one hand, and the “plebeian
nobility,” on the other. The party of “the many” prevailed; and the
electoral vote was given to Michael Wisniowiecki, a man of great private
worth, poor, as to his fortunes, modest, and retiring. The joy of the
inferior nobility was at its height; and the shouts of the noble
multitude, and the salutes from the artillery, proclaimed aloud the
triumphs of equality. Poor Michael declined the honour, in vain. He
entreated, with tears in his eyes, to be released from it. His tears
were equally vain. He made his escape from the electoral field on
horseback; the deputies pursued him and compelled him to be king.

From the commencement of his reign the faction of the high
aristocracy opposed him. The first diet which he convened was broken up;
the senate was openly discontented; the enthusiasm of the nobility grew
cool; and it was found that a mistake had been committed. The Cossacks
were tumultuous; the Turks pursued a ruinous war, terminated only by a
disgraceful peace. The nation was indignant; a new war was decreed;
when, fortunately for himself and the state, the king died. John
Sobieski, the leader of the aristocracy, succeeded.

The relief of Vienna, in 1683, is the crowning glory of Sobieski. His
subsequent campaigns were unsuccessful; for he had neither sufficient
troops, nor money, nor provisions, nor artillery. Nor was he happy in
his family. The great champion of Christendom was governed by his wife,
and the nation sneered at his weakness. His ambition as a father led him
to desire, during his lifetime, the election of his son as successor.
Unable to accomplish this, he took to avarice, not a very respectable
passion for a private man, but a very dangerous one for a prince. But in
avarice he had able auxiliaries in his wife and the Jews. Every thing
was venal; and the king grew rich, without growing happy. As a last
resort, he tried retirement and letters. But the pursuit of letters, in
itself intrinsically exalted, must be chosen in its own right, if
happiness is to be won by it; to the [Pg 469]disappointed statesman
it is but a mere shield against despair; a sort of philosopher’s robe to
hide the ghastliness of sullen discontent. Sobieski found in the Latin
classics, which he diligently read, no healing “medicine for the soul
diseased;” and the atrabilious humours of his wife, and the torment of
his station, and his mental discontent, all combined to hasten his
death. He passed from this world on the same hour and the same day as
his election.

We have traced the progress of the infringements upon the royal
authority; we have seen the election of the king decided by a faction in
an oligarchy, by a rabble of noblemen, by the high aristocracy; the next
election was decided by bribes. Two strong parties only appeared; the
French, which declared for Conti, and the Saxon, which advocated the
interests of the Elector Augustus. But the French ambassador had
distributed all his money, while the Saxon envoy was still in Funds. So
each party chose its own king; each made proclamation of its sovereign;
each sung its anthem in the Cathedral; but the French party subsided, as
soon as the primate, its chief support, could agree upon his price.

Thus the Saxon elector prevailed. He was one of the most dissolute
princes of the age; and an unbounded luxury and abandoned profligacy
were introduced by him among the higher orders in Poland. The morals of
the nobility now became nearly as bad as their political constitution.
What need have we to dwell on the personal war which Augustus II.
commenced against Charles XII. of Sweden; the defeats he sustained; his
forced resignation of the crown; the appointment of Stanislaus in his
stead; and his own restoration after the battle of Pultawa? The leading
point in his history is this: that with him the Russian ascendency in
Poland was established. All the rest of Europe was rapidly advancing in
culture; the only change in Poland was the predominance of Russia.

On the death of Augustus II. the majority of the votes was in favour
of Stanislaus; but the vicinity of a Russian army sustained the
pretensions of Augustus III. His reign, if reign it may be termed,
extended through a period of thirty years. They were interrupted by no
wars; not because the nation desired or profited by peace, but in
consequence of the general inertness, the universal languor, the
unqualified anarchy. The king possessed no power, except through the
miserable expedients of an intriguing cabinet. The cities were deserted;
the regular administration of justice was unknown; and the barbarism of
the middle ages reverted. Nothing preserved Poland in existence, but the
jealousies of surrounding powers.

The last king of Poland was chosen under the dictation of Russian
arms, at the express desire of Catharine the Second. [Pg
470]
Stanislaus Poniatowski was crowned at Warsaw in 1764, and
ascended the throne with philanthropic intentions, but with a feeble
purpose. His reign illustrates the vast inferiority of the virtues of
the heart to the virtues of the will. The difficulties of his position
do not excuse his own imbecility; and while the paralysis of the nation
was complete, he was himself deficient in the manly virtues of a
sovereign.

Within nine years after his accession to the throne, the first
dismemberment of Poland was consummated. The student of human nature
might ask, by what mighty armies the division was effected? What
overwhelming force could lead a nation of nobles to submit to the
degradation? What bloody battles were fought, what victories were won in
the struggle? It might be supposed, that all Poland would have started
as if electrified; that the ground would have been disputed, inch by
inch; that every town would have become a citadel, garrisoned by the
stern lovers of independence and national honour.

The fall of Poland was ignominious. Not one battle was fought, not
one siege was necessary for effecting the division. Anarchy,
intolerance, scandalous dissensions, an imbecile sovereign, these were
the instruments which accomplished the ruin of the state.

The personal adherents of Stanislaus had designed to change the form
of government from a legal anarchy to a limited monarchy. This patriotic
design of the Czartorinskis was defeated by the hot-headed zeal of the
republican party, by the influence of Russia, and most of all, by the
excesses of intolerable bigotry.

The dissidents had, in the early part of the century, incurred
suspicion, as the secret adherents of Sweden. If in England, where
culture had made such advances, the Catholics could be disfranchised, is
it strange, that in Poland, a vehement party was opposed to the
toleration of Protestants? In 1717, unconstitutional enactments had been
made to their injury; and at subsequent periods, the religious tyranny
had proceeded so far as to exclude the dissident from all civil
privileges. They were excluded from the national representation, and
declared incapable of participating in any public magistracy
whatever.

On the accession of Stanislaus it was hoped that a more moderate and
equitable spirit would prevail. Stanislaus himself favoured the cause of
religious freedom. The dissidents made a very moderate request for the
establishment of freedom of worship, without claiming the restitution of
all their franchises. The zealots, strengthened by the opponents of the
king, would concede absolutely nothing; and as in politics religious
parties have always exhibited the most deadly hostility, so in this case
Poland was more distracted than ever.

The Russian ambassador immediately seized the opportunity [Pg 471]of
making Russian influence predominant under the mask of protecting
liberty of conscience. The empress demanded for the dissidents a perfect
equality with the Catholics; and amidst scenes of tumultuous discussion
and legislative frenzy, the demand was rejected. The highest religious
zeal became combined with a detestation of Russian interference, and
unbridled passion accomplished its utmost.

The dissidents, unsuccessful in their application to the diet,
confederated under Russian protection; and as the proceedings of the
king had excited a vague apprehension of some encroachments on the
privileges of the nobles, the confederates were joined by the opponents
of the king also. In this way a general confederation was formed
agreeably to the established usage in Poland; but the whole was under
the guidance and control of Repnin, the Russian ambassador.

When the general diet was convened in 1767, so large a Russian army
was already encamped in Poland, that Repnin was able to dictate the
petitions and the complaints which were to be presented for
consideration. No foreign power interfered. France and Austria were
exhausted; and Frederic was careful to preserve a good understanding
with his great Northern ally.

But with all this, some refractory spirits appeared in the diet. No
terrors could subdue the inflexible and impassioned spirit of Soltyk,
Zaluski, and the two Rzewuskis. And what was done by an ambassador of
the foreign power in the capital of a free and mighty state? Repnin
ordered the resolute patriots to be seized by night and transported to
Siberia. Horror chilled the nation at the outrage, and the rage of
despair filled all but the partisans of Russia. The ambassador of
Catharine was now able to dictate to the diet all the decrees relating
to the dissidents, and all the other laws which were enacted at the
session. It was plain, that he did not understand the wants of the dissidents; but he took care
to render the continuance of Russian interference necessary for their
security.

It was the misfortune of the Polish patriots, that the defence of
their nationality became identified with the most furious form of
religious bigotry. The diet had not terminated its session before a new
confederation convened at Bar, and contending against the Russians on
the one hand, attempted to depose the king on the other. But the
confederation was easily dissolved by the Russian army, and its leaders
were obliged to fly for refuge beyond the frontier.

Thus the cause of the Poles seemed to be abandoned by all the world.
The efforts of the king were insignificant; the nobles were many of them
in the pay of Russia, the rest of them divided by civil, religious, and
family factions; and England and [Pg 472]France were idle
spectators of the approaching dissolution of the Polish state.

Yet one power there was, whose ancient maxim would not allow a
Russian army in Poland. While all the Christian monarchs neglected or
joined to pillage the unhappy land, the Porte declared war against the
aggressor. The issue of that contest is well known; and the power of
Russia was but the more confirmed by her entire success in the war.
Russian ascendancy in the North and East became established, and the
last hope of Poland was removed.

When at length the three principal powers invaded Poland, and
published their manifesto, proclaiming its dismemberment, the nation
submitted almost without a struggle. The blow came as upon one in a
lethargy. The revelries of the wealthy nobility, the feuds of the great
families, and the wretchedness of the peasantry, continued as
before.

It may be asked, who first planned the partition of Poland? We
believe it was Frederic. Austria was indeed the first to advance her
frontier; but every thing tends rather to show, that the Austrian
cabinet insisted upon its share, only because the robbery was at all
events to be committed; and Russia had no interest in proposing a
division, for she already virtually possessed the whole. Frederic, on
the contrary, was earnestly desirous of consolidating and uniting his
kingdom, of which the parts were before divided by Polish provinces.

Previous to this first division in 1773, Poland had possessed a
territory of about 220,000 miles; her neighbours now left her about
166,000. Prussia and Austria would gladly have taken more; but Russia
protected the residue, as prey reserved for herself.

Or rather, the Russian ambassador in Warsaw, was from that time the
real sovereign over the land. A secret article in the treaty with
Prussia guaranteed the
liberties and constitution of Poland, that is, stipulated that the state
of anarchy should continue.

And yet it seems surprising, that a nation of fourteen millions, and
of proverbial valor should have submitted without a blow. The result can
be explained only from the abject state to which the peasantry had
become reduced, and the immense gulf which separated the nobility from
the people.

But a new epoch was opening in the history of the world. The United
States of America had achieved their independence, and established their
liberties. The impulse was instantaneously felt throughout Europe, and
it extended to Poland. The relative position of the Northern European
powers was also changed. The alliance between Russia and Prussia had
expired in 1780, nor had the Empress been willing to renew it. On the
contrary, the alliance of Austria was preferred, and the new associates
[Pg
473]
combined to engage in a war with the Porte. The purpose
of dismembering the Turkish state was avowed, and the Poles foresaw full
well, that their own territory would next be coveted. They therefore
determined to shake off the
intolerable yoke of foreign interference, and, observing that their
constitution was absolutely in ruins, they ventured to attempt a
reconstruction of their state.

The condition of the public mind in France had its share of
influence. The Polish nobility had long been partial to the language and
manners of France. Nor were the two countries in situations wholly
unlike. Both states were disorganized; one was suffering from anarchy,
the other tending to it; and both needed a renewal of their youth. On
the Seine and on the Vistula, a new order of things was demanded. The
United States had been the first state in the world to introduce a
written constitution; Poland was now the first country in Europe to
imitate the example.

It was in October, 1788, that the revolutionary diet assembled at
Warsaw. It assembled tranquilly: for Austria and Russia were at war with
the Porte, and Sweden had also threatened St. Petersburg from the north.
Its first decree abolished the liberum veto. Henceforward, the
will of the majority was to be the law.

But even yet the spirit of faction was unsubdued. A Russian
party,—a minority, it is true, yet, under the circumstances, a
formidable one, introduced divisions into the diet. The king himself had
not lofty independence enough to join heartily with the patriots, but
still continued to hope for the political safety of his country, from
the clemency of Catharine.

A treaty of alliance with Russia against the Porte, was proposed to
the diet and rejected, in part, through the influence of Prussia. It was
next voted to raise the Polish army, from 18,000 to 60,000; and, if
possible, to 100,000 men. To effect this object, the nobility and clergy
voluntarily submitted to taxation. The control of the army was entrusted
not to the king, but to a special commission.

Some foreign support was next desired; and the political position of
Prussia, gorged though she had been with the spoils of Poland, seemed
yet under the reign of its new king to offer a safe and resolute
protector. The court of Berlin published to the world its determination
to guarantee the independence of Poland, and to avoid all interference
in its internal concerns.

Stanislaus wavered, and evidently leaned to the Russian side. The
decision of the diet at length won him over to the party of the
patriots;—and he agreed to assist in expelling the Russian army
from the Polish soil, in forming a constitution, and in soliciting the
concurrence of other nations in repressing the [Pg 474]unmeasured
aggrandizement of Russia. These proceedings were not without
effect;—in June of the following year, the ambassador of Catharine
announced that her army had left Poland, and would not again cross its
boundaries.

The diet now advanced to the work of framing a constitution; while
the representatives of the third estate were, in the meanwhile, admitted
to a seat in the assembly.

The alliance with Prussia was, however, delayed, partly by means of
Russian intrigue, but still more, because Frederic William demanded the
cession of Dantzig. On this point, divisions ensued, which were never
reconciled. But, in March, 1790, a treaty of peace and alliance between
Poland and Prussia was signed, containing a guarantee of each other’s
possessions, and a mutual pledge of assistance, in case of an attack
from abroad. Should any foreign nation attempt interference in the
internal concerns of Poland, the court of Berlin pledged itself to
render every assistance by means of negotiations, and, if they failed,
to make use of its whole military force.

But, alas, for the plighted faith of princes! The time of this treaty
was a very critical juncture. Joseph II. of Austria was dead; Prussia
was in alliance with the Porte, and of course exposed to a war with
Russia; and the negotiations for a general peace in the congress of
Reichenbach, were not yet begun. At that congress, Prussia revealed its
will to become master of Dantzig and Thorn; and it was not deemed an
impossible thing to induce King Frederic William to be false to his
word, which had been plighted to the Poles.

The period, during which a diet might legally continue, having
expired, a new one was convened December 16th, 1790. It consisted of all
who had been members of the former diet, and of an equal number of
additional members. The new infusion increased the strength of the
patriotic party. In January, 1791, they voted the punishment of death
against any who should receive a pension from a foreign power; in April,
they extended the right of citizenship to mechanics, and all free people
of the Christian religion;—a habeas corpus act was passed,
protecting all residents in the cities.

Finally, on the 3d of May, 1791, the long desired new Polish
constitution was promulgated. The king repaired to the cathedral, and,
at the high altar, swore to maintain it; the illustrious nobles imitated
the example,—all Warsaw celebrated the day as a memorable
festival.

The new constitution made the Roman Catholic religion the ruling
religion in Poland,—but conceded full liberty to other forms of
worship. It confirmed the privileges of the nobility, and the charters
of the cities; it gave to the peasantry the right [Pg 475]of
making compacts with their over lord, and placed the inhabitants of the
open country, under the protection of the laws and the government.
Poland was called a republic. The supremacy of the will of the people
was distinctly recognized; but, for the sake of civil freedom, order,
and security, the government was composed of three separate branches.
The legislative was divided into two chambers,—that of the
deputies and the senators; the former, the popular branch, was esteemed
the sacred source of legislation; the latter, under the presidency of
the king, could accept a law, or postpone its consideration. The
decision was according to a majority of voices. The liberum veto
was abolished; confederations were prohibited as inconsistent with the
genius of the constitution; and it was provided, that, after every
quarter of a century, the constitution should be revised and amended.
The executive, composed of the king and his cabinet, was bound to
carry the laws into effect; but it could neither number nor interpret
them, nor impose taxes, nor borrow money, nor declare war, nor make
peace, nor conclude treaties definitively. The crown ceased to be
elective, and was declared to be hereditary in the family of the elector
of Saxony. The judiciary shared in the general improvement.

The majority of the nation loudly applauded the results of the diet,
and the western cabinets of Europe were satisfied. The British
Parliament was eloquent in the praises of the new order of things, and
Austria and Prussia united in negotiating with Russia for the
recognition of the constitution, and the indivisibility of Poland.

Catharine II. preserved an ominous silence, till the peace of Jassy
was concluded, and her armies were ready for action. She then rejected
the interference of the two powers, who had attempted to check her
career,—and, listening to the requests of a few factious and
misguided members of the ancient Polish oligarchy, she proceeded to
denounce the spirit of revolutions. The Polish diet rejoined with
dignity and moderation, expressed its intentions of peace with respect
to the rest of Europe, and published its determined resolution to
maintain the independence of its country, and its new form of
government. It then applied to the neighbouring powers for
assistance;—but Lucchesini, the Prussian envoy, gave evasive
answers to all questions respecting an impending war, and especially
avoided all written communications; and the elector of Saxony, after
some wavering, declined the intended honour of the Polish crown for his
family.

Meanwhile the war of Austria and Prussia against France had begun;
and now the way was open to Russia to invade Poland, Lucchesini, the
Prussian envoy, declared, May 4th, 1792, that his king had not
participated in framing the new constitution, [Pg 476]and was not bound to
its defence; while, on the 18th of the same month, Catharine censured
the new government “as adverse to Polish liberties,” and declared that
she made war “to rescue Poland from its oppressors.” While a
confederation of factious refugees was made at Targowitz, according to
the ancient usage of the anarchy, the Russians precipitated themselves
upon the distracted kingdom in two great masses. The Poles, under Joseph
Poniatowski and Kosciusko, fought with undaunted valour, but
unsuccessfully. On the 30th of May, King Stanislaus ordered a general
levy of the population. On the 4th of July, he expressed his
determination to share the fate of the nation, and to die with it if
necessary, rather than survive its independent existence: and oh! the
misery of a gallant nation, with a pusillanimous chief, on the 23d of
July he declared his adhesion to the confederation of Targowitz. A
vehement scolding letter from Catharine had effected the change in his
heroism. The movements of the Polish army were stopped by his order;
while Joseph Poniatowski and Kosciusko resigned their places. The
leading patriots poured out their souls in eloquent regrets at the last
assembly of the diet, and travelled abroad.

The innocent confederates having, after the king’s adhesion, added
many names to their former number, were now assembled at Grodno, fully
relying on the magnanimous clemency of Catharine, to maintain the
integrity of their state. Just then the German army was returning from
its excursion in Champagne, where it had won no laurels; and Prussia,
having obtained the reluctant assent of Austria, claimed, as a
compensation for its ill success against France, the privilege of a new
inroad upon its neighbour; and in January, 1793, its army took
possession of Great Poland, under pretence of keeping the Jacobins in
order.

The confederates rubbed their eyes and began to awake; but it was
only to read the Prussian note of March 25th, 1793, declaring the
necessity of incorporating about 17,000 square miles of the Polish
territory with Prussia, “in order,” as it was kindly intimated, “to give
to the republic of Poland limits better suited to its internal
strength.” Two days after the publication of this note, Dantzig was
seized, to check the progress of a dangerous political sect. Two days
more, and Russia declared its willingness to incorporate into its empire
about 73,000 square miles of Poland, and three millions of inhabitants.
The diet at Grodno showed some signs of obstinacy; but was obliged to
assent to the terms dictated by their ally and their protector. The
confederation of Targowitz was now dissolved; it had done its work.

The anger of the Poles was frenzied. They were indignant [Pg 477]at
every thing; but to them it was the bitterest of all, that Frederic
William should have had a share in the plunder.

There now remained to Poland about 76,000 square miles, and between
three and four millions of inhabitants. The neighbouring powers
generously renounced all further claims, became joint guarantees of the
remainder, and promised that now the diet might make any constitution it
pleased. How far the good pleasure of the diet was independent, may be
inferred from the treaty concluded in October with Russia; of which the
conditions were, that Poland should leave to Russia the conduct of all
future wars, allow the entrance of Russian troops, and frame its foreign
treaties only under the Russian sanction. The diet of Grodno signed this
treaty November 24th, 1793, and adjourned. Igelstrom, the general of the
Russian army, was constituted the Russian ambassador in Poland. It is
evident, that Catharine proposed no further division of Poland;
she intended to lay claim to the whole that remained; and as a
preparatory step, caused a large part of the Polish army to be
disbanded.

The party of the patriots determined upon one final effort; and a new
confederation was made at Cracau. Its aims extended to the establishment
of the internal and external independence of their country, and the
restoration of its ancient limits. Kosciusko was called from his
retirement at Leipzig, to be the generalissimo of the Patriot army. A
supreme council was established, with plenary authority, till the
national independence should be recovered; and then a representative
constitution was to be formed by a general convention. The movement was
national; the Poles were invited to rise in the defence of their
country; and those between eighteen and twenty-seven years of age were
to serve in the armies; the elder men to constitute the militia.

Success beamed upon the first efforts in the field; and the victory
of Raclawice, April 4th, 1794, breathed inspiration into every heart.
The Prussian armies continued their encroachments; the Austrians offered
no hope of succour; and the king had declared in favour of the Russians.
But the victory of Kosciusko inspired such hopes, that, just as
Igelstrom was preparing to exile twenty-six men, whom he could not bend,
and to disarm the Polish garrison, the people of Warsaw rose in arms.
The Russians were defeated; more than 2000 fell; an equal number were
made prisoners; Igelstrom, with the remainder, fled from Warsaw. Thus
was Good Friday celebrated in Poland, in 1794.

It was ominous, however, for the eventual success of the patriots,
that, though they were joined by Lithuania, the dismembered provinces
made no movements towards an insurrection. In the Prussian, a strong
military police maintained military quiet; in the Russian, there was
still less room for hope, since [Pg 478]the peasantry knew nothing about
politics, and the nobility having lost nothing in the exchange of
allegiance, remained contented. Secret cabals were also active in
gaining partisans for the foreign powers; some tendencies to the
licentious influence of the passions of the multitude, were observed
with apprehension; and the spirit of faction had not yet learnt to yield
to the exalted sentiment of general patriotism.

The supreme national council, now established in Warsaw, had neither
money nor credit. Cracau surrendered to the Prussians; Lithuania was
given up after a hard struggle; and though the Poles could have coped
victoriously with the Prussians, yet the advance of Suwarrow seemed to
portend a fatal issue. On the 10th of October, the last battle in which
Kosciusko commanded, was bravely contested; but in consequence of the
faithlessness of one of his generals, Poninski, the Polish cavalry
yielded. Kosciusko rallied them, was thrown from his horse, grievously
wounded, and made a prisoner by the Cossacks. Finis
Poloniæ
, was his exclamation as he fell.

The contest now centered round Praga, which was defended by a hundred
cannon, and the flower of the Polish army. Suwarrow, whose name is
unrivalled as the ruthless stormer of cities, commanded the assault. It
ensued on the 4th of November. The bridge over the Vistula was
destroyed; more than eight thousand Poles fell in battle; more than
twelve thousand inhabitants of the town were murdered, drowned, or
burned to death in their houses. On November 6th, the capitulation of
Warsaw was signed upon the smoking ruins of Praga.

The third division of Poland was complete. No permission was asked.
The three powers signed the treaty of partition, and promised each other
aid, in case of attack; but no formal communication of the procedure was
made to any foreign country. A declaration only was presented to the
German diet. Napoleon could, therefore, truly say, in 1806, that France
had never recognised the partition of Poland.

And King Stanislaus? He was angry, and wept, and took up and threw
down the pen, and fainted, and wept again; and January, 1795, signed the
document of abdication. They agreed to pay him 200,000 ducats a year. It
was more than he merited. He would have made a very charitable almoner,
a very liberal patron, to second rate artists and men of letters. But
excellence of heart, when coupled with debility of purpose, is but a
sorry character for every day concerns; in a ruler it becomes the most
deadly pusillanimity. And now for the romance; for Catharine loved
romance. The letter of abdication was forwarded to St. Petersburg by a
courier, who arrived on the very birthday of the empress, and in the
midst of the festival, presented it to her in the form of a bouquet.
What a commentary on [Pg 479]despotism! A nation struck out of
existence to grace a gala! If men may thus be sported with in masses, if
the concentrated existence of a people may be made the pastime of a
woman’s fancy, well did the ancient exclaim, how contemptible a thing is
man, if we do not raise our view beyond his deeds!

The result of what we have written, established the truth, that the
fall of Poland was an event which destiny had been preparing for
centuries. In an age of barbarism, a great nation had become resolved
into separate principalities, and an aristocracy, not definitely
limited, if not absolute, had sprung up. The family of the Jagellons
came to the throne by a compromise with that nobility; at the extinction
of that family, a tumultuous mob exercised tumultuously, by a sort of
general enthusiasm, the privilege of electing a monarch; enthusiasm
declining, a faction of the high oligarchy succeeded in the election of
Sigismund III.; with Michael, the inferior nobility came into power;
with Sobieski was introduced the influence of the high nobility, and of
female intrigue; with Augustus II. came the reign of gross and
undisguised venality; with Augustus III. the controlling presence of a
foreign army and domestic anarchy; with Stanislaus the wild fury of
religious bigotry, in collision with the treacherous liberality of
foreign influence. Every thing had had its day but the real nation; of
them no notice had been taken; and though Poland was called a republic,
it was a republic without a people. The royal power, the tumultuous
patriotism of a nobility, the oligarchical feuds, the democracy of the
nobility, the high aristocracy, downright bribery, the direct presence
and interference of foreign troops, each had had its period; and is it
strange that the anarchy of Poland had become complete? There was not
only no government virtually, but even the forms did not exist, by which
a government could be effectually set in motion. Is it strange, then,
that the party of the patriots was unable to triumph over the obstacles
in their path, since they had to contend with the strongest foreign
powers, with a domestic political chaos, and with a destiny, which had
for ages doomed their country to destruction? The Russians and their
coadjutors could never have accomplished their purpose, if the ancestors
of the Poles had not themselves prepared the way.

The world would have heard no more of the Polish state, but for the
simultaneous revolution in France. There the issue was as different, as
the abuses which required remedy, and the instruments which could be
applied for their correction. In Poland there was no middling class; in
France the revolution sprung from the middling class; in Poland the
contest was against the anarchy of an oligarchy; in France against the
impending anarchy of superannuated absolutism. Both nations were fertile
in great men; both had patriots disciplined in the school of America;
both suffered [Pg
480]
from internal dissensions; both were attacked by the
refugees from their own country, under the banners of foreign monarchs;
both suffered from the hesitancy of inefficient kings; both contended
with the greatest financial difficulties; but in France there existed a
free yeomanry, a free class of mechanics, a free, numerous, and
cultivated order of citizens; while in Poland, there was almost no
intermediate class between the nobility and the serfs. In that lies the
secret of the different issue of their struggles. Poland was the victim
of the American revolution; France its monument. Poland was erased from
among the nations of the earth; while France put forth a gigantic
strength in the triumphant defence of its nationality. Poland, brightly
though it had shone for ages in the eastern heavens, was blotted out,
while the star of France, rising in a lurid sky, through clouds of
blood, was at length able to unveil the peerless light of liberty, and
lead the host of modern states in the high career of civil
improvement.

After the victories of Napoleon over Prussia, the peace of Tilsit
restored a portion of Poland to an independent existence as a Grand
Dutchy. The loss of national existence, and the disgust at submitting to
foreign forms, had excited discontent; and the race still lived, which
had witnessed the two last partitions of their country. Napoleon’s
answer to the Polish deputies, “that he was willing to see if the Poles
still deserved to be a nation,” resounded through the provinces; and
troops assembled hastily between the Vistula and the Niemen. But in
Posen, the French emperor set Austria at rest as to Galicia; and when he
became the personal friend of Alexander, nothing could be wrested from
Russia. Thus the relations of Napoleon enabled him to dispose only of
Polish Prussia; and of that, Bialystock was ceded to the Czar, while
Prussia still retained a territory sufficient to connect East-Prussia
with Brandenburgh. Thus the new Grand Dutchy of Warsaw, under the
hereditary sway of the Saxon king, and constituting a portion of the
French empire, contained but less than twenty-nine thousand square
miles, and less than two and a half millions of inhabitants. Its
constitution was given, July 22, 1807. Slavery was abolished, and
equality before the law decreed. Two chambers were created, and a diet
was to be convened at least once in two years, for fifteen days. The
initiative of laws belonged to the Grand Duke; the chamber of
deputies was to be renewed, one-third every three years. The code of
Napoleon was made the law of the land.

In the peace of 1809, the Grand Dutchy was increased by further
restorations from Austria; though Russia took advantage of that
emergency to demand from its Austrian ally, also a territory of great
value, with a population of four hundred thousand souls.

[Pg
481]
The great expedition against Russia, in 1812, was called
by Napoleon his second Polish war. It was his professed object to
restrain Russia, and to circumscribe her limits. A proclamation to the
Poles promised the restoration of their state, with larger boundaries
even than under their last king; and the Poles rose with their wonted
enthusiasm. It was a point of honour with their young men to serve in
the army; the middling class would accept no pay, while the rich
lavished their fortunes, and the women their ornaments, for the defence
and restoration of their nation.

Yet, when in June, Napoleon entered Wilna, the Lithuanians showed
little disposition to unite with their brethren of Warsaw; and the
emperor’s answers, as to the future condition of Poland, were too vague
to inspire confidence. The eventual defeat of Napoleon, brought the
Russians into the pursuit, and the Grand Dutchy was occupied by their
armies.

In the close of 1814, the fate of Poland was at issue on the
deliberations of the congress of Vienna. While Prussia demanded the
cession of all Saxony, Russia claimed Poland, including Austrian
Galicia. Encountering strong opposition, the emperor Alexander in his
turn formed a Polish army, and issued a proclamation to the Poles,
inviting them to arm under his auspices for the defence of their
country, and the preservation of their political independence, while
Austria, Great Britain, and France, formed a treaty for resistance. But
for the return of Napoleon from Elba, the congress of Vienna would
probably have issued in a war between its members. A compromise ensued,
it conformity with which, Russia retained nearly all which in had gained
of Prussia in the peace of Tilsit, and of Austria in 1809, and further
acquired all the Grand Dutchy of Warsaw, except Posen, which fell to
Prussia, and Cracau, which was left in neutral independence.
Constitutions were promised to the respective parts, and have been,
after a manner, conceded.

The constitution issued for Poland, November 27, 1815, by the emperor
Alexander, was an attempt to conciliate the liberal sympathies of the
people. Religious equality, freedom of the press, security of personal
liberty against arbitrary procedures, the responsibility of all
magistrates, and an assurance of all civil and military offices in
Poland to Poles, were the leading features of the compact. The power of
making treaties, of declaring war, of controlling the armed force, and
of pardoning, was assured to the king; but all his commands were to be
countersigned by a minister, who should be held responsible in case of
any violation of the constitution. The diet, composed of two chambers,
was to be assembled once in two years; the king had the
initiative and a veto.

At the opening of the diet, April 27, 1817, Alexander declared [Pg 482]his
intention of gradually introducing into his immense empire, the salutary
influence of liberal institutions; and promised security of persons, and
of property, and freedom of opinions. “Representatives of Poland,” said
he, “rise to the elevation on which destiny has placed you. You are
called upon to give a sublime example to Europe, whose eye is fixed upon
you.” The Poles have in this latest period of their existence, shown no
reluctance to be true to themselves and to the world; but the revolution
of Spain, and Naples, and Greece, struck terror into the cabinet of
Alexander, and led him to abandon the sympathies which he had professed
for ameliorated forms of government. Accordingly, by an arbitrary
decree, February 13, 1825, he abolished the publicity of the assemblies
of the diet, and taught the Poles the true value of an apparently
liberal form of government, of which the fundamental principles might be
altered according to the caprices or the fears of an individual.

We have thus endeavoured, by a careful reference to numerous and
exact authorities, to which we have had access, to give some historical
explanations of the present Polish question. It seems plain, that there
is little room to hope for the re-establishment of Polish independence.
The provinces belonging to Austria, have most of them been under the
Austrian rule for nearly sixty years; and so, too, a large portion of
Polish Prussia has belonged to the Prussian monarchy, since 1773. The
still larger parts, which have been incorporated into the Russian
monarchy, seem to have learnt acquiescence in their condition. A kindred
dialect, and a sort of national relationship, have always rendered
Russian supremacy more tolerable to the Polish provinces, than that of
the dynasty of Hapsburg, or the court of Berlin. It is only in that
portion of Poland, where, by the establishment of the Grand Dutchy of
Warsaw under Napoleon, and by the erection of a nominally independent
kingdom, a spirit of irritation and change has fostered the honourable
passion for national existence, that the present revolution has been
supported with enthusiasm. The world will do honour to this last effort
of determined patriotism; but the liberties of Poland will be
reconquered only by the gradual progress of the moral power of
free-opinions, which is advancing in the majesty of its strength; over
the ruins of centuries and the graves of nations.


[9]
The emperor in no wise confused, is said to have replied, “much obliged
to you,” and retained the present.]


[Pg 483] Art. IX.A Historical View of the
Government of Maryland, from its Colonization to the present day.
By
John V. L. M’Mahon. Baltimore: 1831. Vol. 1.
pp. 539.

The history of Maryland under the proprietary government
is little known, says our author, even to her own people. Yet, as that
government was the mould of her present institutions, the school of
discipline for her revolutionary men, it is to its history we must go
back for just notions of both. The revolution was not wrought by a few
master minds, miraculously born for the occasion, but was the natural
development of a train of causes which leave us less surprised at our
ancestors’ manful and accordant resistance of usurpation, than at the
strange ignorance of them which seems to have begot the unwise designs
of the mother country.

Montesquieu has observed, with his usual antithesis, “In the infancy
of societies, it is the leaders that create the institutions;
afterwards, it is the institutions which make the leaders.” Perhaps, the
former event has in truth happened less often than received history
would persuade us. The more dim the dawn of tradition, the oftener we
find ascribed to the Lycurguses, the Numas, the Alfreds, either such
original establishments or such fundamental changes as would seem to
have created the civil or religious polity of their people anew. We know
not how much they were indebted to precedent and concurrent
circumstances; and thus obscurity may magnify their renown, as distant
objects, according to a figure of our author’s, are exaggerated to the
eye in a misty morning. The vulgar, who do not trouble themselves with
cavils, resolve the result they perceive into the effort of some moral
hero, just as the Greeks referred to Hercules the feats which
transcended the ordinary limits of physical prowess.

The same thing takes place in a less degree, at periods whose history
is more authentically written. The leaders of revolutions may transmute,
so to speak, into personal merit, some of the results which, more
narrowly considered, are referrible to the pervading spirit and general
movement of the occasion. To weigh justly these elements of their
renown, is not invidiously to derogate from it, but only to vindicate
the truth of history. It still leaves them the highest merit to which,
perhaps, the leaders in any kind of reform can truly lay claim, that of
seizing the spirit of their age, and employing and directing it with a
just energy and discernment. As it has been said that Luther might have
ineffectually preached the Reformation in the twelfth century, and
Napoleon, if he had not been, in fact, but “the little corporal,” might
have been no more than a leader of Condottieri in the fourteenth;
so our revolutionary sages could hardly, in the [Pg 484]circumstances of the
crisis, and amidst the men of the age, have been other than what they
were. Though they fought in the van of the war, they had, however, their
Triarii to sustain them, a nation, namely, accustomed to the
discipline of liberty. The wave of opinion rolled high, and they had the
praise of launching their barks on it, with strength and skill indeed,
but yet with a propitious gale and a favouring current. The notices in
the volume before us, of the character and history of the colonists of
Maryland, show how the principles of liberty which they brought with
them to “this rough, uncultivated world,” (such is their own description
of it,) they maintained with a uniform constancy and understanding.
Though colonial dependence has seldom been less burdensome in point of
fact than in their case, the abstract doctrines of political right were
not on that account guarded with the less vigilance. Thus, in our
author’s language, “they were fitted for self-government before it came,
and when it came, it sat lightly and familiarly upon them;” the first
moments of its adoption being marked with little or none of that anarchy
and licentiousness which mostly deform political emancipations. Their
institutions had moulded them; a conclusion not more apparent from our
colonial and revolutionary history, than apposite for estimating at
least the immediate results of revolutions effected under moral
circumstances less propitious. The political structure has often, as in
our own case, been pulled down by an excusable impatience of the people;
but seldom has it been repaired with such solidity, and just adaption to
their wants.

We have said that the obscurity of history may have magnified the
pretensions of some of its heroes; it is certain that it quite quenches
the light of others. The state whose early transactions our author
records, furnished its full share of the intelligent minds that
contributed their impulse to the general movement of their time; and as
the execution of his task has led him to a closer contemplation of their
influence on its issue, he laments the comparative obscuration of
merited fame, even in this brief lapse of time, in individuals who were
the theme and boast of contemporaries. This is the law of our fate. As
the series of events is prolonged, the greater part of the actors in
them sink out of their place in the perspective, though their lesser
elevation might be scarcely observable to their own age. In the twilight
which falls on all past transactions, the rays of national recollections
fade from summit to summit, and linger at length only on a few of the
more “proudly eminent.” Our author sketches some of these forgotten
worthies in the melancholy spirit of a traveller who finds a stately
column in the desert. With the reverence of “Old Mortality,” he
re-touches the [Pg 485]inscription to the illustrious dead,
that they may not wholly perish.

The first volume of the present work, the only one yet published,
brings down the history of Maryland to the establishment of the state
government. Besides a historical view of the transactions preceding this
era, it contains, in an introduction, a view of the territorial limits
of the colony as defined in the first grant to the proprietary, and of
the disputes with neighbouring grantees by which they were successively
retrenched. Two other chapters of the introduction are occupied with a
sketch of the civil divisions of the state, and an essay on the sources
of its laws. Appended to the historical sketch is a view of the
distribution of the legislative power, of the organization of the two
houses of assembly, their respective and collective powers, and the
privileges of their members. This plan involves a critical inquiry into
the political laws of the state, and a laborious examination of its
records. The diligence with which the writer seems to have executed his
task, is a voucher of his accuracy; and the body of information thus
collected with painful research, will probably establish his work as one
of authentic reference. This original collation of the materials from
which history is distilled, includes a labour, and deserves a
praise, which readers can hardly estimate competently. The writer’s
style is vigorous, but wants compression; he is occasionally inaccurate,
but is often lively and striking; his scriptural phraseology is
superabundant. As he understands the period and the men he describes,
his views and reflections are just. The narrative would have been
enlivened by a little more individuality in the portraits of the actors;
but though some of the materials for this were probably at his command,
at least as to the more recent ones, we are aware of the reasons which
impose on this head, a partial silence on the historian of an age not
remote. It is respecting its personages that Christina’s saying of
history is more emphatically true;—”Chi lo sa, non scrive; chi
lo scrive, no sa.
“—”The one who knows it, does not write; the
one who writes it, knows it not.” It was this Mr. Jefferson meant, when
he said the history of the revolution had never been written, and never
would be written. On the whole, Mr. M’Mahon’s is a valuable contribution
to an interesting theme, and we must increase the obligations we are
under to him, by borrowing the copious materials he supplies, for a
hasty sketch, or rather some selections of the colonial history of
Maryland, in which we shall take the liberty to make, without scruple,
free use both of his language and thoughts.

The present state of Maryland is embraced within considerably narrower limits
than those described in the original grant. By the charter which bears
date the 20th of June, 1632, the [Pg 486]province assigned to
Cecilius, Lord Baltimore, had the following boundaries. On the south, a
line drawn from the promontory on the Chesapeake, called Watkins’s
Point, to the ocean; on the east, the ocean, and the western margin of
Delaware Bay and river, as far as the fortieth degree of latitude; on
the north, a line drawn in that degree of latitude west, to the meridian
of the true fountain of the Potomac; and thence, the western bank of
that river to Smith’s Point, and so by the shortest line to Watkins’s
Point. These limits, it is apparent, embrace the whole of the present
state of Delaware; they comprehend also that part of Pennsylvania in
which Chester lies, as far north as the Schuylkill, and a very
considerable portion of Virginia. It may not be uninteresting to trace
the controversies which resulted in this abridgment of territory,
especially as it appears from Mr. M’Mahon’s deduction of that with
Virginia, that Maryland has a subsisting claim to a large and fertile
portion of the latter state, lying between the south and north branches
of the Potomac.

The proprietary’s first contest, was with a personage who makes some
figure in the early history of his colony, and who, though painted with
little flattery by its chroniclers, seems to have possessed some
talents, enterprise, and courage. This was the notorious William
Clayborne, who, before the grant to Baltimore was carved out of the
limits of Virginia, had made some settlements on Kent Island, in the
Chesapeake, under the authority of that province. Clayborne defended his
claims with pertinacity for several years, and was not brought to
submission to the new grantee, till he had harassed the infant colony
with commotions, and even prepared to make depredations. He subsequently
gratified his resentment by exciting a rebellion, and driving the
proprietary’s governor to Virginia. That province also for some time
persisted to assert its dominion over Maryland, in defiance of the royal
grant; and, when that question was at length decided in the
proprietary’s favour, it was next necessary to fix the actual boundary
between the two provinces, a matter not adjusted till June, 1668, when
the existing southern line of Maryland was finally determined.

The proprietary’s next territorial controversy had a greater
duration, and a less fortunate issue, being prolonged nearly a century,
and resulting in the dismemberment of a portion of his fairest and most
fertile territory. It must be mentioned, that the charter of Maryland
extended its northern boundary to the southern limit of what was then
called New England. In the intermediate territory between the actual
settlements of the two, the Dutch and the Swedes had planted some
colonies and trading-houses on the banks of the Delaware Bay and river,
in what is now the state of Delaware. The Swedish establishments were
[Pg
487]
reduced by the Dutch in 1655, and appended, together with
their own, in the same quarter, to the government of New Netherlands; on
the English conquest of which, and the grant of them by Charles II. to
his brother, the Duke of York, the settlements on the Delaware became
dependencies on the government of New-York, and, though clearly within
the limits of Maryland, being south of the latitude of 40°, remained so
until the grant to Penn, and the foundation of Pennsylvania in 1681. The
southern boundary of Penn’s grant, was somewhat loosely established to
be “a circle of twelve miles drawn round New Castle, to the beginning of
the fortieth degree of latitude.” Penn was eager to adjust his boundary
with Maryland; but when it was found, on an interview between his agent
and Baltimore, at Chester, then called Upland, that Chester itself was
south of the required latitude, and that the boundaries of Maryland
would extend to the Schuylkill, he very earnestly applied himself, to
obtain from the Duke of York, a grant of the Delaware settlements
mentioned above. In contravention of the claims of Baltimore, a
conveyance was made to him in 1682, of the town of New Castle, with the
district twelve miles round it, and also of the territory extending
thence southward to Cape Henlopen.

Thus fortified, Penn was again eager to adjust the disputed boundary.
The negotiations for this purpose, proving fruitless, were referred to
the Commissioners of Trade and Plantations, to whom Penn submits a case
of hardship, more naïf than convincing. “I told him, (Baltimore,)
that it was not the love of the land, but of the water;—that he
abounded in what I wanted,—and that there was no proportion in the
concern, because the thing insisted on was ninety-nine times more
valuable to me, than to him.” It must be recollected, that this
reasonable claim involved nothing less than Baltimore’s entire exclusion
from Delaware Bay, and greatly abridged his territory on the coast of
the ocean. Another objection was urged by Penn, which finally governed
the award of the commissioners, who, in 1685, decided that Baltimore’s
grant “included only lands uncultivated, and inhabited by savages;”
whereas the territory along the Delaware had been settled by Christians
antecedently to his grant,—a decision, by the way, inconsistent
with the previous ejectment of Clayborne, and with the determination in
Baltimore’s favour, of the jurisdiction claimed over his grant by
Virginia. They directed also, for the avoidance of future contests, that
the peninsula between the two bays, should be divided into two equal
parts, by a line drawn from the latitude of Cape Henlopen, to the
fortieth degree of latitude,—the western portion to belong to
Baltimore, and the eastern to His Majesty, and, by consequence, to Penn.
This is the origin of the eastern boundary of [Pg 488]Maryland, which was
thus cut off from the ocean, on the greater portion of her eastern
side.

Her northern boundary still remained to be adjusted; but the
embarrassments of both proprietaries with the crown, caused the
controversy in this quarter to sleep nearly half a century. The mutual
border outrages which meanwhile disturbed the debatable ground, led to the compact of the 10th
of May, 1732, between Baltimore and the younger Penns, which provided,
in the first place, for the extension of a line northerly, through the
middle of the peninsula, so as to form a tangent to a circle drawn round
Newcastle, with a radius of twelve miles. The northern boundary of
Maryland was also to begin, not at the fortieth degree of latitude, but
at a point fifteen miles south thereof; and in case the tangent before
described should not extend to that point, it was to be prolonged by a
line drawn due north from the point where the tangent met the circle;
thus was ascertained the eastern extremity of the northern boundary
line, which was thence to be extended due west. New obstacles
intervened, however, to the execution of this agreement, which was
subsequently carried into chancery, but on which no decision was had
until 1750; and in the interval, some frightful excesses were committed
by the borderers on both sides. The house of one Cresap, in Maryland,
was fired by a body of armed men from Pennsylvania, who attempted to
murder him, his family, and several of his neighbours, as they escaped
from the flames. In retaliation, a little army of three hundred
Marylanders invaded the county of Lancaster, and took summary measures
to coerce submission to the government of Maryland. These mutual
outrages occasioned, in 1739, an order from the king in council for the
establishment of a provisional line; and in 1750, Chancellor Hardwicke
pronounced a decree, which ordered the specific execution of the
agreement of 1732. But Frederic, Lord Baltimore, the heir of Charles,
with whom the agreement had been made, contending that he was protected
from its operation by certain anterior conveyances in strict settlement,
objected to the execution of the decree, until finally, and pending the
chancery proceedings, a new agreement was entered into on the 4th of
July, 1760, between himself and the Penns, which adopted that of 1732,
and also the decree of 1750. Commissioners were appointed to run the
lines accordingly, who in November, 1768, reported their proceedings to
the proprietaries, and definitively adjusted the eastern and northern
boundaries of Maryland, in the terms of the agreement before described.
The northern line, from the names of the surveyors, is commonly known as
“Mason and Dixon’s line,” so often referred to as the demarcation of the
slave states from the others.

This controversy was not terminated in the north, when the [Pg
489]
proprietary found new pretensions to combat in the west.
These grew out of the words of his charter, which described “the true
fountain of the Potomac” as the common terminus of his western
and southern boundaries. A subsequent grant from the crown had conveyed
to certain persons all the tract between the heads and courses of the
Rappahannock and Potomac, and the Chesapeake Bay. This grant, which
comprehended what was commonly known as “The Northern Neck” of Virginia,
and which carried only the ownership of the soil, the jurisdiction
remaining in Virginia, was finally vested solely in Lord Culpepper, and
from him descended to his daughter, who marrying Lord Fairfax, the
property in it passed to the Fairfax family. As it called only for lands
on the south side of the Potomac, there was nothing on the face of it
inconsistent with the call of the charter of Maryland; but the
under-grants from Fairfax were soon pushed so far west as to raise the
question of the true fountain of the Potomac. Commissioners appointed by
Virginia to ascertain, as between that state and Fairfax, the limits of
their respective ownership, determined the North Branch to be the
fountain of that river; whereas, from information given to the council
of Maryland, in 1753, by Colonel Cresap, one of the settlers in the
eastern extremity of the state, it appeared, from its having the longest
course, and from other circumstances, that the South Branch was to be
considered the principal stream, and its source the true source of the
Potomac. The British council for plantation affairs had, as early as
1745, on the petition of Fairfax, made a report, adopting the North
Branch as such; but the proprietary of Maryland, who viewed his rights
as disregarded in this decision, continued to assert his claim up to the
first fountain of the Potomac, “be that where it might.” Various
circumstances prevented his bringing the matter before the king in
council; and so the question hung, till the Revolution substituted the
state of Virginia for the British crown, as one party in the
controversy, and that of Maryland as the other.

In the constitution of the former, adopted in 1776, there is an
express recognition of the right of Maryland “to all the territory
contained within its charter;” but the actual boundary was not brought
into negotiation till 1795. New delays then interposed, and though
Virginia named commissioners in the matter in 1801, she restricted their
powers to the adjustment merely of the western line, unwilling to allow
even a discussion of her claim to the territory between the two
branches. The negociation consequently dropped for the time, and
Maryland, wearied, it would seem, with various efforts to reclaim the
territory south of the North Branch, agreed, at length, by an act passed
in 1818, to adopt as the terminus, the most western source of that
stream. But a new obstacle, interposed by Virginia, defeated the
adjustment [Pg
490]
under this concession. Her commissioners were instructed
to commence the boundary “at a stone, planted by Lord Fairfax on the
head waters of the Potomac,” being thus restricted to the old adjustment
between Fairfax and the crown; those of Maryland were directed to begin
at the true or most western source of the North Branch, be that where it
might. Fairfax’s stone, our author says, is not planted in fact at the
extreme western source. The proffer of Maryland, by the act of 1818, to
confine herself to the North Branch, being thus rejected by Virginia,
she is remitted apparently to her original rights, which comprehend the
sovereignty of all the territory between these two streams of the
Potomac, and call for the South Branch as her south-western boundary in
that quarter. In a letter of Mr. Cooke, then a distinguished lawyer of
Maryland, and one of the commissioners named in 1795, to adjust the
point, the territory in contest is stated to contain 462,480 acres; and
he remarks, that prior occupancy gives, in such a case, no title to one
party, and no length of time can bar the claim of the other.

We have thus abridged the author’s copious and distinct account of
the territorial wars, which resulted in the defeat of the proprietaries
of Maryland on two parts of their frontier, and have left a legacy of
debate on a third. We must now return to the era of the first grantee
and proprietary, and take up the line of the general events of the
colonial history.

Cecilius Calvert had no sooner obtained his grant, for which he is
said to have been indebted to the influence of his father, George
Calvert, who but for his death would have been himself the grantee, than
he prepared for the establishment of a colony. The expedition, which he
entrusted to his brother, Leonard Calvert, sailed from the Isle of Wight
on the 22d of November, 1633, the emigrants consisting of about two
hundred persons, principally Catholics, and many of them gentlemen of
family and fortune. They reached Point Comfort, in Virginia, on the 24th
of February following, and thence proceeded up the Potomac, in search of
an eligible site. Having taken formal possession of the province, at an
island which they called St. Clements, they sailed upwards of forty
leagues up the river, to an Indian town called Piscataway; but deeming
it prudent to establish themselves nearer its mouth, they returned to
what is now known as St. Mary’s river, (an estuary of the Potomac,) on
the eastern side of which, six or seven miles from its mouth, they
disembarked, on the 27th of March, 1634. Here, near another Indian town,
bearing the uncouth name of Yaocomoco, they laid the foundation of the
old city of St. Mary’s, and of the state of Maryland. The proprietary
had made ample provision for his infant colony, of food and clothing,
the implements of husbandry, and the means of erecting habitations;
[Pg
491]
expending in the first two or three years upwards of
£40,000, and governing, by all concurring accounts, with much policy and
liberality.

The new colony seems to have been looked on a little coldly by
Virginia, her next neighbour in the great continental wilderness, and to
have had indeed more positive ground of complaint in the connivance
given there to Clayborne, who has already been mentioned as the
colonizer of Kent Island, and whose fancied or real injuries from the
proprietary, made him the persevering foe of the colony during
twenty-five years. His first essay was to kindle the jealousies of the
natives against the colonists, which, in the beginning of 1642, broke
out into an open war, that endured for some time, and was the cause of
much expense and distress to the province. The distractions of the great
rebellion of 1642, which began at this time to involve the colonies,
furnished him the next pretences of disturbance, and with fit
associates. Richard Ingle, the most prominent of these, was a known
adherent of the parliamentary cause; he had before this time been
proclaimed a traitor to the king, and had fled the province. The
insurrection promoted, therefore, by these confederates and others,
(commonly known as “Clayborne and Ingle’s rebellion,”) was probably
carried on in the name of the Parliament; though the loss of the greater
part of the provincial records, anterior and relating to this period,
the circumstance from which it acquired its chief notoriety, leaves us
little other knowledge of the insurrection itself, than that it was
attended with great misrule and rapacity, that it commenced in 1644, and
that the proprietary government was suspended till August, 1646; Leonard
Calvert, the governor, being compelled meanwhile to seek refuge in
Virginia. Quiet was then restored by a general amnesty, from which only
Clayborne, Ingle, and one Durnford, were excepted. During two or three
years the province maintained this tranquillity, by pursuing a neutral
course towards the contending parties in England, varied by the single
unadvised act of proclaiming, on the 15th of November, 1649, the
accession of Charles II., Governor Stone being absent at the moment.
This procedure was followed by very ill consequences to the proprietary.
The Parliament, now triumphant, issued a commission for the subjugation
of the disaffected colonies, of which, ominously, for Maryland,
Captain Clayborne was named one, and which, after reducing
Virginia, demanded of Stone, the Governor of Maryland, an express
recognition of the parliamentary authority. Delaying compliance with
this demand, he was threatened with the deprivation of his government;
but it was arranged at length that he should continue to exercise it,
till the pleasure of the commonwealth government could be known. This
trust he seems to have discharged [Pg 492]with due fidelity to
the Parliament. He required, indeed, the inhabitants of the province to
take the oath of allegiance to the proprietary government; an act which
does not seem inconsistent with his engagements. It was alleged,
however, to be an evidence of disaffection; and as intentions, says our
author, are always easy to charge, and difficult to disprove, he was in
the end compelled to resign his office to a commission named by
Clayborne and his associates. Stone now attempted resistance; but an
engagement taking place near the Patuxent, his small force of two
hundred men was entirely defeated, and himself taken prisoner. He was
condemned to die; but he had, like another Marius, inspired, it seems,
such respect and affection in the soldiery, that the party intrusted
with his execution refused to proceed in it. A general intercession of
the people procured a commutation of his sentence to imprisonment, which
was continued, with circumstances of severity, during the greater part
of the protectorate. With him the proprietary government fell for the
time.

The occasion was seized by Virginia, to urge with the Protector, her
old claim of jurisdiction over Maryland. The proprietary’s charter was
assailed, and the story of Clayborne’s wrongs, pathetically told at
length. The fanaticism of the Protector was approached, by objecting the
religious toleration, which, much to the honour of the proprietary, had
consistently characterized his government. The union of the two
provinces was urged, among other reasons, on the score of its preventing
“the cutting of throats,” and restraining the excessive planting of
tobacco, thereby making way for the more staple commodities, such
as silk. Cromwell, however, who could lay aside his fanaticism on
occasion, but who, on the other hand, probably sought to keep the
proprietary in his interests, by holding his rights in suspense, made no
decision in the case; and the latter, who at first expected a speedy
result in his favour, seems to have resolved at length to regain his
province by force. His government had fallen without a crime, and,
besides, the pretensions of Virginia had roused the pride and
indignation of all parties. He had thus many adherents, among the most
conspicuous of whom was Josias Fendall, who having, with a consistency
that merits remark, signalized by treachery every measure he was
concerned in, played for some years a part in the transactions of the
colony, worthy of versatile politicians on a more extensive theatre. He
is brought to our notice in 1655, when he was in custody before the
provincial court, on a charge of disturbing the government, under a
pretended power from the late governor, Stone, and was imprisoned. Being
discharged, probably on taking an oath not to disquiet the government,
he nevertheless appeared soon after as an open insurgent, acting under
the proprietary’s commission [Pg 493]as his governor. We are uninformed of
the particulars of his operations against the commissioners. During a
part of 1657 and 1658, there seems to have been a divided empire in the
province, the commissioners administering theirs at St. Leonard’s, and
Fendall and his council sitting at St. Mary’s. An arrangement between
the proprietary and the Virginian commissioners, then in England, at
length put an end to these divisions. The latter ceased to push the
claims of Virginia, and it was agreed that his province should be
restored to the proprietary. On the 20th of March, 1658, it was formally
surrendered to Fendall as his governor, under a stipulation for the
security of the acts passed during the defection;—a stipulation
which the latter fulfilled, not only by declaring them void, but by
causing them to be torn from the records.

Clothed thus with authority, Fendall was enabled to play off a kind
of parody of Cromwell’s proceedings, by “kicking away the ladder by
which he had mounted.” At the next convention of the assembly, the lower
house transmitted a message to the upper, declaring itself the true
assembly, and the supreme court of judicature, and demanding its opinion
on this claim. The latter, not acceding with the required good grace and
promptness to this new doctrine, which involved a complete independence,
not only of itself, but of the proprietary, was visited in a body by the
lower house, and ordered to sit no longer apart, with the privilege,
nevertheless, of seats in the lower house. To the assembly thus
reformed, Fendall surrendered his commission from the proprietary,
accepting a new one from itself; and the inhabitants of the province
were required to recognize no other authority but that of this new
legislature, or of the king. The Restoration cut short the rule of this
commonwealth party in the province. Baltimore obtained the countenance
and aid of the new government,—and thus fortified, enjoined his
brother, Philip Calvert, as his governor, to proceed against the
insurgents even by martial law, and especially not to permit Fendall to
escape with his life. Fendall, accordingly, with one Hatch, was excepted
from the general indemnity, and proclamations were issued for their
apprehension;—yet, on a subsequent voluntary surrender, he found
means to be quits for a short imprisonment, with a disability to vote or
hold office;—a lenity not more impolitic in the government, than
unmerited by him, as he not long afterwards attempted to excite another
rebellion.

An uninterrupted tranquillity of many years followed the commotions
just narrated. In 1675, died Cecilius, Lord Baltimore, the first
proprietary, leaving his estate in the province to his son and heir,
Charles Calvert. On a visit to England, the new proprietary found
himself and his government the subject [Pg 494]of complaint to the
Crown, from the resident clergy of the Church of England, in the
province. They represented that the province was no better than a
Sodom,—religion despised,—the Lord’s day profaned, and all
notorious vices committed;—in short, it was in a deplorable
condition for want of an established ministry, the Quakers providing for
their speakers, and the Catholics for their priests, but no care taken
to build up churches in the Protestant religion. Baltimore represented
very honestly, that all religions were tolerated by his laws, and none
established,—and was dismissed for the time, with the general
injunction to restrain immorality, and provide for a competent number of
clergy of the Church of England. But the jealousy of popery, now abroad
in England, began to flame up in the colonies, and especially in
Maryland, which, peopled chiefly by Protestants, was yet under the
dominion of a Catholic. Complaints were poured into Charles’s ear, of
Catholic partialities in the proprietary administration; and, in reply
to a communication from Baltimore, by which it was shown beyond doubt,
that his offices were distributed without distinction of religion, and
the military power almost exclusively in Protestant hands—”that
exemplary monarch,” says our author, “gave his commentary on religious
liberty, by ordering all offices to be put into the hands of the
Protestants.” With a singular ill fortune, which must be put to the
account of his tolerance, the proprietary, thus controlled by a
Protestant king, and menaced, besides, with that then formidable weapon
of royalty, a quo warranto, did not the less encounter an enemy
in his Catholic successor, by whom, in 1687, a quo warranto was
actually issued. Before judgment was pronounced, indeed, the monarch
himself was an exile, by the judgment of his people; but the proprietary
was now attacked, on the opposite quarter, by the “Protestant
Association of Maryland,” which succeeded in overthrowing his
government. This revolution marks one era in our author’s historical
narrative, before we proceed in which, we must pause a moment with him,
to mention the condition of the colony, at the time this event
occurred.

The two hundred original settlers were increased as early as 1660 to
twelve thousand, and in 1671 to nearly twenty thousand; their exact
number at the protestant revolution is unknown. The settlements had
extended from St. Mary’s a considerable distance up the Potomac, and all
along the Chesapeake Bay on both sides, and were seated chiefly on its
shores, and around the estuaries of its rivers. Excepting St. Mary’s,
there appears to have been no place entitled to the appellation of a
town, unless, says the author, we adopt the same number of houses to
make a town, which it requires persons to constitute a riot. The
city of St. Mary’s, which numbered fifty or sixty houses in two
or three [Pg
495]
years from its planting, never much exceeded these humble
limits. The colonists were almost universally planters of tobacco, and
each plantation, according to an early writer, “was a little town of
itself, every considerable planter’s warehouse being a kind of shop,”
where inferior planters and others might obtain the necessary
commodities. Tobacco supplied the purposes of gold and silver; but as
this currency was in some respects inconvenient, the lords proprietaries
struck coin, and imitated more powerful sovereigns by
attempting,—and, as may be supposed, with the like
success,—to circulate it at a rate beyond its intrinsic value. The
act of 1686, making coins a legal tender at a certain advance beyond
their real worth, deserves mention as establishing the provincial
currency in lieu of sterling. There was also at this time a
printing-press and a public printer; a circumstance peculiar to this
colony at that early period. Toleration was coeval with the
province.
The oath of office prescribed by the proprietary to his
governors, recognising the freedom of religious opinion in the amplest
manner, “is in itself a text-book of official duty,” and ought to be
remembered to the honour of Cecilius Calvert, “when the lustre of a
thousand diadems is pale.” For the only two departures from this
principle, the proprietary government is not responsible. An ordinance
of Cromwell’s Commissioners prohibited the profession of the Catholic
religion; and the unscrupulous Fendall, at another time, banished the
Quakers for refusing to subscribe an engagement of fidelity to the
government. We are to seek, therefore, other causes than the intolerance
of the proprietary for the Protestant revolution which we are now to
notice.

A chasm in the colonial records, from November, 1688, to the
beginning of 1692, leaves us without accurate information of its reasons
and progress. Apparently, the alarm of Popery then general through the
empire, was the true cause, and some indiscretions of the proprietary’s
governors the pretence. The government was at this time in a commission
of nine deputies, who by summoning the lower house of assembly to take
an oath of fidelity to the proprietary, were deemed to have committed a
breach of its privilege. The president of the deputies was a Mr. Joseph,
whose address on the opening of the assembly, being a very quaint but
clumsy exposition of jus divinum, and of its derivation to
himself, cannot claim the praise of a happy adaption to the humour of
the moment. The house refusing to take the oath, the assembly was
prorogued. News now came of the expected invasion of England by the
Prince of Orange; and, without any fixed views probably, even as to
their own course in the existing distractions, much less against the
Protestants of the province, the deputies awaked jealousy, and gave
rumour wings by ordering the public arms to be collected, [Pg 496]and
attempting to check reports which might beget “disaffection to the
proprietary government.” The whole colony resounded with the cry of a
Popish plot; and as a treaty long subsisting with some Indian tribes
happened to be renewed about this time, the plot thus engendered by the
deputies was to be accomplished, it was asserted, by the aid of the
savages and the French. An accidental delay of the proprietary’s
instructions for proclaiming William and Mary, heightened the alarm, or
increased the exasperation; and at length, in April 1689, an association
was formed, styling itself, “An Association in arms for the defence of
the Protestant Religion, and for asserting the right of King William and
Queen Mary to the province of Maryland.” The deputies took refuge from
the storm in a garrisoned fort at Mattapany, by whose surrender, in
August 1689, the Associators gained undisputed possession of the province. The articles of
surrender have preserved the names of the leaders, at the head of which
is that of John Coode, another personage of colonial celebrity.

The first measure of the Associators was to summon a convention at
St. Mary’s, which transmitted to the king an exposition of the motives
of the recent revolution. Their charges against the provincial
government are so much at war with the tenor of its history, under both
Cecilius and George Calvert, that we can in reason only impute them to
popular exaggeration. It was alleged that all the offices of the
province were under the control of the Jesuits, and the churches all
appropriated to the uses of popish idolatry; nay, that under connivance,
if not permission of the government, all sorts of murders and outrages
were committed by Papists upon Protestants. Another topic, not less
prevailing, was the reluctant and imperfect allegiance of the
proprietary rulers to the crown, which they accordingly solicited to
take the province under its immediate guard and administration, William
gratified his own wishes as well as theirs, by arbitrarily depriving the
proprietary of his province, without even the usual forms of law, and by
sending out, in 1692, Sir Lionel Copley as the royal governor. We blush,
says our author, to name Lord Holt as having given the opinion, behind
whose high authority the crown intrenched itself in this summary
procedure. The new governor’s message to the assembly, recommending “the
making of wholesome laws, and the laying aside of all heats and
animosities,” was responded to by an act, the second passed after its
meeting, “for the service of Almighty God, and the establishment of the
Protestant religion in the province.” By this act, the Church of England
was made the established church, and a poll-tax imposed of forty pounds
of tobacco on every taxable, to build churches and support ministers.
But the new church was not only to be encouraged; [Pg
497]
penalties were to be added for the suppression of others.
Under the act of 1704, “to prevent the growth of popery,” Catholic
priests were inhibited by severe penalties from saying mass, or
exercising, except in private families, other spiritual functions, or in
any manner persuading the people to be reconciled to the Church of Rome.
Protestant children of Papists, might also compel their parents to
furnish them adequate maintenance. The Quakers, too, shared these
persecutions for a time; but the toleration of Protestant dissenters was
established some years after; and thus, “in a colony founded by
Catholics, and which had grown into power and happiness under the
government of Catholics, the Catholic inhabitant was the only victim of
religious intolerance.” The next attempt was against the revenues and
land rights of the proprietary; but these were sustained by the
crown.

Another victim of the Protestant revolution seems to have been the
ancient city of St. Mary’s, which, being in a district inhabited chiefly
by Catholics, had always been distinguished by its attachment to the
proprietaries. This circumstance was not calculated to lessen the
complaints long made of its inconvenient remoteness from the greater
part of the present settlements. A natural feeling had nevertheless
retained the government at its old seat, (antiquity is comparative,) and
in 1674 a state-house was built, at an expense (40,000 pounds of
tobacco) which, in our author’s opinion, shows it to have been a work of
some taste and magnitude. This edifice was habitable till the present
year, when its remains, which it would have been better taste to spare
at least, if not preserve, were removed to make room for a church,
erected on or near its site. Notwithstanding this embellishment of his
capital, the proprietary, in 1683, yielded to the wishes of the
colonists, and removed the legislature, the courts, and the public
offices, to “the Ridge,” in Anne Arundel county, and thence to Battle
Creek, on the Patuxent; but the want of the necessary accommodations
drove them from the first after one session, and from the latter after
the shorter experiment of three days. The government was brought back to
St. Mary’s, and remained there till the Protestant revolution, when its
removal was again resolved on. The petition of the ancient city against
the measure, and the reply to it, exhibit the usual topics of the two
parties which divide the world; on the one side, prescription and
ancient privilege; utility, and the progress of events on the other. In
vain the citizens expatiated also on their capacious harbour, in which
five hundred sail might ride securely at anchor; and offered to keep up,
at their own cost, a coach, or caravan, or both, to run daily during the
session of the legislature and provincial courts, and weekly at other
times; and at least six horses, with suitable furniture, for all [Pg
498]
persons having occasion to ride post. Neither their
representations nor their offers begat any thing more than sarcasms on
their leanness and poverty, and the intended removal took place in
1694-5.

The spot selected for the new seat of government, was a point of land
at the mouth of the Severn; a town, according to the definition before
given, but not yet possessing the qualification required by a colonial
statute, entitled by the author “an act to keep the towns off the
parish,” which denied it the right of sending a delegate to the
assembly, till inhabited by as many families as might defray his
expenses, without being chargeable to the county. This place, known as
“Proctor’s,” or “the town-land at Severn,” was named, at the removal,
Anne Arundel town; the following year it acquired the title of the Port
of Annapolis; it was erected in 1708 into a city, with the privilege,
which it still retains, of sending two delegates to the assembly. Four
or five years after it had become the seat of colonial legislation, it
is described as containing about forty dwellings, seven or eight of
which could afford good lodging and accommodation for strangers. One is
curious to know what might have been the accommodations at “the Ridge,”
and at Battle Creek. Our
informant continues, “there is also a statehouse and free-school, built
of brick, which make a great show among a parcel of wooden houses; and
the foundation of a church is laid, the only brick church in Maryland.”
He adds, “had Governor Nicholson continued there a few months
longer, he had brought it to perfection.” This perfection it
seems not to have acquired even as late as 1711, being then described by
one “E. Cooke, gentleman,” in his poem called “The Sotweed Factor,” yet,
by rare accident, extant, as—

“A city situate on a plain,
Where scarce a house will keep out rain;
The buildings, fram’d with cypress rare,
Resemble much our Southwark Fair;—
And if the truth I may report,
It’s not so large as Tottenham-court.”

This tobacco merchant, as we translate his title, a gentleman
apparently of a caustic vein, the prototype of English travellers in
America, reflects also on the hospitality of the new capital; an
allegation doubtful, considering its source, but at any rate amply
refuted at a subsequent day, as this little city, though it never
acquired a large population or commerce, was, long before the American
revolution, proverbial for the profuse hospitality of its inhabitants,
their elegant luxury, and liberal accomplishments. A French writer thus
describes it during the revolution, when it may be presumed to have
shared the distresses and gloom of the period: “In that very
inconsiderable town, of the [Pg 499]few buildings it contains, at least
three-fourths may be styled elegant and grand. Female luxury here
exceeds what is known in the provinces of France. A French hair-dresser
is a man of importance among them; and it is said a certain dame here
hires one of that craft at one thousand crowns a year. The state-house
is a very beautiful building; I think the most so of any I have seen in
America.”[10] To these habits
of profusion, our author is inclined to add others less excusable, and
hints at “dangerous allurements,” administering neither to happiness nor
purity. This early seat of colonial elegance and luxury is still the
political metropolis of Maryland. From the lofty dome of its state-house
the visiter may still look down on mansions that betoken ancient
opulence, and on a landscape of quiet beauty, varied with gardens and
ancient trees, and picturesquely watered by winding estuaries of the
Chesapeake, whose breeze attempers a climate rich in early flowers and
fruits. It was at this time the residence, of course, of the royal
governors, of whose administration we find little to record in this
hasty narrative. One of them, indeed, Francis Nicholson, though a pliant
minister of the crown, seems to have acquired some popularity in the
province, his versatility of temper combined with some energy and
talent, and a courteous demeanour, enabling him to fall easily into the
prevailing humour. Having arrived when the enthusiasm of the Protestant
revolution was yet fresh, he became a great patron of the clergy, and
promoter of orthodoxy, and in that capacity we find him engaged in
proceedings against Coode, though the latter had figured in the events
by which the Protestant ascendency had been established, when his
services were deemed of such merit as to entitle him to the reward of
one hundred thousand pounds of tobacco, and an office. Coode seems not
to have elevated his private virtues to the level of his public. He
subsequently appears exercising the incompatible functions of a
clergyman, a collector of customs, and a lieutenant-colonel of militia,
at the same time alleging that religion was a trick, and that all the
morals worth having were contained in Cicero’s offices. If the orthodoxy
of Governor Nicholson was offended by these opinions, his vanity was not
less so by intimations from Coode, that as he had pulled down one
government, he might assist in overthrowing another. The agitator, on
the ground of his being in holy orders, was prevented by the governor
from serving as a delegate in the assembly, and was then dismissed from
his employments, and indicted for atheism and blasphemy. He fled to
Virginia, but afterwards, on the removal of Nicholson from the
government, came in and surrendered himself. In [Pg 500]consideration of former
services, his sentence was suspended; age and adversity probably tamed
his unquietness, as thenceforward we hear no more of him in the colonial
history. Nicholson’s next proceedings were against some persons whose
principal offence seems to have been the ascription to him of certain
acts of early licentiousness not very consistent with his orthodox zeal,
and which, as they have come down to posterity, might, the author says,
be entitled the Memorabilia of Governor Nicholson. Whatever these
Memorabilia were, they seem not to have impaired the popularity
of his administration, which was also remarkable for the establishment,
in 1695, of a public post, before unknown in the colonies. The
route of this post extended from some point on the Potomac through
Annapolis to Philadelphia. The postman was bound to travel the route
eight times a year, for which he received a salary of 50l.
The scheme dropped on the death of the first postman in 1698, and
appears not to have been revived afterwards. A general post-office for
the colonies was established by the English government in 1710.

Though our author pronounces the administration of the royal
governors to have been favourable in general to the liberties and
prosperity of the colony, its population and resources appear to have
increased extremely little during that era. In 1689 it contained about
twenty-five thousand inhabitants, and in 1710 only thirty thousand.
Immigration had in a great measure ceased; a circumstance imputable to
nothing so probably as the change in its religious policy. Complaints
are made of the distressed condition of its husbandry, and the years
1694 and 1695 were years of unusual scarcity, and of surprising
mortality among the cattle and swine. The artisans, including the
carpenters and coopers, constituted, according to a statement in 1697,
only one-sixtieth of the whole population. The colonists depended
entirely on England for the most necessary articles; in a few families,
coarse clothing was manufactured out of the wool of the province; and
some attempts were made in the counties of Somerset, and Dorchester, to
manufacture linen and woollen cloths on a more extensive scale. Even
these imperfect attempts seem to have offended the commercial jealousy
of the mother country; for the difficulty of getting English goods at
the time, is mentioned by way of excuse for them. There was an
inconsiderable export to the West Indies, and a small trade with
New-England for rum, molasses, fish, and wooden wares, for their traffic
in which latter article the New-Englanders were already conspicuous. The
shipping of the colony was very trifling, the trade with England being
carried on entirely in English, and that with the West Indies, chiefly
in New-England vessels.

The proprietary government had now been suspended twenty-five years.
It had fallen through jealousy of the Catholics, and [Pg
501]
Charles Calvert, who submitted in his own person to the
loss of power for the sake of the religion in which he had grown up, had
yielded to the anxieties of a parent, and induced his son and heir,
Benedict Leonard Calvert, to embrace the doctrines of the established
church. By his own death, in February, 1714, and that of his heir in
April, 1715, the title to the province devolved to Charles Calvert, the
infant son of the latter, who was also educated in the Protestant faith.
The reason for excluding the proprietary family then subsisted no
longer; their claims were in fact soon after acknowledged by George I.
and their government restored in the person of the infant proprietary,
in May, 1715. The only consequence of this event meriting notice, was
the imposition of a test-oath, requiring of Catholics the abjuration of
the Pretender, and the renunciation of some of the essential points of
their faith. Private animosity gave edge to these civil persecutions;
Catholics were excluded from social intercourse, nor permitted to
walk in front of the State-House
; swords were worn by them for
personal defence. Charles Calvert died in 1751, leaving the province to
his infant son Frederic, after acquiring for his administration the
praise of moderation and integrity. Yet it was fruitful in internal
dissensions, which no policy could have averted. The controversy
respecting the extension of the English statutes to the colony,
originated in 1722, and was succeeded in 1739 by the disputes relating
to the proprietary revenue; controversies full of heat at the time, but
which will be more conveniently considered in connexion with some
subsequent transactions of the same sort. One dispute may be mentioned
here, as indicating the spirit of all the rest. The “Six Nations,” a
tribe of Indians, occupying a border position between the French and
English colonies, had claims to a considerable portion of the territory
of Maryland lying along the Susquehanna and the Potomac, and in 1742 it
was resolved to depute commissioners to Albany for the purpose of
extinguishing them by treaty. The lower house of assembly claiming,
however, to participate in the appointment of the commissioners, and
also to restrict the amount of expenditure, a dispute arose on this
point of prerogative, which was only adjusted, two years after, by the
governor’s appointing the commission on his own responsibility, and
defraying its charges from the ordinary revenue. The claims in question
were extinguished by the Indian treaty of Lancaster, in June, 1744.

Questions of this sort now became frequent between the lower house of
the colonial legislature and the proprietary governors. At this period
the French settlements in Canada had begun to be formidable, and their
fortifications had been extended along the northern lakes, with a view
of connecting them by a chain of posts on the Mississippi, with their
possessions in Louisiana. [Pg 502]They had encountered much resistance in
this quarter from the Six Nations, just mentioned, whose hostility to
France made them usually the allies of the English, but whose consistent
aid was only to be bought. As early as 1692, New-York had asked
pecuniary succors of the other colonies, of Maryland among them, for
securing the faith of these savage allies, and repelling the common
enemy. A general injunction to the like effect was issued by the crown,
and this was followed by more particular instructions, defining the
respective quotas of the colonies. Thus began the system of “crown
requisitions,” which, always received with an ill grace, were often
entirely disregarded. In the “French war,” which began in 1754, a few
years after the death of the last mentioned proprietary, Maryland
scarcely co-operated, and the want of her aid was seriously felt in
several of its campaigns; a course construed by the mother country into
a pertinacious and unreasonable opposition to its wishes, and by the
sister colonies into a selfish disregard of the obligations of mutual
defence. Mr. Pitt himself, the subsequent champion of American
liberties, was so highly incensed at the conduct of Maryland, as to avow
his resolution to bring the colonies to a more submissive temper. Dr.
Franklin appreciated more correctly, and explained, the course of the
Maryland assembly. We have his authority, that it voted considerable
aids, only rendered abortive by unhappy disputes between the two houses
as to the mode of raising the requisite revenue. The popular branch
claimed also the privilege of exercising its judgment as to the details
of defence, and of directing its efforts with a view to the more
immediate interests of Maryland, and to the dangers which seemed most
instant. In 1754, it voted £6000, however, for the defence of Virginia;
and on the disastrous defeat of Braddock, by which the frontiers of
Maryland herself were left defenceless, and the terror of her borderers
borne to the very heart of her settlements, her legislature waived the
pending disputes, and entered into the extensive plan of operations
concerted by a council of the colonial governors at New-York. A supply
was voted of £40,000, of which £11,000 were to be applied to the
erection of a fort and block-house on her own western frontier.

At this period, the westernmost settlements of the province scarcely
extended beyond the mouth of the Conococheague, a tributary of the
Potomac, though a few of the more adventurous of the borderers had
plunged perhaps a little deeper into the wilderness. The settlement at
Fort Cumberland, was not then a settlement of Maryland; and, being
separated from the inhabited limits of the latter, by a deep and almost
trackless forest of eighty miles, the fort at that place could afford no
protection to the frontiers of the colony. Its very situation was, at
that not remote day, a subject of conjecture to the good people of
Maryland. There [Pg 503]were many passes of approach for the
Indian foe, beyond its range; and a few stockade forts erected by the
settlers were the only retreats for their families in case of these
sudden and frightful inroads. A more eligible defensive position was
sought, therefore, on the Potomac, a few hundred yards from its bank,
and ten or eleven miles above the mouth of the Conococheague. On this
spot was erected Fort Frederick, the only monument of ante-revolutionary
times remaining in Western Maryland, every vestige of the fortification
at Cumberland having disappeared. It was constructed of durable
materials, in the most approved manner, and was seen by our author in
the summer of 1828, the greater part still standing, in good
preservation, in the midst of cultivated fields.

At the peace of Paris, which ended the French war, the population of
the province had rapidly increased to about 165,000. The number of
convicts alone, imported since the proprietary restoration, was
estimated at fifteen or twenty thousand. The annual shipment of tobacco
to England, according to the best information obtainable, amounted to
28,000 hogsheads, valued at £140,000, and the other exports, in 1761, to
£80,000 currency; the imports, in the same year, to £160,000. Iron was
the only manufacture that had made any progress. As early as 1749, there
were eight furnaces and nine forges, manufacturing, by an estimate in
1761, 2,500 tons of pig, and 600 of bar iron. Such were the resources of
Maryland, at the commencement of the civic struggle for her liberties,
beginning with the Stamp Act.

For the honour of originating and sustaining the resistance to this,
and the like measures of the British government at this time, our author
justly remarks, that there is little room for rivalry among the
colonies. They had all brought with them, as a familiar principle of
English liberty, their right of exemption from taxes, unsanctioned by
their assent, for mere purposes of revenue. There was nothing in the
political establishments of Maryland to efface this original impression.
Its charter exhibits the most favourable form of proprietary government;
and its benignant provisions for the security of rights, were the cause
that it retained, till the revolution, the anxious attachment of the
colonists. It designed entirely to exclude the taxation of the province
by the mother country; and, though the proprietary rights were leniently
exercised by a family which seems to have been especially characterized
by mildness and moderation, they also were limited and modified by the
spirit of the colonists, to a consistency with public welfare, and their
broad notions of the privileges of freemen. Several branches of the
proprietary revenue proving burdensome, or vexatious in the mode of
their collection, were commuted, or partially diverted [Pg 504]to
the public defence and uses; and, even when the provincial assemblies
failed of effecting these objects, their pretensions served to
familiarize the people with the principle, that all impositions were
illegal, not sanctioned by their consent. Our limits do not permit us to
go into the history of these questions, which forms an interesting
portion of the present work.

The resistance of the colony to external aggressions was not less
resolute. We have noticed her neglect of the royal rescripts in the case
of the quotas; she opposed with like firmness, the plan
originated in 1701, and revived in 1715, for destroying the charters,
converting the colonies into royal governments, and forming a
confederacy of them, at whose head was to be a royal commissioner,
residing at New York. She was as adverse to the plan of colonial union,
aiming at much the same object, proposed in 1753. We have already
alluded to the controversy respecting the extension of the English
statutes to the province, which began in 1722, and lasted ten years. In
their session of that, year, the lower House of Assembly adopted a
series of resolves assertory of their liberties, and declaring the
grounds on which they claimed the benefit of the statutes. These
resolves, which became the Magna Charta of the province, and were
afterwards substantially re-adopted on every occasion, involving its
rights and liberties, declared that the province was not to be regarded
as a conquered country, but as a colony planted by English subjects, who
had not forfeited by their removal any part of their English liberties;
that, as such, they had always enjoyed the common law, and those general
statutes of England, which were not restrained by words of local
limitation, and such acts of the colonial legislature, as were made to
suit the particular constitution of the province; and that this was
declared, not from apprehension of the infringement of their liberties
by the proprietary, but as an assertion of them, and to transmit their
sense thereof, and the nature of their constitution, to posterity. These
resolves divided the whole province into two parties, “the court party,”
consisting of the immediate retainers and adherents of the proprietary,
and “the country party,” which embraced the lower house, and the great
body of the people. On the latter side, were enlisted all the talents of
the province; and the papers on this subject proceeding from the lower
house, were marked by great ability and research. Some of them are from
the pen of the elder Daniel Dulany, the father of another distinguished
person of that name, and who transmitted to his son the talents, which,
our author remarks, seem to have been the patrimony of the family in
every generation. The controversy resulted in the recognition of the
pretensions of the assembly, and thenceforth the courts of judicature
continued to adopt [Pg 505]such statutes as were accommodated to
the condition of the province.

The spirit which begat and established these claims, appeared equally
in the dissensions which succeeded them, respecting the proprietary
revenues. A series of resolves was adopted by the lower house in 1739,
denouncing, as arbitrary and illegal, the levying of certain duties, the
settling of officers’ fees by proclamation or ordinance, and the
creation of new offices with new fees, without the assent of the
assembly. The act proposing the appointment of an agent to present these
grievances to the king was vindicated by a message from the lower house,
“worthy to be preserved for its laconic boldness.” “The people of
Maryland,” say they, “think the proprietary takes money from them
unlawfully. The proprietary says he has a right to take that money. This
matter must be determined by his majesty, who is indifferent to both.
The proprietary is at home, and has this very money to enable him to
negotiate this affair on his part. The people have no way of negotiating
it on theirs, but by employing fit persons in London to act for them.
These persons must be paid for their trouble, and this bill proposes to
raise a fund for that purpose.” Though the measures then adopted did not
lead to a definitive suppression of the grievances complained of, some
of them were removed in another mode. Thus, fines on alienation were
relinquished by the proprietary in 1742; officers’ fees were established
by law in 1747; but the tobacco and tonnage duties formed a standing
subject of complaint till the revolution, and a justification of the
refusal of supplies, and of other opposition to the government. In
voting supplies during the French war, the lower house had imposed an
increased tax on “ordinary licenses,” and a duty on convicts transported
into the colony. The former was resisted as an invasion of proprietary
prerogative; the latter, as in conflict with the acts of Parliament
authorizing their importation, according to an opinion obtained from Mr.
Murray, afterwards Lord Mansfield. The assembly was not daunted by
authoritative names. “Precarious,” said they, “and contemptible indeed
would the state of our laws be, if the bare opinion of any man, however
distinguished in his dignity and office, yet acting in the capacity of
private counsel, should be sufficient to shake their authority.” “I
remember,” says Daniel Dulany, in his Considerations on the Stamp-Act,
“many opinions of crown lawyers on American affairs. They have generally
been very sententious;—they have all declared that to be legal,
which the minister, for the time being, has deemed to be expedient.” The
opinion of Attorney-General Pratt, afterwards Lord Camden, prevailed as
little on a subsequent occasion. In it he denied the legality of certain
extensions of the taxing power, in a supply [Pg 506]bill voted by the lower
house. It is chiefly remarkable, however, for the distinction set up by
one who was afterwards an advocate of American liberties, between the
rights of the House of Commons and of the Colonial Assemblies. The
Assembly entertained a very different judgment. “Being desirous,” they
said, “to pay the opinion all due deference, we cannot but wish it had
been accompanied with the state of the facts on which it was founded.”
In nine successive sessions, the supply bill was passed in nearly its
original form. With such exhibitions of the tempers of the colonies, it
is a just subject of wonder that the Stamp-Act should ever have been
ventured on.

The peace of Paris had now, however, not only secured the safety, and
with it the gratitude of the colonies, but also confirmed over them, it
was supposed, the authority of the mother country. But if the
termination of the French war, says the author, seemed to the government
a fair occasion for resuming designs never lost sight of, its progress,
however calamitous, had nurtured the free and adventurous spirit of the
colonists by privations and dangers, until their minds, as well as their
resources, were matured for effectual resistance. Their trade, indeed,
was burdened with duties imposed for its regulation and restriction; but
no tax had yet been laid for the mere purpose of revenue. Sir Robert
Walpole “had sagaciously remarked, that, contenting himself with the
benefits of their trade, he would leave the taxation of the Americans to
some of his successors, who had more courage, and less regard for
commerce.” The Stamp-Act, by which the experiment was now to be tried,
being stripped of the odious machinery of collection, and operating
indirectly, was a well contrived initiatory measure. Coupled with it,
however, were certain harsh enforcements of the trade-laws at this time,
which had the effect of raising higher the indignation of the colonists,
and of confounding the distinction hitherto, though reluctantly
admitted, between the right to regulate their commerce, and that of
direct taxation.

Circumstances prevented Maryland from expressing her opposition to
the measure through her legislature, before, and for some period after
its adoption. The act was passed on the 22d of March, 1765, and that
body was repeatedly prorogued, from November, 1763, to September, 1765.
This delay, at such a juncture, did not escape strong remonstrance.
There existed, however, at that time, another mirror of the public
feeling, whose respectable antiquity deserves mention. This was a
journal at Annapolis, conducted by Jonas Green, under the name of “The
Maryland Gazette.” It was established in 1745, and has ever since been
conducted by his descendants, under the same title. Its pithy appeals to
the popular sentiment are amusing at this day; and, though the
government paper, its temperate support [Pg 507]of colonial rights made
it the vehicle of communications on that side, not only from the
province, but from other colonies. In one from Virginia, the writer
says, “it being well known that the only press we have here is totally
engrossed for the vile purposes of ministerial craft, I must therefore
apply to you, who have always appeared to be a bold and honest assertor
of the cause of liberty.” The person selected for the distribution of
the stamps in Maryland, was Zachariah Hood, a native of the province,
and at one time a merchant residing at Annapolis. His appointment was
announced with due mock ceremony in the Gazette, and himself to be a
gentleman whose conduct was highly approved by all “court-cringing
politicians, since he was supposed to have wisely considered, that, if
his country must be stamped, the blow would be easier borne from
a native than a foreigner.” His arrival also was greeted with customary
honours; his effigy, according to a circumstantial narrative in the
Gazette, being hung to the toll of bells, by the “assertors of British
American privileges” at Annapolis, and afterwards at Baltimore,
Elk-Ridge, Fredericktown, and other places, in emulation. These
significant tokens of the popular temper seem to have been promoted, as
acts of deliberate defiance, by men of authority and character; as among
the “assertors” at Annapolis was the celebrated Samuel Chase, who, at
twenty-four, was already the champion of colonial liberties, and gave
promise of that combination of abilities, which afterward elevated him
beyond rivalry in the province, as a lawyer and advocate, and a leader
both of popular and deliberative assemblies. Talents thus employed would
naturally provoke the calumny of opponents. A publication of the
municipality of Annapolis, describes him as “a busy, restless
incendiary, a ringleader of mobs, and a promoter of their excesses; a
foul-mouthed and inflaming son of discord and faction.” His reply,
“abounding in personal reflections, and savouring too much of coarse
invective,” shows something of the spirit of a tribune of the people,
who, thrown into a tumultuous scene, and into contests with the courtly
adherents of power, might deem himself excused for some disdain of
reserve, and some bluntness of phrase. I admit, he says, that I was one
of those who committed to the flames the effigy of the
Stamp-Distributor, and who openly disputed the parliamentary right to
tax the colonies; while some of you skulked in your houses, and grumbled
in corners, asserting the Stamp-Act to be a beneficial law, or not
daring to speak out your sentiments. The reader may be curious to know
Hood’s subsequent adventures. Not daring to distribute the stamps, and
finding the indignation which had been lavished on his effigy, taking a
more dangerous direction towards his person, he absconded secretly, and
never paused in his flight [Pg 508]till he reached New-York, and had taken
refuge under the cannon of Fort George. Having gone afterwards to reside
on Long Island, a party surrounded the house where he was concealed,
requiring the abjuration of his office, on pain of being delivered to
the exasperated multitude, and carried back to Maryland, with labels
upon him signifying his office and designs. Unwilling to run this
gantlet through a country up in arms, he yielded, and was accompanied by
upwards of a hundred gentlemen from Flushing to Jamaica, where he swore
to his abjuration, and was discharged.

The first measure of the assembly, when at length convened, was to
appoint commissioners to a general congress that was to be held in
New-York; its next, to make an expression of its sentiments on the
existing question. The tone and unanimity of the resolves adopted,
sufficiently show, in the author’s opinion, that the temper and course
of Maryland at this juncture, have been too lightly considered, and may
advantageously be compared with those of any other colony. Another of
her contributions, and not the least effective, to the common cause, was
an essay published at Annapolis, in October, 1765. “A style easy but
energetic, perspicuous thoughts, illustrations simple, and arguments
addressed to every understanding,” betrayed it to be the production of
Daniel Dulany, the younger, whom it placed at once in the first rank of
political writers. Long signal for talents and professional learning,
his “Considerations” earned him the more grateful distinction of the
great champion of colonial liberties; and in the joyous celebrations of
the repeal of the stamp-act, placed him in remembrance with Camden, and
with Chatham, his admirer and eulogist. It is known, that in this essay
Mr. Dulany, though bold and decided as to the question of right, urged
the disuse of British commodities as the most advisable weapon of
resistance. This appeal to the commercial cupidity of England would,
also, he thought, be the most effectual. The course, even could it have
been perseveringly adopted, was too pacific for the temper of the
times.

Political integrity and abilities associated the name of Dulany with
the history of Maryland, during the better part of a century. The father
of the distinguished person just mentioned, was admitted to the bar of
the provincial court in 1710, and for forty years held the first place
in the confidence of the proprietary and in the popular affection, being
a functionary in the highest post of trusts, and long a leader also of
the country party in the assembly. He was a kinsman of the celebrated
Delany, the intimate of Swift, some of whose letters to him breathe the
tone both of friendship and reverend regard. His son, Daniel Dulany,
the Greater, (as our author styles him,) came to the bar in 1747,
and was named one of the council in 1757; in 1761, [Pg 509]he
was appointed secretary of the province, and thenceforward held these
posts in conjunction, till the Revolution. His legal arguments and
opinions, the praise of contemporaries, and the deference of courts,
attest him to have been an oracle of law; as a scholar and an
orator, he was not only highly celebrated at home, but in the judgment
of Mr. Pinkney, who saw him but in his “evening declination,” unexcelled
by the master minds abroad. Suavity of manners, and the graces of the
person, combine to complete a most agreeable picture.

The stamp-paper had now arrived. The governor, to whom the lower
house had refused all advice as to the disposal of that paper, found it
expedient to pursue the suggestion of the upper, to retain it on board
of the vessel. By a general consent, the ordinary transactions of
business and of the courts proceeded without it, and on the 24th of
February, 1766, an association, bearing the name of the “Sons of
Liberty,” was formed at Baltimore, with the object of compelling the
government offices at Annapolis to dispense with it likewise. They
assembled at that place on a day assigned, the 31st of March; and the
provincial court and other offices, after first a peremptory refusal,
and some delay, conceded the point. Thus was the stamp-act virtually
annulled in Maryland; it had been repealed in England a few days before,
on the 18th of March; so that, in the author’s words, “Maryland was
never polluted even by an attempt to execute it.”

Of the subsequent revival of the scheme of taxing the colonies, the
manner and the event are so well known, that we have only to notice the
contemporary transactions in Maryland, which fanning the resentment of
her people, kept her at an even pace with the other provinces in the
march of resistance. The “Proclamation and Vestry Act questions,” have
lost indeed their momentary interest, but serve to show in how many
schools of exercise the champions were trained, who afterward displayed
their collected prowess in a more conspicuous arena.

The colonial legislature had always controlled the provincial
officers by exercising the right to determine their fees, which, by way
of further precaution, they had been in the habit of regulating by
temporary acts. An act of this nature, passed in 1763, coming up for
renewal in 1770, objections were made to the exorbitance of the fees
themselves, abuses in the mode of charging, and the want of a proper
system of commutation. Angry discussions were followed by a prorogation
of the assembly, and subsequently by a proclamation of Governor Eden,
ostensibly to prevent extortion in the officers, but with the real
purpose of regulating the fees by the prerogative of his office;
accordingly, he re-established the fee-act of 1763. The proclamation
begat the usual array of parties for and against prerogative, [Pg 510]in
which our author includes the established clergy on the government side,
and on the popular, the lawyers. In this conflict of influence and
abilities, by a turn which is to be lamented, as it threw them into
collision with the Revolutionary leaders, and exciting high resentments
on both sides, kept him aloof from their measures, Daniel Dulany was, in
this question, the prominent partisan of the governor and upper house.
The grounds somewhat technical on which he defended their procedure as
both legal and expedient, and the more large and comprehensive ones on
which it was impugned, were set forth in a series of essays in the
Maryland Gazette, in which Mr. Dulany’s antagonist was Charles Carroll
of Carrollton. The angry excitement of the day gave these essays one
feature in common,—strong invective, and personalities,—”of
which, some are now unintelligible, and all deserve to be forgotten.”
Their distinctive characteristics are,—in Mr. Dulany’s, “the
traces everywhere of a powerful mind, confident in its own resources,
indignant at opposition, contemptuous, as if from conscious superiority,
yet sometimes affecting contempt to escape from principles not to be
resisted;” in his opponent’s, the language of a man “confident in his
cause, conscious that he is sustained by public sentiment, and exulting
in the advantage of this position.” When the discussion was dropped by
these combatants, it was taken up by others, as vigorous and adroit. In
this new controversy, John Hammond, no contemptible reasoner in behalf
of the proclamation, found antagonists in Thomas Johnson, the first
governor of the state of Maryland, Samuel Chase, and his more
conciliatory friend and coadjutor, William Paca. In the proceedings of
the lower house relative to this subject, we find a sententious
description of political liberty, which might serve as the motto of all
Constitutionalists. “Who,” says their address, “who are a free
people? Not
those over whom government is reasonably and equitably
exercised, but those who live under a government so constitutionally
checked and controlled, that proper provision is made against its being
otherwise exercised.”

The “Vestry Act” related to clergy dues, and the controversy
on it arose out of the technical objection, that the law imposing them,
which was enacted in 1701-2, was passed by an assembly, which, being
dissolved by the demise of the king, had nevertheless been convened with
fresh writs of election. The law thus regarded as intrinsically
defective, had the farther demerit of being revived, (as in the case of
the officer’s fees,) in default of an existing enactment, by
proclamation of the governor. In this discussion the clergy naturally
took a part, and “found in their own body an advocate of extraordinary
powers, in the person of Jonathan Boucher.” These questions filled the
province with contention. An act regulating clergy dues, some time [Pg
511]
after, put that question to sleep; the other remained in
angry suspense, till swallowed up, with all less disputes, in the vortex
of the Revolution.

That event was now nearly impending. It may be remembered, that the
duty act of 1767, in which the ministerial scheme of taxing the colonies
had been revived, had been subsequently repealed, except as to the
article of tea, on which the duty had been retained, “by way, it has
been remarked, of pepper-corn rent, to denote the tenure of colonial
rights.” A new stratagem of the ministry in this matter was followed, it
is also known, by “the burning of the tea in Boston,” and by the
retaliatory measure of the Boston-Port Bill; acts, respectively, which
may be said to have made up the issue between the conflicting parties.
The convention in 1774, assembled at Annapolis, in June of that year. In
the October following, the tea-burning at Boston was re-enacted
in Maryland, with circumstances of deliberation and defiance that show
what a flame was abroad. On the 14th of that month, the brig Peggy
Stewart arrived at Annapolis, having, as a part of her cargo, seventeen
packages of tea. The non-importation agreement, to which the act of 1767
had given rise, was understood to be retained as to this article, which
still bore the badge of usurpation in the obnoxious duty. The consignees
did not venture to incur the public indignation by landing the teas,
without at least consulting the Non-Importation Committee; but in the
meantime, the vessel was entered, and the duties paid by Anthony
Stewart, a part owner of the vessel. The people, highly incensed,
determined, in a public meeting, at Annapolis, that the tea
should not be landed. It was proposed, in a subsequent one, to burn it;
and at a county meeting which followed, it was decided, that this should
be accompanied also by a most humiliating apology from Stewart and the
consignees. As the people now threatened to burn the vessel itself, the
former, by the advice of Carroll of Carrollton, proposed to destroy her
with his own hands. Crowds repaired to the water-side to witness the
atonement; the vessel was run ashore at Windmill Point, where
Stewart set fire to his own vessel, with the tea on board.

All was now preparation for open hostilities. Military associations
were formed, military exercises eagerly engaged in, and subscriptions
set afoot for purchasing arms and ammunition. The planters were
requested to cultivate flax, hemp, and cotton, and to enlarge their
flocks with a view to the manufacture of woollens. At this point we must
leave Mr. M’Mahon. On the appearance of his second volume, we may resume
his narrative from this period, and take the same occasion to notice
some other matters in his work, for the discussion of which we have not
room at present.


[10]
New Travels by the Abbé Robin, one of the Chaplains to the French Army
in N. America.]


[Pg
512]
Art. X.Notes on
Italy.
By Rembrandt Peale. 1 vol 8 vo.
Carey & Lea: Philadelphia: 1831.

To review a new volume of travels in Italy, may seem to
many readers an unprofitable task. Since its shores were first hailed by
the faithful Achates, it has been the goal of travellers and the theme
of authors. Every age has sent its children to visit that favoured soil;
and the barbarians who rudely invaded it from beyond its Alpine
barriers, have been followed by successive generations of men, less rude
indeed from the progress of time, but not less ardent to explore and
overrun it. Peace and war have alike urged them on. Its mountains, its
valleys, its defiles, its broad and sunny plains, have resounded for
hundreds of years with the clash of arms, and glittered with innumerable
warriors; bands scarcely less numerous have penetrated every corner, led
by spirits inquisitive for knowledge or fond of dwelling on beauties of
nature, perhaps unrivalled, and on the certain charms of refined and
exquisite art, with which no other land, however favoured, has yet dared
to offer a comparison. Nor is there wanting the ample, the reiterated
record of all this. Historians, and poets, and antiquarians, and
novelists, and travellers, have made familiar every incident of every
age—every allusion that can give fresh and delightful associations
to every spot. What ruin is there that they have not made eloquent? What
mountain, what grove, can eager curiosity, urged on by the enthusiasm of
taste and genius, discover, which is not already hallowed—that has
not “murmured forth a solemn sound.”

Yet, still, we read over the oft-repeated tale; we can bear to hear
again and again the history of Roman grandeur; we delight to trace the
footsteps of warriors, of statesmen, of heroes, philosophers, and poets,
whom we have learnt to regard rather as old friends, as household
deities, as companions who have enchanted our youth, and beguiled our
later years,—who have given us at once rules and lessons of human
conduct, and pleasing visions to delight our fancies and our hearts,
than as merely individuals in the great family of mankind. We can bear
to dwell again and again on the graphic page which imparts to us the
knowledge of those triumphant efforts of taste, of genius, and of art,
whose charm time cannot injure, and which become to us the more dear,
because they remain after centuries have passed away, with scarcely a
single rival.

We were impressed with these feelings when we took up the
unpretending volume before us; we can scarcely doubt, that they will be
common to many at least of our readers, when they find our page headed
with “Notes on Italy.” To these sentiments will be justly added a
favourable impression from the [Pg 513]character of the writer, and the
circumstances which have led to his tour and to the publication of the
present volume.

As early as the year 1786, Charles Wilson Peale, the father of the
author, and a gentleman whose name is well known as connected with the
infant arts and sciences of America, was the first person to build an
exhibition room in the city of Philadelphia. There he displayed to a
public, perhaps but little prepared to appreciate them, the first
collection of Italian paintings, and there his son acquired in his
earliest youth, not only an enthusiastic admiration for the art itself,
which he has since successfully cultivated, but an ardent desire to
visit the region where he could behold the productions of artists whose
genius he had learned to venerate.

Having commenced his studies as a painter under the direction of his
father, he went to England, during the peace of 1802, with the design of
visiting France and Italy. The renewal of hostilities, however,
prevented this, and after availing himself for a short time of the
benefits London offered, he returned home. In 1807, he again crossed the
Atlantic; the disturbed situation of the continent obliged him to
confine himself to France; but in the gallery of the Louvre he could
admire, study, and emulate the noblest productions of the pencil and the
chisel, collected by that wonderful man, who loved to blend in the
triumphs of warlike ambition, the trophies dear to philanthropy, to
science, and to art. Mr. Peale returned to his own country, not
satisfied however, because Italy itself was yet unseen. It was in vain
that an increasing patronage and attention to the fine arts in his own
country offered him renewed reasons to remain there; he was as restless
as before, and in 1810 we again find him in Paris, and again obliged, by
the unsettled state of Europe, to forego his long cherished visit. He
returned to his own country; but the fever that still burned as in the
ardour of youth, was not allayed, and the idea that his dreams of Italy
were never to be realized, seemed, as he tells us, to darken the cloud
which hung over the prospect of death itself. For a number of years the
duties required by a large family forbade his separation from them; but
these at length permitted the gratification of his wishes, and
patronised by the liberality of several gentlemen of New-York, at the
age of fifty-one he was able to gratify a desire which had not failed to
increase with his years. The narrative of his tour, which occupied
nearly two years, is embraced in this volume. His main object was to
examine the celebrated works of Italian art, and to select, for the
employment of his pencil, some of the most excellent pictures of the
great masters which are preserved in Rome and Florence; the copies of
these carefully made cannot fail to advance, among the artists and
amateurs of his own country, a correct knowledge of the fine arts. [Pg 514]

With his thoughts and his pursuits directed chiefly to this object,
we find in the volume before us, no pretension and little attention to
antiquarian research, or classical allusion, which have been so
generally called forth by the mouldering monuments, and the familiar
scenes connected with the history and poetry of earlier days. Neither do
we meet with the elaborate reflections on the political or social state
of Italy, in the present day. It is true, the remarks of Mr. Peale are
not confined to works of art, for he could not shut his eyes to the
scenes among which he had to pass, and he was not uninfluenced by a
general curiosity and love of truth;—but they are the notes of a
transient observer, whose mind was turned to other things. Yet they are
found not unfrequently to convey lively impressions of the state of
society and manners, and of the local peculiarities of Italy.

Having sailed from New-York, Mr. Peale arrived at Paris, in the month
of December, 1828. After a short stay there, merely sufficient to glance
over the principal works of art, and to regret the altered situation of
the magnificent gallery of Napoleon, deprived of the matchless memorials
of his conquests, he continued his journey towards the south of France.
Passing through Lyons, the route continued a long way on the border of
the rapid Rhone, upon which he saw but one vessel,—whilst the road
presented a constant procession of wagons. Such a stream in America,
between two great cities, would be covered with steam-boats. As the road
advanced south, it passed through more abundant vineyards, the verdure
of the fields became more extensive, and, on each side, were seen vast
orchards of mulberry trees, for the support of silk-worms, tributary to
the great manufactories of silk at Lyons. As he approached Marseilles,
the milder atmosphere gave evidence of a more genial climate, and the
altered costume of the women, of a different people—to the caps
common after leaving Paris, was now added a piece of black silk, of the
size and shape of a plate laid on the top of the head; and, in the
immediate vicinity of the town, the women wore black hats, with small
round crowns and broad rims. Marseilles is a large and bustling
sea-port, with but little to detain those who are in search of the
productions of Italian art. Instead of pursuing the route he had
intended, by Aix and Genoa, Mr. Peale here embarked in a Neapolitan
ship, and, after a stormy and uncomfortable passage of ten days, found
himself in the magnificent Bay of Naples. Four weeks were devoted to an
examination of the works of art in the various galleries, palaces, and
churches;—and most of the curiosities, the objects which attract
an inquisitive traveller, were examined. Among the latter may be
mentioned the catacombs of Santa Maria della Vita, which are thus
described:

[Pg 515]

“Descending into the valley of houses, and then rising to the foot of
a neighbouring hill, we entered the court yard of a vast hospital for
the poor; an establishment made by the French, in which are men, women,
and girls, each class being kept separate and made to work. Here an old
man presented himself who officiated as an experienced guide, furnished
with a lantern and great flambeau made of ropes impregnated with some
kind of resin. A little back lane conducted us to a kind of grotto,
containing an altar ornamented with several marble medallions, which are
said to have been sculptured by the early Christians. This chapel served
as an entrance to the chambers of the dead, which consist of long,
winding, and intricate passages, cut out of the tufa rock; in
procuring which, for the purposes of building, these vast subterranean
excavations were originally made, and afterwards used as depositories of
the dead. During the persecutions against the early Christians, they
were occupied by them either secretly as places of residence, where they
might practise their worship unmolested, or, by the permission of their
pagan persecutors, as abodes of the most humiliating kind, secluded from
the light of day. Here our guide, preceding us with his smoking torch,
which he occasionally struck on the walls, so as to scatter off a
radiating flood of sparks which left him a brighter flame, showed us the
little lateral recesses in which the humble believers were contented to
lie, and shelves, excavated in the rock, in which their mortal remains
were deposited after death. He pointed out the larger chambers, somewhat
decorated with columns and arches in faint relief, in which the priests
resided; the places where altars stood; and, in a higher excavation,
raised his torch to a rude recess, or sunken balcony above the arched
passage, whence the word was preached to the faithful below in a hall of
great width. The chambers occupied by the most distinguished characters
were denoted by better sculpture, Mosaic incrustations, and fresco
paintings. We followed the windings of these subterranean corridors to a
great extent, till we reached a hall which was said to be a quarter of a
mile in height; but whether contrived for the purpose of ventilation, or
as a shaft for raising the stone, we could not ascertain, any more than
we could the accuracy of our guide’s information, that the bodies of
hundreds of martyrs were thrown down there by their pagan murderers,
whence they were conveyed by their surviving friends into the niches
prepared for them. From these remote parts, passages, now closed, were
formerly open, which communicated with other catacombs and villages for
sixteen miles round, affording the inmates, it is said, the means of
escaping the persecutions which, from time to time, fell upon a sect so
obnoxious to the pagan priesthood.

“We found the bones in these catacombs in excellent preservation, and
on many the flesh of fifteen hundred years was still of such tenacious
though pliant fibre, that it required a sharp knife to cut off a piece.
The guide showed us the heads of some of those early Christians, with
the tongues still remaining in them, but would not permit us to take one
away. Here lived the venerated St. Januarius, whose particular cell was
pointed out to us; and to these retreats was his dead body borne after
his martyrdom; though some ancient painters represent him walking back
with his head in his hands.

“We then visited the church of Santa Maria della Vita; it is
an old and curious edifice, rich in marbles, and remarkable for the
style of the grand altar, which is constructed over another one, as on a
bridge, to which you rise by two lateral flights of steps, ornamented
with elegant balustrades of costly marbles. The old monk showed us,
behind the altar, an ancient painting of the Madonna, resembling an
Indian, and a precious door to a case containing some sacred relic; but
as we did not seem interested in these, he proceeded to open a door in
the side wall, and requested us to walk in. To our surprise it was the
entrance to another series of catacombs, in which were deposited the
dead within the last two hundred years. These were placed in
perpendicular niches in the rock, and plastered up, leaving only a part
of the head projecting; the men with their faces out, the women with
their faces in, only exposing the backs of their heads, from which the
hair had long since fallen. By scraping away the plaster, some of the
skeletons appeared in their whole extent, among which was an
extraordinary one of a man about eight feet tall. The plaster which
covers these bodies, [Pg 516]thus showing only one half of the head,
was painted so as to imitate the entire figure, clothed as men or women,
and sometimes representing them as skeletons in part covered with
drapery, with various inscriptions above them. The deeper recesses of
these vaults led to chambers where we saw two carcasses of men,
deposited only six months since; the flesh not decaying, but gradually
drying up. They were naked and seated in niches in the wall, with their
heads and arms hanging forward in very grotesque postures. In the
catacombs which we first visited, the dead were generally placed
horizontally, whereas here, all that we now saw were standing erect. We
entered some chambers, however, with numerous empty horizontal
recesses.”

All the spots around Naples, of particular interest, as Vesuvius,
Posilippo, and Portici were visited; crowds of beggars were encountered
in all directions; but the people in general appeared to be healthy,
lively, and happy. The streets are made gay by the immense number of
carriages with which the public are accommodated at a very cheap rate,
and people of all ranks are seen splashing along, sometimes to the
number of seven or eight, clinging, as well as they can, to a vehicle
scarcely large enough to hold half the number. The Neapolitans speak
with great gesticulation, using many signs which have a known meaning;
and they may sometimes be seen thus conversing across the street, from
the upper stories of opposite houses. They are, of course, great eaters
of macaroni, which is seen dangling from the shops in all parts of the
city; and nothing is more amusing than the humble purchasers gathered
around the stalls, stretching their necks with open mouths to suck it
in.

Having seen as much of Naples as a long succession of bad weather
permitted, our travellers set out in a vetturino for Rome, under the guidance of a snug, young,
leather-breeched postilion, who spoke nothing but broad Italian.
Crossing the Pontine marshes, where, it is probable, the wintry season
prevented the frogs and musquitoes from recalling to their recollection
the sufferings of Horace, they first looked down from the heights of
Albano on the dome of St. Peter’s, glittering in the bright rays of the
sun, which just then broke through the clouds. On the last day of
January, Mr. Peale found himself comfortably placed in a hotel of the
Piazza di Spagna, ready to explore all that the eternal city could offer
to his curious research. He remained at Rome till the month of July
following.

His earliest visit was to St. Peter’s, which he has minutely and
graphically depicted. His first sensation he describes as one of
surprise at the brightness and elegance of the whole interior, and in
part of disappointment at the apparent want of magnitude. This was
probably occasioned by the colossal statues, which, being proportioned
to the vast pilasters, arches, and columns, seem to reduce the whole to
an ordinary scale; and also to the wonderful harmony of all the parts,
which prevents [Pg 517]the contrast necessary to fill the mind
with a sense of a gigantic object. When he had, however, walked over the
wide fields of pavement, and compared the human beings before him with
the stupendous masses around, he became by degrees convinced of the
mighty magnitude, and experienced increased emotions of wonder and
delight.

His visit to St. Peter’s was followed by a minute survey of all the
principal churches, galleries, antique monuments, and ruins, with which
Rome abounds, among them, and in the study of the works of the great
masters of art, he found five months pass rapidly away.

The houses of modern Rome generally present a good appearance, from
the circumstance, that, although built of brick, they are, with few
exceptions, plastered with great skill and dexterity to resemble stone,
outside and inside. The puzzolana earth forms an admirable cement, and
even when placed on the tops of houses it forms a terrace impenetrable
by water. The streets are kept rather clean by the employment of
convicts, but there is always abundance of dirt around the dwellings of
the poor, who inhabit the ground floors, which are used not only for the
residence of poverty and wretchedness, but for stables, and shops of
every kind. The men, women, and children, however, in these unpromising
abodes, are fat, dirty, and merry, and present no appearance of being
victims of malaria or despotism. The streets, except the Corso, are
seldom straight; but in the evenings they are filled with people, the
rich taking a fashionable drive, with the utmost seriousness and
silence, the poor lying and sitting on the ground, eating a piece of
bread, or a fresh head of lettuce, in general, silent and serious like
their betters, but occasionally bursting into roars of laughter, and
expressing their hilarity by loudly clapping their hands.

“As the warm weather advances, every kind of workman who can get out
his little bench, apparatus or chair, is at work in the street close up
to his house. I have counted nine shoemakers, with their stalls, in
front of one house, for the purpose of enjoying light and air. Benches
and chairs are likewise occupied by the idle, chiefly old gentlemen, in
front of the coffee-houses, especially in the Corso, where they are
amused by the continual movement of carriages and pedestrians. In the
evening, especially on holidays, tables are spread out with white
cloths, and brilliantly illuminated and decorated with flowers,
containing various articles of food, whilst a cook is busy on one side
with his portable kitchen, cooking dough-nuts, or other articles, which
are eaten on the spot.

“The English and French style of dress, both among men and women,
prevails not only in the higher classes, but through all others, and in
every part of the city. Huge Parisian bonnets, full set with broad
ribands, are seen in every street; contrasting widely with the fashion
of the country, which covers the head with a white linen cloth, folded
square, and either hanging loose, or kept flat by sticks within them, or
long pins like skewers, which bind up the hair. Long waists and stays
are universal—the rich wear the fashionable corset of
France—the poor, the stays of the country, thick set with bone,
covered with gay velvet, and worn outside of their gowns, when they have
any on, and tied at the top and back of the shoulders with long bunches
of gay ribands. An apron, skirted with many coloured bands, hangs in
front of a short petticoat with [Pg 518]similar bands, and the shoes have great
silver buckles. The taste for large ear and finger rings is universal,
and heavy rolls of beads encircle almost every neck—the dark red
coral being calculated, by its contrast, to improve their brown Italian
complexion.

“The peasants, as they appear in town, differ from these, in wearing
coarse pointed wool hats, decorated with ribands or flowers; wretched,
old, ragged, or patched clothes; breeches without buttons or strings at
the knees; sandals which they make out of raw hide, turning up a little
above the sole, and with strong cords bound to their feet, the cord
passing around their legs and up to their knees, encircling coarse linen
or rags, which they wear instead of stockings. On Sundays and holidays,
certain streets, as the Repetti, are the rendezvous of labouring
men, who are then a little, but very little, better dressed than on
other days; always displaying their stout legs in coarse white
stockings, their knees still unbuttoned, and their shirt collars open
even in cool weather, and, if warm, their jacket across one shoulder,
one sleeve hanging in front—the other behind, and shifted to the
other shoulder, should their exposure to the wind or current of air
require it. I have often stopped to notice these groups, and have been
surprised to find them generally silent, but with an expression of
content. Occasionally, when a joke would circulate, it was managed with
the fewest words. It is only when much excited, that a Roman displays
any volubility of tongue or extravagance of gesticulation to disturb his
usual air of dignity—whether above or below contempt—whether
with much thought or with no thought at all.

“The Romans are certainly a sober people, but the lower classes,
though they are not afflicted by Irish, Scotch, or American whiskey,
Holland gin, or English porter, yet often indulge to excess in the cheap
wine of the country. Every body drinks wine, and to offer water to a
beggar would be an insult. It is only used occasionally with lemons in
hot weather. At a late hour in the evening, in many streets, may be
heard the noise of Bacchanalian merriment proceeding from some deep
cavernous chamber, which, seen by lamp-light, shows nothing but coarse
plastered walls, a greasy brick pavement, and benches and tables, around
which, in the absence of all other comforts, the most miserable enjoy
their principal, or only meal of the day, and freely circulate the
bottle as a social bond. Besides, on holidays, the wine shops are
frequented by groups of men and women, who sometimes exhibit around the
door a noisy and licentious crowd. But wine is not always deemed
sufficient, and those who are disposed to take a walk about sunrise, may
every day see persons with little baskets of aqua vitæ, which is
swallowed by artificers between their beds and their workshops.”

During Mr. Peale’s stay at Rome, the election of the pope afforded
him an opportunity of witnessing the many gorgeous and striking
ceremonies, which attend the elevation of the spiritual father of the
church to his temporal throne. These he has described minutely, but with
little variation from the accounts given by those who have been at Rome
on previous and similar occasions. He speaks of the sudden illumination
of the vast dome of St. Peter’s, as a sight of singular magnificence; in
an instant the whole edifice appeared to throw out flowers of flame, and
then, a few moments after, a new succession of lights, still more vivid,
by their superior brightness, rendered the first nearly invisible.

From Rome, Mr. Peale went to Tivoli, and spent some days among the
lovely scenery of that spot, familiar to every one who has not forgotten
the exquisite praises Horace has bestowed on it. He saw and admired the
remnants of the temple of the Sibyl, which Claude Lorraine has so often
selected to add to the harmony and beauty of his inimitable landscapes;
and amid the [Pg
519]
importunities of beggars, who infest a traveller in Italy
in every haunt to which the love of antiquity or of scenery can lead
him, and beneath the spray of the cataract—the polvere
del’acqua
, as it was called by the natives—he sketched a
drawing of a spot which poets and painters have alike loved to select in
ancient and modern days.

On entering Tuscany, he was pleased to find no longer the rags and
patches of Naples and Rome, but a peasantry, better clad, and more
industrious; the country was in a fine state of cultivation, and the
habitations were neat and commodious. It was the season of harvest, and
the fields abounded with men and women in nearly equal numbers, and
apparently happy as they were cheerful.

At Florence, where Mr. Peale arrived on the 7th of July, he remained
until the 22d of April following, thus devoting to that fair seat of the
arts more than eight months. His time was zealously employed in the
pursuit of his favourite studies; and he made, in the galleries so
liberally opened to artists, copies of many of those works which have
been considered as masterpieces at all times, which have been deemed the
noblest of the spoils of conquest, and have become the guides of
aspiring genius, and the test of taste, throughout the world.

The manners of the inhabitants are lively, but in general decorous;
and whenever crowds are accidentally assembled, they disperse without
tumult.

“In the public square it is common, once or twice a week, to see a
quack doctor, seated in his chaise or gig, haranguing the crowd, with
the most impassioned language and gestures: at one corner of his
carriage is a banner consisting of a hideous portrait of an old monk,
from whom he professes to have learned his precious secrets in the
healing art; occasionally he displays a book of botanical engravings,
gaily coloured, to show his knowledge of nature and his reliance on the
bounty of Providence, invoking frequently the name of the Blessed
Virgin, and reverently taking off his hat, in which he is imitated by
the faithful around him. At the end of his discourse he produces his
medicines, which are eagerly bought by the credulous.

“Occasionally, too, a dentist appears, on horseback, with an
attendant, likewise on horseback, who, in a similar manner, but with an
eloquence more voluble, and language more refined, expatiates on his
well known skill and experience; and then, to suit his action to the
word, proceeds to draw the teeth gratuitously of any that may present
themselves at the left side of his horse, to the amount of five or six.
It is surprising with what dexterity he performs the act, without moving
from his saddle. Afterwards, if any one wants the assistance of the
accomplished dentist, he must be sought at his lodgings.”

The number of beggars, though great in itself, is small, when
compared to that at Rome. Every place, too, is crowded with persons who
pester you with knives, razors, and combs—linens, silks, and
cloths—cravats, shawls, and rugs—alabaster carvings, and
every thing that can be carried about by hand, which they persecute you
to buy in spite of your no, no, which means nothing to them. Experienced
Italians send off the dirty fellows with a “caro mio“—”no,
my dear, I am not in want of it.” [Pg 520]The streets are kept
remarkably clean, and the houses are generally substantial and well
built, but less ornamented with stucco and sculpture, than those of
Rome. The public edifices are remarkable rather for massive strength
than architectural beauty, looking more like fortresses than palaces,
and black with stone and time. There are numerous fountains scattered
through the city; but, amidst the abundance of bronze and marble
ornaments which they exhibit, the stream of water they pour out is
extremely insignificant. The coffee-houses are well served, the
favourite ices are made with clean ice taken from the streams, instead
of the frozen and dirty snow collected in the mountains, which is used
at Rome. In all public places of resort, are seen quantities of
beautiful and fragrant flowers, the delight of the Florentines; and men
are everywhere met who carry baskets of them, which are offered not only
to the ladies, but are presented bunch after bunch, with the most
persevering assiduity, to gentlemen who are sipping their coffee, eating
their ice-creams, or reading the papers.

While Mr. Peale was in Florence, he had the good fortune to witness
the powers of the most celebrated improvisatrice of the day, Rosa
Taddei
, of Naples. Her performances took place at the principal
theatre, two or three times on each occasion, but with intervals of
several days:

“When the curtain rose, the scene was that of a parlour, with an open
piano, at which a professor of music was seated. On the entrance of Rosa
Taddei, she was greeted with loud applause by her old friends and
confiding expectants. She appeared to be about thirty years of age, and,
though small, her uncorsetted chest gave ample space for the important
action of her powerful lungs. She was dressed as a private lady. Her
pale face indicated a studious life, but her forehead was low and
narrow, though her head was broad; her little sunken eye was quick in
its movements, and when it looked intently out, to fashion the measure
of a thought, was accompanied by a slight contraction of the brow that
banished all suspicion of coquetry. Her nose was small, and her mouth
would be called ordinary; but when it was about to speak, it quivered
delicately with the rising emotion, and varied its expression according
to the passion of her discourse.

“A servant now advances to the front of the stage, holding a little
casket, destined to received the papers which are handed from different
parts of the house, containing subjects proposed for recitation. When
about forty of these are received, the casket is placed on a side table.
Without reading them she folds and returns them to the casket. This is
an operation of some time, and serves to give the appearance of
business, and, perhaps, composure to the performer. Advancing to the
side boxes and orchestra, she offers successively to different persons
the casket, out of which, each time, a paper is drawn and presented to
her. With a grave, deliberate, and emphatic voice she reads the theme
proposed. If the subject is hackneyed, dull, or unfit, a lamentable and
deep-toned ah! synonymous with our bah! is heard from various parts of
the house; on which she tears up the paper with an impressive look,
which seems to say—such is your pleasure. When six or seven
subjects are approved by the cries of yes, yes, she places them on her
side table, selects one, and, advancing to the piano, decides upon a
musical harmony, which the professor immediately begins to play, and
continues delicately; during which she walks in measured steps across
the stage backwards and forwards, looking earnestly down, occasionally
pausing, sometimes raising her hand to her mouth or forehead. The [Pg
521]
crowded house is silent as death, and she is only
influenced by the measure of the music and the arrangement of her unseen
materials of thought. This being completed, she suddenly advances, and
begins with a burst of language, in which she continues with
unhesitating volubility and moderate action, occasionally uttering some
fine expression that draws forth from experienced critics an approving
bravo! It was to be remarked, that as she advanced to the termination of
every line, couplet, or stanza, according to the compass of the
sentiment, there was a dwelling on the syllables and a monotonous
chanting, very much resembling the cadence of a Quaker preacher; thereby
permitting her thoughts to advance and fashion the commencement of the
following line, couplet, or stanza, which was always eagerly and
expressively pronounced at its commencement, and as regularly terminated
in the thought-resolving chant.

“Among the subjects which she treated, some of which she began with
little preparation, were the following:—The discoveries of Galileo
and Columbus, and the ingratitude of their country; two Doctors, a
Lawyer and Jealous Woman; a Lawyer’s Inkhorn; and a Dialogue between the
Dome of St. Peter and the Dome of Florence. This last appeared to
perplex her a little, and it was some time before she could fashion it
to her mind; indeed, there was an expectation, from the frequency of her
turns across the stage, and her contracted brow, that she would be
obliged to acknowledge a failure; but when she advanced and began in
elegant strains to state the difficult nature of the singular task
imposed on her, to give tongues to the domes so long silent, and listen
to so distant a dialogue between the Duomo, the boast of Florence, and
the Dome of St. Peter, suspended in mid air by the divine Buonarotti;
and then with increasing enthusiasm, made them recount, in strains of
honourable emulation, the great events of which they had been the
witnesses, the delight of the audience knew no bounds in the thundering
repetitions of bravo!

“Some of the pieces she composed with terminating words, suggested by
acclamation from the audience as she proceeded; other pieces were so
conceived as to introduce a particular word into every stanza, proposed
by any voice at its commencement. It was a singular and interesting
exhibition, in which a little feeble woman, during a whole evening,
could afford the most refined entertainment to a crowded theatre. Such
is the homage paid to mental superiority.”

From Florence, Mr. Peale proceeded to Pisa, and thence along the
plains or alluvial grounds between the mountains and the Mediterranean,
on the road to Genoa. At Carrara, he visited and examined the studios
and work-shops, where the various works in the marble of the celebrated
quarries are made. This marble is obtained in the ravines of the
mountains, from two to five miles distant from the town. It is generally
taken from their base, but frequently great masses are tumbled from
situations many hundred feet high, to which the labourers are an hour in
ascending, and where they work with cords around them, to secure them
against the danger of falling. The whitest marble is found only in
occasional layers, some at the base of the mountain is most beautifully
so.

On entering Genoa, the streets through which Mr. Peale passed, though
of moderate width, presented the appearance of much magnificence, being
lined with the palaces of the king and nobles. In other parts he
remarked, however, but little of the splendour which would entitle it to
be called a city of palaces; the houses are in general plain and high,
and the passages of communication wide enough only for persons on
foot.

From Genoa, Mr. Peale turned again to the east, and, crossing the
extremities of the Maritime Alps, passed through the [Pg
522]
broad and beautiful plain which spreads far and wide on
either bank of the Po. At Parma, he visited the plain and simple palace
where the Empress Maria Louisa resides, and a beautiful new theatre
contiguous to it lately built by her; he saw also the more splendid
palace once inhabited by Napoleon, which is at the extremity of the
city, surrounded by fine gardens, and contains some good frescoes and
fine old tapestry. The pictures which crowd the churches, are not,
however, in the best style, but the marbles are frequently rich and well
wrought.

Bologna presents the singular character of a city composed of
streets, lined, with a few exceptions, with arcades, many of which are
of lofty and elegant proportions, and the arches supported by stone
pillars with handsome bases and capitals, while others are of plastered
brick. These long ranges of columnated arcades, impart great elegance to
the general aspect of the place. The public square is ornamented by a
magnificent fountain, which ranks among the greatest works of John of
Bologna. In the gallery of the fine arts are some admirable pictures of
Guido, Domenichino, and the Caraccis; and the Pontifical University is
attended by a great number of students, while its halls are well filled
by an extensive library, and large collections relating to natural
science.

From Bologna Mr. Peale proceeded through Ferrara to Venice. His
description of the entrance into that celebrated city of the sea, does
not offer the glowing picture which novelists and poets have delighted
to paint, but perhaps conveys a more correct idea of the reality.

“Early the next morning we beheld the queen of the ocean, at the
extremity of the lagune, stretching across, and almost united with the
mole of fishermen’s dwellings, called Palestrina. The steeples and domes
were relieved by an extensive range of gray mountains, rising high in
the distance, upon the tops of which the snow was bright with the rising
sun. For many miles our boat was towed by another boat with oarsmen. At
length we reached some old
walls and ruinous houses, the outskirts of Venice, and passing these,
opened into a magnificent harbour, resembling a great river, lined with
good houses, and animated by a variety of shipping and boats in motion.
Crossing this great harbour, we approached a point of land embellished
by a beautiful edifice as the Porto Franco, and then opened into another
great but less spacious canal. In front, the singular but beautiful
palace of the doges, and the lesser palace of St. Mark were close by,
with a fine terrace or wharf extending along the water’s edge. As our
boat pursued its way to the post-office, down the great serpentine canal
or river, the magnificence of the palaces, and their peculiar style of
architecture, rich in bold ornaments, balconies, and sculptures, excited
us to frequent exclamations of admiration. What must have been their
beauty when Venice was in her full glory, and these marble palaces were
new or in bright repair? From many which were built of brick, the
plastering was falling off, and others, with broken windows, were
uninhabited: yet, as an evidence of renovation, since Venice has been
made a free port, we passed a large new edifice, rising from an old
foundation, and others undergoing repair.

“The Gondola, about which so much is said and sung, is a
ferry-boat, very much resembling an Indian canoe, floating lightly on
the water, and rising pointed at each end, the front being ornamented
with a large sharp-edged piece of iron, something like a battle-axe. In
the centre are cushioned seats, with an [Pg 523]arched covering of
black cloth, where two grown persons and two children may conveniently
sit, or, on an emergency, six grown persons may squeeze together, either
with open door and side windows, or closed with glass or black Venetian
blinds. The boatmen, without a rudder, and only
one oar at his right side, stands on the little deck of his narrow
stern, and bearing his weight on his oar, which seldom rises out of the
water, not only urges the gondola straight onwards, but by dextrous
movements, which are practised from infancy, turns it in all directions
with surprising facility and accuracy.

“Having reached the post-office, and assorted our baggage, we entered
one of these gondolas, and returned to the Hotel de l’Europe, which we
had passed on entering the port. I found that the use of one oar
produced an unpleasant rocking of the boat, to which those are not
subject who employ an additional boatman at the front of the canoe,
whose oar, striking simultaneously with the other, at opposite sides,
corrects the evil, and it affords the advantage of greater speed when
long excursions are to be made. We landed on marble steps rising a few
feet out of the water to a vast hall, in which the light gondola, when
only for private use, may be deposited; first divested of its covered
chamber, which two men lift off the seats and carry up.

“It had begun to rain before we entered Venice, and a mist obscured
the magnificent mountains which we had seen at sun-rise stretching
beyond and extending far over the low lands of the adjoining continent.
As it cleared up, however, the view from our elevated balcony, of
splendid edifices stretching in various directions into the broad
expanse of waters, was as delightful as it was novel.”

Mr. Peale remained in Venice, only sufficiently long to make a rapid
survey of the works of art which it contains, especially the
masterpieces of Titian, Paul Veronese, and Tintoretto, which are found
in its palaces and churches. Though the necessity of passing generally
along the canals, and the narrowness of the streets which do traverse
the city to a much greater extent than is supposed, give a gloominess to
Venice, yet the place and arcades of St. Mark offer a gay scene not
often surpassed. The leisure and excitement of a Sunday afternoon
especially, make them lively with the fashion and curiosity of the city;
among which the gay modes of Paris are less to be admired than the fine
features and rich complexions of the descendants of those men and women,
who have served as models for the glowing pencils of the masters we have
named. In the evening, the crowd may he seen still to increase, enjoying
the soft mildness of the sea atmosphere, and basking in the blaze of the
patent lamplight which attracts them round the coffee-houses; whilst a
fine band of military music, stationed in the centre of the place, with
music-books and lamps, greatly increases the popular enjoyment at the
expense of the government. The grand canal, in length two miles,
presents on each side a great number of elegant palaces, intermingled
with some ordinary buildings, all in a degree blackened and injured by
age and neglect. Some of the palaces of the ancient noble families are
in a grand style of architecture, enriched with a profusion of bold
sculpture, according to the taste of the times, and the peculiar
propensity of the Venitians to this exuberance of decoration.

From Venice Mr. Peale again turned across the peninsula. [Pg
524]
Passing through Padua, Vicenza, and Verona, he reached
Milan, where he visited the celebrated works of art, which however do
not seem to be numerous. There, however, he took leave of the arts of
Italy, and bent his way towards the Alps. Near the village of Arona, he
saw and inspected the colossal statue of San Carlo Borromeo, which he
thus describes.

“It is made of sheet copper, and stands on a
pedestal about forty feet high; and judging by a ladder which was placed
at one side, and the proportions of the persons who ascended it, I
computed the height of the statue to be about seventy feet. This agrees
with the statement of my companions, who ascended under the skirt of his
tunic, and climbed the iron bars which united the circumference of the
bishop’s garment with the brick core that rises through it. The head,
they agree, is about eight or nine feet in height, so that only a boy or
a very small man can stand in the nose. Yet it is not only a very
stupendous, but I think it rather an elegant statue. My companions were
amused with the singular animation which they found in the head of the
saint, the dark asylum of a vast number of bats, which darted past them
to escape out of a trap-door in the neck.”

Crossing the Alps by the route of the Simplon, Mr. Peale reached
Geneva, on the 29th of May, and after a short stay, set off for Paris.
The dirt and incommodiousness of most of the Italian cities, gave
increased enjoyment to his return to the noble quays of Paris, the
Boulevards, and the gardens of the Luxembourg, Tuileries, and Palais
Royal. After the course, too, which he had made through Italy, it became
an object of no little interest to examine the treasures of the Louvre.
He acknowledges that the specimens of the Italian painters there
preserved, sunk a little in his estimation as he compared them with the
best works in the galleries he had visited; but at the same time, he
derived increased pleasure from many of the productions of what may be
termed the old French school—especially from those of Poussin,
Vernet, and Subleyras.

From Paris, he crossed the channel to England. He was astonished at
the great improvements of late years in London, especially in the vast
amount of buildings and ornamented squares, erected in the place of
green fields, and the improvements effected in opening and widening many
streets. Regent street, lined with splendid shops and dwellings
like palaces, including its circular sweep of fluted cast-iron columns,
and connecting St. James’s park with the Regent’s park, encircled with
splendid mansions, he thought perhaps unequalled by any thing of the
kind he had seen. Among the artists, he found our countrymen, Leslie and
Newton, holding a distinguished rank, and he bears especial testimony,
not only to the genius and reputation, but to the urbanity and moral
worth of the former.

From London he proceeded to Portsmouth, and embarking there, reached
America after an absence of nearly two years, on the last of September,
1830.

We have already remarked, that in this volume a reader is [Pg 525]not
to look for those reflections, either on ancient or modern Italy, which
are to be found in the pages of scholars and travellers, who have
visited it to revive the memory of former studies, or to gratify
emotions which are excited by the contemplation of the fading relics of
the grandeur of Rome. Yet, we collect among the notices of Mr. Peale,
many remarks which occurred to him in the necessary attention he paid to
the antiquities that abounded on his route, from one part of the country
to another; and while he was exploring, with the curious zeal for which
he is distinguished, all parts of the various cities and towns in which
he stayed. Of these his narrative is perfectly simple. He enters into no
antiquarian discussions; he quotes no passages of familiar poets and
historians; he feels no peculiar glow from standing upon spots, or
gazing upon scenes, which would have filled to overflowing a heart
imbued with the remembrance of Virgil and of Livy. He paused in the
midst of the Forum, but not for him

“Did the still eloquent air breathe—burn with
Cicero.”

He wandered among the heights of Tivoli, but though the “præceps
Anio” and the “domus Albuneæ resonantis” were still there, they seem not
to have excited one thought of him, who not only preferred them to the
favoured cities of Juno and Minerva, but gave them as lasting a fame.
This is not in our opinion an objection to the volume of Mr. Peale; the
task of classical illustration has been well performed in the travels of
Eustace, whose book, censured as it may be, will ever be a favourite
with scholars; and it has been yet more brilliantly performed by the
wonderful genius of that man, who has given new fame in his immortal
poem to spots already consecrated by the noblest and sweetest
inspirations of the muse. As to most travellers, indeed, we had
infinitely rather that all classical allusion was omitted, than have
inflicted upon us the long string of hackneyed quotations, and the vapid
recollections of schoolboy studies, which go for the most part to make
up such portions of their journals. What we find here on the subject of
antiquities, is just what we might expect from an inquisitive man of
taste, making no pretensions to extraordinary research or information.
When at Naples, Mr. Peale of course visited the buried towns of
Herculaneum and Pompeii, and has described them with much minuteness, so
as convey a very distinct impression of their present state.

“The first house which was shown to us was the Villa of
Diomedes
, of considerable extent, comprising a variety of apartments
and gardens. We descended into his wine cellar, where there still remain
some of the jars that contained his wine. In this spacious cellar
seventeen skeletons were found, probably persons of his family who had
sought this place for safety. They were smothered and entombed, with all
their ornaments of gold upon them, by the flood of hot [Pg
526]
water and ashes, which had evidently flowed in through
the little windows where light had been admitted, and where the traces
of the fluid may still be seen.

“The houses were generally of only one story, though, in a few
instances, we found a small stair-way leading to some upper apartments.
They consist of a great many small rooms surrounding a court-yard, with
a kind of piazza all around, as a protection against the sun and rain.
In two private court-yards we were shown gaily decorated fountains, in
alcoves or niches, curiously and elaborately ornamented with mosaic and
shellwork, the shells being in perfect preservation.

“We looked into many shops, the counters of which were incrusted with
bits of marble, of various colours, fitted around the narrow mouths of
large earthen jars, which were imbedded in solid brick work, to hold oil
and wine. Sometimes there were little shelves, like steps, covered with
marble, upon which small articles were displayed close to the
window.

“The basilica, or great hall of justice, was an oblong hall of great
size, surrounded inside with noble columns, which, from their size, must
have supported a lofty roof. At the farther end was an elevated throne,
on which the judges sat; and beneath it a chamber, where three skeletons
of men were found, fastened by their legs to iron stocks. From the
public promenade we entered the tragic and the comic theatres; walked
over the stone scats, now moss-stained; looked on the shallow stage,
which allowed no scenic effect; stood in the prompter’s central niche,
and read the names of the managers, recorded in mosaic letters on the
pavement in front of the orchestra; but its best sculptural decorations
had been removed to the museum.”

In the museum at Naples are preserved all the articles taken from the
houses at Herculaneum and Pompeii, and they offer specimens of almost
every thing that, even at the present day, domestic establishments seem
to require. The visiter may here behold the charcoal form of a loaf of
bread impressed with the baker’s name; a plate of eggs, or rather egg
shells, some of which are not broken, retaining their natural whiteness;
thread nets for boiling vegetables; figs, prunes, dates, olives, and
nuts of various kinds; the golden ornaments of the ladies; vases of
glass of various colours; utensils of the clearest crystal; bronze
candelabra of singular and beautiful forms; and all the apparatus of a household,
exhibiting taste, convenience and luxury. Here, too, are seen the fresco
paintings taken from Pompeii. Those first discovered, happening to be
found in a part of the city inhabited by tradesmen, did not furnish the
most elegant specimens of the arts. The judgments which were
consequently propagated from one antiquarian critic to another, were
unfavourable to the ancient painters, who were pronounced inferior to
contemporary sculptors, and ignorant of grouping, foreshortening, and
perspective. Subsequent excavations have been made in a portion of the
city where splendid temples, halls of justice, theatres, and spacious
dwellings, gave occasion for the best employment of the arts. The result
has been the discovery not only of statues and sculpture far superior to
that formerly developed, but of fresco paintings of great excellence and
beauty. Very different from those previously collected, they decisively
indicate a high state of painting, as it must have been practised [Pg 527]in
Greece and Italy at the time the statues were executed, which yet
exhibit such perfect knowledge of the human form, and of the principles
of grouping. They prove that the ancient painters were perfectly
acquainted with the rules of perspective and foreshortening. Indeed, we
may fairly believe, from these beautiful works, done on walls, and
probably by inferior artists, that on other occasions, as in moveable
pictures, their best artists must have painted in a manner to correspond
with the high rank of their sculpture, and the extraordinary accounts
given of them by contemporary writers.

“These specimens of ancient fresco painting have
been cut out of the walls, where they were executed, with great care,
and transported here in strong cases, which serve as frames. When first
found, they are pale and dull; but, on being varnished, their colours
are brightened up to their pristine hues, and exhibit to the astonished
eye every stroke of the brush, slightly indenting the fresh mortar,
which was given by hands that perished, with the genius that directed
them, nearly eighteen hundred years ago, yet appearing as the rich and
mellow pencilling of yesterday. Most of them are taken from shops and
ordinary houses, and represent all kinds of objects, drawn with
remarkable spirit and truth. Many of the better kind served to decorate
apartments in which there were no windows, where they must have been
executed, and afterwards seen only by lamplight. But the best were found
in the porticos of open court yards, or on the walls of dining-rooms or
saloons. In looking closely into these, I was surprised to find such
spirited execution and knowledge of anatomy, combined with the most
exquisite beauty, perfection of drawing, colouring and expression of
character.”

It is, however, to the works of modern art that Mr. Peale has turned
his principal attention. Travelling himself as an artist; seeking for
the subjects of his own studies, the masterpieces wherever found;
exercising a criticism, not as the picture-dealer who sees in every
dingy canvass which bears, truly or falsely, the name of some celebrated
master, the marks of pre-eminent genius, regardless of the time or
circumstances under which it was executed—nor as the connoisseur
or virtuoso, who has to maintain or to gain reputation by the
singularity, the rashness, or the accidental correctness of his
opinions; but viewing them at once with the devotion of an artist who
had long heard of and known the works he was now to see, as the various
efforts of genius, sometimes successful, but sometimes also less happy,
and having no end to gain but the improvement of his own style, and the
gratification of his own taste, Mr. Peale must be allowed the credit of
candour, and entire freedom from affectation in the judgments he has
passed. At the same time we should not omit to notice the variety,
extent, and minuteness of his examinations. No church, gallery, or
collection, was passed by, and most of the individual pictures are
separately and carefully noticed. At Rome, especially, he admired and
copied many of the works of her immortal artists, and in the loggie of
the Vatican he gazed on their matchless productions with the enthusiasm
of a painter, but without yielding up his senses to the praise of [Pg
528]
tablets, famous only in name, and disfigured by smoke,
damp, and age. The walls of the celebrated Sistine chapel were painted
by various artists of merit in their time, but they are now much
injured, and offer little worthy of notice; but the ceiling, designed
and executed by Michael Angelo, is eminently worthy of admiration, as
exhibiting the best productions of his pencil, and as among the few
paintings of that great genius not yet destroyed by smoke, and giving
evidence of the grandeur of his invention and the boldness of his
execution. The Last Judgment, so familiar in name to every one
who reads the history of art, now excites no attention except from its
former celebrity, as it is dimly traced in the dark, through stains of
damp and mould, and blackened by smoke. Of his great rival, and in some
respects superior, the fate is scarcely different, whilst some of the
smaller works of Raphael are tolerably preserved, the celebrated
frescoes in the Pauline chapel are so much injured by time and smoke,
and the lances of soldiers who have occupied the rooms as barracks, that
they excite but little pleasure at first sight. Artists, however, of all
nations may be seen continually copying them, some mounted on
scaffolding up to the ceiling, some drawing, others painting, and all
seeking out with almost idolatrous or rather superstitious admiration,
the beauty of every head, hand, limb, and fold of drapery. They obtain
permission to copy, without difficulty from the Pope’s secretary, when
the places are not occupied, or whenever a vacancy may occur; but so
numerous are the applications for some celebrated pictures, such as the
Transfiguration, that they are frequently engaged for years in
advance by artists of various nations.

It is, indeed, by foreigners chiefly, that the galleries of Italy are
filled. The praise of superiority is no longer due to the painters of
the peninsula, and amidst the precious models which they have around
them, few have, of late years, maintained or restored the departing
glory of their country. Fresco painting, so admirably calculated to call
forth and give display to grand and spirited invention, as well as to
promote careful and beautiful drawing, by the elaborate cartoons which
it requires, has almost ceased to exist as a branch of works of design.
Mosaic is still cultivated with considerable success, but it is seldom
applied to original works. We may rejoice, however, that this happy art
will preserve to future and distant ages, accurate copies of those great
productions which have faded, and are still quickly fading, beneath the
touch of time.

In the Vatican, there are apartments especially assigned to workers
in mosaic, and placed under the directions of the historical painter,
Camucini, who is zealous in endeavouring, by means of this curious art,
and the great skill of those artists who at present execute it, to
preserve the best paintings of the great [Pg 529]masters, now
imperfectly seen in several churches, and in danger of perishing. In
these rooms may be found various workmen, some copying small pictures,
for the purpose of learning and practising the art; and others, who are
more experienced, occupied with larger works for the churches. In a
great hall is a store, arranged on shelves, of the semi-vitreous
porcelain, or coarse enamel, in cakes half an inch thick and several
inches in diameter. These cakes are of every colour that may be
required, all arranged, numbered, registered, and weighed out by an
accountant to the workmen as they are wanted to be afterwards broken
into bits. Some of the cakes consist of two or more colours, gradually
blending into each other; and there are said to be no less than sixteen
thousand assorted tints. The large pictures are wrought by being placed
nearly erect, with the one to be copied, so that the effect may be
compared from time to time; when not more than three or four feet long,
they are done on sheets of copper, stiffened with strong iron bars
within a rim of metal; but those of a greater size, especially such as
are intended for permanent fixture in churches, are executed each on one
great slab of stone, from eight to twelve inches thick, which is
excavated about an inch deep, leaving a raised border all round. The
irregular surface is then nearly filled up with a level mass of cement.
On this, when dry, the artist carefully traces the contours of his
picture; he then procures from the adjoining magazine an assortment of
tints to suit the part he purposes working at; and is furnished with a
little table, on which is fixed a chisel, with the edge upwards, in the
manner of an anvil, on which, with a hammer, he breaks the semi-vitreous
composition into small squares or other shapes, to suit the part to be
copied. Along side of this is another table, furnished with a horizontal
grindstone on a vertical shaft, made to revolve rapidly by a cord which
passes round a larger wheel, turned by a pin at its periphery. This is
moved with the left hand, while the right is employed in fashioning the
bits of stone into squares, triangles, circles, crescents, &c. of
various dimensions. The artist then chisels out of his composition,
within the lines of his drawing, any spot he chooses to fill up with his
mosaic; which, being inserted, stone by stone, with fresh cement,
enables him either to pursue the continuity of an outline, or the masses
and directions of similar tints; so that he can work at any spot, and
fill up the intervals, or take out any portion of what he has done, and
do it over again. The stones are from half an inch to three quarters in
depth, and in breadth, of all sizes, from an eighth to half an inch in
diameter. After the picture is finished, and the surface of the stones
ground down to a level, and perfectly polished, the white cement is
carefully scraped out of the interstices to a little depth. A variety of
painters’ colours, in fine powder, are then each mixed [Pg 530]with
a small portion of melted wax, and put on a palette. With these, by
means of a hot pointed iron, like a tinman’s soldering-iron, the artist
melts a little of the coloured wax to match the stones, and runs it from
the point of his iron into all the crevices—then scrapes off the
superfluous wax, and cleans the surface with spirits of turpentine.

In an art kindred to painting, but perhaps more impressive on the
imagination and the senses, that of statuary, the Italians of the
present age may bear a more honourable comparison with their
predecessors. It is true, they cannot aspire to that wonderful
excellence, which we are able to appreciate in the few fragments that
have descended to us from the great sculptors of ancient times; but,
still, the works of Canova, Thorwaldsen, and others, may be added to
those of Michael Angelo and John of Bologna, and given as evidence of
great powers of invention and a profitable study of the ancient remains.
Thorwaldsen, who, since the death of his great rival, Canova, holds the
first place as a sculptor at Rome, and whose taste and skill are known
in America by a graceful statue of Venus, executed for and in the
possession of a gentleman of Philadelphia, is remarkable for his careful
cultivation of the antique taste, and the extreme simplicity of his
statues. To become an artist, he studied at Rome, with singular
assiduity, although contending with the most distressing poverty, till
the age of thirty. His practice at the academy was to draw from the life
only those parts of the figure which chanced to please him. He modelled
in clay numerous spirited compositions, which he was obliged to destroy
for want of the funds necessary to put them into marble or even plaster
of Paris: and it was owing to the taste, judgment, and liberality of an
English gentleman, that he was at last enabled to execute his first work
in stone. In his workshop, Mr. Peale was shown a basso relieve to the
memory of his patron, who is represented supplying the lamp of genius
with oil.

Statuary, however, at the present day, appears to be an art
altogether different in its mechanical and practical details from that
of former times. The genius of Michael Angelo was frequently fatigued
before he could approach in his blocks of marble, the forms his
imagination conceived, and he often hastened to chisel out a part as a
guide in the development of the whole figure, which was sometimes
spoiled by his impatience. Now, however, a sculptor is scarcely required
to touch his marble, or even to know how to cut it. He first models the
figure in ductile clay, which is kept moist by wet cloths, during any
length of time, so that he may give it the utmost perfection of form.
This model he places in the hands of a careful mechanic, whose art is to
make a mould upon it, and to produce a facsimile in plaster of Paris,
the colour of which enables him more readily [Pg 531]to judge of its effect,
and to add to its beauty. When the model is thus perfected, the artist
may either copy it himself in stone, or employ workmen who generally do
nothing else all their lives, and who proceed without any of the
inventive enthusiasm of genius, but with wonderful mechanical accuracy.
The model is marked all over with numerous spots, which are transferred
by the compasses to the block of marble; two well defined points may
serve as a base for fixing the position of a third, and the workman
continually measures as he advances to the completion; and in this he is
expert or excellent, in proportion to the attention he has paid to his
studies in drawing, modelling, and anatomy. The accuracy with which
these workmen copy the model, is such as to induce the ablest sculptors
to trust to them their choicest works. Many of the most skilful reside
at Carrara; and, to save the expense of transporting large masses of
marble, it is becoming very customary to transmit thither the model very
carefully packed up, and to have it either accurately copied there, or
roughed out for the sculptor to complete. Thorwaldsen, whose models are
seldom remarkable for the delicacy of the finish, is so well satisfied
with the general accuracy of the work done at Carrara, that statues
which he is making for his native country, will be boxed up there and
sent to Denmark, without being once seen by him.

As a school of art, Mr. Peale seems to consider the great advantages
of Italy, as arising less from her academies, or from any direct
facilities which are there offered to the student, than from the
treasures of ancient sculpture, and the sublime works executed by the
greatest masters, which offer admirable models, and serve to infuse a
kindred spirit. In regard to the peculiar excellence exhibited in these,
he admits that nothing has more puzzled the professors and critics of
art. He thinks that, although much must have depended upon the capacity
of the artist, and his means of information, and a great deal on the
nature of his employment and encouragement, yet that almost as much
advantage has been derived from accidental circumstances. The Italians,
who enjoy a clear sky, and witness in their sunsets the most glowing
colours, are surprised that the Hollanders, living in an atmosphere of
gray mist, should have produced so many excellent colourists. It may be
from that very circumstance that they were so. A vapoury atmosphere
which reduces all colours at a distance to one hue of gray, serves, at
the same time, to render every colour which is near, not only more
distinct, but more agreeably illuminated; but, under a blue sky, the
shadows are necessarily tinged with blue, and the eye becoming
accustomed to vivid colours, too easily rests satisfied with the most
violent contrasts, both in nature and the works of art. The atmosphere
of England, in like manner, has contributed [Pg 532]to produce a good taste
in colouring, which was confirmed by the example and authority of
Reynolds, who so well understood the principles of the Flemish masters.
Giorgione, Titian, and Paul Veronese, were, it is true, Italians, and
rank at the head of good colourists; but the situation of Venice, built
in the water, essentially softens its atmosphere, and combines the
advantages of Holland and Italy. The happy genius of Corregio derived
his theory of light and colour certainly not from his visit to Rome.

Accidental circumstances have probably influenced several
distinguished artists. Vandyck happened to learn the use of a certain
brown colour from Germany, called Terra de Cassel, by which he softened
and harmonized his shadows; hence the English artists call it Vandyck
brown. Holland, enjoying the commerce of the East Indies, which
furnished her with a variety of pigments, likewise produced from her own
soil the best quality of madder, from which her chemists and
manufacturers procured the richest and most durable dyes. Van Huysum,
and other painters of that country, must have learned the use of this
and other rich pigments, the knowledge of which they could not entirely
keep to themselves, but which were probably known to Andrea del Sarto
and the good colourists of Florence. It is not improbable that the
fashion of wearing changeable silks, reflecting opposite colours in
different angles, may have influenced the old painters to represent
their blue draperies with red shadows and yellow lights, as in Raphael’s
picture of the Transfiguration: certain it is that such things
being found in the master works of the great painters, which are copied
with the most scrupulous exactness, even to the most palpable fault, the
painters of the present day in Italy pursue the same system of
colouring, with as much pertinacity as they display in their hard-earned
accuracy of outline.

Besides, the revival of the art in Italy was by fresco painting, the
peculiar nature of which required that the artist should first prepare
his compositions in finished cartoons. At all events, it was the
practice of painters, derived from each other, and passing from
generation to generation, to bestow their chief study on a cartoon
executed in black and white chalk of the full size of the intended
fresco. Many of these are preserved in the galleries and churches of
Italy, and are to be considered among the most precious relics of the
art; displaying the finest skill of the master, in composition, drawing,
light and shade, and execution. Of these original and spirited drawings,
what are called the original pictures are but copies in colour,
sometimes executed by the master himself, but more frequently by some of
his pupils.

When oil painting was introduced into Italy, and adopted by [Pg
533]
those who had practised in fresco, the habits which they
had acquired led them to practise the methods with which they were most
familiar. Their oil paintings were therefore generally painted from
drawings, and, hence, the colouring was often from imagination or
recollection, which sufficiently accounts for its deviation from nature;
although it is frequently spread out with great beauty and airiness.
Those painters who, it is agreed, excelled in colouring, almost always
painted their studies in colours, by which they had a double chance of
success, without vitiating their own powers of vision by the continual
contemplation of highly wrought colourless forms, or transcripts in
fanciful hues.

We had desired, after these observations on the subject of the arts,
which it must be confessed form the topic of chief interest in perusing
the volume of Mr. Peale, to add some remarks on the political and moral
character of the Italians, as it appears in the unaffected and
occasional observations which occur in regard to the people themselves
and their institutions. There is in general a freedom from prejudice; a
temperateness of expression; a mildness of judgment, and a clear and
natural manner of relation, which do great credit to the author, and
while they assist a reader in forming an opinion of his own, give
strength to that expressed by the writer himself. Our limits, however,
do not permit us to do so, and after the expression of this general
opinion, we must refer to the volume itself for the evidence of its
correctness. In concluding, we may respond to the sentiment of Mr.
Peale, when on leaving Milan, he bade farewell to the arts of Italy.

“An Italian, not exempted from bigotry, discovered
a new world for the emancipation of man. May America in patronizing the
arts, receive them as the offspring of enlightened Greece, transmitted
through Italy, where their miraculous powers were nourished in the
bondage of mind. Let them in turn be emancipated, and their persuasive
and fascinating language be exalted to the noblest purposes, and be made
instrumental to social happiness and national glory!”


[Pg 534]

[Pg 535]

INDEX.

A B C D E F G H I J K L
M N O P R S T U V W Y Z

A.

  • Achilles,
    • illustration of the effects of ennui in,
      38
      .
  • Acosta,
    • commendation of tobacco, by, 149.
  • Address of Convention of Teachers and Friends of Education at
    Utica, &c.,

    • notice of, 283.
  • Alibert, J. L.,
    • his Physiology of the Passions, &c., chap. XI. Ennui, reviewed,

      33
      , &c. See Ennui.
  • Aristotle,
    • a prey to Ennui,
      43
      .
  • Augustus II. and III., Kings of Poland,
    • reigns of, 469.
  • Auto-biography of Thieves, 116, &c.
    • tests of truth in marvellous narratives, 117, 118
    • first commitment to prison of James Hardy Vaux, Thomas Ward, and
      Vidocq, with the effect of placing young prisoners with old convicts, 119, 120
    • Vaux’s account of a prison-ship, 121
    • necessity of solitary confinement, ib.
    • evils from the slow operation of the law, 122
    • Ward’s account of his first act of dishonesty, 123
    • his escape after horse stealing, 124
    • adventure of Vaux with Mr. Bilger, a jeweller, 126-128
    • robbery by Beaumont of the police of Paris, 128, 129
    • criminals the best police officers, 129
    • circumstances that led Vidocq to become a police officer, 130
    • his first capture, 131
    • arrest of a receiver of stolen property, 132
    • hazard police officers run, exhibited in the arrest of Fossard by
      Vidocq, 132, 133.

B.

  • Bacon, Lord,
    • commendation of tobacco, by, 149.
  • Balboa, Vasco Nuñez de,
    • his adventures in South America, 176-183
    • his execution, 184.
  • Baltimore, Lord,
    • his grant of Maryland, &c., 483,
      &c. See Maryland.
  • Bank of the United States,
    • report of the Committee of Ways and Means on, and the President’s
      Message in relation to, 246, &c.
    • President Jackson’s course in relation to, 247, 248
    • propositions involved in his Message examined, 249, &c.
    • on the constitutionality of, 249-258
    • whether the influence it exercises is dangerous, 258-261
    • whether it creates discontent with the people, and collision with
      the states, 261-266
    • whether the proposed bank is free from these objections, 266-282.
  • Bastides, Rodrigo de,
    • his voyage to America, 169.
  • Bates, Professor,
    • in the New-York Convention for founding a University, 285-287.
  • Beaumont, M. E. de,
    • his researches on the geological age of mountains, 109-112.
  • Beaumont, Elie de, and M. Dufrenoy,
    • their
      Voyage Metallurgique en Angleterre, notice of, 352. See Iron.
  • Bible, the,
    • oration on the advantages of,
      as a school-book, &c., by Thomas S. Grimké, notice of, 283.
  • Bolingbroke, Lord,
  • Bollman, Dr. Erick,
    • his arrest by General
      Wilkinson for a participation in Burr’s plot, 216.
  • Boré, Etienne,
    • his cultivation of the
      sugar cane, 198.
  • Bruce, the traveller,
    • a prey to ennui at
      the fountain head of the Nile,
      38
      .
  • Brun, Malte,
    • his Universal Geography,
      82
      , &c.
    • his arrangement of mountains into connected systems,
      90
      .
  • Bonaparte, N.,
    • remarkable instance of ennui in,
      48
      .
  • Burke, Edmund,
  • Burr, Aaron,
    • proceedings at New-Orleans in
      relation to his plot, 216-218.
  • Byron, Lord,
    • his description of ennui,
      34
      .

C.[Pg 536]

  • Calvert, Cecilius,
    • his part in the settlement of Maryland, 490.
  • Calvert, Leonard,
    • colony of Maryland established by, 490.
  • Carondelet, Baron de,
    • his miscalculations respecting the western people of the United
      States, 211.
  • Casimir the Great, King of Poland,
    • events in the reign of, 461, &c. See Poland.
  • Casimir, John,
    • his resignation of the Polish crown, 467.
  • Catacombs of Santa Maria della Vita, 515.
  • Catechism of Education, by William Lyon Mackenzie,
    • notice of, 283.
  • Catharine of Russia,
    • her part in the dismemberment of Poland, 476, &c.
  • Chamberet, M.,
    • his opinion of the use of tobacco, 152.
  • Champollion, Jr. M.,
    • his System of Egyptian Hieroglyphics, by J. G. H. Greppo, translated
      by Isaac Stuart, reviewed, 339, &c. See
      Hieroglyphic System.
  • China,
    • residence in, &c.,
      52
      . See Dobell, Peter, his Travels.
  • Cibber, Colley,
    • epigram on, by Pope, and by self, 127, note.
  • Clarke, Dr. Adam,
    • a dissertation on the use and abuse of tobacco, by, 136, &c.
    • anecdote of, 155.
  • Clayborne, William,
    • his disturbances in the early settlement of Maryland, 486
    • Clayborne and Ingle’s rebellion, 491.
  • College-Instruction and Discipline, 283, &c.
    • education must be suited to the country, 284
    • universities in France, Italy, Great Britain, Germany, Russia, and
      the United States, ib.
    • proceedings of a Convention of literary and scientific gentlemen at
      New-York, 285, &c.
    • organization of Harvard and other colleges, 287
    • appointment of professors, ib.
    • Mr. Sparks on this subject, 288
    • their remuneration, 289, 290
    • Dr. Leiber’s opinion, 290
    • powers of the president, 291
    • University of Virginia, 292
    • salutary rules the best safeguards of universities, 293
    • existing and proposed modes of punishment, 294-296
    • should one university refuse admission to students dismissed from
      another? 297
    • gaming and drinking, 298
    • regulations in regard to students’ funds, 299, 300
    • uniform dress, &c., 301
    • practical instruction, 301, 302,
    • age of admission, and period and plan of study, 303-306
    • ought students to be confined to their classes, or allowed to
      receive degrees when found prepared on examination? 306
    • should the title Bachelor of Arts be retained? 307
    • study of languages and mathematics, 307, 308
    • mode of conveying instruction, 309, 313
    • necessity of a department of English language, 313.
  • Columbus, C.,
    • Voyages and Discoveries of the Companions of, 163. See Irving, Washington.
  • Cosa, Juan de la,
    • his participation in the discoveries of South America, 166, &c.
  • Croly, Rev. George, A. M.,
    • his Life of George the Fourth, reviewed, 314, &c. See George IV.
  • Cullen, Dr.,
    • his opinion on the use of tobacco, 153.
  • Culman, F. I.,
    • his translation of Karsten’s Manuel de la Metallurgie de fer, notice
      of, 352, &c. See Iron.

D.

  • Davila, Pedro Arias,
    • his execution of Vasco Nuñez de Balboa,
      whom he superseded, 184.
  • Dobell, Peter,
    • his Travels in Kamtchatka and Siberia, with a narrative of a
      residence in China, reviewed,
      52
      , &c.
    • his facilities for acquiring information,
      52
    • venality of the Chinese,
      53
    • opium smuggling,
      54
    • robbery of the government,
      54
      ,
      55
    • pirates, and fate of their leader Apo-Tsy,
      55
    • salt trade,
      ib.
    • unblushing venality of the mandarins,
      56
      ,
      57
    • population of China overrated,
      57
    • productions of the climate, tea,
      58
      ,
      59
    • mechanic arts,
      59
    • character, mode of living, temperature, fops, amusements,
      60
      ,
      61
    • dinners of ceremony,
      62
    • religion,
      62
      ,
      63
    • Mr. Dobell’s arrival at St. Peter’s and St. Paul’s,
      63
    • bay of Avatcha, and embankments on the river,
      ib.
    • the Kamtchatdales poor but hospitable,
      64
    • their dwellings,
      65
    • hospitable reception at the cottage of Toyune of Sherrom,
      66
    • volcano of Klootchefsky,
      ib.
    • town of Nijna Kamtchatsk,
      ib.
    • winter store of a Kamtchadale family,
      67
    • perilous adventure of the Toyune of Malka,
      ib.
      [Pg 537]
    • sagacity, perseverance, and swiftness, of the Kamtchatdale dogs,
      69
    • in the country of the Tongusees, the author deserted by the native
      guides, and his dangerous adventures,
      70-72
    • town of Ochotsk,
      72
      ,
      73
    • journey thence to Yakutsk,
      73
    • dress and appearance of the Yakuts and Tongusees,
      74
    • water communications of Siberia,
      ib.
    • colony of banished persons on the banks of the river Aldan,
      75
    • the Yakuts a pastoral people,
      76
    • arrival at Yakutsk,
      ib.
    • Siberian wedding,
      77
    • town of Olekma,
      78
    • Irkutsk the capital of eastern Siberia,
      79
    • journey thence to St. Petersburg,
      80
      , &c.
    • disinterestedness of the Siberians,
      ib.
    • Tomsk,
      ib.
    • Tobolsk,
      81
      .
  • Dufrenoy, MM. and Elie de Beaumont,
    • their Voyage Metallurgique en Angleterre, notice of, 352, &c. See Iron.
  • Dyspepsia, Method of Curing, by O. Halsted,

E.

  • Egyptian Hieroglyphics. See Hieroglyphic System, 339, &c.
  • Encisor, Martin Fernandez de,
    • his participation in the early adventures in South America, 171, &c.
  • Ennui,
    • J. L. Alibert’s chapter on, in his Physiology of the Passions,
      reviewed,
      33
      , &c.
    • character of the work,
      ib.
    • Lord Byron’s description of ennui,
      34
    • literature of the day transient, with a feverish excitement for
      novelty,
      34
      ,
      35
    • nature of ennui,
      36
    • Solomon’s delineation of it,
      37
    • illustration in Achilles,
      38
    • in Bruce the traveller,
      38
    • in Vergniaud,
      ib.
    • ennui conjured up the ghost of Cæsar to Brutus on the eve of the
      battle of Phillippi,
      39
    • its extensive influence,
      40
    • its operation to be traced in the sanguinary amusements of ancient
      Rome,
      41
    • its power over Jean Jacques Rousseau,
      42
    • exemplified in Spinoza,
      43
    • Aristotle,
      ib.
    • King Saul,
      45
    • causes the slander of the gossips,
      ib.
    • influence on fashion,
      46
    • in the haunts of business,
      ib.
    • peoples the mad house, and inhabits jails,
      ib.
    • Pyrrhus an ennuyé,
      47
    • Napoleon,
      48
    • Leibnitz,
      ib.
    • Lord Bolingbroke,
      49
      ,
      50
    • cure for it,
      51
      .
  • Erskine, Lord,
  • Europe and America, &c.,
    • translated from the German of Dr. C. F. Von Schmidt-Phiseldek, by
      Joseph Owen, reviewed, 398, &c.
    • features which distinguish the American from other revolutions, 399
    • representations made to England in 1635 of disloyalty in
      Massachusetts, 400
    • deductions from the North American revolution in regard to the
      south, 401
    • the old governments of Europe, 401-403
    • effects of the American revolution upon Europe, 404, 405
    • discontents now agitating Europe, 406-408
    • causes that will produce emigration to America, 408, 409
    • Europe cannot do without America, 409, 410
    • in seeking new markets for her surplus manufactures, North America
      will be an enterprising rival, 411
    • the old world destined to receive its impulses in future from the
      new, 412
    • consideration of events which have occurred in Europe since Von Schmidt-Phiseldek’s work was
      published, 413, &c.
    • situation of France, 415
    • England, 415, 416
    • Holland, Belgium, Italy, Germany, Russia, and Prussia, 417
    • South American states, 418.

F.

  • Fendall, Josias,
    • trouble to the colony of Maryland from, 492,
      493.
  • Fowler, Dr.,
    • his opinion of the medicinal virtue of tobacco, 153.
  • Fox, Charles,
  • France in 1829-30, by Lady Morgan,
    • reviewed. See Morgan, Lady, 1
      , &c.
  • Francis, Sir Philip,
    • his claim to the authorship of Junius, 325.
  • Franklin, Dr.,
    • anecdote of, 163.

G.

  • Gallatin, Albert,
    • in the Convention at New-York, to form a University, 285-305.
  • George IV., Life of, &c., by the Rev. George Croly, A.
    M.,

    • reviewed, 314, &c.
    • marriage to Sophia Caroline, 315
    • character of George III., 316
    • private education of the Prince of Wales, 317
    • income allowed him, ib.
    • attempts to palliate his vices, 318-320
    • his debts and expenditures, 321
    • [Pg
      538]
      Pitt, Fox, and Sheridan, 322-324
    • Burke and Sheridan, 324, 325
    • investigation of the authorship of Junius, Sir Philip Francis,
      Edmund Burke, Horne Tooke, Wilkes, Lord George Germaine, Dunning, Gerard
      Hamilton, &c., 325-327
    • jeux d’esprit of the Prince, 328
    • his marriage, Mrs. Fitzherbert, 329
    • ascends the throne as regent, 330
    • his last sickness and death, 330, 331
    • description of an election for members of Parliament, 332-334
    • how republicans can usefully study the characters of kings and
      legitimate nobility, 335-338.
  • George III.,
    • character of, 316.
  • Germaine, Lord George,
    • his claim to the authorship of Junius, 326.
  • Greppo, J. G. H., Vicar General of Belley,
    • his Essay on the Hieroglyphic System of M. Champollion,
      Jr., reviewed, 339, &c. See Hieroglyphic
      System
      .
  • Grimké, Thomas S.,
    • his oration before the Connecticut Alpha of the ΦΒΚ
      Society, notice of, 283-302.
  • Guerra, Christoval,
    • his adventure to South America, 168.

H.

  • Hall, Judge Dominick A.,
    • his arrest and imprisonment by General Jackson, 226-232.
  • Halsted, O.,
    • his Method of curing Dyspepsia, reviewed, 233-246.
  • Hamilton, Gerard,
    • his claim to the authorship of Junius, 326.
  • Hayne, General,
    • his attack in Congress on the New-England States, and the discussion
      that ensued, 448-455.
  • Hearne,
    • (the traveller) his commendation of tobacco, 153.
  • Herculaneum and Pompeii,
  • Hieroglyphic System of Champollion, Jun.,
    • Essay on, by J. G. H. Greppo, translated by Isaac Stuart, reviewed,
      339, &c.
    • cause of Champollion’s researches, 340
    • clew afforded by the Rosetta stone, confirmed by a monument found in
      the island of Philæ, 341, 342
    • signs common to both, 342, 343
    • advantages of his discoveries in the prosecution of sacred
      criticism, 344
    • plan of the author’s essay, ib.
    • did Pharaoh perish in the Red Sea? contrary opinions of the author
      and Professor Stuart on, 345, 346
    • city of Ramses, where situated? 347
    • a manuscript 200 years older than the Pentateuch, 349
    • reason for the silence of the Scripture in regard to Sesostris, ib.
    • concluding remarks of the author, 350.
  • Hood, Zachariah,
    • the distributer of royal stamps, in Annapolis, case of, 507, 508.
  • Howell, (author of Familiar Letters),
    • his commendation of tobacco, 149.

I.

  • Ingle, Richard,
    • his part in the Clayborne and Ingle rebellion, 491.
  • Iron,
    • importance of, 352
    • its use by the Egyptians in the time of Moses, 354
    • its importance gathered from Homer; used by Lycurgus for currency;
      in Solomon’s temple, 354
    • art of welding; mines of Elba; steel; cast iron, 355
    • appearances of good and bad iron, 356
    • impurities in ores, 356, 357
    • grey and white cast iron, 358
    • theory of Karsten on, 359
    • reduction of ores, 361, 362
    • blooming, 363
    • stuckoffen, 364
    • flossoffen, 365
    • blast furnaces 365-368
    • casting; pig iron, 368
    • causes of whiteness, 369
    • fuel adapted to different kinds of castings, 370, 371
    • early preparation of iron in the British American provinces, and
      attempt to introduce into England, 372
    • refining, 373-375
    • cost of manufacturing iron in England, 375,
      376
    • duty on iron in this country; its manufacture by charcoal; stone
      coal; capital required for a profitable competition, 377-380
    • how far government ought to afford protection, 385.
  • Irving, Washington,
    • his Voyages and Discoveries of the Companions of Columbus, reviewed,
      163-186
    • why this book is not so interesting as the Life of Columbus, 164
    • voyage of discovery of Alonzo de Ojeda, associated with Juan de la
      Cosa and Amerigo Vespucci, 165
    • arrival on the coast of Surinam, 166
    • gives the name which it still bears to the town of Venezuela, 167
    • reception at Coquibacoa, ib.
    • [Pg
      539]
      profitable voyage of Pedro Alonzo Niño and Christoval
      Guerra, 168
    • expedition of Vincente Yañez Pinzon, ib.
    • of Diego de Lepe, 169
    • of Rodrigo de Bastides, assisted by Juan de la Cosa, ib.
    • Ojeda and Diego de Nicuesa receive contiguous grants of territory,
      and quarrel about the boundary, 170
    • Ojeda relieved from embarrassment by Martin Fernandez de Enciso, and
      sails, having on board Francisco Pizarro, 171
    • disasters among the savages, and Ojeda’s reconciliation with
      Nicuesa, 173
    • founds St. Sebastian; distress of the colony, ib.
    • sails for St. Domingo with Bernardo de Talavera, 174
    • shipwreck, ib.
    • death, 175
    • Vasco Nuñez de Balboa proceeds with Enciso to Ojeda’s new
      settlement, 176
    • events there, 177
    • fate of Nicuesa, ib.
    • Enciso superseded by Vasco Nuñez, 171
    • his adventures; discovery of the Pacific Ocean, and return to
      Darien, 178-181
    • Pedro Arias Davila supersedes Vasco Nuñez and has him executed, 181-184
    • Valdivia, and Juan Ponce de Leon, 184
    • merits of the work, 185.
  • Italy,
    • Notes on, by Rembrandt Peale, reviewed, 512,
      &c.
    • the author’s long-cherished desire to visit Italy repeatedly
      frustrated, 513
    • arrival in the Bay of Naples, 514
    • catacombs of Santa Maria della Vita, 515
    • Rome, 516
    • appearance, &c. of the inhabitants, 517
    • Tivoli, Tuscany, Florence, 518, 519
    • the celebrated improvisatrice Rosa Taddei, 520-521
    • Pisa, Carrara, Genoa, 521
    • Parma, Bologna, entrance into Venice, 522,
      523
    • statue of San Carlo Borromeo, 524
    • return to France; and home through England, 524, 525
    • ruins of Herculaneum and Pompeii, 525-527
    • workers in Mosaic, 529
    • statuary, 530
    • colouring of different artists, 531, 532.

J.

  • Jackson, Gen. Andrew,
    • his proceedings at New-Orleans, before, during, and after the
      battle, 218-231
    • his message to Congress in relation to the Bank of the United
      States, 246-282.
  • Jagellon,
    • weds Hedwiga, daughter of Lewis of Hungary, and ascends the Polish
      throne, 462, &c.
  • James I.,
    • his counterblast to tobacco, 136-140
    • his dinner for the devil, 145
    • argument in his counterblast, 148.
  • Johnson, Mr.,
    • his letter on the culture of
      the sugar cane, 199-201.
  • Journal of proceedings of Literary and Scientific gentleman
    at New-York,

    • notice of, 283,
      &c.

K.

  • Kamtchatka,
    • Travels in,
      52
      , &c. See Dobell, Peter.
  • Karsten, C. I. B.,
    • his manuel de la Metallurgie de fer, translated from the German by
      F. I. Culman, notice of, 352, &c. See
      Iron.
  • Klootchefsky,
    • volcano of,
      66
      .
  • Koskiusko, count,
    • his efforts for Polish liberty, 476, &c.
      See Poland.

L.

  • Ladislaus I.,
    • crowned king of Poland, 461
    • Ladislaus IV., 466.
  • Leib, James R., A. M.,
    • Lectures on Scientific education by, notice of, 283.
  • Leiber, Dr.,
    • his part in the Convention for forming a University, 290.
  • Leibnitz, Professor,
    • a victim to ennui,
      49
      .
  • Lepe, Diego de,
    • his voyage of discovery, 169.
  • Lewis, king of Hungary,
    • made king of Poland, 462.
  • Livingston, Mr.,
    • his part in the cession of Louisiana to the United States, 214.
  • Louallier, Mr.,
    • his arrest by General Jackson, 225.
  • Louisiana, History of, by François-Xavier Martin,
    • reviewed, 186, &c.
    • Barbé Marbois’s history, 187
    • character of Judge Martin, 188
    • odd combinations in his work, 189
    • account of an earthquake in Canada, 190
    • Penn’s purchase from the Indians, 191
    • government paper money, 191, 192
    • Marbois on this subject, 192
    • Louisiana in 1713, 193
    • introduction of negroes from Africa, 194
    • a female adventurer, 195
    • progress of New-Orleans, 195, 196
    • [Pg
      540]
      aggression on the Indians and their revenge, 197
    • introduction of the sugar cane, and its progress, 197, &c.
    • Mr. Johnson’s letter on, 199-201
    • paternal affection in an Indian, 202
    • removal of the Arcadians, 203
    • shipping off obnoxious characters, 204
    • cession to Spain of a portion of Louisiana, ib.
    • Don Ulloa arrives to take possession, but refrains from formally
      doing so, 204
    • followed by Don Alexander O’Reilly, who commits many atrocities, 205-208
    • interest felt in Louisiana in our struggle for independence, 208
    • instance of American gallantry and enterprise, ib.
    • the foundation of commercial intercourse laid with the United States
      by General Wilkinson, 209
    • Don Martin Navarro’s sagacious communication to the king, 210
    • Baron de Carondelet’s miscalculations respecting the western people,
      211
    • retrocession of the territory to France, 212, 213
    • cession to the United States, 214, 215
    • Burr’s plot, and General Wilkinson’s proceedings, 216-218
    • General Jackson’s preparations for the defence of New-Orleans, 218, 219
    • efforts to suspend the writ of habeas corpus, 220
    • battle of Orleans and subsequent proceedings of Jackson, 221-232
    • banishing the French from New-Orleans, 224
    • arrest of Louallier, 225
    • of Judge Hall, 226, 227
    • of Hollander, 228
    • Jackson summoned before Judge Hall, 230
    • his sentence, 231.

M.

  • Mackenzie, Wm. Lyon,
    • his catechism of education, notice of, 283.
  • M’Mahon, John V. L.,
    • his Historical View of Maryland, &c. reviewed, 483, &c. See Maryland.
  • Madison, James,
    • his opinion upon the tariff and nullification, 453.
  • Maizeaux, M. de,
    • his translation of Latin verses in praise of tobacco, 143.
  • Marbois, Barbé,
    • his History of Louisiana, notice of, 186, &c. See Louisiana.
  • Martin, François-Xavier,
    • his History of Louisiana, reviewed, 186, &c. See Louisiana.
  • Maryland, Historical View of the Government of, by John V. L.
    M’Mahon,

    • reviewed, 483, &c.
    • occasional remarks, 483-485
    • boundaries of Lord Baltimore’s grant, 486
    • his contest with William Clayborne, ib.
    • with William Penn, ib.
    • settlement of
      boundaries to the north, 488
    • controversies in regard to the west, 489, 490
    • first settlement under Calvert, 490
    • Clayborne and Ingle’s rebellion, 491
    • contest with the Parliament, ib.
    • governor Stone defeated, 492
    • troubles from Josiah Fendall, 492, 493
    • condition of the colonies in 1687, 494, 495
    • formation of Protestant Association, which transmits to the king
      charges against the provincial government, who dispossesses the
      proprietary and appoints Sir Lionel Copley royal governor, 496
    • seat of government changed, 497
    • Annapolis, 498
    • Governor Nicholson, 499
    • view of the colonies from 1689 to 1710, 500
    • persecution of Catholics, 501
    • internal dissensions, 501, 502
    • resources of Maryland at the commencement of the revolution, 503
    • resistance of colonies to aggressions, 504
    • case of Zachariah Hood, the distributer of stamps in Annapolis, 507, 508
    • proceedings of Assembly, 508
    • stamp paper retained on board the vessel, 509
    • proceeding in relation to the tea, 511.
  • Matthews, Rev. Dr.,
    • notice of his address to the convention at New-York, 285.
  • Memorial of the workers in iron of Philadelphia,
    • notice of, 352, &c.
  • Monroe, James,
    • his part in the cession of Louisiana to the United States, 214.
  • Morgan, Lady,
    • her France in 1829-30, reviewed, 1
      , &c.
    • preparations for a tour, 2
    • Lady Morgan’s parentage, 3
    • marriage, 4
    • book-making propensity, 4
      , 5
    • pernicious tendency of her works, 5
    • reasons for severity in regard to her, 6
    • her egotism, 7
    • arrival at Calais, 8
    • the Diligence, and difference between English and French stages, 9
      -11
    • arrival at Paris,
      12
    • her horror at the prevalence of Anglomania in France,
      13-15
    • travelling in France,
      16
    • want of magnificent country seats,
      ib.
    • number of mendicants,
      17
    • facility of making acquaintance with fellow-travellers,
      ib.
    • Lady Morgan’s deductions as sapient as those of the Hon. Frederick
      de Roos,
      18
    • [Pg
      541]
      her want of decorum,
      19
    • vanity,
      20
    • becomes the subject of the Parisians propensity to ridicule,
      22
    • notice of her works in the Edinburgh and Quarterly Review,
      24
    • romanticism and classicism in Paris,
      26
    • interview with a romanticist,
      27
      ,
      28
    • with a classicist,
      29
    • Othello at the Theâtre Français,
      ib.
    • Lady Morgan’s plagiarism,
      30
      ,
      31
      .
  • Murray, Dr.,
    • his opinion of the use of tobacco, 154.

N.

  • Navarro, Don Martin,
    • his communication to the King of Spain in regard to the American
      colonies, 210.
  • Nicholson, Governor Francis,
    • his part in the colonial government of Maryland, 499, 500.
  • Nicot, John,
    • tobacco introduced into France by, 144.
  • Nicuesa, Diego de,
    • his grant of territory and adventures in South America, 170, &c.
  • Niño, Pedro Alonzo,
    • his adventure to America, 168.
  • Nyssens, Abbot,
    • his belief that the devil first introduced tobacco into Europe, 142.

O.

  • Ochotsk,
  • Ojeda, Alonzo de,
  • Olekma, town of,
  • O’Reilly, Don Alexander,
    • his arrival at New-Orleans to take possession for Spain, and his
      atrocities, 205-208.
  • Owen, Joseph,
    • his translation of Von Schmidt-Phiseldek’s Europe and America,
      reviewed. See Europe and America.

P.

  • Paper currency,
  • Peale, Rembrandt,
    • his Notes on Italy, reviewed, 486, &c.
      See Italy.
  • Penn, William,
    • his difficulties in settling the boundary line with Maryland, 486, 487.
  • Physical Geography,
    82

    • density of the earth,
      83
    • polar and equatorial
      diameters,
      ib.
    • sources of heat,
      84
      ,
      85
    • equilibrium of the particles of the earth,
      85
      ,
      86
    • heat at the centre,
      86
    • consolidation of the surface of the earth,
      87
    • present appearance of its surface,
      88
    • chain of mountains,
      89
    • Malte Brun’s arrangement of mountains into connected systems,
      90
    • basins, rivers, and streams,
      91
    • traces of aqueous action,
      92
    • diluvial deposits,
      93
    • stratified rocks,
      94
    • third, fourth, and fifth orders of rocks,
      95
    • organic remains,
      96-102
    • different level of the same rocks, 103
    • volcanoes, 104-109
    • trap rocks, 105
    • earthquakes, 107-109
    • M. E. De Beaumont’s researches into the age of mountains, 109-112.
  • Physiology of the Passions, by J. L. Alibert,
  • Pinzon, Vincente Yañez,
    • his voyages of discovery, 168.
  • Pitt, Prime Minister,
    • his followers and opponents, 322-325.
  • Pizarro, Francisco,
    • his early adventures in America, 171, &c.
  • Poland,
    • impending fate of, 457, 458
    • constitution granted it by Alexander, 458
    • its former importance, 459
    • early history, 460
    • Ladislaus crowned king, 461
    • events in the reign of Casimir the Great, ib.
    • Lewis, king of Hungary; his daughter Hedwiga, weds Jagellon, whose
      family filled the throne through seven reigns, 462
    • increasing power of the nobles, 463
    • with Sigismund Augustus the reign of the Jagellons ceased, and the
      succession became elective, 464
    • Henry of Anjou elected king; succeeded by Stephen Bathory, duke of
      Transylvania, 465
    • Sigismund III. declared king, in whose reign the dismemberment and
      woes of Poland began, 466
    • succeeded by Ladislaus IV., ib.
    • followed by John Casimir, who, after predicting the fate of the
      empire, resigned the crown, 467
    • Michael Wisniowiecki chosen king; on his death, John Sobieski
      succeeded, 468
    • reigns of Augustus II. and III., 469
    • Stanislaus Poniatowski, the last Polish king; events in his reign
      that led to the dismemberment of Poland, 470-472
    • assembling of the revolutionary diet at Warsaw, 473
    • alliance with Prussia; second diet; constitution promulgated, 474
    • Catharine invades Poland, and shares with Prussia a portion of its
      territory, 476
    • [Pg
      542]
      final effort of the patriots under Koskiusko, 477
    • battle of Praga, and third division of Poland; abdication of
      Stanislaus, 478
    • summary of events in Polish history, 479-482.
  • Prussia,
    • alliance of with Poland, 474
    • share in its partition, 476.
  • Pyrrhus,
    • an ennuyé,
      47
      .

R.

  • Ralegh, Sir Walter,
  • Rome,
    • appearance of the inhabitants of, &c. 516, 517.
  • Rousseau, Jean Jacques,
    • a prey to ennui,
      42
      .
  • Rulhiere, M. his Histoire de l’Anarchie de Pologne,
    • notice of, 457, &c. See
      Poland.
  • Rush, Dr. Benjamin,
    • his observations upon the influence of the habitual use of tobacco,
      &c. 136, &c.
  • Russia,
    • the part of, in the dismemberment of Poland, 457, &c. See Poland.

S.

  • San Carlo Borromeo,
    • statue of, 524.
  • Santa Maria della Vita,
    • catacombs of, 515.
  • Sartorius, George,
    • his continuation of Spittler’s Polish revolution, notice of, 457, &c.
  • Sheridan, R. B.,
  • Siamese Twins, The,
    • a Satirical Tale by the author of Pelham, reviewed, 385, &c.
    • occasional remarks, 386-391
    • outline of the poem, with remarks, 392-397.
  • Siberia,
    • Travels in,
      52
      , etc. See Dobell, Peter, his Travels.
  • Sigismund Augustus,
    • the last of the Jagellon family on the throne of Poland, 464.
  • Sigismund III.,
    • woes to Poland in the reign of, 466.
  • Sobieski, John, king of Poland,
  • Spanish Voyages of Discovery,
    • by Washington Irving, reviewed, 163, &c. See Irving, Washington.
  • Sparks, Mr.,
    • in the Convention at New York on the subject of an University, 286-288-309.
  • Spinoza,
    • his resources against ennui,
      43
      .
  • Spittler’s Polish revolution,
    • with a continuation by George Sartorius, notice of, 457.
  • Stanislaus (Poniatowski) king of Poland,
    • reign of, 470, &c. See
      Poland.
  • Steel,
    • preparation of, &c. See Iron, 352-385.
  • Stone, Governor,
    • his defeat in an insurrection in the colony of Maryland, 492.
  • Stuart, Isaac,
    • his translation of Greppo’s Hieroglyphic System of Champollion, Jr.,
      reviewed, 339, &c. See Hieroglyphic
      System
      .
  • Stuart, Professor,
    • remarks of, on the perishing of Pharaoh in the Red Sea, 346.
  • Sugar-cane,
    • introduction and culture of in Louisiana, 197-201.
  • Sylvester, Joseph,
    • his tobacco battered, notice of, 140.

T.

  • Taddei, Rosa,
    • celebrated improvisatrice, description of, 520, 521.
  • Talavera, Bernardo de,
    • his adventure to South America, 174.
  • Thieves,
    • auto-biography of, 116, &c.
  • Thompson, Dr. A. T.,
    • his notices relative to tobacco, &c., 136, &c.
  • Thorius, Dr. Raphael,
    • his Latin poem in praise of tobacco, 137
    • anecdote of, 138.
  • Tobacco, 136
    • whimsical subjects selected by authors, ib.
    • Latin poem in praise of tobacco, by Dr. Raphael Thorius, 137
    • anecdote of him, 138
    • Mr. Lambe’s Farewell to Tobacco, 139
    • James I., his Counterblast to Tobacco, 140
    • origin of, ib.
    • Joseph Sylvester’s tobacco battered, ib.
    • Indian superstition respecting, 141
    • different names of the weed, 141, 142
    • Abbot Nyssen’s belief that the devil first introduced it into
      Europe, 142
    • competitors for that honour, 143
    • Latin verses in its praise, with English translation by M. de
      Maizeaux, ib.
    • its introduction into France by John Nicot, 144
    • disputes respecting its origin, ib.
    • King James’s dinner for the devil, 145
    • remarks on Sir Walter Ralegh, 145-147
    • young women imported for wives into Virginia, and paid for in
      tobacco, 147
    • prohibitions of it in Europe, ib.
    • [Pg
      543]
      King James’s arguments in his Counterblast, 148
    • commendations of it by Acosta, Lord Bacon and Howell, 149
    • unprofitableness of its culture, 150
    • its production and consumption in France, 151
    • opinion of Dr. Rush, Mr. Chamberet, 152
    • Dr. Walsh, Hearne, Willis, Dr. Cullen, and Dr. Fowler, 153
    • Dr. Murray, 154
    • anecdote respecting it, related by Dr. Clarke, 155
    • its tendency to promote intemperance, 156
    • snuff-taking, 156-159
    • smoking, 160
    • chewing, 161
    • anecdote of Franklin, 163.
  • Tobolsk,
  • Tomsk,
  • Tooke, Horne,
    • his claim to the authorship of Junius, 325.

U.

  • Ulloa, Don,
    • his arrival at New Orleans to take possession for Spain of
      Louisiana, and withdrawal without exhibiting his powers, 205.

V.

  • Vaux, James Hardy,
    • Memoirs of, 116, &c. See Auto-biography of Thieves.
  • Vespucci, Amerigo,
    • his participation in the discoveries of South America, 165, &c.
  • Vidocq,
    • principal agent of the French police, memoirs of, 116, &c. See Auto-biography of Thieves.
  • Von Schmidt-Phiseldek, Dr. C. F.,
    • his Europe and America, &c. reviewed. See Europe and
      America
      .

W.

  • Walsh, Dr.,
    • his testimony to the use of tobacco, 152.
  • Ward, Thomas,
    • (the American Trenck) memoirs of, 116, &c. See Auto-biography of Thieves.
  • Webster, Daniel,
    • his Speeches and Forensic Arguments, reviewed, 420, &c.
    • nationality of his addresses, 420
    • his birth, &c., 421
    • remarks on the support of schools, 422
    • graduates at Dartmouth college, studies the law; advantages derived
      from intercourse with Messrs. Thompson, Gore, Judge Smith, Senator
      Mason, 423-424
    • elected to Congress in 1812, 425
    • opinion upon a navy, 425
    • opposition to paper-bank proposition of 1814, 426-430
    • or receiving depreciated currency for government debts, 430, 431
    • his removal from Portsmouth to Boston, 431
    • counsel in the case of Dartmouth college, 432-434
    • Gibson vs. Ogden, 435, 436
    • Ogden vs. Saunders, 436
    • one of the delegates to revise the Constitution of Massachusetts, 437
    • selected to deliver an oration from the rock of Plymouth, in
      celebration of the landing of the pilgrim fathers, 438, 439
    • at Bunker’s Hill, on laying the foundation stone of the monument, 440, 441
    • on the deaths of Adams and Jefferson, 441
    • his part in Congress in favour of the Greeks, 442, 443
    • on the tariff, 444
    • Crimes’-Act, 445
    • internal improvements, 446
    • Panama mission, 447
    • election to the United States’ Senate, ib.
    • his overthrow of the doctrine of nullification, 447-455.
  • Wilkinson, General,
    • the foundation of a commercial intercourse with the United States
      and Louisiana laid by, 209
    • his proceedings in relation to Burr’s plot, 216-218.
  • Willis,
    • (as quoted by Mons. Merat,) his commendation of tobacco, 153.
  • Wisniowiecki, Michael,
    • chosen king of Poland, 468.
  • Wolf, Dr. J. Leo,
    • his part in the New-York Convention for forming a University, 297-311.
  • Woodbridge, W. C.,
    • part taken by, in the New-York Convention, for forming a University,
      286-297-311.

Y.

  • Yakutsk,

Z.

  • Zielinski, M.,
    • his History of Poland, notice of, 457. See
      Poland.


Scroll to Top